JP2019080765A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine enabling easy assembly work of a plurality of decorative boards.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 comprises: decorative boards such as a tray upper-left decorative board 273, a tray upper-right decorative board 278, a door frame left-side upper decorative board 422, a door frame left-side lower decorative board 423, a door frame right-side upper decorative board 432, a door frame right-side lower decorative board 433, a door frame top-center decorative board 455, a door frame top-left decorative board 456 and a door frame top-right decorative board 457 which are provided behind decorative bodies, of which front faces are designed to be white, and of which front faces are mounted with a plurality LEDs, the decorative bodies being such as a tray upper-left decorative body, a tray upper-right decorative body, a door frame left-side decorative body, a door frame right-side decorative body, and a door frame top decorative body which are disposed at the door frame 3 and have light transmissivity; and identification portions 7 provided on the rear faces of respective decorative boards for distinction from other boards.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 239

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  In a pachinko machine as a game machine, a plurality of decorative bodies having a light transmitting property provided inside and outside the game area in a front view, a game area where a game is performed by a game medium being hit by an operation of a player And a plurality of decoration substrates provided behind the plurality of decoration bodies and on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted (for example, Patent Document 1). Then, according to the state of the game being played in the game area, by making the plurality of LEDs emit light appropriately and make the decoration body emit light and decorate, the player is surprised or the arrival of a chance is seen, the player I am trying to entertain you.

  However, since the conventional gaming machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1 includes a plurality of decorative substrates, when a decorative substrate having a similar shape or size is present, the desired decoration is required when assembling the gaming machine. It takes time to search for a substrate, or a different decoration substrate is mistakenly attached, and there is a problem that the cost increases because the assembly operation takes time.

JP 2011-92394 A

  Then, in view of the above-mentioned situation, the present invention makes it a subject to provide a game machine which can make an assembly operation of a plurality of decoration boards easy.

Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A plurality of decorative substrates provided behind a decorative member having a predetermined light transmission property, at least having a white front surface, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided on the rear surface of each of the plurality of decorative substrates, and has a distinction means for distinguishing it from other substrates.

  Here, as the "decorative body", any shape may be used as long as it is formed in a three-dimensional shape, such as "a predetermined item shaped", "a predetermined character shaped", "a predetermined logo or the like" Those obtained by forming serifs in a three-dimensional manner, "made by forming a predetermined pattern or pattern", and the like can be mentioned. In addition, as the “decorative body”, it may be provided inside the game area where the game is played in a front view, or may be provided outside the game area.

  In addition, as "discrimination means", "a colored portion having a predetermined color", "a character portion having a predetermined character such as kanji, kana, alphabet, symbol, number, model number, etc.", etc. Can be mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine is provided behind the decorative body having a predetermined light transmission property, and at least the front surface is white, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The substrate and the rear surface of each of the plurality of decorative substrates are provided with a distinction means for distinguishing from the other substrates.

  As a result, since the discriminating means is provided on the rear surface of each of the plurality of decorative substrates on which the plurality of LEDs for emitting and decorating the decorative body are mounted, the worker is required to carry out the assembling operation of the gaming machine. Only by looking at the discriminating means provided on the decorative substrate, it can be judged whether or not it is a desired decorative substrate, and a desired decorative substrate can be easily searched and the decorative substrate to be attached by the discriminating means Mistakes can be easily noticed, assembly errors can be reduced, and the time required for assembly work can be made easier.

  In addition, since the front of each decorative substrate is white and the discriminating means is provided on the rear surface, the decorative substrate is viewed from the front (the player side) even if the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. Can be made inconspicuous, and the appearance of the decoration can be improved, and the white front face of the decoration substrate makes it possible to reflect light from the LED forward, making the decoration brighter and more decorative The player can be entertained by the light emission effect with high effect, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  The distinguishing means may have a colored portion provided over substantially the entire length of the decorative substrate in the longitudinal direction. As a result, since the back surface of the decorative substrate has the colored portion colored in a predetermined color over the entire length in the longitudinal direction, the back and front of the decorative substrate can be easily distinguished by the colored portion, At the time of assembly of the gaming machine, when preparing (planning) the decorative substrate necessary for one gaming machine, even if there are symmetrical decorative substrates on the left and right and up and down, the front and back sides should be clear by the colored part Thus, it is possible to prevent such an error as preparing only two decorative substrates on one side, and it is possible to surely prepare the decorative substrates necessary for assembly. Therefore, the assembly operation of the gaming machine can be smoothly performed, and the time required for assembly can be shortened to suppress the increase in cost.

  In addition, the distinction portion may have a character portion consisting of different characters for each of the plurality of decorative substrates. Thereby, since the character part as a distinction means for distinguishing with other boards is given on the back surface of the decoration board, when the worker reads the character of the character part, the decoration board concerned is not what part It is possible to easily know whether it is or not, and the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  Moreover, it is desirable to make a distinction means into a different color for every decoration board. Thus, since the color of the discriminating means is different for each decorative substrate, the decorative substrate can be easily distinguished by the color of the discriminating means even if there is a decorative substrate having a similar shape when assembling the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent an incorrect decoration substrate from being assembled during an assembly operation, and to improve the assembly workability.

  Furthermore, as described above, when the color of the distinction means is made to differ for each decoration substrate, the same color distinction means is provided when preparing a decoration substrate necessary for one gaming machine at the time of assembly. When there are decorative substrates, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, in the discriminating means provided on the prepared decorative substrate, when colors are insufficient, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative substrate not prepared. Therefore, when preparing a decoration substrate necessary for assembling a gaming machine, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decoration substrate is prepared or that the prepared decoration substrate is insufficient. It is possible to prepare the decorative substrate for exactly the necessary amount, and to make the gaming machine easy to set up at the time of assembly.

  Further, functional components provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate may be further provided. As a result, since the functional parts are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate and the functional parts are not seen from the front (the player side), the appearance of the functional parts is degraded by seeing the functional parts through the decoration. This can be avoided, and the appearance of the decorative body (game machine) can be improved. Further, in this case, since the functional parts are not visible by providing them on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) so as not to be noticeable. It can be used, and the trouble of coloring the functional parts can be omitted to suppress the increase in cost for the gaming machine.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The distinction means
It is characterized by having a colored portion provided over substantially the entire length of the decorative substrate in the longitudinal direction.

  Here, as the "colored portion", "a portion colored by printing (for example, silk printing)", "a portion colored by sticking a seal", "a portion colored by application of a paint" , Etc. In addition, the “colored portion” may be uniformly colored (solidly coated) as a whole or may be partially colored (spotted) like a dot pattern.

  In addition, the color of the “colored portion” may be a color different from the white color of the front surface of the decorative substrate, and the color may be different for each decorative substrate, and the same color (for example, yellow) in all the decorative substrates ) May be.

  By the way, when there are symmetrical decorative substrates and symmetrical decorative substrates vertically and horizontally, when preparing a decoration substrate necessary for one gaming machine at the time of assembling the gaming machine, the decoration of horizontal and vertical symmetry is made Because the shapes of the substrates are the same with each other, two of the decorative substrates on one side are prepared by mistake, noticing the mistake while assembling, and preparing the correct decorative substrates again. The time may be long and cost may increase.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the discriminating means has a colored portion provided over substantially the entire length of the decoration substrate in the longitudinal direction.

  As a result, since the back surface of the decorative substrate has the colored portion colored in a predetermined color over the entire length in the longitudinal direction, the back and front of the decorative substrate can be easily distinguished by the colored portion, At the time of assembly of the gaming machine, when preparing (planning) the decorative substrate necessary for one gaming machine, even if there are symmetrical decorative substrates on the left and right and up and down, the front and back sides should be clear by the colored part Thus, it is possible to prevent such an error as preparing only two decorative substrates on one side, and it is possible to surely prepare the decorative substrates necessary for assembly. Therefore, the assembly operation of the gaming machine can be smoothly performed, and the time required for assembly can be shortened to suppress the increase in cost.

  In addition, since the colored portions are provided over the entire length in the longitudinal direction of the decorative substrate, when the colors of the colored portions are made different depending on the decorative substrate, a plurality of types of decorative substrates are used during assembly. Even in the overlapping state, if a part of the decorative substrate is visible, the colored part can be seen, so that the desired decorative substrate can be easily found, and the time required for the assembly operation can be simplified. .

Means 3: In the structure of means 1 or 2,
"The distinction unit
Each of the plurality of decorative substrates has a character portion composed of different characters.

  Here, as the “character part”, “Kanji”, “Kana”, “alphabet”, “symbol”, “number”, “model number” and the like can be mentioned. In addition, the color of the “character part” may be a color different from the white color of the front surface of the decorative substrate, and may be the same color (for example, yellow) in all the decorative substrates, or the color for each decorative substrate May be different.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the distinction portion has a character portion consisting of different characters for each of a plurality of decorative substrates.

  Thereby, since the character part as a distinction means for distinguishing with other boards is given on the back surface of the decoration board, when the worker reads the character of the character part, the decoration board concerned is not what part It is possible to easily know whether it is or not, and the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

Means 4: In any one of the means 1 to the means 3,
"The distinction means
Each of the plurality of decorative substrates has a different color.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the distinction means is made to have a different color for each of the plurality of decorative substrates.

  Thus, since the color of the discriminating means is different for each decorative substrate, the decorative substrate can be easily distinguished by the color of the discriminating means even if there is a decorative substrate having a similar shape when assembling the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent an incorrect decoration substrate from being assembled during an assembly operation, and to improve the assembly workability.

  In addition, since the color of the discriminating means is made different for each decorative substrate, there is a decorative substrate provided with the discriminating means of the same color when preparing a decorative substrate necessary for one game machine at the time of assembly. Can easily recognize that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, in the discriminating means provided on the prepared decorative substrate, when colors are insufficient, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative substrate not prepared. Therefore, when preparing a decoration substrate necessary for assembling a gaming machine, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decoration substrate is prepared or that the prepared decoration substrate is insufficient. It is possible to prepare the decorative substrate for exactly the necessary amount, and to make the gaming machine easy to set up at the time of assembly.

Means 5: in any one of the means 1 to 4
It is characterized in that "the functional component provided on the back surface of the decorative substrate is further provided".

  Here, as the "functional components", "a connector for connecting the decoration substrate and another substrate", "an LED driver for controlling a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decoration substrate", "a resistor" , “Capacitor”, “transistor”, “regulator”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the gaming machine is further provided with the functional components provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate.

  As a result, since the functional parts are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate and the functional parts are not seen from the front (the player side), the appearance of the functional parts is degraded by seeing the functional parts through the decoration. This can be avoided, and the appearance of the decorative body (game machine) can be improved.

  In addition, since the functional parts are not visible by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) so as not to be noticeable, and use the functional parts as they are It is possible to suppress an increase in cost for the gaming machine by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

Means 6: In a gaming machine
"A plurality of decorative substrates provided behind a decorative member having a predetermined light transmission property, at least having a white front surface, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface,
A plurality of colored portions provided on the rear surface of each of the plurality of decorative substrates, applied over substantially the entire length of the decorative substrate in the longitudinal direction and having a different color for each of the plurality of decorative substrates, and the plurality of decorative members A character part comprising different characters for each substrate, and a distinction means for distinguishing from other substrates,
And a functional component provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the gaming machine is provided behind the decorative body having a light transmitting property, and at least the front surface is white, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A substrate, a colored portion provided on the rear surface of each of the plurality of decorative substrates, applied over substantially the entire length of the decorative substrate in the longitudinal direction and having a different color for each of the plurality of decorative substrates, and a plurality of decorative substrates It has a character part which consists of a different character for every, and is provided with the distinction means for distinguishing from another board | substrate, and the functional component provided in the back surface of the decoration board | substrate.

  As a result, the rear surface of the plurality of decorative substrates on which the plurality of LEDs for emitting and decorating the decorative body are mounted is provided with the discriminating means including the colored portion and the character portion. In this case, it is possible to determine whether the desired decorative substrate is the desired decorative substrate simply by looking at the discrimination means provided on each decorative substrate, and the worker can easily find the desired decorative substrate. The distinction means makes it easy to notice the mistake of the decorative substrate to be attached, and the mistake in assembly can be reduced, and the time required for the assembly operation can be facilitated.

  In addition, since the back surface of the decorative substrate has a colored portion as a distinction means colored in a predetermined color over the entire length in the longitudinal direction, it is possible to easily distinguish the back and front of the decorative substrate by the colored portion Since it is possible to prepare the decoration substrate necessary for one gaming machine at the time of assembling the gaming machine, even if the symmetrical decoration substrate is present horizontally and vertically, the front and back sides are clearly seen by the coloring section. By doing this, it is possible to prevent such a mistake that only two decoration substrates on one side are prepared, and it is possible to surely prepare a decoration substrate necessary for assembly. Therefore, the assembly operation of the gaming machine can be smoothly performed, and the time required for assembly can be shortened to suppress the increase in cost.

  In addition, since the color of the colored portion as a distinction means is different for each decorative substrate, even when there is a decorative substrate with a similar shape when assembling a gaming machine, the decorative substrate can be easily made according to the color of the colored portion. While being distinguishable, while being able to prevent assembling the wrong decoration baseplate in the assembly operation, it is possible to improve the workability of assembly.

  In addition, since the colored portion is provided over the entire length of the decorative substrate in the longitudinal direction, a part of the decorative substrate can be seen even in a state in which multiple types of decorative substrates overlap during assembly and the like. For example, since the colored portion can be seen, the desired decorative substrate can be easily found, and the time required for the assembly operation can be simplified.

  Furthermore, since the color of the colored portion as the distinction means is made different for each decorative substrate, the colored portion of the same color is provided when preparing the decorative substrate necessary for one gaming machine at the time of assembly. When there are decorative substrates, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, in the colored portion provided on the prepared decorative substrate, when colors are insufficient, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative substrate not prepared. Therefore, when preparing a decoration substrate necessary for assembling a gaming machine, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decoration substrate is prepared or that the prepared decoration substrate is insufficient. It is possible to prepare the decorative substrate for exactly the necessary amount, and to make the gaming machine easy to set up at the time of assembly.

  In addition, since the character portion as a distinction means for distinguishing from other substrates is provided on the back surface of the decoration substrate, the operator can read the characters of the character portion, so that the decoration substrate is at any part. It is possible to easily know if there is any, and the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In addition, since the front of each decorative substrate is white and the discriminating means is provided on the rear surface, the decorative substrate is viewed from the front (the player side) even if the transparency of the decorative body provided in front of the decorative substrate is high. Can be made inconspicuous, and the appearance of the decoration can be improved, and the white front face of the decoration substrate makes it possible to reflect light from the LED forward, making the decoration brighter and more decorative The player can be entertained by the light emission effect with high effect, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the functional parts are provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate so that the functional parts are not seen from the front (the player side), the appearance of the functional parts is prevented from being deteriorated by seeing through the decorative body. The appearance of the decorative body (game machine) can be improved. In addition, since the functional parts are not visible by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) so as not to be noticeable, and use the functional parts as they are It is possible to suppress an increase in cost for the gaming machine by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

Means 7: in any one of the means 1 to 6
The gaming machine is
A game area in which game media are shot by the operation of the player;
A plurality of receiving ports arranged in the game area and capable of receiving game media;
The pachinko machine according to the present invention is a pachinko machine including a payout device for dispensing a predetermined number of gaming media in response to the reception of gaming media to the receiving port.

  Here, as the "receiving port", "a general winning opening that is always open in the gaming area", "an opening that is always open in the gaming area, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by receiving the game medium. In the game area, the start winning opening (starting opening) where the special lottery whether or not to generate a game is performed, and the fact that the game medium is received in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area Regular lottery that is selected by game media passing through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium is a variable winning opening (a variable start opening, a prize winning opening, etc.) that can accept game media, and a "specified area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area" Through Depending on the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by doing, it is possible to receive the game media, the variable start winning where special lottery whether or not to generate the advantageous game state where the player becomes advantageous by acceptance of the game media is done "A variable start-up opening", "V-prize-out opening for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium received in the prize-winning opening is distributed and accepted by the allocating means", As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there are a special winning opening and a winning feature winning opening which can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to receive game media.

  In addition, as the "pachinko machine", "lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by the reception of the game medium to the start opening, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner after being displayed in a stopped manner, and the special lottery result display means for drawing the special lottery result by drawing by the combination of the special symbols displayed for the stop and the special lottery result display means One that includes advantageous gaming state generating means for causing an advantageous gaming state to be generated by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when the special lottery result to be generated is displayed ("so-called digipachi machine") The distribution means for distributing the game media received in the mouth and the game medium distributed by the distribution means are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern when the game medium is received by the V prize opening A game provided with an advantageous gaming state generation means for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (a so-called honeymoon machine), "having a large winning opening and a prize winning opening, gaming media to the starting opening The special prize opening or the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern according to the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the prize winning opening when the gaming medium accepted in the prize winning opening is distributed to the V prize opening Or, those equipped with advantageous gaming state generation means (so-called, multi-function device) etc. which generate an advantageous gaming state which makes the player advantageous by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the gaming machine is divided into a game area into which game media are inserted by the operation of the player, a plurality of receptacles arranged in the game area and capable of receiving game media, and a game to the receiver A pachinko machine provided with a payout device for dispensing a predetermined number of gaming media in accordance with the reception of the media. As a result, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to achieve the operation and effect of any of the means described above.

  In addition, the effect (light emission effect) to make the decoration body emit light and decorate by making the plurality of LEDs mounted respectively on the plurality of decoration substrates emit light appropriately is that the game medium inserted into the game area is received by the receiving port It is desirable to have As a result, when a game medium is received into the receiver, a predetermined number of game media is paid out, and effects are produced such that the decorative body emits light and decorates, so the player is aimed at the receiver by entertaining the player. It is possible to make it easy to continue the insertion of game media, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous due to the reception of the game medium to the starting opening is presented to the player when suggesting the lottery special lottery result to the player. The decorative body may be made to emit light and decorate as one of the effects to be performed. As a result, since the decorative body emits light and decorates, it is possible to give the player a strong impact and enjoyment by the above-described function and effect, the player can obtain the special lottery result for the player. It can be thought that an advantageous gaming state to be advantageous occurs (for example, a "big hit"), and a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be enhanced to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, by making the decorative body emit light and decorate, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect with a higher effect effect, so it is possible to show the player the special lottery result that has been drawn (for example, It can be suitably used for reach effect), and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 8: in any one of the means 1 to the means 6,
The gaming machine is
Multiple torso, each with multiple symbols,
A start operation unit that causes the plurality of the torso bodies to rotate, respectively, by the player operating after the game medium is inserted;
A plurality of stop operation units for rotating and stopping the plurality of the torso respectively;
A slot machine comprising: a payout device for dispensing a predetermined number of gaming media according to a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies stopped by the player operating a plurality of the stop operation units It is characterized by

  Here, as the "slot machine", "the number of effective lines to determine the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game", "a plurality of times of the trunk The internal lottery is executed with the start of the rotation, and the player gives a benefit according to the combination of the stop symbols and the lottery result of the internal lottery, "the effective line for determining the combination of the stop symbols is fixed And the like. In addition, as "Privileges", "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", "Assist Time ( AT), etc.

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the start operation unit for rotating the plurality of torso by the player operating the gaming machine with the plurality of torso each having the plurality of symbols and the game medium inserted. , And a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of turning bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all the turning bodies stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units. A slot machine including a payout device for dispensing a predetermined number of game media. As a result, in the pachislot machine, it is possible to achieve the operation and effect of any of the means described above.

  In addition, the effect (light emission effect) to make the decorative body emit light and decorate by making the plurality of LEDs mounted respectively on the plurality of decorative substrates emit light appropriately is a symbol whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line When the combination satisfies the combination of winning combinations (so-called reach), the decoration may be lighted and decorated as one of the effects to be presented to the player. As a result, the decorative body emits light and decorates, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to be a winning combination. Further, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decorative body may be made to emit light and decorate, and since the decorative body emits and decorates light, a strong impact can be given to the player. If it is stopped by the combination of specific symbols, it can be considered that the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs (for example, “BB”), and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is increased. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, as described above, by making the decorative body emit light and decorate, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect with a higher effect effect, so it is preferable for the effect for suggesting to the player the drawn internal lottery. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 9: in any one of the means 1 to the means 6,
The gaming machine is
It is characterized by being a fusion machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, the “fusion machine” in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused is a series of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of the start operation unit (for example, operation lever) after inserting a plurality of game media. Is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and then, the fluctuation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stop symbol, , Advantageous game state) is given. In addition, when the stop operation unit is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variation display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the predetermined time having elapsed.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the gaming machine is a fusion machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Thereby, in the compound machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the operation effect of any of the means mentioned above can be produced.

  In addition, the effect (light emission effect) to make the decorative body emit light and decorate by making the plurality of LEDs mounted respectively on the plurality of decorative substrates emit light appropriately is a symbol whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line When the combination satisfies the combination of winning combinations (so-called reach), the decoration may be made to emit light as one of the effects to be presented to the player. As a result, when the winning combination is made, the decorative body may be made to emit light and be decorated, and the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating the assembly operation of a plurality of decorative substrates.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of a pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine when the press operation part of a production operation unit is a raise position from the right front. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and was seen from the front upper, and (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and seen from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (b) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled a handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer base unit in a saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit into every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in a saucer unit from the direction of movement of a production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front upper side. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation button unit and was seen from the front lower. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a rotational drive unit in the left view of a production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board | substrate in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, (c) is a central pressing operation section of the pressing operation section It is a front view of a plate unit when pressing. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front lower. It is a front view of a door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of the door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit in the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit into every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the back sectional view which cut the delivery apparatus of the delivery unit in the front-back direction center of a delivery blade. (A) is a back sectional view which cut a dispensing device in the front-back direction center of a dispensing blade, when a ball extraction movable piece is an open state, (b) is a sectional view cut by the AA line in (a) . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit by main structure, and was seen from back. It is an expanded side sectional view showing the lower part of a pachinko machine which was cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from the back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows upper part in the perspective view which looked at a main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. in the ball | bowl tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled FIG. 101 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball which overflowed from the ball | bowl tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in a main body frame upper part. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back of the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board which made center property etc. opaque in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of drawing of the wiring from the function display unit in a main control board. It is a front view of the game board of the state which made center goods etc. transparent. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board into every main member and was seen from back. FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 107 taken along the line C-C. FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 107 taken along the line D-D. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the front unit is cut in parallel with the face of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nail. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel in the game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball of the right side in a table | surface unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls circulating in the first guiding passage in the guiding passage group, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls circulating in the second guiding passage in the guiding passage group is there. (A) is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls received in the prize winning opening, (b) is an explanatory view showing a portion of the third sorting device in (a) from above, (c) These are explanatory drawings which show the part of the 2nd distribution apparatus in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the timing of operation | movement of the prize winning opening and 1st distribution apparatus and 2nd distribution apparatus according to the kind of "small hit." (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in an attacker unit, and is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in (a). (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment of the guide passage group different from FIG. (E) And (f) is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment of another guidance passage group. (A) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a back view of the out ball detection unit, (d) is It is a perspective view which looked at out ball detection unit from the front, (e) is a perspective view which looked at out ball detection unit from the back, (f) is a perspective seen from a position from out ball detection unit and the right front lower It is a figure and (g) is a perspective view which looked at out ball detection unit from the lower right rear. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the out ball detection unit and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the out ball detection unit and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a game panel and an out ball detection unit, (b) is a perspective view shown in the state which made the out ball detection unit contact | abut on a game panel. It is an enlarged sectional view assembled from the game board and cut vertically at the center of the out-port right sensor and viewed from the right. It is a perspective view which shows the vicinity of an out outlet from the front in the state assembled to the game board. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the light-guide plate presentation unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the light-guide plate presentation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light-guide plate and the board | substrate for patterns in a light-guide plate presentation unit from a front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which light-emitted the 1st pattern of the light-guide plate, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which light-emitted the 2nd pattern of the light-guide plate. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which carried out the light emission decoration of the 2nd pattern in the light-guide plate of the light-guide plate presentation unit of a back unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which made the light emission decoration of the 1st pattern in the light-guide plate of the light-guide plate production | presentation unit of a back unit. It is a block diagram which roughly shows the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the process at the time of main control side power on in FIG. 138. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value confirmation display process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control part power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of the payout control part power supply ON of FIG. 145 is a flowchart illustrating the continuation of the process when the payout control unit is powered on, following FIG. 145; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payment control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power failure notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and the special electric motorized item control processing which are executed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing for a big hit, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for lottery processing for a type of big hit, and (C) is a type for a small hit It is a small hitting symbol determination table used in the lottery process for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol and the common_motor_effects control process which are performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit start processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit middle processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is an example of a mode of error information. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of sound output control of sound volume adjustment and a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of sound output control of sound volume adjustment and a predetermined frequency band. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing of sound output control of sound volume adjustment and a predetermined frequency band. It is a table which shows the winning probability etc. according to the setting value of a game machine. It is explanatory drawing shown about the procedure which changes a setting value. It is a fluctuation pattern table used for determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a right detection sensor is provided in the first guide passage. It is an example of concrete production at the time of execution of the warning production using the right detection sensor. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a detection sensor is provided in the 1st guidance passage and the 2nd guidance passage. It is an example of concrete production at the time of execution of warning production using a right detection sensor and a left detection sensor. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a ball clogging cancellation | release hole is provided in a 1st guide passage and a 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a ball clogging cancellation | release hole is provided in a 1st guide passage and a 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a 2nd out port is provided in the entrance vicinity of a 1st guide passage and a 2nd guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which a 2nd out port is provided in the exit inside the inside of a 1st guide passage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of calculation in, when abnormality generate | occur | produces. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of calculation in, when abnormality generate | occur | produces. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment which a 2nd out port and a 3rd out port are provided separately from an out port. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution state of calculation in, when the 2nd out port and the 3rd out port are provided separately from an out port. It is a luminescent color pattern table in which the luminescent color pattern of the light guide plate is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows embodiment by which several decoration bodies are provided around the display area of a presentation display apparatus. It is an example of concrete production with a light guide plate and a plurality of decorations at the time of execution of light emission production. It is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate and the effect display device at the time of execution of the imitation effect. It is an example of a concrete effect with a light guide plate and an effect display device at the time of execution of imitation effect. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the setting information determination processing performed by main control MPU. It is an explanatory view showing an example of setting value reservation suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image data which combined the display mode of setting notification on-premises, and the display mode of setting value suspension suggestion production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of setting value continuation suggestion production. It is a table which shows the winning probability etc. according to the setting value of a game machine. It is a table which shows the winning probability etc. according to the setting value of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of the wrongdoing while changing the setting of the setting value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of a fraud in the case where a fraud is not monitored during confirmation display of a setting value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of a fraud in the case where a fraud is monitored in part during confirmation display of a setting value. It is a time chart which shows the monitoring state of a fraud in the case where a fraud is monitored in part during setting change of a setting value. It is a front view of the game board of a modification. It is an example of the table used by lottery processing. It is a modification of setting value suggestion production. It is a front view of a pachinko machine of a third embodiment in which a part is different from the pachinko machine of FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine of a 3rd example. It is a left view of a pachinko machine of a 3rd example. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine of 3rd Example from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame in the pachinko machine of 3rd Example, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock in the pachinko machine of the 3rd example from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back front, (c) is the third It is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock in the pachinko machine of one Example from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the cylinder lock of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment as viewed from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment as viewed from the rear It is a disassembled perspective view. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock in the pachinko machine of 3rd Example from a front, (b) is shown in the state rotated 90 degree | times to the anticlockwise direction from the state of (a) It is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock, and (c) is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock shown in the state rotated 90 degree | times in the clockwise direction from the state of (a). (A) is an enlarged front view showing a portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and (b) shows a portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment It is an expansion perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit in FIG. 218, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle cover unit in FIG. 218, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit in FIG. 218, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit in FIG. 218, and was seen from the front. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 218 (a) cut along the line a-i. FIG. 210 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 210 taken along the line aa. (A) is a sectional view showing the principal part by cutting horizontally in a portion of a lower ball and ball supply port in a door frame of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment, (b) is a door of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects the site | part same as (a) in a frame, and shows the principal part. It is a top view which expands and shows the site | part of the ball lending operation unit of the door frame of the pachinko machine in 3rd Example. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame in the third embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of (a) seen from the front, (c) is a front view It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of (a) from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit of FIG. 227, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit of FIG. 227, and was seen from back. FIG. 227 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 227 (a) cut by a bow line. (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame in the third embodiment, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit of (a), (c) is (a) It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of 4 from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of (a) from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit of FIG. 231, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit of FIG. 231, and was seen from back. FIG. 231 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 231 (a) cut by an air-line. FIG. 231 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line O in FIG. (A) is a right view of the door frame right side unit shown in the state which made the outer layer of two-color molding opaque in the door frame in 3rd Example, (b) leaves an inner layer as it is in (a) It is a right view of the door frame right side unit shown in the state which made the outer layer transparent. It is a front view showing each decoration board of a door frame in a pachinko machine of a 3rd example. It is a top view which shows the decoration substrate of the site | part of the effect operation unit of the door frame in the pachinko machine of 3rd Example. It is a rear view which shows each decoration board | substrate provided in the circumference | surroundings of the door window of the door frame in the pachinko machine of 3rd Example. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of a tank rail, seeing the pachinko machine of 3rd Example from back. (A) is a top view in the state where a tank rail etc. were assembled to a ball tank in a pachinko machine of a 3rd example, (b) is a perspective view which looked at a tank rail etc. of (a) from the front, c) is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail of (a) from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the tank rail of FIG. 241 etc., and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the tank rail etc of FIG. FIG. 241 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail etc. cut along a car line in FIG. 241 (a). FIG. 241 is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls in the tank rail of FIG. 241 in cross section; (A) is a front view of the substrate unit in the main frame of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) seen from the right front, (c) is (a) It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of this from the left front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit of FIG. 245 (a) from upper right back, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit of FIG. 245 (a) from lower right back. FIG. 245 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit in FIG. 245 (a) as viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit of FIG. 245 (a), and was seen from back. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key line in FIG. 245 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the broken line in (a), (c) is in (a) It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the cable line. It is a bottom view of a pachinko machine which shows a part behind a door frame in a 3rd example. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the guidance piece in the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which made the out sensor removable, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the out sensor in (a).

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the rendering operation unit is at the rising position from the right front is there. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B (see FIG. 90) is inserted.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 Attached to the upper surface left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame upper member 30, the lower end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20; An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 and the main body The frame lower hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be able to open and close in a forward direction centering on the left side in a front view.

  In the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to partially cover the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-reversed and radiated forward to allow the player to hear a more deep bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can be entertained also by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2. The main frame upper hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner, the main frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main frame base unit 500, and the game The ball launch device 540 for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, the payout base unit 550 which receives the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout control board 63 in addition to a power supply board 630 provided with a payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side and a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 Between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. And a locking unit 650 for locking.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and whose outer shape is substantially square in a front view, It is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a back side of the game panel 1100 The peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and the center of the game area 5a in front view are arranged in a predetermined effect image A performance display device 1600 capable of displaying includes a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emission effects according to the game state.

  In the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails which are in contact with the gaming ball B and are installed in a predetermined gauge array, and a predetermined benefit for the player by accepting or passing the gaming ball B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail N is implanted on the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  The player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 etc. in the gaming area 5a. As a result, the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the handle 182.

  In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back effect according to the game state changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. A player can be entertained by causing a light emission effect to be performed by the unit 3200 or the like.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of an outer frame of a pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame in which the shape in a front view extends vertically.

  The outer frame 2 is, as shown in the figure, separated from the left and right and extending vertically, the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. Outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends, outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20, and upper surface of outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper surface left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 The sound outputted to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-reversed and emitted forward.

  The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 of the outer frame 2. The outer frame 2 coaxially rotatably supports the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable to the front centering on the left side in a front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend in the vertical direction, and are disposed apart from each other in the left and right direction. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially rotatably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 has an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And the lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame left member 11 is a portion from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a which is recessed to the right in a flat shape in the rear side portion of the left side in the front-rear direction divided into three, and the right side from the side opposite to the concave portion 11a The bulging part 11b bulging toward the direction and the hollow part 11c which penetrates the bulging part 11b up and down are provided. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 11c.

  Moreover, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed to be symmetrical with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b at the left side of 12a is provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 brings the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a of the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 is a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally and a flat upper horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat contact portion 13d which extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and brings the left side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, the screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 on the left end side, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the notch 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hooking member 25 attached to a lower portion of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded material. The outer frame right member 21 is provided with a recess 21a recessed leftwardly in a flat shape at the rear side of the right and left sides of the right and left sides from the front and back, and a left side from the side opposite to the recess 21a in the left side A bulging portion 21 b bulging in the direction, and a hollow portion 21 c penetrating the bulging portion 21 b up and down are provided. The outer frame right member 21 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the recessed portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and reduced in weight by the hollow portion 21c.

  Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically in the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side is formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side is formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion A flat plate-like pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of the right side 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and further front side And in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 brings the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the lower surface of the right end of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout 30a of the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion at the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b And a flat contact portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state in which the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut the upper surface of the right end of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout 41a of the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are members to which an outer frame collar 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later is hooked. The upper hooking member 24 extends vertically from the front side of the mounting portion 24a to a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21 And a flat plate-like locking piece portion 24b on which the outer frame collar 653 at the upper side is locked.

  The lower hooking member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left from a flat mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 The flat-plate shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame collar 653 is locked and the insertion through which the lower outer frame collar 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a which is recessed to the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at the left and right ends, respectively.

  Moreover, the outer frame upper member 30 is provided with the attachment step part 30b in which the upper surface and front surface were recessed rather than the general surface in the left side edge part. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 spaced apart to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated left and right, and extends in the left and right direction; A box-shaped front curtain member 42 which is disposed forward of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain member 42 And a box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extending forwardly open, and a ball biting prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the longitudinal direction substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 and has a constant thickness in the vertical direction and extends in the lateral direction. It is formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a which is recessed to the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and is provided with a recess 41 b into which the lower portion of the rear curtain plate member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41 b extends in the left and right direction, and extends from the rear position of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recessed portion 41 b widens the volume of the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate formed by the front plate member 42 and the rear plate member 43 as much as possible.

  The front curtain plate member 42 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height The entire rear side is open. The front curtain member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear curtain plate member 43 so as to cooperate with the rear curtain plate member 43 to be part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 The space 40a is formed. The front curtain member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front and back direction and extending in the left and right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The rear curtain plate member 43 has a length in the left-right direction extending slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape whose front is open. The rear curtain plate member 43 cooperates with the front curtain plate member 42 to form the inner curtain plate space 40 a which becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 by attaching the front curtain plate member 42 to the front. The rear curtain plate member 43 has a cylindrical connection cylindrical portion 43a which extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward and communicates with the inner curtain plate space 40a at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylindrical portion 43 a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear curtain plate 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylindrical portion 43a has a length in the left-right direction which is about 1/3 the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and a depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. Is also formed slightly short. In the connection cylindrical portion 43a, a plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. In communication with the internal space of 620 a, an enclosure 624 is formed.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the gaming ball B is retained at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the gaming ball B is held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is for preventing that it is pinched.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is provided with a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the outer frame lower hinge member 60 to be described later may be involved; A first discharge port 44b opened upward at the left end of the left end 44a, and a second discharge port 44c opened upward on the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a; An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the resting portion 44a, and an upper end projection projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and inclined to be positioned upward as the upper surface goes rearward And a unit 44e.

  The first discharge port 44 b is formed at a position that matches the discharge hole 60 d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open at the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the gaming ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, when the ball biting preventing mechanism 44 is inserted into a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later, an incorrect tool such as a piano wire is inserted. The rising wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tool entry. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d, even if it is bent upward, it abuts on the forwardly projecting upper end projecting portion 44e provided on the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent action from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the gaming ball B dropped onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is blocked by 44d, the gaming ball B is easily retained on the placement portion 44a. Then, when the game ball B is staying on the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 can not be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is firstly discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear curtain plate member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The lower outer frame assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front and rear curtain plate members 42 and 43 at a distance to the left and right and the opening 42a of the front curtain plate member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-like grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending in the front and rear direction and attached to the inside of the front curtain plate member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46; And a frame-like seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts on the pair of guide members 45. The guide member 45 is formed of a low friction material having low friction resistance, and the lower end of the main body frame 4 is made slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain inner space 40 a (the enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. In the port member 47, two cylinders are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonate and amplify the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (in the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (player's side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass.

  The seal member 48 is compressed between the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Thus, it is possible to prevent the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking between the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame and upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. Fig.21 (a) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2, and was seen from the front upper side, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the front lower side. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11 a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30 b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the outer frame upper hinge member 51 And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 extends from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a to the upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends horizontally from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extension 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending to the left and right center of the front extension 51b from the middle of the right side of the front extension 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion The plate-like horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from the end edge to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is open from the left side to the front side of the front extension 51b And a flat plate-like end edge wall 51e which is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock main body 52a extending in the front and rear direction, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a left side extending from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally forward to the left and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the rear end of the lock main body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extension 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  With the lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to abut on a portion of the edge wall 51e which extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the attachment hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface in the vicinity of the front end of the lock main body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion on the front side of the lock main body 52a in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock main body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view by rotating the lock body 52a in the direction in which the front end moves leftward by the operation of the operation piece 52b, and the bearing groove 51c Can be completely through. Thereby, the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. And an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a; and a discharge hole 60d which has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through vertically through the horizontal portion 60a. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached at a left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and extends in a reverse U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The lower portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the state assembled to the outer frame 2, and a screw not shown Is fixed to the rear curtain member 43 by the Further, the rising portion 60 b is attached to a portion on the front side of the bulging portion 11 b in the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close.

  Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60 d matches the first discharge port 44 b of the anti-ball bite mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when closing the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between 4 and 4 gradually narrows, it rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be more easily prevented from rolling backward than the main frame 4 by discharging the game balls B from the discharge holes 60 d. It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball B to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 22 is a surface view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a substantially the same size as the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the inside of the frame of the outer frame 2 can be attached openably from the front side It is done. The door frame 3 closes the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the gaming ball B is struck so as to be visible from the front side, stores the gaming ball B for hitting into the gaming area 5a, and stores the gaming It has a handle 182 operated by the player in order to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the door frame 3 decorates the whole front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in the front view extends vertically, and the game board 5 which is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4 A glass unit 160 closing the gaming area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a crime prevention cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, A handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner, a pan unit 200 mounted to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and a front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the pan unit 200. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101 a which is formed in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) in which the outer shape of the front view extends vertically, and the front right of the door frame base 101 Handle attachment member 102 attached below, speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and attached near the rear end right end in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the left side A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the rear handlebar relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104, and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handlebar relay board 106 from the rear side A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and a door A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the gaming balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fall ball) that has been fired by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580 The game ball B is to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 is provided with a handle 182 which can be operated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 can be inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing the game which is thrown into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. Fig. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side in a front view in a hinge rotatable manner with respect to the main body frame 4 and closes the front of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular, flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a handle attachment member 102 attached to the front lower right of the door frame base 101 for attaching the handle unit 180. And a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in a rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 is a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the right end in the rear view in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay in the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 A door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the substrate 104 and a handle back relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, the door frame base 101 The back handle handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the back of the handlebar and covers the handle back handle relay board 106 from the back side, and is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 to cover the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-like door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 mounted on the right of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

  In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 180 is in the front lower corner, the dish unit 200 is in the lower front of the door window 101a, the door frame left side unit 400 is in the front left outside of the door window 101a, and A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front of the door window 101a.

  Further, the glass frame 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and the transparent crime prevention cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the door window 101a formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the door window 101a approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 101 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 101 up and down It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101 a penetrating in the front and back direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the front right lower corner of the front view and is inclined such that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the front end and the insertion recess 101c in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth in the cylinder lock 130 The cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b are penetrated back and forth in front view left side, and the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 And a ball feed opening 101e for facing the

  The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates the ball outlet 150d of the far cover unit 150 forward for the lower bowl ball A passing hole 101f, a ball passing hole 101g for the upper tray which penetrates forward and backward through the ball passage 150a of the far cover unit 150 so as to penetrate forward and backward adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view And a glass unit attachment portion 101h into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, which is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i which are formed at the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper plate) in a front view and penetrate through the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i has the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200 located forward and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101 j which passes through in the front and rear direction below the door window 101 a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101 b. A wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the plate unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101 j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 to be described later penetrates It is formed to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1 b. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching a handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 102a, and a tubular A plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c which project into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at irregular intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a The outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a are provided.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102 b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. The three ridges 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle attachment member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state in which the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similar inclined state.

[3-1 c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. When the speaker duct 103 is in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 The player can be favorably guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker opening 211 b of the dish unit base 211.

  Moreover, the speaker duct 103 is equipped with the cable holder 103a which hold | maintains the connection cable 503 in the back surface of the downward direction of a cylindrical site | part. The cable holder 103 a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is the same as that of the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1 d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle back relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle back relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay substrate 104 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends in the vertical direction, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle back relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. And FIG. 84) are connected.

  The outer shape of the door frame sub relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending right and left on the front view right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically is combined and extends vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left of the frame main relay board 104 in a rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 and the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc. and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay substrate 104 and the door frame sub relay substrate 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending above and below the door frame sub relay board 105 with the door frame base unit 100 assembled are The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the rear cover unit 150.

  The handle back relay board 106 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting surface 101 b below the ball feeding opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle back relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. To relay the When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the handle back relay board 106 is in a state in which the rear side is covered by the handle back relay board cover 108.

[3-1 e. Door frame relay board cover · handle back relay board cover · cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the back handle handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a part extending in the reverse L shape up and down) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape whose front and left in front view are open. In the state assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 covering the rear side and the door frame sub relay board 105 are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The handle back relay board cover 108 is attached to the back side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the back side of the handle back relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is used. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and an opening for passing the wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction of the lower surface.

[3-1 f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is connected to the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending up and down, which are disposed apart from each other on the left and right, and the left and the right connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. An upper reinforcement frame 113 which has been extended, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 which is attached at the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 to the left and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcement frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of vertically spaced apart mountings on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked And the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes which are vertically separated and penetrated in the front-rear direction. In these insertion holes, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame wedge 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the width of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends in the left-right direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 in the vertical direction. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched in a square shape from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end. The notch portion 114 a is formed at a position where the upper plate ball passage opening 101 g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114 b coincide with the through hole 101 j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is disposed to be separated left and right, and in a front view, has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending in the vertical direction, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending flatly forward from the side and a flat plate-like front piece portion connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extending portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at the site of the insertion hole penetrating in the front and rear direction. A door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked to the hooking member 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are stamped and formed of a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is , And assembled so as to be located below the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the ball passing opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101 and the through hole 101j. The cylinder attachment frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101 c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame and hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 mounted movably in the vertical direction on the hinge bracket 121, and a hook attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a square shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the attachment piece 121a is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The wedge member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of projecting pieces 121 b of the door frame upper hinge pin 122. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the wedge member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124 via the wedge member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121 b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121 b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire door frame upper hinge pin 122 is entirely moved. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below or pull it out downward. it can. Thus, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in a front view is rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, a portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 extending in the vertical direction is coaxial with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1 h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square-shaped flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The mounting piece 125 a and the protruding piece 125 b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125 b when assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is attached.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinged rotatably with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the body frame lower hinge member. Can.

[3-1 i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking with The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending in the front and rear direction, a key hole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular hole attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132. And a rotation transmitting member 133 which rotates together with the rotation of the key of

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and has its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter becomes larger toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of cutouts to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 for rotation.

  The cylinder lock 130 is in a state where the front end of the cylinder main body 131 substantially matches the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the pan unit main body 252 in the pan unit 200 when assembled in the door frame 3 (see FIG. 22 etc.).

[3-1 j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the back case removed and the tamperproof member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to the ball emitting device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game stored in the upper plate 201 The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by the operation of the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a which is supplied with gaming balls B from the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. And the rear end of the front cover 141 are closed and the front is opened in a box shape, and the game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front and rear direction A front cover pivotally supported on a rear cover 142 having a striking ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and an axis extending between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 in the front-rear direction. The ball extraction member 143 having a partition 143a that divides the entrance 141a from the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game ball B on the partition 143a of the ball extraction 143 one back cover 14 The ball feeding member 144 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142. And a ball feed solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has the ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144 A ball feed solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feed member 144, respectively.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. From 141c, an operating rod 143c of a ball pullout member 143 described later extends forward. Also, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed and guide passage 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper ball. And it is formed so that the site | part currently open | released to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from a back side.

  The ball extraction member 143 divides the space between the inlet 141a and the ball outlet 141b below the inlet 141a, and has a partition 143a whose upper surface is lowered in the direction of the ball feeding member 144; Around an axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and being bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b from near the middle in the vertical direction and the lower end extends in the front and rear direction , A rod-like operating rod 143c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a lower part of the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 143c moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extraction button 222 of the disc unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 Contact with the upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 is directed to the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-like plan view centering on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, and the back of the blocking portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b which is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped collar portion 144c which extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one gaming ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis by moving the collar portion 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feed member 144 has a supply position in which the ball holding portion 144b is in communication with the ball hitting supply port 142a at the same time as the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b has a partition portion 143a. It is pivoted between the directionally oriented holding position. When the ball feed member 144 is at the supply position, the gaming ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the ball hitting supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540 and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B to the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) side is blocked by the blocking portion 144a, and the game ball B remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 is turned to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b is directed to the partition portion 143a, and the ball holding portion 144b is closed at the ball feeding port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding movement rod 146 which is swung in the vertical direction. And a ball feeding crank 147 for pivoting the ball feeding member 144 around the vertically extending axis.

  The ball feed operating rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feed solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable about an axially extending axis. It is done. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feed solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feed around the right end The left end side closer to the crank 147 is pivoted to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side near the ball feed crank 147 moves downward around the right end. As it is pivoted back to its initial state. As a result, the ball feed operating rod 146 causes the left end portion (tip) near the ball feed crank 147 to swing in the vertical direction by the ball feed solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and extends in the left and right direction, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b disposed on the side opposite to the side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft portion 147b And a transmission portion 147c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, whereby the ball feeding crank 147 is moved through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be pivoted about an axis extending back and forth.

  When the ball feed solenoid 140 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed unit 140 is in a state where the ball feed operation rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed operation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 is held Turn to That is, when the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 144 receives one game ball B, and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 137) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the ball extracting member 143 pivotally supported pivotally or by the weight portion 143 d. However, the actuating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball extracting member 143 abuts on the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper disc ball extracting slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 222 of the disc unit 200. In the normal state, since the rotation is restricted, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b, and is separated. The game ball B does not intrude.

  Then, when the player presses the upper disc ball extraction button of the dish unit downward, the upper disc ball extraction slider slides downward with the operation transmission unit, and the movement lever 143c is moved with the movement of the operation transmission section downward. Will move relatively downward. When the actuating rod 143c moves downward together with the actuating transmission portion, the ball extracting member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the partitioning portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition Is released. As a result, the gaming ball B entering from the entrance 141a drops toward the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball withdrawal guiding path 241c of the unit 240 after pulling out the upper ball in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper disc ball removal slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242 b with which the operation rod 143 c of the ball removal member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B on the partition part 143 a Can be absorbed by the spring 243 through the actuating rod 143c, so that breakage of the ball pullout member 143 etc. can be prevented, and the gaming ball B is a partition It is possible to prevent bouncing back at 143a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) etc.) that is recessed forward on the upper right in the back view of the hitting supply port 142a of the rear cover 142. A tamperproof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142 b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated into upper and lower portions 148a at a substantially central position in the vertical direction. A lower piece portion 148b, and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered manner on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other . The upper piece portion 148 a of the tamperproof member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamperproof member 148 so that the right end in the front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148 b extends in the same plane as the general surface of the tamperproof member 148. Thus, in the plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove extending toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b is in communication with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to this fraud prevention member 148, the illegal gaming ball B attached with a string is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 and attached to the illegal gaming ball B The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit ball) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed such that the illegal game ball B is moved into and out of the first starting opening by operating the strap The V-shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b after the string attached to the illegal gaming ball B is inserted between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b by It is possible to cut off by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using an illegal gaming ball B attached with a string.

[3-1 k. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 36 and FIG. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of a front cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid removed. The false cover unit 150 is attached to the lower portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side in a rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (fall ball) that has been fired by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580 The game ball B is to be guided to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 150 is a shallow box-like unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit main body 151 And 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and a through ball passage 150a which brings the normal guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit of the main body frame 4 into communication with the upper countersink supply port of the dish unit; The full ball receiving opening 150b is open toward the rear on the lower right side in the front view of the through ball passage 150a and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit of the main body frame 4 .

  In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward at the right side in front view of the full tank receptacle 150b and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main frame 4 The ball ball socket 150c for receiving the game ball B (far ball) and the game ball B which is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view and received by the full tank ball socket 150b and the ball ball socket 150c. And a ball outlet 150d for discharging forward and communicating with the lower ball inlet of the tray unit.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receptacle 150b and the far ball receptacle 150c and the ball outlet 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of gaming balls B. A reservoir passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through ball passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receptacle 150 b and the far ball receptacle 150 c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball outlet 150 d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  In addition, the flat cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and the flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152; And a spring 155 for biasing the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e. The full tank detection sensor 154 detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e.

  In the far cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the gaming balls B and the gaming balls B are not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, to some extent in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the gaming balls B moves the upper end of the movable piece 153 away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. As the movable piece 153 rotates, the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of gaming balls B, so if fullness is detected by the full detection sensor 154, the payout of more gaming balls B is stopped At the same time, it is possible to notify the player or a person in charge of the game hall of that effect, and to urge the player to eliminate the filling of the lower tray 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150 a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the dispensing passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball passage unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 described later of the body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f is provided to which the actuating projection 613a of 613 can abut (see FIG. 91). The door opening and closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operation projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 150f, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to lower end of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full delivery passage 610b The front opening can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 29, FIG. 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is removably inserted from the rear into the glass unit attachment portion 101 h so as to close the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 enables the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (forward) It closes the front of the area 5a.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 101h larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the inside of the glass frame 161 closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be in contact with the projection 163 b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161 b is insertable into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit attachment member 163 has a disk-like base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a bar-like projection from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. Do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit attachment portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 by the protrusion 163b when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit attachment member 163 is located below the base 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the protrusion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction of the backward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 29, FIG. 30, and the like. The crime prevention cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 170 is disposed with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear projection 172 projecting short rearwardly along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 171, and left and right And a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward beyond the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed along a portion of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection 172, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, the rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projection 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area It does not prevent the game ball B from being driven into 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 is resiliently locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the crime prevention cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projection 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state where the rear projection 172 projecting backward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the player. It is a thing.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182 A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 And a handle front lens 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  Further, the handle unit 180 is rotatably attached by an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 at the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 It has a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a integrally rotating with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 held between the base 186 and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 to return the handle 182 to the initial rotational position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in a direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186 and a tip end projecting outward from the left side in a front view outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 A single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 and a single-shot button 193 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth to the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186 and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front and rear direction, a disk-like front end 181b radially projecting from the front end of the base 181a, and a cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three grooves 181 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102 c of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c can be inserted in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward in a circumferential direction away from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting backward from a position inside with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a is such that the side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the portion of the handle 182 that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side The side in the direction of is concaved (curved) to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Is slightly lower. The second protrusion 182 b is configured such that the side surface in the clockwise direction in the front view clockwise bulges outward and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c has a portion most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees from the first protrusion 182a It also protrudes slightly high. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182 d are inclined in a substantially linear shape, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183 a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183 a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 by penetrating the slit 182 e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In the present example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation.

  The handle front lens 185 has a front surface bulging forward and has translucency. The handle front lens 185 is provided internally with a three-dimensionally formed lens member of a transparent member. The handle front lens 185 is made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (the open side). The handle unit 180 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can make the user perform the turning operation without a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the emission solenoid 542 in the ball emission device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the handle 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch, when the handle 182 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is applied with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Thus, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B can not be hit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Also, when the player presses the one-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the one-shot button manipulation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, and the firing control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193, the operation before the one-shot button 193 is performed. The game ball B can be re-injected into the game area 5a with the hitting strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes, in the handle 182, four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, and the handle 182 is rotated most in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front. Of the first protrusion 182 a when the fourth protrusion 182 d does not rotate the handle 182 when the game ball B is most strongly hit into the game area 5 a (so-called “right hit”). The position is substantially the same as the position, so that the player can maintain the handle 182 at the position of “right-handed” in a comfortable state by changing the fourth protrusion 182 d as the first protrusion 182 a and holding the handle 182. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit from the back. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate units disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 at a position lower than the door window 101 a. The dish unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the upper dish 201 and the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls B for hitting into the game area 5a, and the game balls supplied from the upper dish 201 and the far cover unit 150 And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The pan unit 200 has a pan 201 and is mounted on the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The pan unit 210 is mounted on the front of the pan base unit 210. And a rendering operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-like plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate body 212 attached to the front upper portion of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 attached to the front and projecting forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the top surface of the mounting base 213; An upper counterball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and an upper counterball removal unit 240 mounted at the rear of the upper counterball removal unit 230 are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. Tray unit main body 252, a lower plate ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and a plate upper left decorative unit 270 separately attached to the upper front of the plate unit main body 252 A dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 mounted below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 capable of rotating operation by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by pressing operation by the player. The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302 A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 for emitting and decorating the rendering operation ring 330, a decoration substrate cover 353 covering the upper side of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320 Vibration speaker 354, effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 And have.

  The whole is bulging forward as a whole, and the rendering operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 is obliquely upward forward at the center in the lateral direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper surface While the upper plate 201 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, the ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed, and the lower plate 202 is disposed on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and to the left of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed of the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in the shape of a container which is largely expanded forward on the left side than the center in the left and right in a front view. In the upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding to the rear as it goes to the right in a front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). See). In the upper tray 201, the entire bottom surface including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end is lower, and the right end side in a front view of the guiding passage portion 201a is below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is placed on the lower end of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper ball supply port 211a. It inclines so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thus, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

  The induction passage portion 201a is provided with a metal earth metal fitting 201b electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B contacts (rolls) to make the game ball Static electricity charged to B can be removed.

[3-5 b. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction in a front view. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the gaming balls B, and is provided at the bottom wall with a lower countersink extraction hole 202a which penetrates up and down and can discharge the gaming balls B. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202 a of the lower tray 202 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lower bowl ball extraction unit 260.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends leftward and rightward, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower tray 202, lower countersink holes 202a penetrating vertically are disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the lower ball open hole 202a. The lower bowl ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located in front of the lower bowl ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the tray unit 200.

  The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower flat ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and open the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the above can be discharged to the lower side (e.g., dollar box) of the dish unit 200. Further, in the state where the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is opened, the lower flat ball extraction hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower flat ball supply port 211c, so It is possible to quickly discharge the released game ball B downward from the lower ball extraction hole 202a by the movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5 c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the pan base unit in the pan unit. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there. The dish base unit 210 is attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are attached to the front.

  The plate base unit 210 is a flat plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The mounting base 213 is attached to the right of the main body 212 and the upper pan body 212 at the upper front of the pan unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213 at the front of the pan unit base 211 And the tray unit relay board 214.

  Further, the bowl base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper bowling ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , And an after-the-counter ball removal unit 240 mounted on the rear side of the plate unit base 211 at the rear of the table ball removal front unit 230.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front face of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends flat across the entire width of the door frame base 101 Box-shaped).

  The pan unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan ball supply port 211a and the upper pan and ball supply port 211a extending cylindrically rearward. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower circular bulb supply port 211c which penetrates back and forth in the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and cylindrically extends backward; A notch 211d is notched in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c and has a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and front and rear in the front right upper side of the lower flat ball supply port 211c And an upper flat ball feed port 211e which extends upward and downward and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, and is raised on the left side of the upper flat ball feed port 211e, on which the mounting base is placed. A slider insertion port 211g which penetrates back and forth in the lower part of the pan body and into which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper disc ball removal slider 242 of the upper disc ball removal unit 240 is inserted and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner Handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view And a mouth 211i.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 211 a of the bowl unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper bowl 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper bowl ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101 g is penetrated from the front side to be connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B dispensed from the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 is supplied (dispensed) into the upper tray 201 through the upper ball dispensing port 211 a.

  The lower disc ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and the cylindrical rear end is the lower disc ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected with the front end of ball emission mouth 150d of far cover unit 150. As a result, the gaming ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower countersink supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball extraction guiding path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the removal of the upper ball is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower ball supply port 211c. ing. Thus, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is operated by the upper plate ball extraction button 222, the upper ball supply port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and the upper The lower ball and ball supply port 211c is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b and the ball removal and introducing passage 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper flat ball feeding port 211 e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241 a of the rear base 241 in the upper flat ball dropping unit 240 in a state assembled to the flat base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the unit 240 after ball removal to the ball feeding and introducing passage 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper dish main body 212 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the upper dish 201. The upper dish main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper side and the rear side are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends in the left and right direction, and the left side of the upper plate main body 212 bulges forward largely from the center in the left and right in a front view. The upper plate main body 212 is formed such that the front end recedes backward as going from the most bulging part to the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B ing. The bottom surface of the upper tray main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper tray main body 212 is closed at the top near the right end.

  The upper tray main body 212 is attached to the lower end of the bowl unit 200 so that the portion closed at the upper side in the vicinity of the right end sinks below the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled in the tray unit 200. Further, in the upper tray main body 212, a rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction in the upper portion, and a part of the rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the rendering operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the pan base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the pan unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211 f of the pan unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper side is open. The mounting base 213 is provided with an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetration port 213b penetrating vertically in the rear right corner.

  The insertion hole 213a of the mounting base 213 is a hole through which the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is removed. Moreover, the wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213 b.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame sub relay substrate 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the plate lower left decorative substrate 283, and the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 , And relay the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The tray unit relay substrate 214 is attached to the right of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the back side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 Or, after inserting a prepaid card, lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine, or use the ball rental machine It is for deducting and returning the part of the game ball B from which the cash and prepaid card thrown in to were loaned out, or returning.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 has a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball extraction button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221 A light transmitting disc-like ball lending operation base 223 disposed to the right of the extraction button 222, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper ball ball extraction button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by the player performing a pressing operation. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is configured of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be viewed through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball extraction button 222. Further, after inserting a prepaid card with cash or balance into the ball lending machine and pressing the ball lending button 224, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display unit when the ball rental machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Upper flat ball removal unit and upper flat ball removal unit]
The unit 230 for removing the upper ball and the unit for removing the upper ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper flat ball extraction unit 230 and the upper flat ball extraction unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed to operate the upper tray 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower tray 202.

  The upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement projection 211 f on the front surface of the bowl unit base 211. The upper bowl ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the bowl unit base 211 at a position behind the upper bowl ball removal unit 230.

  The upper ball and ball removal front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the disk unit base 211 and extends in the up and down direction, and is movably inserted in the cylinder of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 211 near the front of the upper pan and ball feed port 211 e and the slider insertion port 211 g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 of the unit 240 after the upper flat ball extraction. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The upper countersink ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the disk unit base 211 so as to close the upper ball and ball supply port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the front surface of the rear base 241 in the vertical direction An upper ball ball slide slider 242 slidably mounted, a spring 243 urging the upper ball ball slide slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241; Is equipped.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is opened forward and a ball socket 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket 241a. A ball feed guiding path 241b for guiding the received gaming ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guiding it backward, and a position on the rear surface of the rear base 241 below the ball feed guiding path 241b And a ball extraction guide path 241c for guiding the ball B downward and guiding it to the right in a rear view.

  The ball socket 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and is directed forward through the upper plate feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feed guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feed unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part in the state assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the gaming ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 is made to enter the entrance 141 a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241 a and the ball feeding guide path 241 b.

  The portions of the ball extraction guide path 241c that extend to the left and right are projected to the right in the rear view and inclined so that the right end in the rear view is lower than the part to which the upper disc ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached. And open on the right side in a rear view. The rear side of the ball extension guiding path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The upper part of the part extending vertically up and down below the ball feeding and guiding passage 241b is located in front of the ball pulling out port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when the ball pulling and guiding passage 241c is assembled in the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end in the rear view of the portion extending leftward and rightward is formed so as to be connected to the notch portion 211 d of the lower circular bulb supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the gaming ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guiding path 241c and the notch portion 211d.

  The upper flat ball slide slider 242 is formed in a square shape in a front view, and protrudes rearward from the rear surface which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242 a that protrudes forward from the upper left corner and the operation receiving portion 242 a And an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a is formed flat. In addition, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper ball ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the front flat ball. Further, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation transmission portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates the ball extraction member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. A weir 143c is in contact.

  The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper countersink slider 242, and the upper countersink slider 242 is biased upward. Therefore, the upper ball ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

  The upper counter ball removal unit 230 and the upper counter ball removal unit 240 have the upper counter ball removal slider 242 positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper counter ball removal slider 242 The upper flat screen extraction button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper flat ball slide slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the actuating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the actuating transmission portion 242b is blocked. The partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal hole 141b to separate the two.

  Therefore, in a state in which the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the space between the inlet 141a and the ball outlet 141b is partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and is sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball socket 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting supply port 142a to the ball emitting device 540 via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 The actuating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removal member 143 rotates the ball removal member 143 to divide the partition 143a. Is retracted from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the gaming ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receptacle 241a and the ball feed guiding path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. It will be done. The gaming ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower flat ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower flat ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper plate 201 are discharged into the lower plate 202 after being discharged into the plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper flat ball extraction button 222 is released, the upper flat ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper pan via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 is lifted, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the actuating rod 143c in contact with the actuating transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  As described above, the gaming ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 for removing the upper bowl and the unit 240 for removing the upper bowl. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5 d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and seen from the back is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202 and is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 is decorating almost the whole of the dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish main body 251 and the dish unit base to cover the outer circumference of the lower dish main body 251. A bowl unit main body 252 attached to the front of the bowl 211, a lower bowl ball pulling out unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower bowl main body 251, and a bowl separately mounted on the upper front of the bowl unit main body 252 A lower left decoration unit 280 and a lower right decoration unit mounted below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 on the entire surface of the main unit 252 And 285.

[3-5 d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) which extends in the left and right direction and is open at the upper and the rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the front lower portion of the tray unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear is closed.

  The lower tray main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose shape in plan view extends in the left and right direction, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward than the right side. In the lower tray main body 251, in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view, a lower countersink hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed. The lower tray main body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof is lowered toward the lower spherical ball opening 202a. The lower ball ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball ball extraction lid 265 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower tray body 251 is in a state in which the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the tray unit main body 252 in a state where the lower tray main body 251 is assembled in the tray decoration unit 250. Further, the lower tray main body is in a state assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface is positioned lower than the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is a lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5 d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210, and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The pan unit body 252 bulges so that the center in the left and right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left and right direction bulges forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the plate unit main body 252 is curved such that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in the shape of a box opened rearward.

  The pan unit main body 252 bulges forward toward the center in the left and right direction from the left and right ends in the upper part and extends upward and separately from the upper side bulged part 252a spaced apart in the left and right And a bottom plate portion 252c extending in the form of a flat plate from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b to the rear in such a manner as to cover the outer periphery of the lower tray main body 251. .

  The left and right upper side bulging parts 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and the front left plate top left decoration unit 270, the plate bottom left decoration unit 280, the plate top right decoration unit 275 and the plate bottom right decoration unit 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The pan unit main body 252 is formed with a lower pan opening 252d which penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size such that the player's finger can be inserted, and the lower plate opening 252d is formed to be wider upward and downward as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 is a front notch portion 252e which is notched upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is notched at a lower part of The lower countersunk ball extraction unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

  Furthermore, the pan unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted; It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h which penetrates the decoration part 252b back and forth and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging parts 252a which becomes the center in the horizontal direction. And a rendering operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker opening 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where it is assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower disc ball extraction button 263 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260 faces forward from the front notch portion 252e, and the lower disc ball extraction base 261 of the lower disc ball extraction unit 260. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5 d-3. Lower bowl ball removal unit]
The lower ball ball extraction unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and stores the game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges the game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction holes 202a. It is intended to

  The lower disc ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower disc body 251 and has a flat lower disc ball extraction base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view; A slider 262 slidably mounted to the front and back on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower countersunk ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward; The lower disc ball lid 265 opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and the holding mechanism 266 holds the lower disc ball lid 265 in the open state via the slider 262.

  The lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed to close the bottom notch 252f of the disk unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a of the lower disk 202 (lower disk main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower ball ball extraction base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower ball ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front and rear direction, and is slidably mounted on the lower disc ball removal base 261 in the front and rear direction at a position from the center in the left-right direction to the left. The slider 262 is provided with a projecting pin projecting cylindrically upward.

  The lower disc ball ejection lid 265 is attached to the lower disc ball ejection base 261 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending up and down at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at the left end side. The right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower flat ball lid 265 is formed with a slit extending in the left and right direction in which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 260, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface cutout portion 252f of the plate unit main body 252 in a state assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate 252c. In addition, the lower countersunk ball extraction button 263 is facing forward from the front cutout 252e of the main dish unit main body 252. Under normal conditions, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower microcontroller ball lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole in the normal state. And the through hole (the lower countersink hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265, and the gaming ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in the normal state, the front surface of the lower ball ball extraction button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e in the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  Under normal conditions, when the lower ball extraction button 263 is pushed backward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower ball extraction button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower flat ball lid 265 backward through the slit, and the lower flat ball lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end is backward It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower countersunk ball lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower countersink hole 202a is opened, The gaming ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  In addition, when the slider 262 is moved backward by the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower ball lifting button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 is not moved forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower ball removal cover 265 is kept turned to the rear, and the lower ball removal hole 202a is maintained in the open state, and the gaming balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously used. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower ball extraction hole 202a from this state, when the lower ball extraction button 263 which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pushed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. Ru. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball releasing button 263 returns to the state where it matches the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower ball removal cover 265 is pivoted so that the right end side is located immediately above the through hole, and the lower ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower ball removal cover 265. Thus, the gaming balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5 d-4. Upper left decoration unit and upper right decoration unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the main unit 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 are for decorating the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semicylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271 A dish upper left decorative substrate 273 mounted on the back side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending to the left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted from the back into the dish upper left decoration 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decoration substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left decoration substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the upper left decoration 271 can be made to emit light.

  The left upper part of the upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the left left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the upper central decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the upper left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration substrate 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left decoration 271 is The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semicylindrical shape extending laterally and has a light transmitting property, the dish upper right decoration 276 and the dish upper right reflector 277 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right decoration 276, A dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is mounted on the back side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decoration 276 extends curvilinearly so as to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper right decoration 276 has a shape in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely rightward at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The dish upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from behind into the dish upper right decoration 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decoration 276 can be decorated to emit light.

  The right upper part of the upper right decoration unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the upper part decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the presentation operation unit 300. And continuous. Since the dish upper right decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decoration substrate 278 are illuminated, the entire front face of the dish upper right decoration 276 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 are partially assembled to the door frame 3. The upper left portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decorative unit 250 is partially protruded upward. The step in which the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 side become higher can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a. As a result, the player can hook a finger using the step between the upper left decoration unit 270 and upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is equalized. Alternatively, the finger can be used when operating the effect operation unit 301 to be described later. Further, the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing forward by the step between the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a.

[3-5 d-5. Lower left decoration unit and lower right decoration unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower portion of the front of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the main unit 252 so as to extend along the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 respectively. Be The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 300 .

  The lower left decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending in the left and right direction and has a light transmitting property. The lower left decoration 281 has a lower left reflector 282 mounted on the rear side of the lower left decoration 281. A dish lower left decorative substrate 283 mounted on the back side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The lower left decorative body 281 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decorative body 271 and the upper right decorative body 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped so that the semi-cylinder is bent. The left lower end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. This dish lower left decoration 281 is formed milky white.

  The lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decoration board 283 is a full color LED, and by emitting light, the lower left decoration 281 can be made to emit light.

  With the lower left decoration unit 280 assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left decoration unit 280, since the left end of the lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape, it looks as if the left end is sunk into the door frame 3. The lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 The light emitting decoration can be made substantially uniform, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical, horizontally extending, light transmitting dish lower right decoration 286 and a dish lower right decoration attached to the back of the dish lower right decoration 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decoration substrate 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  The dish lower right decoration 286 extends curvilinearly to move forward and move downward from the right end to the left end, and extends in a circular arc having a center at the rear in plan view, It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a of the right side. The lower right decoration 286 is a semicircular arc bulging forward at a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the half cylinder is formed to be bent. The right lower end of the lower right decoration 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. This dish lower right decoration 286 is formed milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the back into the inside of the dish lower right decoration 286, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish lower right decoration 286 can be decorated with light emission.

  The right lower end of the lower right decoration unit 285 is located below the right end of the upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the lower center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. In the lower right decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration 286 of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration of the lower right decoration appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decoration unit 285 has no rib in the middle of the dish lower right decoration 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plural LEDs of the dish lower right decoration substrate 288 emit light, the dish lower right decoration 286 The entire front surface of the light emitting device can be substantially uniformly emitted and decorated, and it can appear as if a fluorescent light is embedded.

[3-5 e. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the pan unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the direction of movement of the effect operation button. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, and while decorating the plate unit 200, the player operates and participates in the rendering when the player participation type rendering is performed. It can be done. The rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 receives the operation of the player and can move the rotation operation unit 302 In addition to the operation of hitting the game ball B, the player can participate in the effect during the game. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than a half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is mounted on the top surface of the rendering operation portion cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation portion base 320 housed inside the rendering operation portion cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation portion base 320. The ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation portion 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 A transmission gear 350 for operation ring that transmits rotation between the unit 302 and the gear 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for operation ring to the operation portion base 320.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the rendering operation ring 330, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and the rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 The decorative substrate cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the above, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face inside the ring of the effect operation ring 330 The rendering operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Effect operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper and rear portions are open.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 recessed downward, a semicircular annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and expanded forward, and a unit front The dish center upper reflector 313 is mounted from the rear in the dish center upper decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The plate center upper decoration substrate 314, the plate center lower reflector 315 mounted from the rear in the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the plate center lower reflector 315 And a lower center decoration substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the light are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit main body 252 It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to a virtual plane formed on the front semicircular arc extending upper end edge is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drainage holes 311 a formed at the lowest position when assembled into the pan unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape in which the shape of the unit front cover 312 bulges forward so that the shape in plan view follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. It is attached. The unit front cover 312 is a plate central upper decoration 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front below the dish central upper decoration 312a. And a dish center lower decoration body 312 b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulging semicircular arc follows the front end of the unit lower cover 311. The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the dish center lower decoration 312 b.

  The plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are formed by dividing a cylinder of substantially the same thickness (radius) into halves and extending in a semicircular arc shape with the dividing surface facing the center side It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends with a large curvature in a semicircular arc shape with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It has a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish upper center decoration 312a protrudes forward than the front end of the dish center lower decoration 312b. Further, when assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper center decoration body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275 The left and right ends of 312 b are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left end of the dish lower right decoration unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed milky white.

  The front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about half the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish upper central reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape which bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish central upper decoration body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decoration substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center upper decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the dish upper center decoration substrate 314 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper center decoration body 312a can be illuminated and decorated.

  The lower center dish reflector 315 is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the lower stage center decoration 312 b of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The lower center dish reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower dish center lower decoration substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the lower center dish decoration substrate 316 are full color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower dish center lower decoration body 312b can be lighted and decorated.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of extending in a semicircular arc shape in the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, so When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower center lower decoration substrate 316 are made to emit light, the whole can be emitted and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end projecting forward more than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish upper center decoration body 312a is continuous with the dish upper left decoration body 271 and the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b is the dish lower left decoration body 281 and the dish right It is continuous with the lower decoration 286. Thus, the rendering operation unit 300 is made to stand out and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Controller base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit base 320 is inserted from above into the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper tray main body 212 in the dish base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper side is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having a substantially cubic outer shape and extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 whose upper portion is open, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape The upper attachment which is formed on the flange base 322, the plurality of (here four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom of the main body 321, and the rear end of the flange 322 and attached to the disc base unit 210 A portion 324, and a gear bearing portion 325 which is opened upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outside of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 350 for operation ring.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body portion 321 has a bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from the lower side, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into a sound such as voice or music and output it. it can.

  The leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. In the main body portion 321, the rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outer side of the left side wall, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outer side of the rear wall.

  The flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter such that the outer periphery thereof substantially matches the inner periphery of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312. A rendering operation ring decorative substrate 352 and a decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring attachment base 331 of the rendering operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for operation ring around an axis extending in the left and right direction in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is attached to the gear bearing 325, the upper portion of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring protrudes upward, and the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring is a flange portion. It is exposed to the outside below 322.

  The upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly lower than the upper surface of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in a state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 300. Moreover, in the state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with it.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 55, FIG. 56 and the like. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 which can be rotationally operated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) about twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

  The rendering operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and rotatably mounted around a vertically extending shaft on the ring mounting base 331 and are attached to the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotating base 332 upward And a ring retaining member 334 which regulates the movement.

  Also, the rendering operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 that constitutes a part of the rotational operation portion 302 and the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation portion 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 to constitute a part of the rotation operation portion 302 And an in-ring cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a light transmitting annular shape.

  The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and an inner diameter formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the placement portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably disposed in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge and the placement portion 331a on the upper surface And a boss 331 b for projecting cylindrically upward from a plurality (four in this case) of parts and for mounting the bush 333 rotatably and spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting part 331 a on the upper surface And a through-hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. The plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The outer diameter of the rotation base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332 a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed in a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes to the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332 a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331, and in a state of being assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332 a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring attachment base 331. The ring gear 332 a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350 a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which circular arcs forming the outer and upper portions in a circular shape are arranged three-dimensionally And an outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extending in the circumferential direction after extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335 a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc in the range of 1⁄4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335 b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335 c extends slightly lower than the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer ring lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer lower portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward from the inner side of the outer lower surface portion 336a in the circumferential direction And a plurality of outer lower cover attachment portions 336b arranged in plural. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc within a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336 b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc constituting an inner upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis And an inner cover attachment portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1⁄8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337 c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion in the range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is in a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 is capable of emitting light by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the rear. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the left front. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating and driving the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft protrudes leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the transmission gear 350 for operation ring A gear cover rotatably mounting the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base and covering the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side 346, and.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346, and detects a rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape which is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and opened leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is constituted by a spur gear-like first gear 344a meshing with the drive gear, and a spur gear-like second gear 344b integrally rotating with the first gear 344a and having a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a having a diameter (a size twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) larger than the transmission gear 344 and extends in the circumferential direction. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345 b have a length in the circumferential direction equal to the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345 b are arranged circumferentially at intervals of a rotational angle of 45 degrees. The detection pieces 345 b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction at an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345 b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated at a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It is supposed to be. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected through the transmission detection gear member 345.

  In the assembled state, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for operation ring. Engage with Further, the whole of the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 can freely set the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the transmission gear for operation ring by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 may cause the rotary operation unit 302 to oscillate in a reciprocating manner by oscillating the drive gear 343 by means of the operation ring drive motor 342 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  In the rotary drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated. The detection piece 345 b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be given to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by combining these as appropriate, it is possible to provide the rotation operation unit 302 with an operation feeling or click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The transmission gear 350 for operation ring of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation portion base 320 It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The transmission gear 350 for operation ring rotates integrally with the ring gear portion 350a in the bevel gear shape, which meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340 And a spur gear-like drive-side gear portion 350b engaged with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The pitch circle of the ring gear portion 350a and the drive gear portion 350b are formed to have the same diameter. The bevel gear-like ring side gear portion 350 a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for operation ring is inserted from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320, and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation portion base 320, so that it is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320. Be

  In the operation ring transmission gear 350, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotational drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be transmitted and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Effect operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can emit light and decorate the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annular ring is divided back and forth, and is configured of a front decoration substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decoration substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arrayed along the outer circumference on each of the top surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is covered with a decoration substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. Similar to the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352, the decoration substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear, and is a front substrate cover that covers the front decoration substrate 352a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 A rear substrate cover 353 b and a rear substrate cover 353 b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 from the upper side covering the rear decorative substrate 352 b are configured.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and thereby the rotation operation unit 302 is configured through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331 c of the ring attachment base 331. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated and decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the light emission decoration that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 53, FIG. 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and can output various frequencies of vibration in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared to a vibration device in which a decentered weight is rotated by a motor, and can present more colorful effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The rendering operation button unit 360 in the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face in the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 which can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is configured of a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has an outer periphery formed in a substantially circular shape, and is disposed at an object bordering on a central axis of the button unit base 361 attached within the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the button unit base 361. A disc-like member having a pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a cylindrical shape and connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having a circular outer periphery smaller than the button unit base 361 Between the upper base 363 and the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361, the guide shaft 362 is movably attached in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size Disc-shaped lifting and lowering base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the presentation operation button unit 360 extends cylindrically upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has a central shaft 366 whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363 and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361 Engaging with the operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361 and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably inserted by the central shaft 366 being inserted therein. 370, the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected and the central shaft A lift cam member 371 for vertically moving the lift base 364 by inserting and rotatably attaching and moving the lift base 364, the lift drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lift cam drive gear member 370 is covered from above. And a disk-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape whose inner diameter is larger than the upper base and extends vertically, and is mounted movably in the vertical direction by the pair of guide shafts 362 above the lift base 364 Substantially the same as the central button main body 373 and a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the elevation base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward; The central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter and the upper end side is closed and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing portion 303a.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button main body 373 on the upper surface of the elevation base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted; An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative substrate 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 and a portion of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covering the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 disposed on the outer peripheral side above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and raised and lowered so as to cover the outer peripheral surface and upper surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 having translucency with three-dimensional decoration A transparent perimeter button attached to the base 364 with the center button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is configured by the outer periphery substrate cover 378, the outer periphery decoration lens 379, and the outer periphery button cover 380.

  Further, the rendering operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and the elevation cam driving gear member 370. An elevation detection sensor 382 for detecting elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting a rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base main body 361 a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361 b projecting downward from the base main body 361 a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed in a size slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The lower end of the leg 361 b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached on the top surface of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361 a from the center to the front and the rear. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter that is about one half of the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the lift base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

  The elevation base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The lift base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a in which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrated with a size that allows the lift cam member 371 to pass through at the center. An upright wall portion 364c cylindrically projecting upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the central hole 364b near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axial core and rotatably mounted around the axial core.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be vertically movable in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The upper end of the upright wall 364c abuts on the upper base 363 to restrict the upward movement of the elevating base 364 and a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button main body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364c. It is formed. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The lift cam drive gear member 370 has a spur gear-like gear portion 370a engaged with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b projecting upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the lift cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. The elevating detection piece 370 c has two cylindrical portions projecting downward from the lower side and facing each other, which are notched and detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The lift cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The lift cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by the central shaft 366 being inserted at the center. The lift cam member 371 is spaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface, and includes a pair of cam portions 371a protruding outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pins 364 d of the elevation base 364.

  The cam portion 371a has a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial center near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end parallel to the axial center, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364 d of the lift base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371 a.

  Further, the lift cam member 371 is provided at the lower end thereof with a connected portion 371 f connected to the connection portion 370 b of the lift cam drive gear member 370.

  The lift cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the lift cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as. The raising and lowering cam member 371 can rotate and thereby guide the guide pin 364d of the raising and lowering base 364 by the cam portion 371a to raise and lower the raising and lowering base 364.

  The central button body 373 penetrates the cylindrical portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b, and the pair of guide shafts A pair of guide holes 373c into which the guide 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevation base 364 and downward from the bottom 373b It includes a pressing detection piece 373 e which is projected and detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373 f which project in a cylindrical shape rearward from the bottom portion 373 b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the cylindrical portion 373a and the bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed such that the bottom 373 b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373 d is formed in a cylindrical shape which is extended short downward, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the lift base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button main body 373 is restricted. Through the central opening 373 d of the central button body 373, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 abuts on the upper base 363.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f is inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f is formed such that the lower end extends downward through the lift base 364 and a screw having a washer inserted therein is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f abuts the lower surface of the lift base 364 to restrict the upward movement of the central button body 373.

  When the bottom portion 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 abuts against the upper surface of the elevation base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 It is formed to project downward through 364. The central button body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker biasing force than the elevation springs 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to be translucent. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

  The central button decoration substrate 376 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface as full color LEDs. The center button decoration substrate 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full color LEDs. The outer circumference button decoration substrate 377 can cause the outer circumference decoration lens 379 and the outer circumference button cover 380 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and has an annular base portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and cylindrically extending upward from the inner periphery of the base portion 378a. And a cylindrical portion 378 b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as going upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending to the center side from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  In the effect operation button unit 360, in the assembled state, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is in a state where the elevation base 364 is biased upward by the pair of elevation springs 365, The locking portion 371 c of the cam portion 371 a of the lift cam member 371 is inserted from below. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 It has become.

  Therefore, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 Also project upward (see FIG. 63 etc.).

  In this state (the state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373 e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303 a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven through the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. While rolling to the left portion of the locking portion 371c in one cam 371b, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relative to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 causes the guide pin 364d to move upward along the second cam 371d. At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to be in the raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in the state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 moves upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected to a position larger than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 when moved to the raised position in a state assembled in the effect operation unit 300 (see FIG. reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes in contact with the lift base 364. In a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevation base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the central button main body 373 protrudes downward relative to the elevation base 364, but the elevation base 364 is a button unit base 361. Because the pressure detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevation spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and along with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button main body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button main body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 However, the pressure is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressure on the center button cover 375 (center pressure operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force more than the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the elevating base 364 lifts the elevating spring The lower end of the lifting base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevation base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) protrudes upward by the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body The pressing detection piece 373 e does not protrude downward from the elevation base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373 e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer periphery button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising and lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button raising and lowering drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the elevating base 364 is moved downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d becomes the first cam Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 inserts the guide pin 364d into the locking portion 371c which is recessed upward, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay substrate unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay substrate 392 attached inside the substrate box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled in the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay substrate 392 is a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a presentation operation ring decoration board 352, a vibration speaker Relay the connection between the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the central button decoration substrate 376, the outer circumference button decoration substrate 377, the pressure detection sensor 381, the elevation detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210 There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in the plan view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation section is at the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing section It is a front view of a saucer unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 which can be operated by the player on the top surface. The effect operation unit 301 is configured of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a circular center pressing operation unit 303 a positioned at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer periphery pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And 303 b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303 a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b is formed by the outer periphery button cover 380 and the outer periphery substrate cover 378.

  The rendering operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operating unit 302 (the rendering operation ring 330) is lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward) .

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state where the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Figure 63 etc.)

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates clockwise in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can repeat the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in a range of a predetermined rotation angle to swing the rotation operation unit 302 back and forth to vibrate. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in left side view through the transmission gear 350 for operation ring, and the rotation is performed. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors of a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345 b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 spaced apart in the circumferential direction is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The intervals are not integer multiples. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. Do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. The rotational speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342. . Alternatively, by rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, it is possible to make the rotation operation heavier or to give a click feeling.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more circular arc extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And since the rotation operation part 302 is attached in the state which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of inner peripheral surface exposed, as shown in figure, it is formed in the shape which is easy to grasp with a player's hand .

  As a result, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, it is possible to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a way that the player can easily do, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 Sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the rotation operation part 302 is attached to the operation part base 320 on the lower surface side, it can not be grasped like a steering wheel of a car.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the rendering operation unit 300 is provided below the rendering operation ring 330 with a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are annularly arranged. Thus, the light emitting decoration of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be performed by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to emit light and decorate only a specific part of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. Thereby, the player can be illusive as if the LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 65A, the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descent position which projected slightly upwards. In this state, the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303 a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). The sensor 381 detects a press.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) is not moved downward, and the pressing is detected The sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  In the normal state, when the lift cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b) The biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the pressing base 303 along with the lifting base 364 to vigorously project upward to be in the state of the rising position (see FIG. 65B). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the center pressing unit 303a is pressed downward with the pressing unit 303 in the raised position, first, the center pressing unit 303a moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374 to move the center pressing unit 303a. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b are in substantially the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press. Furthermore, the central pressing unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing unit 303b are the rotation operating unit 302. The height is substantially the same as that of the upper surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects a press.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 presses the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b downward with the pressing operation unit 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a is projected above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b. The outer periphery pressing unit 303b and the center pressing unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing unit 303b becomes substantially flush with the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (see FIG. 65A). . In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press.

  As described above, regardless of the lowered position or the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 according to the present embodiment can not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operating unit 301 in the player participation type effect , The player participation type can be more enjoyable.

  In addition, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotating operation may be facilitated by the pressing operation unit 303, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be difficult to perform the rotating operation. The operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more versatile operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 66 to FIG. Fig.66 (a) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a in the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the front of the door frame left side base 401 A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration 404 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape which extends vertically and is opened forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip plate shape extending vertically, and is configured of a left side upper decorative substrate 402 a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402 b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can cause the door frame left-side decoration 404 to emit light and decorate by causing the plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate.

  The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the form which the half circular arc bulging forward extended up and down. Thus, the door frame left side decoration 404 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decoration 271 of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decoration 453 It is formed to be continuous with the lower end on the left side of.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and appears as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends from the right side of the door frame 3 in the form of a flat plate to the front substantially to the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left and right direction And a light emitting side window interior decoration 410b disposed in a plurality in the side window 410a. The door frame right side unit 410 is a player who makes it difficult to see inside the gaming area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right in the gaming hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 inconspicuous, and to form a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and extending forward cylindrically and arranged in a row vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and the plurality of side window in-window decorative members 412 And an internal reflector 414 which is inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration 410b.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed to the front of the front end of the side window inner decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and the door frame A door extending in a plate shape in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and having a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction to constitute a side window 410a It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and longitudinal directions so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 Door frame having a through-hole 417a which extends in the shape of a circle and which penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a The side panel and 417, and a.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the right side reflector 415 And a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and being opened rearward. The in-side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a connecting the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) in-side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window inner decoration portion 410b of the side window inner decoration member 412 is formed in a truncated cone-like cylinder whose front end side has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed hemispherical ing. In the side window inner decoration member 412, the front end of the side window inner decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower side position to the upper side with respect to the vertical center. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed to have a translucent white light.

  The side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 is attached to the front of the door frame right side base 411 at a position behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the in-side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape of upper, lower, left, and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is done.

  The inner reflector 414 is formed in an X shape in a front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window inner decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The inner reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window inner decoration portion 410b into four in the upper, lower, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wave shape such that it moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. It is done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates in the front and rear direction, and a plurality of through holes 415 a are formed in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side outer panel 416, a through hole 416a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and longitudinally, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends along the right side reflector 415 in a wavelike manner. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, a through hole 417a penetrating in the left and right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and a door frame of the front side of the connection base 412a of the in-window decorative member 412 and the door frame The rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) can be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a vertically extending strip-like plate shape, and is configured of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs. The door frame right side decoration substrate 418 can cause the door frame right side decoration 419 to emit light and decorate by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

  The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavelike manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decoration 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200 and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450 It is formed to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent light Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends in a wavelike manner forward so that a quarter of the portion from the top protrudes forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and can visually recognize the opposite side through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window inner decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LEDs of the side window inner decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window interior decoration 410b can be illuminated and decorated. Then, the light emission decoration is performed on the side window inner decoration portion 410b, so that the inside of the side window 410a can be made bright and the opposite side can be made less visible through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, since the LED of the in-window decorative portion decoration substrate 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of in-window decorative portions 410b is turned off in the normal state, the side window It is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window interior decorations 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if the player who is searching for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities, the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of the player located in the vicinity can be blocked by the other part including the in-side window decorative part 410b. It is possible to make the whole game area 5a hard to see from the player, and by making it hard to receive the feeling as seen from other players, it is possible to cause the other players to play the game without hesitation .

  Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a glare, and the visibility through the side window 410a changes Let At this time, since the three side window inner decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light is radiated in a band shape and in a radial manner, so the side window inner decoration portions 410b are made to be dazzling and the opposite side is made between them It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a from another player such as the next player. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to avoid that another player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the other player is distracted by being noticed. Can prevent you from feeling uncomfortable because you can not concentrate on playing games, or you can feel you are lost due to the induction of mistakes, and you can make the game more fun by letting the player concentrate on playing games It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and (c) is an outside of the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in a closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the lower front side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451 attached on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451 And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the frame.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted A door frame top right decoration substrate 457 attached to the right of the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front Have.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 450 is disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and is attached to the front of the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top decoration Between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 And a top right reflector 460 mounted on the front of the top top cover 452.

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached respectively to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 from below And a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from the lower side, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near upper right end of base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 is a flat plate-like main body portion 451a extending in the right and left in the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction; And a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451 a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined in such a way as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in the shape of a box opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in such a shape as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451 b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the front end upper portions of the left and right front protrusions 451 b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most projecting forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward as going from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front on the upper surface. The opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed to have a translucent white light. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward has a curvature which becomes smaller as going from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 It is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the lateral direction bulges upward Extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape such that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically separated between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a which are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front end and the rear end and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically in the lateral direction outer side of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464 ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front as full color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can cause the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 to emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can emit light and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 can cause the right portion of the door frame top decoration 453 to emit light and decorate by emitting a plurality of LEDs appropriately.

  The top central reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes are formed at the positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending leftward and rightward, and is mounted such that the pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and frontward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451 b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs the high range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. It is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub relay board 105.

  The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, and the front end thereof is locked to the top upper cover 452 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and the outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419 to form an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As illustrated, the door frame 3 has, at the center in a front view, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 is the dish upper left decoration 271 of the dish unit 200, the dish upper right decoration 276, the dish upper center decoration 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame The outer periphery of the door window 101 a is surrounded by the door frame 101 a by the door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  Top left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, top right decorative body 276, top center decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body Since the reference numeral 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish upper center decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame 101 Behind the door frame top decoration 453, the dish upper left decoration board 273, dish upper right decoration board 278, dish upper center decoration board 314, door frame left side decoration board 402, door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top central decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are disposed, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be made to emit light by emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate appropriately. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is coaxially disposed on the upper surface in an annular annular donut-shaped rotation operating unit 302 whose diameter is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 and the rotation operating unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 below the rotation operation unit 302. Of the upper and lower two-centered upper decoration 322a and the lower center decoration 312b of a large diameter donut shape (semi-cylindrical shape or semi-tubular shape), The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the lower center decoration of the plate 312b, the door frame right side unit 41 Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the plate unit 200, three doughnut-shaped members are vertically aligned with the rotation operation unit 302 and the two upper and lower center decoration 3a and 312b, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer periphery Since the pressing operation unit 303 b and the center pressing operation unit 303 a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out.

  In addition, the dish upper left decoration 271, the dish upper right decoration 276, and the dish lower left decoration 281 disposed below the dish upper center decoration 312a, the dish lower right decoration 286 and the dish lower center decoration 312b, The tube-like tube has a slightly smaller thickness, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the lower center dish decoration 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 is larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the sense of perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation portion 302 or the like operable by the player disposed on the upper side. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Furthermore, on the upper surface of the tray unit 200, the doughnut-shaped rotational operation portion 302 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotational operation portion 302 has the front end side Since the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 turns. The entire volume of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily viewed, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 performs the rotation operation, so that the player rotates immediately when the player participation type effect is performed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation portion 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and the diameters of the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate lower center decoration body 312b project more forward than the upper plate 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation section 302, the upper center dish decoration 312a and the lower center dish decoration 312b are made to stand out At the same time, the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can improve the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the pachinko machine 1 different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to appeal the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The entire configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The main unit frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is performed by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in the shape of a box whose front is open as shown in the figure, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated in the inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Can be mounted.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-like main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion is insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view Body frame upper hinge member 510 to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted and the body frame mounted on the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2; Body frame lower hinge set attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in a front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 rotatably attached And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and to the lower front of the main body frame base unit 500 A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped dispensing base unit 550 mounted along the front side upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a dispensing base unit 550. A payout unit 560 mounted on the rear side for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player, a substrate unit 620 mounted on the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 Back cover 640 which is attached to the main frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and which covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501; 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connecting cable guide member for guiding a connecting frame 503 for connecting the main body frame base 501 which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose shape in front view extends vertically and a door frame 3 side. And 502 a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The dispensing base unit 550 is a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a box-like ball tank attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the form of a groove opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  Payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 for guiding gaming balls B from tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, and one for gaming balls B induced by ball guidance unit 570 based on instructions from payout control board 633. Dispensing device 580 each, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming ball B passed through the dispensing device 580 downward, the gaming ball B through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Or a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the back surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the back side of the base unit 620b. 620 c, a payout control unit 620 d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620 c, and an interface unit 620 e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620 a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a plurality of door frame wedges 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the door frame 3, and projecting rearward from the unit base 651. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame ridge 652 or the outer frame ridge 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame ridge 652 downward. A lock spring 655 which biases and presses the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 which moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Main unit frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame, and FIG. 83 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guiding member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front to the rear, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and a lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide the connecting cable 503 And a game board lock member 505 rotatably mounted on a lower portion of the front surface of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 in an attachable and detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. The game board insertion slot 501b which penetrates back and forth in the height range of the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and the lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b is formed, and the game board on which the game board 5 is placed A placement board 501c, and a game board regulation part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left and right and backward.

  Further, the main frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front of the base main body 501a in the front view, and the launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540; It penetrates back and forth in the cylinder insertion port 501f which penetrates back and forth in the front view right side of the part 501e and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth in the front view lower left side of the game board placement part 501c. A circular speaker opening 501g for facing the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward under the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. The cable attachment recess 501 h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached and the positive of the cable attachment recess 501 h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Furthermore, the main frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the front right side of the gaming board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 640 is at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the rear extension portion 501j rotatably mounted and the left end in the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a, and for mounting the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

  In addition, the main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. The frame opening switch is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch is configured such that the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. A detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is provided with a main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame open switch is attached. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing of the main body frame opening switch is released so that the opening of the main body frame 4 can be detected. A detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably mounted on the main body frame base 501 at a position below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the front and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b, thereby making the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b removable.

  The cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is attached to the right of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501 h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be rotatably mounted on the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 protrudes forward in the upper and lower sides of a flat guide body 502a extending in the left and right direction, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are extended, a cylindrical attachment shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the left and right ends of the guide main body 502a And a plurality of through holes 502d aligned in the direction.

  The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connecting cable guiding member 502 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending up and down near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501 h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 includes a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub It is connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 etc., the connection cable guiding member 502 is an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) to which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hinge-rotatably attached to the body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably mounted about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 by the connection cable guide member. In a state of being in contact with the front surface of the guide main body 502a so as to extend leftward from the right side of the guide main body 502a of 502, the lateral direction is the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide main body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being clamped together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 which penetrated to the pair of through-holes 502d of the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is the back of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 in a state where the assembly door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and the door frame relay board cover It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed to the left of the left end of the connection cable guiding member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the open angle α of the door frame 3 and the open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies: α / 2 ≧ β (desirably, α / 3 ≧ β) (See FIG. 84 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guiding member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α becomes larger, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees) Transition as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward relative to the main body frame base 501. The guiding of the connection cable 503 can prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 is relatively moved backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guiding member 502 is pivoted about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guiding member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guiding member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, since the connecting cable 503 guided by the connecting cable guiding member 502 is folded 180 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connecting cable 503 is folded at the folded part. You can put on a bribe. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the force for closing the connection cable 503 is acted upon by the fold when the 180-folded portion of the connection cable 503 is changed to open. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) from moving in the opening direction by its fold, and the connecting cable 503 (connection cable guiding member 502) It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Furthermore, on the side of the door frame 3, the cable holder 103a is located closer to the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guiding member 502, and the door rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 centering on the central axes (axial centers) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126. A tangent line contacting a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) projecting backward on the central axis (axial center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, and an angle of 45 degrees crossing the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is configured to be as follows. Thereby, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to close the tip end side of the connection cable guiding member 502 opened through the connection cable 503. Since it is possible to press in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed reliably. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 which rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Main frame upper hinge member]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  An upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511 And a main frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically in the front view left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 at a horizontally extending portion, and the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 Have.

  A portion of the upper hinge main body 511 which is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501 k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The main frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted in the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. A door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 can be mounted so that the main frame 4 can be hinged rotatably relative to the outer frame 2 in cooperation with the lower main frame hinge assembly 520, and the door frame relative to the main frame 4 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. The lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The lower main frame hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape upward And a lower hinge second body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate material extending horizontally is bent in an L shape upward. The lower horizontal hinge assembly 520 is provided with a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 at a distance from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower portion thereof. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below for the outer frame It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a at the left side of the horizontally extending portion, for restricting the pivoting range of the door frame 3; And. The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 5011 of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. Be The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the main frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main frame 4. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 81, FIG. 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The cross-sectional shape in plan view of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed in a U shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion material.

  In the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 is restricted forward and upward to the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position control members 531 are vertically spaced apart and attached.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a which is open to the right and extends vertically, on the front side formed in a U shape in which the right side is opened in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove 530 a is such that the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing flail 111 meanders in a plan view, and an incorrect tool from the left side of the pachinko machine 1 Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as viewed from the rear. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front of the main frame base unit 500, and the gaming ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is It is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can strike the gaming ball B with a strength according to the turning angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 541 in a front view From around the tip of the hitting ball 543, a shooting solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose axis extends forward through the shooting base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the shooting solenoid 542, and The game ball B is mounted on the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward and to the left, and the game ball B is rollable.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feed unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544 When the handle 182 is turned in the state where it is in motion, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength according to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hit ball 543. The game ball B hit by the hitting ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rails 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rails 1001 and the inner rails 1002) Between the two, it falls to the ball socket 150 c of the lower far cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the far cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Disbursement base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. Fig. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as viewed from the rear. Dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of main body frame base unit 500.

  The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side in a front view The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side in front view of the top plate portion 551a is substantially the same width as that of the top plate portion 551a And a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b Back plate left portion 551e and inner plate portion 551f extending backward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left side plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left side plate portion 551b to the right Extend to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and in an L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the lateral direction substantially the same as the width in the left-right direction of the game board slot 501b of the main frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b is the upper and lower sides of the game board slot 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the direction height. The front end of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c of the dispensing base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

  Further, the dispensing base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion which is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and the portion is dispensed Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side surface of the inner side plate portion 551 f in a front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551 i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  Dispensing base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of top plate portion 551a of dispensing base 551 and extends in the left and right box-like ball tank 552 opened upward, and the portion of dispensing base 551 extending in the left and right And a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 at the upper side and extending in the form of a groove opened upward to the left.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 on the left side of the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction, A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553 and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 And a ball stopper 557 attached near the left end in the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left and right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left and right direction, and the front and rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front and rear direction Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position on the right side in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the top surface of the top plate 551 a of the dispensing base 551 with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is approximately one minute from the depth at which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonal to the left and back from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 and several times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B After extending so as to be depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left at a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guiding passage 570 a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the left end. It inclines so that the left end side becomes low at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. In addition, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are attached to the tank rail 553 at the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from spreading or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to the axis about which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction It is rotatably mounted. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in two stages in the upper and lower directions is delayed by the rectifying pieces 556a, and the flow is rectified in the downstream side to flow in the tank rail 553 Even if the height is lowered, it does not clog the ball.

  The ball stopper 557 is mounted slidably in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 in the front view, and by sliding left, the bottom end opening of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from circulating from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  Furthermore, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 in a front view on the top surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the dispensing base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 is provided with a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of the payout unit]
The entire configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear is there. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 is a ball guiding unit 570 for guiding the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the gaming ball B disposed under the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570 A payout device 580 for paying out one at a time based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the gaming ball B having passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B having passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned by the tank rails 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a, and in a normal state The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball passage unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pullout passage 580b is operated from the ball pulling lever 593 to the upper full ball passage unit The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the gaming ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the gaming ball B discharged from the ball extraction passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side through the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, receives the gaming ball B from the tank rail 553 and guides the gaming ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is to do.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-like guiding unit base 571 having a meanderingly extending guiding passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow and is opened forward, and a front side of the guiding unit base 571 closed. The game ball B in the guide passage 570a is detected by detecting the movement of the flat guide channel front lid 572 and the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a. And a ball-off detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front cover 572 in a front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. The induction passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the induction unit base 571 and extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the induction unit base 571 and then bends to the right It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the width of the unit base 571 and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

  The guiding passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front and rear right and the width in the right and left direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the gaming ball B is distributed. It can be guided in one row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the movable piece member 573 is mounted to be able to move back and forth into the guiding passage 570a near the top. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably mounted around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side in a front view of the guide passage 570a, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a It is formed to be. In this movable piece member 573, when the gaming ball B is in contact with the portion projecting into the guiding passage 570a, the projecting portion is pushed by the gaming ball B and does not protrude backward from the inside of the guiding passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guiding passage 570a, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from inside the guiding passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the gaming ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non detection state when the gaming ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is a dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It is in communication with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the gaming ball B extends in a serpentine manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the entire height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many gaming can be performed in the guiding passage 570a. The ball B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball breakage detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken along the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90 (a) is a back cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extraction movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a) It is. Dispensing device 580 is removably attached to the underside of ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of back plate left portion 551e of dispensing base 551 of dispensing base unit 550 from the rear.

  The payout device 580 has a box-like opening in the rear and has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can be distributed and a payout device main body 581 having a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a It has a flat-plate-like dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-like dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device body 581 and opened rearward. ing.

  Further, the dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581, and the rotating shaft is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably mounted by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser front lid 583; The second transmission gear 587 in the form of a spur gear meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 and the second transmission gear 587 Between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 having a plurality of detection pieces 588 b extending outward from the spur gear-like dispensing gear 588 a and the dispensing gear 588 a A plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the discharge gear member 588 between the discharge device main body 581 and the discharge device back cover 582 and have a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the discharge passage 580a are provided. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the discharge device main body 581 and detecting a detection piece 588b of the discharge gear member 588.

  Furthermore, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects the gaming ball B, and after the payout device main body 581 and the payout device The ball extraction movable piece 592 mounted so as to be able to open and close the ball extraction passage 580b at a site branched from the ejection passage 580a by the lid 582 and the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be held at the position where the ball extraction passage 580b is closed. And a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the dispenser main body 581 and the dispenser rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a plan view. The dispensing device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger in the front view right than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 opens upward at a position near the left from the center in the lateral direction, and the downstream end is at a position near the right end in the lateral direction. It opens downward. Dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height from the upper end so as to move little by little leftward, and after bending slightly diagonally downward from the upper side, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically to the center (rotation axis) of the discharge blade 589. Then, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball B above the center of the dispensing blade 589, a gap slightly larger than the gaming ball B with the outer periphery of the dispensing blade 589 It extends downward in a circular arc concentric with the discharge blade 589 so as to be formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right of the rear view from the center of the discharge blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches off at a portion bent rightward, and extends vertically along the left side in a rear view to the lower end in the rear view of the bottom surface It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball B A main body side guide wall 581a which protrudes backward and forward from each other so as to form a narrower gap than the other, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall in back view of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removing passage 580b And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and are a back view of a portion extending to the right in a rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed mainly to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates through the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the dispensing device body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in a rear view. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-like detection pieces 588 b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device back cover 582. The discharge blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at the portion extending in the dispensing passage 580a from the upper side to the rotational axis and then extending to the right in the rear view. And protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The discharge blade 589 is provided with a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc having a radius larger than the radius of the gaming ball B to the center side, between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can regulate movement of the gaming ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. Thus, the gaming ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially integrally rotatably mounted by the dispensing device rear lid 582 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left in the rear view of the rotation shaft of the delivery gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the discharge blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588 b of the discharge gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the discharge blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the back and forth direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces in the dispensing passage 580a. The depth of the ball removal movable piece 592 is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a Through the gap between the two, and may be projected into the ball removal passage 580b or retracted out of the ball removal passage 580b.

  The ball extracting lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear view left in the vicinity of the upper end of the ball extracting movable piece 592. A part of the ball extraction lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lowering end, the lower portion can be in contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and it is possible to regulate the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580 b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the rising end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. See 90).

  When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the gaming ball B, which is in a state like beading on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, is the ball pulling movable piece 592. Flow to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the discharge passage 580a, the gaming ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the discharge passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is nothing like the payout wing 589 for suppressing the flow of the gaming ball B, so the gaming ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down too early.

  As described above, in the state where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the gaming ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball extraction passage 580b, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball vigorously, but the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispenser main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispenser rear lid 582 Since the ball pullout movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball pullout passage 580b by the contact force since it can move to the outer side than the inner surface of the ball pullout passage 580b, the ball pullout movable piece 592 is The game ball B is not pinched between the wall surface of the removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  From such a thing, since it is possible to make the ball removal movable piece 592 hard to break, more gaming balls B can be discharged faster to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  In addition, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the ball extraction passage 580b passes between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a at intervals where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is narrower than the gaming ball B. In order to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, the game ball B is in contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b so that the ball removal movable piece 592 has a main body side guide wall 581a and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B is moved to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, Only the game ball B can prevent outward movement by the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the gaming ball B to the outside is blocked between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the gaming ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball thereafter Since the movement of the pullout movable piece 592 is due to an inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pullout movable piece 592, and the ball pullout movable piece 592 can be made hard to break and the main body side guide The gaming ball B does not protrude to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the gaming ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7 c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is to be emitted downward from the payout device 580 and guide the gaming ball B to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is a box-like upper full tank base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened at the rear side, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side open. And a dispenser pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the top full-tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispenser 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601 a for attaching a back cover.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 600 is an upper discharge that opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface and extends downward along the left side to a position about 2/3 the height from the lower side. It is in communication with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper discharging ball receiving passage 600a and extends about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the full height An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper normal discharge passage 600c An upper full tank delivery passage 600d extending downward from the front right side from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the upper surface And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank passage unit 600, the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left in front view. The upper full ball passage unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, and the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a is opened immediately below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600e is opened immediately below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the gaming ball B released (disbursed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b to form the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. It is discharged downward from any of the The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate 551g of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball channel unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full-tan ball passage unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank passage unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. And a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and backward at the front end of the lower full tank base 611, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 which can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end opening of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b And a closing spring 614 which is biased.

  In the lower full tank passage unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b extend forward in a side-by-side manner, and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. The lower full tank delivery passage 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal delivery passage 610a. The lower ball removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the longitudinal direction.

  The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream end) of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. Opening is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an operating protrusion 613 a protruding forward. The actuating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 in a front view, and as the front end face approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction It is inclined to project forward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a is formed to abut on the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the wafer cover unit 150 in the door frame 3.

  In the lower full tank unit 610, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are opened upward at the rear upper end, are assembled into the upper full at the upper end of the lower unit. It is located immediately below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue passage unit 600. Thereby, the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the gaming ball B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is the lower full payout passage 610b. , And the game balls B discharged downward from the upper ball-opening passage 600e flow in the lower ball-opening passage 610c.

  Further, when the lower full-tank passage unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal delivery passage 610 a and the lower full delivery passage 610 b pass through the fal cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is opened immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receptacle 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610 c is opened to face the ball removal guiding portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, in the normal state (the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the actuating projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing of the fal cover unit 150 By being in contact with the portion 150f, the plate is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. Thus, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are opened, and are communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving hole 150b of the far cover unit 150. It is in the state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the actuating projection 613 a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the fall cover unit 150. Is pivoted in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the gaming balls B in the lower normal payout path 610a and the lower full payout path 610b can not move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7 e. Flow of gaming ball B in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the gaming balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the main frame. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lowering end, and the ball pulling passage 580 b branched from the discharging passage 580 a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

  A predetermined number of ball tanks 552, which are open upwards, are detected from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example. A game ball B is supplied. The gaming balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 through the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 in a state of being aligned by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the gaming ball B can not move (flow downward) downstream of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of gaming balls B stagnate upstream of the payout blade 589 It becomes.

  Then, the gaming ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball breakage detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the gaming ball B is stored in the passage from at least the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the dispensing blade 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the dispensing motor 584, the gaming ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a It is released downstream of 589. Then, the gaming balls B discharged from the dispensing blade 589 (the ball accommodating portion 589 b) are sent to the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600 after being detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591.

  The gaming ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passing unit 600 is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. Then, the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600 c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610 a of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and the through ball passage 150 a of the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate-ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 in the case of FIG.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 becomes full with the game balls B, the game balls B can not be released forward from the upper ball feed opening 211a, so the payout device When the game ball B paid out from 580 comes to stay in the lower normal discharge passage 610a of the lower full tank passage unit 610 and the game ball B is further discharged, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the communicating upper full ball passage unit 600. Then, when the gaming ball B is further dispensed in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the gaming balls B, the upper normal ball storage passage 600b communicated on the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is stored. The gaming ball B starts to stagnate, and the gaming ball B begins to flow down to the upper full payout path 600d side adjacent to the upper normal payout path 600c.

  Then, the gaming ball B that has flowed down to the upper full discharge passage 600 d passes through the lower full discharge passage 610 b of the lower full ball passage unit 610 and fills the full ball receptacle 150 b in the far cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Received by Thereafter, the gaming balls B received in the full tank receptacle 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. As a result, when the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, when the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The gaming ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full with gaming balls B (( The player is informed by voice (for example, "Please pull a ball!" Etc.) that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is in a state where the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detected. Temporarily stop until it is

  When discharging the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 at the time of maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descent end Slide it to the position of the rising end. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a , And is pushed out of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

  At this time, in the region of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581 a and the rear lid side guide wall 582 a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592. Is less likely to break.

  The gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, the ball ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 pass through the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 Discharged to the island facilities side of

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the bottom rear. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The base unit 620 is a main unit frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a and the speaker unit 620a attached to the lower side than the game board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main unit frame base 501 in the main unit frame base unit 500. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear.

  The speaker unit 620a is directed forward in the vicinity of the front end of the speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 below the gaming board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base And a container-like speaker box 623 mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and has a circular speaker attachment portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view and extending in the vertical direction, and a front surface of the speaker attachment portion 621a A space front recess 621b recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side and a space protruding downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extending in the lateral direction and directed diagonally backward And an open connection portion 621c.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 . The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container opened forward, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes the most greatly, and is stepped backward in a step-like manner toward the right in front view. It is formed so that the protrusion of. As a result, a space on the rear side to the right of the center in the front view of the speaker box 623 can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620 b, the power supply unit 620 c, and the like can be disposed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621 c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has the space front concave portion 621b which bulges forward in the front view right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621. Therefore, the enclosure 624 protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 goes to the right The space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is secured sufficiently wide even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount.

  In the speaker unit 620 a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylindrical portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48. And the inner space 40a of the outer plate 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a large space enclosure 624 can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front plate member 42 and the rear plate member 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622 The sound that has been output can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space (a part of the enclosure 624) behind the main body frame speaker 622 is extended to the right in front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made with the outer frame lower assembly 40 through the connection tube portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound outputted from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. The sound can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted low frequency band can be resonated and amplified by passing the two port members 47 and can be emitted forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-reversed state, and therefore, it is outputted from the front of the main frame speaker 622 to be a dish unit The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the aperture of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which heavy bass sounds.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass. Thus, a sound emitted from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211 b of the dish unit 200 and a sound emitted from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 Allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through cylinder 623a which extends in a cylindrical shape and communicates with the through hole 621d is formed. In the assembled state of the speaker unit 620 a, the through hole 621 d and the through cylinder 623 a communicate with each other, and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620 b of the board unit 620 is attached to the front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620 c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full-tank passage unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 guiding rightward and a discharge ball receiving portion receiving the gaming ball B which is opened upward on the right side in a front view on the downstream side of the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and which is discharged downward from the game board 5 628, and a ball outlet 629 for discharging the gaming ball B which has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the discharging ball receiver 628 downward.

  The upstream end of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 is opened leftward in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and the downstream end is opened on the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guiding portion 627 faces the lower end of the lower full ball passage unit 610 so that the opening at the upstream end matches the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610 The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends in the left and right direction. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 at the left end in a front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628, Since the sheet is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, the space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction can be easily secured widely in front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be enlarged, and the player can hear sounds with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

  The power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 includes a power supply substrate 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply substrate cover attached to the rear base 626 to cover the rear side of the power supply substrate 630. And 631.

  The dispensing control unit 620d includes a box-like dispensing control substrate box 632 detachably mounted on the rear side of the power supply substrate cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control substrate 633 housed in the dispensing control substrate box 632 (see FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 according to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the gaming board 5 or the like. Then, the game balls B of the instructed number are to be paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The dispensing control board box 632 is formed to leave a trace of opening and closing. This makes it possible to detect an unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhances the deterrence against fraud.

  The interface unit 620 e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620 a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. And an interface substrate cover 636 attached to the substrate base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to the rearmost portion of the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 on the rear surface of the speaker box 623. The interface board 635 is connected to an end of one (the body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface substrate 635 is connected to a power supply substrate 630, a payout control substrate 633, a main control substrate, a peripheral control substrate, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface substrate cover 636 extends to the right in a front view more than the substrate base 634 (interface substrate 635) so as to cover a part of the dispensing control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion slot 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end of the rear extension of the rear extension 501 j of the main body frame base 501 on the right side in a front view, and the left side is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601 a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side in a front view right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface is the back plate upper portion 551 d It is formed to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating vertically and longitudinally. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 4 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 projecting forward from the unit base 651. A door frame wedge 652, a plurality of outer frame wedges 653 projecting backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and forward projecting from the lower end of the front end of the unit base 651 And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the locking unit 650 biases the door frame collar 652 downward and the outer frame collar 653 upward as compared to the lock spring 655 and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. And an outer frame unlocking lever 656 for moving the outer frame collar 653 downward by protruding forward from the upper position and sliding it downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) of door frame ridges 652, the transmission cylinder 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward of the front surface of the main frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, whereby the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The transmission member 133 is engaged, and rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame wedges 652 are locked to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) The frame collar 653 is locked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650, when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, inserts a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130, and when rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, a plurality of transmission cylinders 654 The door frame wedge 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame collars 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In the state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame wedges 653 move downward, and the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip end sides of the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the main frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing the upper portion of the main body frame in a rear perspective view. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state in which a tank rail and the like are assembled in a ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory view showing a region where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame are circulated. FIG. 104 is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory view showing the flow of the gaming ball to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 is insertable into the outer frame 2 by the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, and the rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped attached along the front view upper side and the left side on the rear side of the main frame base 501 A dispensing base 551 and a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened upward in a box shape (container form) extending to the left and right, attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward The tank rail 553 extending to the left in the form of a groove, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554 A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the rail 553; a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; A ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the lens 553 and a payout device 580 mounted on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 and for dispensing the gaming ball B to the player And.

  The ball tank 552 is formed in a rectangular shape whose plan view shape extends in the left and right direction, and is inclined from the front side and the rear side of the bottom wall 552a which is inclined so that the left side is low in front view. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container whose upper side is open. It is done. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552 f is about 3⁄4 the length of the front wall 552 b in the left-right direction from the end side of the left wall 552 d to the end of the opposite side (right wall 552 e side) in the front wall 552 b. It is formed over the ridge.

  The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 at the right end side (upstream side) in front view, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552 . The tank rail 553 extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom portion, and has a bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined to be lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view It has a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction and moves parallel to the axis extending from the right end to the left end so as to move backward toward the end . In the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a portion extending parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right, extending to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail at the upper end of this portion With the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 attached, the upper side is closed. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the gaming ball B circulates becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the gaming ball B at the downstream end Is formed at a height allowing only one flow (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the plurality of gaming balls B are mainly arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction A bulging portion 553b which is bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a There is. The plurality of gaming balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned by the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes to the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower as it goes from the upper end side to the main guiding portion 553a below. Because of this, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of gaming balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. In the bulging portion 553b, the center of the curved curvature is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b is slightly Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed such that the curvature thereof is larger on the downstream side than on the upstream side. Because of this, in the gaming ball B that circulates the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts is in accordance with the position of the bulging portion 553b that contacts. It will change in various directions, and can suppress generation | occurrence | production of a ball | bowl on the inside of the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a constant extending shape, a reaction force always acts on the gaming ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction. Because it becomes difficult to disperse the reaction force, it is difficult for the game ball B to escape by always pressing the internal game ball B in a fixed direction, and it becomes easy to generate a ball clog (ball seam). On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b becomes different depending on the position of the game ball B, so the inside is circulated By dispersing the pressed directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pressed game balls B can be easily escaped, and it is possible to make it difficult to generate a ball clog (ball game).

  The tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured to be able to visually recognize the inside from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball seam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be viewed from the outside, so a ball clogged location can be identified quickly. can do. Therefore, since clogging in the tank rail 553 can be eliminated quickly, interruption of the game due to the occurrence of clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible for the player to enjoy the game by interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, it is possible to visually recognize the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 through the tank rail 553 from behind. When a movable malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit etc., with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, the status of the drive motor, transmission mechanism such as gear or belt can be checked, as above The effects and effects of

  The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left and right direction is outside the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return to the ball tank 552 the gaming ball B which extends to the left (left) and overflows from the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 which is open at the upper side And the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is low, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 is A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 out of the left and right direction outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outside diameter of the game ball B Is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the side opposite to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j lower than the portion where the tank rail 553 is open at the upper side of the tank rail 553 and the discharge portion 551j. Covers the upper side of an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a which can be connected with electric wiring from the rear, and a plurality of the wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflowing surface portion 501m is a flat plate from the upper side of the rear surface of the base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape with a front view shape extending vertically to the rear from a position low by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B It is extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about 1/2 the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball B. In this overflow surface portion 501m, in a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between it and the outer frame upper member 30. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m; The upper end of the left step 501n and the right step 501o is higher than the left step 501n and the right step 501o in the left and right direction, and the upper end extends in the front and back direction in a band plate shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals smaller than the diameter. The left step portion 501 n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501 n is inclined with respect to the horizontal surface so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal surface so that the rear end left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. A gap between the two is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the left step coincides with the left end of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step 501o coincides with the right wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

  The bypass passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left wall 552d, and the right wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left from the outside, and is a passage surface 552h inclined such that the front end has the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lower. And a ridge portion extending upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552 d in the passage surface 552 h to the same height as the left side wall 552 d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the left end side (the collar 552i side) of the rear end side It extends diagonally to move forward as it goes from the to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left and right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left and right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the gaming ball B guided to the rear by the bypass passage 552 g changes from the rear end, which is oblique, so that the flow direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the bypass passage 552 g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553. The game ball B from can be received. In addition, since game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction (perpendicular direction) substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the tank rail by the game balls B from the bypass passage 552 g It is possible to make it difficult to cause ball clogging in 553.

  The detour passage 552 g extends obliquely with respect to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves rearward as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 is reached, so the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 side. At the time of discharge, the obliquely extending rear end allows the gaming ball B to be discharged to the upstream side which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed, and the width It is possible to suppress the generation of the ball seam in the tank rail 553 by releasing it to the wide area of

  Further, in the tank rail 553, a portion for guiding the gaming ball B by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the rear side 552c in a front view. In this part, the gaming ball B which has descended from the inside of the ball tank 552 below the guide surface 552 j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552 k) is distributed. Because of this, the height of the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553 in the portion behind the detour passage 552 g in the tank rail 553 Never exceed height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant) where game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. Thus, the game balls B induced to the rear side can be reliably received by the tank rails 553, and the game balls B will not spill backward from the tank rails 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate extending in the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d so as to be lower from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552 j of The guide surface portion 552 j extends from the front wall 552 b to the rear wall 552 c in the front-rear direction. Further, the guide surface portion 552 j has a right end side from the left end of the front wall 552 b to about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552 b in the left and right direction in front view After being obliquely extended to about 1/9 of the total length from the front wall 552b to about one half of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in parallel to the rear wall 552c, extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction.

  The ball tank 552 is a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface 552j formed in the above shape in plan view, the end on the front wall 552b side of the right end and the end on the rear wall 552c The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed to penetrate vertically. The ball tank 552 is a flat flange extending in the lateral direction outward and in the vertical direction on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and on the front end side of the flange portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 551l. The ball tank 552 has the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l have the height of the left end wall 552d or the upper end edge of the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501 Of the left step portion 501 n and the right step portion 501 o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552 k of the ball tank 552. Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side are positioned behind the ball tank 552 )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge unit 551 j is formed on the top surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551 j is in the ball tank 552 so as to be lowered stepwise backward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552 a of the ball tank 552 when assembled in the main frame 4 A position where the top of the tank rail 553 is higher leftward along the tank rail 553 than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction) It extends to the near side and then extends backward.

  The external terminal board 558 is attached to the rear surface with the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a aligned in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal which can hold the tip of the electric wiring by opening the holding portion by the operation of the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in an assembled state in the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the top surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, in the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 103, the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower at the rear end side. The left step 501 n is inclined so that the rear right corner is lower, and the right step 501 o is lower so that the rear left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end side is lower in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552 j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552 a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of gaming balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, the overflowing portion 552 f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper end edges is exceeded It can be made to flow out to the outside (forward) of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501m and made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the forward overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress that the game balls B strongly push each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called, ball seam) due to the engagement between the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back pressure from acting strongly on the game ball B in the ball tank 552 by the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m, and clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 Can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m may spill out on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a problem that the game ball B spilled to the outside of the main body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 can not be opened or closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, since the height of the upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is made higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thus, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m is the left side of one side of the ball tank 552 By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the return from the bypass passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the gaming ball B on the bypass passage 552g side presses the gaming ball B in the ball tank 552 to hold the ball It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the gaming ball B rolls on the bypass passage 552g) Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent the inflow of gaming balls B from the side (ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g, the flow of the gaming balls B in the bypass passage 552g is behind the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side The flow in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side can be made, and the pressure of the gaming ball B guided from the bypass passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be made in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the gaming balls B become different, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming balls B from pushing each other and biting each other, and the clogging of the gaming balls B is generated. It can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the gaming balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned since they are lined up, the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided at a portion of the tank rail 553 which is open at the upper side, the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a Since the change is made to coincide with each other, the plurality of gaming balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. Further, the upper part of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the channel through which the gaming ball B circulates becomes lower toward the downstream end, so the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) The number of steps in the height direction is reduced by circulating the plurality of gaming balls B stacked in multiple steps in the height direction in the lower direction through the portion of the tank rail 553 which is closed on the upper side, thereby reducing the number of steps in the height direction Can be aligned to Therefore, the plurality of gaming balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in one row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of gaming balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulged portion 553b Thus, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more gaming balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected on the opposite side to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal board 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or vigorously supplies in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a etc. There is no occurrence of a short circuit or an electrical wiring disconnection due to the contact of the game ball B.

  The game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552 since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, it is difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, and it is difficult to drop from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such problems.

  Further, the gaming ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guiding surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the guiding surface portion 552j. As a result, the game ball B on the guide surface 552 j can be prevented from pressing in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, due to their inclination, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, and a problem occurs because the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B circulates from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B is configured to pass below the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface 552 j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant) where the gaming ball B can be stacked upward can be secured. The gaming ball B induced by the bypass passage 552 g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are disposed in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 closed on the upper side, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B can be prevented from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 to cause a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The entire configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 to FIG. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which center pieces and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind . FIG. 111 is a schematic explanatory view of routing of wires from the function display unit in the main control board. FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the center product and the like are transparent. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 107, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. FIG. 117 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state where the front unit is cut in parallel to the face of the gaming panel to show the inside of the gaming area where the gaming balls are distributed and the obstacle nail.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. General winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the gaming balls B in the game area 5a, first start opening 2002, normal winning A mouth 2003, a second start mouth 2004, a big winning hole 2005, and a prize winning hole 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B is in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, and the prize winning opening 2006 etc. In order to be accepted, the game is performed to entertain the operation of hitting the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape in a substantially square shape in a front view, and the back of the front component 1000 and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 117 etc.) in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a part of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is to be in the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and to the rear face of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is performed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 115 and FIG. 137 etc.) for controlling the content.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in a visible manner A peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the 1100, an effect display device 1600 disposed on the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a rear side of the gaming panel 1100 Panel relay board 1710 relaying the connection between main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510, front unit 2000 attached to the front of game panel 1100, and back unit 3000 attached to the back of game panel 1100 And are further provided.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Below the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, a panel relay board 1710 is attached. The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a prize winning opening sensor 2513. The first V winning port sensor 2514, the first missing port sensor 2515, the second V winning port sensor 3003, the third missing port sensor, the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid It is for relaying the connection with the prize winning hole solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, the second distribution solenoid 2545, the third distribution drive motor 2555, and the like.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (here three) general winning openings 2001 constantly open to accept the game ball B inserted into the gaming area 5a and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 as the gaming area. The first start port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in 5a, and the normal winning opening 2003 which is always open to accept the game ball B at still another position in the game area 5a. And the second start opening 2004 where the game ball B can be received according to the normal lottery result selected by the game ball B being received in the normal winning opening 2003, and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening The big winning opening 2005 which can receive the game ball B according to the first special drawing result or the second special drawing result drawn by drawing the game ball B to 2004, and the first starting port 2002 or the second In the prize winning opening 2006 and the prize winning opening 2006 that allow the acceptance of the gaming ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the gaming ball B to the slot 2004 A first V prize winning opening 2007 and a second V prize winning opening 2008 where an acceptance opportunity is given to the accepted gaming ball B, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting magnetism acting improperly in the gaming area 5a And.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start opening 2002 and a front surface of the start opening unit 2100 A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit mounted slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 in a front view Attacker 2300 attached to the right in front view of start opening unit 2100 which becomes the front view lower right corner in game area 5a and having normal winning opening 2003, second start opening 2004, and large winning opening 2005 Above the unit 2400, the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, the front view is substantially in the center of the game area 5a. And the upper attached to and character object winning opening to close 2006 includes a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 frame-shaped center won game 2500 has the.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B received at the normal winning opening 2003, and a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball B received at the second starting opening 2004. A large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B accepted by the large winning opening 2005 is provided. The center character 2500 detects the game ball B received in the character prize hole 2006, and the first V prize hole detects the game ball B accepted in the first V prize hole 2007. A sensor 2514 and a first lost opening sensor 2515 for detecting the game ball B received by the first lost opening 2535 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall and the back surface of the back box 3010 And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. In addition, back unit 3000, general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting game ball B received in general winning opening 2001 provided in side unit 2200 of front unit 2000, and starting opening unit 2100 A first start opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in one start opening 2002, and a second V winning opening sensor 3003 for detecting the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 of the center role 2500. And a third loss port sensor for detecting the game ball B received by the third loss port 2556 of the center character 2500 (see FIG. 137).

  Also, the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, and the prize winning opening 2006. Out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting game balls B (game balls B for which a benefit is not given) not accepted, a light guide plate effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and a light guide effect unit 3100 And a rear effect unit 3200 mounted in the rear box 3010 at the rear of the rear cover.

  In the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, and the second V of the third distribution device 2550 in the center character 2500. Back ball discharge unit 3120 which receives the received game ball B and discharges it downward to the winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2556, the first loss opening 2535 in the center character 2500, and the first V winning opening 2007 A back right ball discharge unit 3130 for receiving the game ball B received by the CPU and discharging it downward, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) for detecting magnetism acting improperly on the warp entrance 2501 in the center product 2500; Is equipped.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back.

  The front component 1000 is formed to be entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and abuts against the game ball B rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction in the frame. The gaming ball B induced to the rear by the out guiding part 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008 and the out ball detecting unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and an inner portion of the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, a lower portion of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear projection 172 of the door frame 3 protruding to the rear of the security cover 170 is It will be in the inserted state. Thus, the space between the crime prevention cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the crime prevention cover 170 and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the crime prevention recess 1009. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 which is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in a front view. The notch portion 1010 corresponds to the notch portion 1103 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion are penetrated to lower the lower full ball passage unit 610. The front end openings of the normal delivery passage 610a and the lower full delivery passage 610b are adapted to face forward.

  Furthermore, the front component member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

  In addition, the front component member 1000 is formed substantially transparent in its entirety, and the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front.

5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 118 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 are attached. On the front of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 117 and the like).

  The game panel 1100 is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1100 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1101 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, a plurality of opening portions 1102 are formed in the game panel 1100 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the gaming panel 1100 is provided with a notch 1103 which is cut upward from the lower end in the lower left corner in a front view. This notch portion 1103 is formed to coincide with the notch portion 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1103 penetrates the notch portion and the notch portion and penetrates the lower portion. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full tank passage unit 610 are arranged to face forward. Although detailed illustration is omitted, on the front of the game panel 1100, a decorative sheet having a pattern or decoration according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 which is notched rearward from the front end at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The substrate holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state to the game board 5 and A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  With the substrate holder 1200 assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion 1201 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000, and the game ball discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 B, all can be received, and can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628.

5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 113 to FIG. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 137) for controlling game contents and payout of the game ball B, and a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 137) capable of setting game performance. A main control board box 1320 accommodating the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and attached to the board holder 1200 is provided.

  The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. By forming the cover body and the base body so as to be transparent by polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control substrate 1310 and the setting change substrate 1311 (whether or not illegal modification is performed, Alternatively, it can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 whether or not the illegitimate IC is mounted. In addition, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, the main control board box 1320 In order to open the control substrate box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control substrate box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to discover the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. Also, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a special winning opening sensor 2403, a prize winning opening sensor 2513, 1st V winning opening sensor 2514, 1st missing opening sensor 2515, 2nd V winning opening sensor 3003, 3rd missing opening sensor, out left sensor 3032, out right sensor 3033, start opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid Connection with 2414, prize winning hole solenoid 2512, first distribution solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution drive motor 2555, magnetic sensor 2010, out port left sensor 3032, out port right sensor 3033, etc. It is done.

  The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting values, a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching the setting values, And a setting change permission lamp 1311 c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connecting between boards) (a connector between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is a harness Via an electrical connection). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311 a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311 b are electrically connected to the main control substrate 1310. In the setting change board 1311, the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the right side and the left side is substantially the same as the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the right side and the left side of the main control substrate 1310, and the distance dimension in the horizontal direction is the left and right of the main control substrate 1310. The center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and the center line passing through the middle points of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction It agrees.

  The connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 is arranged on the center line along the right side of the setting change substrate 1311 at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction, and the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310 is mainly Along the left side of the control board 1310, a position that is the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is disposed on the center line. Setting key switch 1311 a having a setting key cylinder inserted with a setting key below the center line of the setting change board 1311 is disposed, and setting having a pressing operation unit above the center line of the setting change board 1311 A setting change permission lamp capable of emitting a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and at the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switching button 1311b) 1311 c is arranged. A setting indicator 1310 g consisting of a 7-segment LED display unit with a decimal point (so-called dot) is disposed above the center line of the main control board 1310 and in the vicinity of the connector MSCN. A base monitor 1310 h is arranged, which is arranged in series of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dotted) from the center toward the right side from the center to the right, and the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310 is The RAM clear switch 1310 f having a pressing operation portion is disposed on the

  In the present embodiment, a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed on the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape extends in the vertical direction) The setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In the present embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot, the other equipment is provided in a row opposite to the island facility of the game hall. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and do not damage.

  The setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation, and the signal of the setting key ON is set The change substrate 1311 is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control substrate 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by pressing the setting key switch 1311a by turning the setting key cylinder counterclockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees toward the counterclockwise direction and the second key is turned on. Is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. In addition, the setting key cylinder is set to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned OFF in the counterclockwise direction, and the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). Can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. In the present embodiment, two functions having a completely different function of setting key ON and a function of determination key ON can be realized by only the single setting key switch 1311 a depending on the direction in which the setting key is turned. The operation of setting the setting key ON and the operation of setting the determination key ON can be collectively performed only by the single setting key switch 1311 a.

  The front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are respectively through the openings formed in the cover of the corresponding main control board box 1320 Although it is exposed, the "gap" formed on the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding opening portions A wire intrusion preventing portion is formed on the cover body with respect to these openings so that the setting change substrate 1311 and the main control substrate 1310 can not be modified by intrusion of a wire or the like from there. . Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and can not be touched at all, the cover body is molded to be transparent as described above. The set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of spheres displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover body.

  In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, a wiring pattern to which a signal of setting key ON of setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern to which a signal of determination key ON of setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and setting key switch Keep the setting change board 1311 away from each other (spaced apart) as a lead-out of the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted. While being formed, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310) is also formed separately, and various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are also formed in the main control substrate 1310 Are transmitted through the wiring pattern (that is, the setting key switch 1311a Wiring pattern to which the signal of setting key ON is transmitted, wiring pattern to which the signal of determination key ON of setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and wiring pattern to which the signal of OFF setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and setting switching button 1311b The wiring with the wiring pattern through which the signal is transmitted is formed so as not to approach each other (separately from each other), and the wiring with the wiring pattern through which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is transmitted is also mutually Are formed so as not to be close to each other (spaced apart from each other).

  The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting indicator 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of performing the setting change of the setting value will be briefly described, and the case of performing the confirmation display of the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used to confirm the current setting value set in addition to changing the setting value, only a limited person, including the game hall manager, has possession. Allowed, limited to 2-3 people.

  When changing the setting of the set value, the main frame of the outer frame 2 is restored at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (temporary power failure occurs). 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on by the first ON. It is necessary to establish a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. That is, a person who actually changes the setting of the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered off), and then the outer frame 2 is selected. Perform work to open the main body frame 4 and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, turn by 60 degrees clockwise and set by performing the first ON operation The key switch 1311a is turned on as the setting key to power on the pachinko machine 1. It should be noted that, as the “predetermined setting value change permission condition” described above, it may be set that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is further operated and the operation signal is input. That is, at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1 at power on or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (instant power failure occurs instantaneously), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation as the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise toward the setting key, and The setting change of the setting value may be executable when the “predetermined setting value change permission condition” that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated is satisfied.

  The person who changes the setting of the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the main frame 4 Perform opening work, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees, and perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630 a of FIG. 7 is operated to turn on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a signal of setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on) The set value is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the light-off state to the light-on state.

  When a setting change of the setting value is performed, the detection signal from the setting change button 1311 b of the setting change board 1311 is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. Input to The main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 every time the person who performs setting change of the setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button 1311b. The value is increased by 1 from the value to the set value 6 which is the maximum value, and the control returns to the set value 1 which is the initial value, is increased again by 1 and performs control to display the set value on the setting indicator 1310g.

  The person who changes the setting of the setting value rotates the setting key cylinder counterclockwise 120 degrees when deciding the setting value (that is, the setting key which turns on the setting key switch 1311a) Turn from the cylinder's rotational position back to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotational position of the cylinder by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

  The setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the initial position (that is, the setting key) which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where setting key switch 1311a is turned on. When the switch 1311a is returned to the setting key cylinder turning position OFF, the ON signal of the determination key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, in this case After the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value is determined simply by turning off the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder as it is Will be able to do things and improve

  Those who perform setting change of setting value return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) The setting key switch 1311 a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the state of displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g to the state of nondisplaying, and switches the state of the setting change permission lamp 1311c to the state of turning off.

  A person who changes the setting of the setting removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 Complete.

  When the confirmation display of the currently set setting value is performed, the outer frame 2 is restored after the power is restored when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs momentary power failure). On the other hand, the main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to turn on the first ON It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by being operated. That is, a person who performs confirmation display of the set value that is currently set is first confirmed after the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power has recovered due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Do the work of opening the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise 60 degrees by the first operation. By turning on the setting key, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

  The person performing confirmation display of the currently set setting value first confirms the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), and then the outer frame 2 Then, open the main body frame 4 and insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on) The set value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1311 c is turned off is maintained, and even if a person performing confirmation display of the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311 b, the pressing operation is performed. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed either.

  When the confirmation display of the set value currently set is completed, when the confirmation of the set value currently set is completed, the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on (that is, In order to return the setting key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder) which is turned off, the turning operation is performed 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1310 a switches from the state where the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g to the state where the setting value is not displayed.

  The person performing confirmation display of the currently set setting value removes the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and performs an operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, Complete the task of confirming the set value displayed.

  In addition, as described above, the preset set value change permission condition set in advance is the preset set value change permission condition set in advance when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (temporary power outage occurs) At the time of power recovery at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder faces clockwise. While it is necessary for the setting key to be turned on by the first turning on by being turned by 60 degrees, the preset setting display permission condition is a pachinko machine as described above. The main unit frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 after power is restored or the power is restored after power is restored after the power is turned on in 1 or after a power failure (instant power interruption occurs momentarily), and the setting key switch 1311a is set Key cylinder Set jack key is inserted, it is necessary to set the key cylinder is set key ON operation by the first ON operation is 60 degrees rotation operation toward the clockwise direction. As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition indicate that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is inserted in the setting key cylinder and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees and the setting key is turned ON by the first ON operation, and it is predetermined While "set at power recovery" is a requirement of the set value change permission condition, the preset set value display permission condition is different in that "after power recovery" is set as a requirement.

  Here, to briefly explain the set value, the “set value” is usually from the time of definite variation, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not and the probability for lottery whether it is a small hit or not. It is possible to change the probability for making a lottery determination, the distribution rate to an area that is advantageous to the player, etc. when shifting to time, which is advantageous for the player (that is, the player gains) The probability (the degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls B that can be played is set in advance. In the present embodiment, as the set values, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance, and from set value 1 to set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) to be advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a big hit determination table defining the ratio of a big hit determination value indicating that a big hit has been won, a big hit symbol A big hit symbol determination table in which the percentage of the determination value of the determination is defined, a small hit determination table in which the percentage of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won is defined, the percentage of the determination value of the small hit symbol determination is defined Small hit symbol decision table, a normal transition decision table etc. where the ratio of the judgment value of transition decision from definite variation to normal time is specified) or used at various distribution rates associated with setting value Select various tables (for example, a distribution table that specifies the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid, etc.) Or. The various determination values are allocated to the various tables used in the various lottery determinations associated with the set values at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least a part of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least a part of the values differ from each other In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. In addition, although six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6 were used as the setting values described above, they may be in a range smaller than this, or in many ranges. It may be one. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

  As described above, the setting display 1310 g displays the set value, and the main control MPU 1310 a checks the contents of the RAM built in itself when the power returns, and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off, the contents stored in the RAM built in itself are abnormal (or trusted) And an error display telling that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the gaming area 5a formed in the gaming board 5 among the gaming balls B fired in the gaming area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B is displayed. Of the game balls B fired in the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by any one of the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033, and this detection signal Are input to the main control MPU 1310 a via the panel relay substrate 1710.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the gaming ball B collected by the out port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a is set from the initial position, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. Rotate only within the range up to the rotation position of the key-on setting key cylinder It may be used as the setting key switch 1311a 'that can be. In this case, the counterclockwise direction is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a 'is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotating position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a 'can be turned on by pressing the setting key switch 1311a' by turning it 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it off. The signal of the decision key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (The mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be described as “modification (1) of determination key”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control substrate 1310, but instead, the setting change substrate 1311 has a pressing operation unit An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and corresponds to the pressing operation unit of the decision key button The wire intrusion preventing portion is provided on the cover with respect to the opening so that the setting change substrate 1311 and the main control substrate 1310 can not be modified by intrusion of a wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the opening. It becomes a structure to be molded. When the pressing operation unit of the determination key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, while the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the decision key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be in the vicinity of the setting key switch 1311 a or in the vicinity of the setting switching button 1311 b. On the cover of the main control board box 1320, a seal is printed with the name of each button printed on the position corresponding to each of the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this seal). Also, in order not to confuse the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b, a button with a cover (for pressing the pressing operation section) which covers any one pressing operation section of the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b. The cover may need to be opened), or the color of the pressing unit may be different, or the shape of the outer shape of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311 b or pressing operation The shape of the part may be different, or another type of switch not having the pressing operation part may be adopted as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the determination key button include, for example, various types such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switch can be mentioned. When the setting change board 1311 is provided with the determination key button and the setting switching button 1311b, the wiring pattern to the determination key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized alteration. And the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310) is also separated. In the main control board 1310 as well, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the determination key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b is transmitted do not approach each other ( They are formed apart from one another. Further, when the determination key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, only the range from the initial position of the setting key switch 1311 a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on may be turned. The setting key switch 1311a 'may be used (a mode of the determination key button (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "modification example (2) of the determination key").

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the palm of the handle 182 in the handle unit 180, the palm or Detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether or not the finger is touched, and play A detection signal from a single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball B by the intention of the player is branched at the payout control substrate 633 and main control via the payout control substrate 633 It may be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the substrate 1310, and the presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 182 When it is not touched, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. While it can be determined that there is, when it is not forcibly stopped the launch of the game ball B it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (a mode of the handle touch sensor (even including a mode of a one-shot button operation sensor May be described as “modification of decision key (3)”.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, a firing control unit of the payout control board 633 described later A discharge reference pulse is branched off at the discharge control board 633 from the discharge timing control circuit provided in 633 b and discharged. Through the control board 633, is input to the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse which allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the emission reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, but determines that the determination key is not ON when the emission reference pulse is not input. (The aspect of the emission reference pulse may be described as “modification of decision key (4)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310, but the action of the player sitting on the other side of the pachinko machine 1 is detected A distance measurement sensor that can do the same is provided on the game board 5, and the detection signal from this distance measurement sensor is peripherally controlled via the relay board When the signal is input to the board 1510, the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is branched at the relay substrate, input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310 via the relay substrate, and determined based on the detection signal The presence or absence of the key ON may be determined. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted from the light emitting portion passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3, and is reflected to the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, whereby the action of the player can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input through the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of the operation based on the detection signal, and when it is determined that the operation is present, the determination key is ON. While it can be determined that there is an operation, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (an aspect of the distance measurement sensor may be described as "modification 5 of determination key") .

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position, that is, the initial position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the key is turned on The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by the setting key cylinder being turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned OFF so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder). At the same time, the setting key cylinder is set to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF, and a signal of this OFF is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Was set, but the setting key O , Determination key ON, and the information to be conveyed to OFF, as serial information, a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting to the outside, may be provided to set the key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change substrate 1311 but may be provided on the main control substrate 1310 instead, or may be provided on the payout control substrate 633. . When serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects the setting key ON, the determination key ON, and the like from received serial information. It is possible to determine which one is to be transmitted among OFF (the mode of the setting key switch 1311 a having a serial circuit may be described as “modification of determination key (6)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position, that is, the initial position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the key is turned on The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by the setting key cylinder being turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned OFF so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder). At the same time, the setting key cylinder is set to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF, and a signal of this OFF is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Was set, but the setting key O , Determination key ON, and the information to be conveyed to OFF, as a pulse signal, a pulse output circuit which can output to the outside, may be provided to set the key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. Although the setting key switch 1311 a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change substrate 1311, it may be provided on the main control substrate 1310 instead, or may be provided on the payout control substrate 633. . For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms in the case of information for transmitting the setting key ON, and the pulse width is set in 3 ms in the information for transmitting the determination key ON. And the pulse width is set to 5 ms in the case of information to convey OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a starts the setting key ON, the determination key ON, etc. from the input pulse signal. It is possible to determine which of the two information and the off state information is to be transmitted (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "modification (7) of determination key").

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. The signal of the setting key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The initial position, that is, the initial position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the key is turned on The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by the setting key cylinder being turned 60 degrees counterclockwise and turned OFF so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder). At the same time, the setting key cylinder is set to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF, and a signal of this OFF is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Was set, but the setting key O Intermediate voltage (for example, from zero V to 5 V) between substrates ranging from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control substrate 1310. Among them, a potential of 2 V to 3 V) is used, a comparator circuit is provided in the main control substrate 1310, and the comparison result by the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310 a. The ON / OFF of the signal of ON / OFF and the determination key ON, and the ON / OFF of the signal of OFF may be determined. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311 a (an aspect of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential may be described as “modification (8) of determination key”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the decision key button, and corresponds to the pressing operation unit of the decision key button And a structure in which the wire intrusion preventing portion is molded to the cover body with respect to the opening so that the dispensing control substrate 633 can not be modified by intrusion of a wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the determination key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, while the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover of the dispensing control board 633, a sticker with the name of each button printed is attached at a position corresponding to each of the decision key button and the error clearing switch so that the decision key button and the error clearing switch are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this seal). Also, in order not to confuse the decision key button with the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers any one of the press operation portion of the decision key button and the error release switch (a cover for pressing the pressing operation portion) It is necessary to adopt the following :), or the color of the pressing part may be different, or the shape of the outer shape of the determination key button and the error release switch or the shape of the pressing part However, other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit may be adopted as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the determination key button include, for example, various types such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switch can be mentioned. In addition, when the determination control button 633 and the error release switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the payout is performed as a wiring of the wiring pattern to the determination key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch. The control boards 633 are formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and connections to the terminals of the connector of the payout control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the determination key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted do not approach each other (are separated from each other) ) Is formed. When the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, only the range from the initial position of the setting key switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on can be turned. The setting key switch 1311a 'may be used (a mode of the determination key button (a mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "modification example (9) of the determination key").

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and is delivered via the payout control board 633. Is input to the main control MPU1310a control board 1310 may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of this signal. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, and after power recovery, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed (when the various control boards are turned on) When the time processing is completed and interrupt processing is performed) and no error occurs as the state of the pachinko machine 1, there is no operation at all on the pressing operation portion of the error release switch. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, while based on the signal from the error release switch When the pressing operation unit of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key (an aspect of the error release switch may be described as “modification of decision key (10)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation unit The logic of the signal from the error release switch is controlled by the payout control unit 633, which will be described later. It monitors in the port input process of time process and creates a command, sends the command created in the command transmission process of the delivery control part power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and receives this command. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, and after power recovery, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completed (when the various control boards are turned on) When the time processing is completed and interrupt processing is performed) and no error occurs as the state of the pachinko machine 1, there is no operation at all on the pressing operation portion of the error release switch. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the payout control MPU is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and conveys that effect. When the command is received, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives a command notifying that effect. When it is determined that the decision key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the decision key (an error release switch mode 2 may be described as “variation example of decision key (11)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on. Turn it back 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to return 1311a to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder) and turn it off 60 seconds further in the counterclockwise direction)) 2nd ON operation In this case, the setting key switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is provided on the payout control substrate 633 to An operation signal from the M clear switch 1310 f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control substrate 633, branched at the payout control substrate 633, and input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 633, The main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on the operation signal input. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310 f operates the pressing operation unit at the time of power recovery (precisely, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f ), When performing setting change capable of changing and determining the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310 a performs setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310 a is configured in a predetermined area of RAM (RAM Clear all the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is performed while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed to always clear the predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a itself, the RAM clear switch 1310 f The main control MPU 1310a uses the decision key ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the basis of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the payout control board 633, it is determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is not pressed. At That. Thus, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON.

  The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the payout control substrate 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover of the payout control substrate box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310 f, and the pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310 f The wire entry preventing portion covers the opening so that the dispensing control board 633 can not be modified by intrusion of a wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the portion and the corresponding opening. The structure is molded into

  The position where the RAM clear switch 1310 f is disposed on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover of the dispensing control board 633, there is a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to each of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error clearing switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error clearing switch are not confused. It is stuck (in place of this seal, the name of each button may be molded on the cover). Also, in order to prevent confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310 f and the error release switch, a button with a cover (for pressing the press operation unit) is used to cover either one of the RAM clear switch 1310 f and the error release switch. The cover may need to be opened), or the color of the pressing portion may be different, or the shape of the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310 f and the error release switch or the pressing operation The shape of the part may be different, or another kind of switch not having the pressing operation part may be adopted as the RAM clear switch 1310 f. For example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotational operation portion, a rotary switch, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc., as the RAM clear switch 1310 f. Various switches can be mentioned. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310 f and the error release switch are provided on the payout control substrate 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310 f and the wiring pattern to the error release switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized alteration. Are formed so as not to be close to each other (detached from each other) in the payout control board 633, and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the payout control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also spaced apart In the main control board 1310 as well, the wiring pattern through which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the error release switch is transmitted do not approach each other Spaced apart). When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, turn only the range from the initial position of the setting key switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be used (a mode of the RAM clear switch (a mode of the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be included) may be described as “modification of decision key (12)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the initial position (that is, the setting key switch) is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on. Turn it back 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to return 1311a to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder) and turn it off 60 seconds further in the counterclockwise direction)) 2nd ON operation In this case, the setting key switch 1311a can be set as the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is provided on the payout control substrate 633 to The logic of the operation signal from the M clear switch 1310 f is monitored in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 to create a command, and the power is turned on The command created in the command transmission process of the process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that has received this command may determine the presence / absence of the decision key ON. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310 f operates the pressing operation unit at the time of power recovery (precisely, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f ), When performing setting change capable of changing and determining the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310 a performs setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310 a is configured in a predetermined area of RAM (RAM Clear all the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is performed while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed to always clear the predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a itself, the RAM clear switch 1310 f The main control MPU 1310a can be used as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a can be used as the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When it is determined that the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated, and the command to convey that effect is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the payout control substrate 633 Operation of It can be determined not determined key ON when receiving a command to communicate that fact to determine that RAM clear switch 1310f pressing element when is not being operated dispensing control MPU of based on No.. Thereby, the security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the determination key ON (a mode 2 of the RAM clear switch (a mode of the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be included)) “Modification of the determination key (13) It may be described as ").

  In the embodiment described above, the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to rotate the setting key cylinder To return from the position to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it off. The setting key switch 1311a can be made to be the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees toward (toward) the signal of the determination key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 The input was made to the control MPU 1310a, but instead, the out-port left sensor 3 32 and an out-port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 (via) and an out-port left sensor 3032 to which the main control MPU 1310 a is input, and an out-port The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signal from the right sensor 3033. As described above, the game balls B fired in the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is detected by any one of the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a is a case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch, and the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right Based on the detection signal from any one of the sensors 3033, it can be determined that the decision key is ON when the out port 1008 has recovered the game ball B, while the door frame 3 is against the main body frame 4. In the case of not being opened (that is, closed) and / or based on the detection signals of the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033, the out port 1008 has not collected the game ball B in any Sometimes it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on. The aspect of (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “modification of determination key (14)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to set the decision key ON.

  In the embodiment described above, the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to rotate the setting key cylinder To return from the position to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it off. The setting key switch 1311a can be made to be the determination key ON by performing the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees toward (toward) the signal of the determination key ON from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 The input was made to the control MPU 1310a, but instead, the out-port left sensor 3 32. The logic of the detection signal from the out-port right sensor 3033 is monitored in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 described later to create a command, and the payout control described later The command created in the command transmission process of the part power on process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 having received this command may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON. As described above, the game balls B fired in the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is detected by any one of the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a collects game ball B from out port 1008 based on detection signals from out port left sensor 3032 and out port right sensor 3033 in frame command reception processing in main control timer interrupt processing described later. When it is determined that the payout control MPU has made a decision and it is determined that the decision key is ON when it receives a command to notify that effect, the payout control MPU decides that the game ball B has not been collected by the out port 1008. When the command to notify that is received, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on. Mode 2 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311 a ′) may be described as “modification of decision key (15)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to set the decision key ON.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574 or when a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 Also, it is branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on these detection signals. The logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball breakage detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 may be a port input process of the payout control processing when the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 will be described later. The command is created by monitoring at the command control processing of the delivery control processing at power-on processing described later, sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command determines The presence or absence of the key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be configured to be able to rotate only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′) may be described as “modification of decision key (16)”.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is operated from the main body frame open switch. When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal of While it is possible to, it can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 is maintained. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be set to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311 a ′) may be described as “modification of decision key (17)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting of the set value needs to close the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in order to set the decision key to ON. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 again.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a operates from the door frame open switch. It is determined that the determination key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal of While it is Rukoto can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the door frame 3 is closed relative to the body frame 4 is maintained. In this case, the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on. The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311 a ′) may be described as “modification of decision key (17)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting of the set value needs to open the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in order to set the determination key ON. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In the embodiment described above, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned on (that is, the setting key cylinder turns off the setting key switch 1311a) To return to the rotation position of 60 60 ° in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then turn it counterclockwise in the counterclockwise direction by 60 °) to perform the second ON operation). Can be set as the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control substrate 1310 may be provided (a mode of the setting key switch may be a modification of the determination key ( 8) "and there is a case to be described).

  In the embodiment described above, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned on (that is, the setting key cylinder turns off the setting key switch 1311a) To return to the rotation position of 60 60 ° in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then turn it counterclockwise in the counterclockwise direction by 60 °) to perform the second ON operation). Can be set as the determination key ON, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change substrate 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a is used as the main control substrate A setting key with which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while being provided to the 1310 The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being turned from the rotation position of the ringer to the initial position and turned off, and a signal of this OFF is inputted to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the signal of OFF is input, and can determine that the determination key is not ON when the signal of OFF is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on (setting key switch 1311 a (setting key switch Mode 2 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311 a ′) may be described as “modification of decision key (19)”.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the main control board 1310 has a pressing operation unit An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the decision key button, and corresponds to the pressing operation unit of the decision key button And a structure in which the wire intrusion preventing portion is molded to the cover body with respect to the opening so that the main control board 1310 can not be modified by intrusion of a wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the opening. Become. When the pressing operation unit of the determination key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the decision key button, while the pressing operation unit of the decision key button is When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  The position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310 f. The cover of the main control board box 1320 is a sticker on which the names of the respective buttons are printed at positions corresponding to the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f so that the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover instead of this seal). Also, in order to prevent confusion between the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f (for pressing the press operation portion The cover may need to be opened), or the color of the pressing portion may be different, or the shape of the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f or the pressing operation The shape of the part may be different, or another type of switch not having the pressing operation part may be adopted as the determination key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as the determination key button include, for example, various types such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switch can be mentioned. When the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310 f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to the determination key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310 f are routed in order to prevent unauthorized alteration. The main control boards 1310 are formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other). When the determination key button is provided on the main control board 1310, only the range from the initial position of the setting key switch 1311a to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on can be turned. The setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be used (a mode 2 of the determination key button (a mode of the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be included) may be described as “modification of determination key (20)”).

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input The presence or absence of the enter key may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310 f. As described later, the RAM clear switch 1310 f operates the pressing operation unit at the time of power recovery (precisely, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f ), When performing setting change capable of changing and determining the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310 a performs setting change processing described later), the main control MPU 1310 a is configured in a predetermined area of RAM (RAM Clear all the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the power on of the pachinko machine 1 is performed while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed to always clear the predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310 a itself, the RAM clear switch 1310 f The main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is possible to determine that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f provided on the payout control substrate 633. Thus, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to turn only the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on from the initial position (RAM clear switch Mode 3 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311 a ′) may be described as “modification of decision key (21)”. The period during which the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed is limited to the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is of the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, when the RAM clear switch 1310 f also functions as an error release switch to be described later, the error clear switch is not necessary for the payout control board 633.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the ordinary winning opening provided on the game board 5 Normal winning a prize opening sensor 2401 of 2003, various sensors of various winning a prize opening (for example, 2nd starting opening sensor 2402, big winning a prize opening Main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the sensor 2403, the prize winning opening sensor 2513, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002), the out port left sensor 3032 of the out port 1008 and the out port right sensor 3033 Alternatively, the presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on from the initial position (various sensors etc. The aspect of (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be included) may be described as “modification of determination key (22)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting of the set value opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 to send the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 in order to set the decision key ON, It is necessary to send the game ball B to the winning opening and send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, Drive control of an electrical drive source such as a solenoid to control the operation of a movable body (object) When the original position or the operating position of the movable body (character) is determined based on a detection signal from a sensor (photo sensor, distance measuring sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a is based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. May determine the presence or absence of the decision key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on from the initial position The aspect of the object sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a ′) may be described as “modification of determination key (23)”. In this case, the person who performs the setting change of the setting value opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in order to set the decision key ON, and the optical sensor indicates the original position of the movable body (characters) It is necessary to move the movable body (object) so as to detect the movement position and the like.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a is detected The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor to be input is input is based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor The presence or absence of a determination key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a 'may be configured to rotate only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a ′) may be described as “modification of decision key (24)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to bring the magnet closer to the front of the game board 5 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to set the decision key ON.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or beaten. The vibration of the pachinko machine 1 is applied to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined in the game board 5. If the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent actions to be made to enter various winning openings and gate portions (gates) provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a is based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor. The presence or absence of the decision key may be determined based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor as well as the presence or absence of the fraudulent activity. In this case, the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on. The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311 a ′) may be described as “modification of decision key (25)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to shake or strike the pachinko machine 1 in order to set the decision key ON.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of this determination key ON can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to play a game The game ball B is operated by causing various sensors of various winning opening provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580 to malfunction. When a radio wave sensor for detecting an illegal act to be acquired correctly is provided in the game board 5 or the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of the illegal action based on a detection signal from the radio wave sensor and The presence or absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signal of. In this case, the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on. The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311 a ′) may be described as “modification of determination key (26)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting of the setting value needs to irradiate the radio wave to the pachinko machine 1 in order to set the decision key ON.

  In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder which turns off the setting key switch 1311a). As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning on the second ON operation by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise toward the counterclockwise direction and further turning 60 degrees counterclockwise). The signal of the decision key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is used. Detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 for detecting the pressing operation of the Detection signals from the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 for detecting the rotation direction of the operation unit 302 are input to the peripheral control board 1510, and are branched at the peripheral control board 1510 to be the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a may be input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence / absence of the determination key ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311 a ′ may be operated to rotate only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on from the initial position (rendering operation button The aspect of the unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a ′) may be described as “modification of determination key (27)”.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 configured of the cover body and the base body, but the setting change board 1311 is It may be accommodated in the body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of a crimped portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism, and is provided with two or more. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body by a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion using one sealing mechanism, and then, to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body can not be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is broken. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the determination key button are exposed through the opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each. Changing the setting change board 1311 by invading a wire or the like from the "gap" formed in the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and in the opening corresponding to the pressing operation part of the enter key button As it can not do, it becomes a structure where a wire intrusion prevention part is molded to a cover body to an opening. In addition, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above as the structure of the setting change board box, when the cover body is configured to be able to be opened or closed from the base body, with respect to the base body, A setting change substrate cover body opening / closing switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, a detection signal from the setting change substrate cover body opening / closing switch may be directly input to the main control substrate 1310, or (indirect) input to the main control substrate 1310 via the setting change substrate 1311. It may be configured to be Based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening / closing switch, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition described above (setting change board box The aspect of may be described as "modification of decision key (28)".

  In the embodiment described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change substrate 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310 are connected, and the setting of the setting key switch 1311a is performed to prevent unauthorized modification. The wiring pattern through which the signal of key ON is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of determination key ON of setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the signal of OFF setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, setting switching button 1311b Of the setting change board 1311 so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other) as a lead-out of the wiring pattern through which signals from the signal are transmitted, and the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (main control The connection of the substrate 1310 to the terminals of the connector MSCN is also formed separately Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern through which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the wiring pattern through which the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the determination key ON of the setting key switch 1311a The wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also not close to each other Among the wiring patterns through which the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal of the determination key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted. The setting change board 1311 for one of the wiring patterns The connector SMCN is connected to another connector provided on the main control substrate 1310 separately from the connector MSCN of the main control substrate 1310 via another connector provided on the setting change substrate 1311 separately from the connector SMCN (inter-board connection) Alternatively, another connector provided on the setting change substrate 1311 and another connector provided on the main control substrate 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (a wiring pattern routing aspect) May be described as “modification of decision key (29)”.

  In addition, among the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the determination key, an aspect appropriately selected and combined may be adopted (a form of the selection combination of the modification is referred to as “modification example of determination key (30) It may be described as ").

  Also, with the above-mentioned set value, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit or not, to make lottery determination when transitioning from definite variation time to normal time Probability of changing the distribution rate to the area which is advantageous to the player, etc. can be changed, which is advantageous for the player (that is, the number of balls of the game ball B that the player can acquire is increased Probability) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, as the set values, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance, and from set value 1 to set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) to be advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although there are a plurality of setting values ranging from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6, there is a probability (advantagement degree) that the player is advantageous to other pachinko machines. Some have a single preset value set. That is, as in the case of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability (advantagement degree) to be advantageous to the player exists in advance as a plurality of set values, which is advantageous to the player There is a probability (advantagement degree) of a gaming specification in which only a single set value exists in advance and the setting change is not required at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in design according to such a game specification and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed in design or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 Is dependent on the game specification, it has a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 having similar or different hardware configurations according to the game specification. Therefore, there is a demand for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 which can be commonly used without depending on the game specification, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

  For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value and there is no need to change the setting at all (probability degree) that the advantage (advantagement degree) to be advantageous to the player is required Because there is no need to use it as a device, it is necessary to cope with the design change by the software that assigns the following contents: set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 as follows. Can.

  For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area (an area excluding the specific area in the entire area of the RAM) of the RAM incorporated therein, a plurality of actual machine check operation patterns can be set (after the RAM is cleared) The start method of the pachinko machine 1 can be used as a set value). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a controls the operation of the movable body (characters) to be controlled, the lighting of the light emitter such as a lamp or LED, etc. Actual operation confirmation pattern 1 is assigned to specify operation of object, lighting of light emitter), and actual operation confirmation pattern 2 to specify "operation of movable body (character)" is assigned as setting value 2 The actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 for designating “lighting of the light emitter” is assigned as the value 3 and “detailed operation of the movable body (character), movement over the entire operation area, other as the setting value 4 An actual machine check operation pattern 4 for specifying an operation such as an interference check with a structure or another movable body (character), an operation sequence with another movable body (character), etc.) is assigned. Light emitter 1 port unit (main control MP A real machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned that specifies "lighting of the light emitter in a predetermined output port unit of 1310a (that is, every one output port)", and a real machine confirmation specifying "no operation" as the setting value 6 The operation pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM may be described as "modification (1) according to common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310 a repeatedly performs main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, and performs operation of a movable body (feature) and lighting of a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED, by repeatedly performing an actual device check operation after clearing the RAM. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 141) from the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control with the content (actual machine check operation pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The operation of the movable body (character) to be controlled by the substrate 1510 and the lighting of the light emitter can be performed. By changing the setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to have variations in the starting method of the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

  In addition, for example, it is possible to use as a set value which can set a plurality of times from the end of the fluctuation of the symbol to the demonstration (demonstration effect to be performed in the player waiting state). In this case, time setting pattern 1 specifying "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 specifying "15 seconds" as setting value 2 is allocated, and "20 seconds setting as setting value 3 Time setting pattern 3 for designating "is assigned, time setting pattern 4 for designating" 25 seconds "as setting value 4 is assigned, and time setting pattern 5 for designating" 30 seconds "as setting value 5 is assigned, The time setting pattern 6 for designating "35 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 6 (A mode of the change setting of the time in which the player is in the waiting state after the fluctuation of the symbol is finished. It may be described as "). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration in a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the time in which the player is in the waiting state after the end of the fluctuation of the symbol, the time from the end of the fluctuation of the symbol to the demonstration can be varied.

  Further, for example, it is possible to use as a set value which can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration effect to be performed in a player waiting state) performed after the end of the fluctuation of the symbol. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 for assigning "comical effect" as the setting value 1 is assigned, and a demonstration effect setting pattern for specifying "comical effect, operation effect of the movable body (character)" as the setting value 2 2 is assigned, demo effect setting pattern 3 which designates “serious effect” as setting value 3 is assigned, and demonstration effect setting pattern which designates “serial effect, operation effect of movable body (character)” as setting value 4 4 is assigned, demonstration effect setting pattern 5 which designates “contemporary drama-like effect” as setting value 5 is assigned, and “democratic direction effect, movable object (character)” is designated as setting value 6 demonstration effect setting Pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of change setting of contents of demonstration effect may be described as “modification (3) according to common hardware configuration”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the contents of the demonstration effect, the contents of the demonstration effect to be performed after the end of the fluctuation of the symbol can have variations.

  Also, for example, it can be used as a set value capable of setting a plurality of default sound volumes adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the periphery control board 1510. By turning the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 specifying "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 specifying "volume 2" as setting value 2, and "volume 3" setting value 3. "Volume setting pattern 3 specifying" is assigned, volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" as setting value 4 is assigned, and volume setting pattern 5 specifying "volume 5" as setting value 5 is assigned, A volume setting pattern 6 specifying "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (a mode of change setting of default volume may be described as "modification (4) according to common hardware configuration"). The volume is set to increase from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6. In the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, the default sound volume is set at the volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the direction to decrease the volume (moved to the opposite direction to the direction to increase the volume), and the movement to the minimum volume end is completed When it is adjusted and adjusted to the minimum side volume, it may be muted, or it may be a volume that can recognize a sound when it stops at the front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 is moved to the direction to increase the volume by the volume adjustment switch (moved to the opposite direction to the direction to decrease the volume), and movement to the maximum volume end is completed When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the maximum volume may be used, or the volume may be set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. According to this aspect of changing and setting the default volume, the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 can have variations.

  Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of volume of error notification sound in error notification such as various problems, goths and errors. The various error notification sounds can not be adjusted by the operation of the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, not depended on), and the pachinko machine that emits an error notification sound by setting the volume to the maximum volume is the game hall Although it may be easy for a clerk or other clerk to notice, the player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine may find it annoying. Then, what can adjust the volume of various error alarm | sounds is also calculated | required. In this case, the error notification volume setting pattern 1 specifying "error notification volume 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, and the error notification volume setting pattern 2 specifying "error notification volume 2" as the setting value 2 is assigned. Error notification volume setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned, error notification volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" as setting value 4 is assigning, "setting value 5" Error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying error notification volume 5 is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as setting value 6 (volume of error notification tone The aspect of the change setting of may be described as “modification (5) according to common hardware configuration”. It should be noted that the setting value 6 (maximum sound volume) from the setting value 1 (a sound volume that does not become muffled and can detect the error notification sound when stopped at the front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310 a performs control to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the volume of the error alerting sound, it is possible to give variation to the volume of the error alerting sound in the error alerting.

  Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The luminance can be increased or decreased from the default luminance with respect to the light emitter to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310 a. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 specifying "brightness 1" is assigned as setting value 1, default brightness setting pattern 2 specifying "brightness 2" as setting value 2 is assigned, and setting value 3 " Default luminance setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned, default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as setting value 4, and default brightness setting pattern specifying "brightness 5" as setting value 5 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 for designating "brightness 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (a case where the change setting mode of default brightness is described as "modification example (6) by common hardware configuration" is there). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeating the main control timer interrupt process described later, changing the setting of the default brightness, and performs lighting, blinking, and gradation points of the light emitter. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default luminance (default luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. The brightness of the light emitter can be adjusted to perform lighting, blinking, gradation points and the like of the light emitter. By changing the setting of the contents of the default brightness, it is possible to give variations to the default brightness of the light emitter such as a lamp or an LED.

  In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in notification of errors such as various defects, gotos and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 specifying “error notification luminance 1” as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp controlled by the main control MPU 1310 a, and “error notification luminance 2” is set as the setting value 2 The error notification luminance setting pattern 2 to be specified is assigned, and the error notification luminance setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification luminance 3" is allocated as the setting value 3, and the error notification specifying "error notification luminance 4" as the setting value 4 Brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, error notification brightness setting pattern 5 specifying “error notification brightness 5” is assigned as setting value 5, and error notification specifying “error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)” as setting value 6 The luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (a manner of changing and setting the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification It may be described as E A modification of the configuration (7) "). It should be noted that the setting value 1 (the luminance of the lamp is low but the lamp's luminance is low, and when it stops at the front of the pachinko machine it is possible to recognize an error notification) to the setting value 6 (maximum luminance) The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing change control of the light emitter brightness in error notification and the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later to adjust the lighting, blinking, and gradation points of the light emitter. Do. The peripheral control board 1510 receiving the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310 a is a target controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the luminance of the light emitter, it is possible to perform lighting, blinking, gradation points and the like of the light emitter. By changing the luminance setting of the light emitter in the error notification, variations can be given to the luminance of the light emitter such as a lamp or an LED in the error notification.

  Further, with respect to various setting values assigned to the above-described variations (1) to (7) according to the common hardware configuration, predetermined setting value display permission conditions established in the setting value confirmation display process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a are satisfied. The setting indicator 1310g is displayed when the power is turned on. However, the setting indicator 1310g may always be displayed from the time the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to the time the power is shut off (setting value display Mode may be described as "modification (8) due to common hardware configuration".

  In addition, any one of the above-described modifications (1) to (8) according to the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted to the above-described modification (30) of the determination key.

  Further, the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 at the time of power recovery at the time of power on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure The main frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. It was necessary that the setting key be turned on. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f, the main control MPU 1310 a performs a specific processing of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power on processing described later. Clear the game, and then proceed with the game by setting the interrupt permission. Further, when the predetermined setting value change permission condition described above is satisfied at power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later and It clears except a specific area among all the areas, and then proceeds to play a game by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f, if the above-described predetermined setting change permission condition is satisfied when the pachinko machine 1 is restored, In any case, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area out of all areas in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, and then proceeds to play the game by performing interrupt permission setting etc. It will be. Therefore, with respect to outer frame 2 at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery at the time of power on of pachinko machine 1 or power failure after power failure (temporary power failure occurs momentarily) as the predetermined setting value change permission condition described above. The main frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key ON operation being performed, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f may be pressed (the case of being described as “a modification of the predetermined setting change permission condition”) is there).

  In addition, the above-described predetermined set value display permission condition is applied to the outer frame 2 after power is restored when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs momentary power failure). The main frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. It was necessary that the setting key be turned on. When the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, main control MPU 1310 a sets and displays the current set value set in the set value confirmation display process performed as one process of the main control timer interrupt process described later. Display on the display 1310g. Further, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310 f needs to be pressed by the pressing operation unit when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the period of pressing operation is limited. Therefore, with respect to outer frame 2 at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery at the time of power on of pachinko machine 1 or power failure after power failure (temporary power failure occurs momentarily) as the preset setting value display permission condition described above. The main frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key ON operation, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f may not be pressed (in the case of being described as “a modification of the predetermined setting display permission condition”) There is In this case, main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as one process of the main control timer interrupt process described later when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. In the process at the time of insertion, the game is progressed by performing the initial setting and activation setting of the built-in WDT, and then performing the interruption permission setting and the like. Since the main control MPU 1310a does not yet perform the interrupt permission setting when performing the set value confirmation display processing when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is established, the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. Otherwise, a detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initial The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation by being turned by 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is read, and the main control built-in RA is read as input information described later. Not stored in the input information storage area of the. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a opens the main body frame for detecting the release of main body frame 4 with respect to outer frame 2 when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is established and the set value confirmation display process is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311 a are read.

  By adopting both the modification of the predetermined setting change permission condition described above and the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above, the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure occurs. At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after the momentary power failure, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned ON by turning the key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and turning the first ON. Sometimes, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in main control-side power-on processing described later to remove the specific area from the entire area of the main control internal RAM. After that, while the game proceeds by performing interrupt permission setting, etc., when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310 a turns on the main control side power source described later. In the hour process, the set value confirmation display process is performed, and then, the game is advanced by performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this mode, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game, the setting value confirmation display process is not performed even once. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the progress of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the current set value being set on the setting indicator 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 in the ball number counting process of the main control side power-on process described later. The number of balls of the game ball B, which is output to the base monitor 1310h and collected by the out port 1008 in the port output process of the main control side power-on process described later, is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value set by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (may be described as "a modification of the method of using the base monitor") . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value set in the period from the power recovery to the start of the progress of the game by performing the interrupt permission setting etc. using the base monitor 1310h. As the game progress can be started by performing interrupt permission setting etc. after power recovery, the number of balls of the gaming ball B collected by the out port 1008 can be displayed, so the setting indicator 1310 g can be displayed. Need not be provided, which can contribute to cost reduction.

  In addition, any one of the modification of the predetermined setting change permission condition described above, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor described above will be appropriately made. It may be selected and adopted in the modification (30) of the determination key described above.

  In addition, any one of the modification of the predetermined setting change permission condition described above, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor described above will be appropriately made. You may select and employ | adopt to the modification (1)-(8) by the common hardware structure mentioned above.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (the player side) through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 displays a status display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status and a normal lottery result selected by acceptance of the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003. A normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs and a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the reception of the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 are provided.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002 The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special hold number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "hit" or the like. It has an indicator.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 and 114 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 controls peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 137) for controlling effects to be presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and peripheral control board housing peripheral control board 1510. And a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control substrate 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control substrate 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative substrates on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can visually recognize from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5. The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or a moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding leftward from the left side surface and one right fixed piece 1602 protruding rightward from the right side surface. In the effect display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen directed forward, the two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in the frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and the locking mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding upward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 120 is an explanatory view showing the flow path of the right game ball in the front unit. FIG. 121 (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls circulating in the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and (b) an explanation showing the flow of gaming balls circulating in the second guide passage in the guide passage group FIG. FIG. 122 (a) is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls received in the prize winning opening, and FIG. 122 (b) is an explanatory view showing a portion of the third sorting device in FIG. c) is an explanatory view showing a portion of the second distribution device in (a).

  Further, FIG. 123 is an explanatory view showing operation timings of the prize winning opening and the first sorting device and the second sorting device according to the type of "small hit". FIG. 124 (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in (a). The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward relative to the front of the game panel 1100, and a part of the rear end protrudes into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. There is.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game balls B driven into the game area 5a, and a plurality of (here three) general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 The first start port 2002, which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and the game ball B is always open, which is attached at a different position in the game area 5a. A second start port 2004 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to a normal lottery result that is drawn by the game ball B being accepted by the game ball B, and a first start port 2002 Or the big winning opening 2005 which can receive the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and According to the first special drawing result or the second special drawing result which is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the prize winning opening 2006 which can receive the game ball B according to A first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 are provided in which the game ball B accepted in the prize winning opening 2006 is given an opportunity to receive.

  A plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the middle in the vertical direction of the game area 5a and on the left side with respect to the middle in the horizontal direction. The first starting port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the lateral center of the game area 5a. The regular winning opening 2003 is disposed lower than the center in the vertical direction near the right end in the game area 5a. The second start opening 2004 is usually disposed at the lower left of the winning opening 2003. The special winning opening 2005 is disposed at a slightly lower height than the first starting opening 2002 between the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002. The prize winning opening 2006 is normally disposed above the winning opening 2003. The first V winning opening 2007 is disposed at a height between the prize winning opening 2006 and the normal winning opening 2003. The second V winning opening 2008 is disposed right above the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a start opening unit 2100 having a first start opening 2002 and a front view left of the start opening unit 2100 A side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the side and having three general winning openings 2001, and a left upper unit 2300 mounted slightly above the left side of the front view of the side unit 2200 Attacker unit 2400 attached to the right in front view of start opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, which is the lower right corner in front view, and having a normal winning opening 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. And above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the game area 5a. And character object winning hole 2006 attached to Ri, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 has a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008, the.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 1008 near the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 which is always open upward with a width which allows only one gaming ball B to be received.

  When the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the first starting opening 2002 protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100 and then opens upward, and the stage 2503 of the center character 2500 is opened. Located just below the center of the Therefore, when the gaming ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2503a of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with a very high probability.

  The starting opening unit 2100 guides the gaming ball B received by the first starting opening 2002 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 in a state of being attached to the gaming panel 1100, and the ball under the light guiding plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3120.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 in which the game ball B is always open. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are opened upward, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side are opened toward the upper left.

  With the side unit 2200 assembled in the game board 5, three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. .

5-8 c. Side upper left unit]
The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 inclined so as to be lower to the right.

  In the side upper left unit 2300, the shelf 2301 projects forward of the front of the game panel 1100 in a state where it is assembled on the game board 5. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 to the right side below the center character 2500 by the shelf 2301.

[5-8 d. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right in front view of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, which is the lower right corner in front view, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 120 and the like).

  The external shape in a front view is formed in a triangular shape in which the height from the lower side is higher toward the right side. In the attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 always opens upward at the upper right corner. The second start port 2004 is provided at the lower left spaced apart from the normal winning port 2003 by more than one game ball B, and is always open forward. The special winning opening 2005 is provided near the lower end of the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and is openable so as to be able to open and close forward.

  In the attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is opened in a size slightly larger than the gaming ball B. Also, in the attacker unit 2400, the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a size slightly larger than the gaming ball B, and the large winning opening 2005 is approximately three to six times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B in the left-right direction. It is open with a width of

  The attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B received at the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the gaming ball B received at the second starting opening 2004, and A large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B accepted by the winning opening 2005 and a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting incorrect magnetism are provided (see FIG. 137 and the like).

  Attacker unit 2400 is a normal lottery where lottery of second starting opening door 2411 capable of guiding gaming ball B to second starting opening 2004 and second starting opening door 2411 by reception of gaming ball B to normal winning opening 2003 The start opening solenoid 2412 to be opened and closed according to the result, the large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 An attacker solenoid 2414 is opened and closed according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result selected by acceptance.

  As shown in FIG. 120, FIG. 121, and FIG. 124 etc., the attacker unit 2400 is provided at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 above the second starting opening 2004, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the left. A second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421, a second starting opening left upright wall portion 2422 provided on the left of the second starting opening upper guiding rack 2421 and extending vertically, and a second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 The second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 extending downward from the right end, and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2222 are provided further to the right than the big winning opening 2005, And a large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 which is inclined to lower to the left.

  The second starting opening upper guide rack 2421 is a center of the second starting opening 2004 and the large winning opening 2005 in the left-right direction from the part on the right side of the right end of the second starting opening 2004 beyond the left end of the second starting opening 2004 It extends to the left to the vicinity. The second starting opening upper guiding rack 2421 prevents the game ball B from being received from above into the second starting opening 2004.

  The second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 is provided to the left from the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 at an interval where one game ball B can pass. The second start opening left upright wall portion 2422 vertically extends vertically from a position higher than the second start opening upper guiding shelf 2421 to a position lower than the second start opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and higher than the lower end of the second start opening 2004 ing. The upper end of the second starting opening left upright wall portion 2422 is bent rightward.

  The second start opening right upright wall portion 2423 extends vertically downward from the right end of the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the second start opening 2004. The second starting opening right upright wall portion 2423 prevents the game ball B from being received from the right side into the second starting opening 2004.

  The big winning opening guide shelf 2424 has a height slightly lower than the lower end of the second start opening 2004 and from the lower end of the second start opening 2004 from the lower end of the second start opening 2004 It extends in the left-right direction so that the left end side becomes lower to the same position as the right end of the large winning opening 2005 at the height of the minute lower part, where the left-right direction is left with respect to the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422. As shown in the drawing, the big prize hole induction shelf 2424 is curved so that the right end side rises upward, and the inclination angle becomes tight as it goes to the right.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 is opened toward the left on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 and guides the gaming ball B to a position lower than the large winning opening 2005 below the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424. The right passage 2430 is provided.

  The attacking right passage 2430 is long between the first opening 2431 which opens vertically upward and to the left above the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second start opening upper guidance shelf 2421. A second opening 2432 opening upward and to the left, a third opening 2433 opening upward and below the second start opening 2004, and a large opening below the large winning opening induction shelf 2424 A fourth opening 2434 which is long to the left and right at the right side of the winning opening 2005, and a discharge opening which communicates with the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens to the left And 2435. Attacker right passage 2430 allows game ball B to enter from the first opening 2431, the second opening 2432, the third opening 2433, and the fourth opening 2434, and the discharge opening 2435. The game ball B can be released to the outside only.

  The right attachment passage 2430 is formed in the shape of a plurality of steps with the left side lowered. More specifically, the right attacking passage 2430 extends downward from a portion above the ordinary winning opening 2003 on the right side of the ordinary winning opening 2003, and is at a height lower than the ordinary winning opening 2003 to the left. After bending to the lower side of the normal prize winning opening 2003, and bending the second start opening right upright wall portion 2423 downward as a part of the left wall on the lower side of the regular prize winning opening 2003, the big prize winning opening guide shelf 2424 It is bent to the left again at a portion lower than the center and bent downward at a portion on the right side of the center of the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 and extends to the lower end of the attacker unit 2400.

  On the inner wall on the front and rear sides of the vertically extending part of the right attachment passage 2430, a plurality of protrusions 2436 projecting in the passage and extending left and right are provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of protrusions 2436 are provided so that their heights are alternately arranged on the front side and the rear side. The plurality of protrusions 2436 can be guided downward in a zigzag manner while suppressing an increase in the speed of the gaming ball B downward, when the gaming ball B contacts.

  The right attachment attack path 2430 is on the right side of the special winning opening 2005, and is long at the top and bottom. A plurality of ridges 2436 provided at the part where the fourth opening 2434 is open is the end on the fourth opening 2434 side. And a protrusion 2437 protruding into the passage (see FIG. 124 etc.). The presence of the projection 2437 can prevent the game ball B in the right attacking passage 2430 from being released from the fourth opening 2434 to the outside (left) and passes through the fourth opening 2434. Thus, the game ball B can be made to enter the inside of the attacker right passage 2430 from the outside. Therefore, the gaming ball B that has entered the right attacking passage 2430 is released from the attacker unit 2400 into the gaming area 5a without an opportunity to be accepted by the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005.

  In addition, since the right attack passage 2430 has the fourth opening 2434 open vertically at a portion passing the right of the special winning opening 2005, the gaming ball released to the left from the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424 The fourth game ball B, which is in contact with the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted above the large winning opening 2005, flows to the upper side of the large winning opening 2005 more than the large winning opening 2005, It can be received by the opening 2434 and enter into the attacker right passage 2430. Then, as described above, since the gaming ball B that has entered the inside of the attacking right passage 2430 is released to the outside only from the discharge opening 2435 at the lower end, it is guided to the right by the obstacle nail N above the big winning opening 2005 The game ball B does not bounce back to the big winning opening 2005 side due to the presence of the attack right passage 2430.

  Therefore, when the gaming ball B released from the big winning opening induction shelf 2424 is guided by the obstacle nail N to the right with respect to the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is in the open state, It will not enter and be accepted by the special winning opening 2005. Because of this, even if a passage for the game ball B (here, the right attachment passage 2430) is provided adjacent to the large winning opening 2005, the large winning opening 2005 side is formed by the wall (fourth opening 2434) of the passage. The game ball B can be provided adjacent to the big winning hole 2005 while suppressing the excessive acceptance of the gaming ball B to the big winning hole 2005 without being bounced back and accepted by the big winning hole 2005 The pachinko machine 1 can have a passage not seen in conventional pachinko machines.

  The second start opening door 2411 is a plate extending from the lower side of the second start opening 2004 to the vicinity of the second start opening left upright wall portion 2422 and is moved back and forth by the start opening solenoid 2412. The second start opening door 2411 is inclined to be lower toward the second start opening 2004 side from the left end side, and is inclined to be lower toward the rear at the portion of the second start opening 2004 doing. The second start door 2411 is retracted in the normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that has entered between the second start opening upper induction shelf 2421 and the second start opening left upright wall portion 2222 falls onto the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 without contacting the second start opening door 2411 To enter the second start port 2004 (acceptable).

  On the other hand, in the normal hit state (open state), since the second start opening door 2411 is moving forward, the game ball B which has entered between the second start opening upper induction shelf 2421 and the second start opening left upright wall portion 2222 Is brought into contact with the second starting opening 2004 by being brought into contact with the second starting opening 2004 by the second starting opening door 2411. Thus, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed by advancing and retracting the second start port door 2411. The second start opening door 2411 closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid 2412 is OFF (during non-energization), and opens the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid is ON (during power) Let

  The special winning opening door 2413 is a rectangular shape that is long in the left and right direction, and is mounted rotatably around an axis in the left-right direction with the long side on one side as the axis. The big winning opening door 2413 can close the big winning opening 2005 opened toward the front by making the short side upright by the attachment solenoid 2414, and the other long side is the front By rotating so as to move, the special winning opening 2005 can be opened, and the game ball B can be received. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attachment solenoid 2414 is OFF (during non-energization), and opens the special winning opening 2005 when the attachment solenoid 2414 is ON (during energization).

  In the attacker unit 2400, the gaming ball B accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. The game balls B received in the second start port 2004 are discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. Furthermore, the gaming ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  In a state where the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front of the game panel 1100, the normal winning opening 2003 is a stage of the center character 2500 below the two exits of the guide passage group 2520 on the upper right side of the center character 2500 described later. It is located at a height higher than 2503 and the second starting port 2004 is usually located at the lower left of the winning prize port 2003 and at a height between the center role 2500 and the stage 2503 and the special winning port 2005 Is located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. In addition, in the state of being attached to the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the upper part of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (second starting opening guiding shelf 2421), and the large winning opening 2005. It is set up.

5-8 e. Center feature]
The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the starting opening unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5 a, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. The center character 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and can visually recognize from the front the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000, etc. through the frame. it can.

  In the frame-shaped center character 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward relative to the front surface of the game panel 1100 so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can not enter the frame. It has become.

  The center character 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view, and a game ball B which has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released It has a warp outlet 2502 opened inward and a stage 2503 which can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the gaming ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left and right direction (FIG. 117 etc. See).

  The stage 2503 of the center character 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and the center character 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 at a position corresponding to the position directly above the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. In the state, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape (W-shape) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. In this stage 2503, a portion (center emission portion 2503 a) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portions (side emission portions 2503 b) on the left and right sides thereof are directed forward. It inclines so that it may become low, and can release game ball B in the game area 5a from those sites.

  When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (central release portion 2503 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is positioned directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the gaming ball B is released from the central release portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with extremely high probability.

  In addition, the center character 2500 constitutes a part of the outer peripheral surface on the upper side, and is inclined so as to become lower from the position on the left side to the right than the center in the left-right direction , And a guide passage group 2520 which is provided in the upper right corner and which can be circulated by the game ball B. The upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 forms an upstream space portion 2505 having a predetermined size, through which the game ball B can flow, between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 in a state assembled to the game board 5. The guide passage group 2520 guides the game ball B to the upper side of the attacker unit 2400.

  In addition, the center character 2500 is provided in the middle of one passage of the guide passage group 2520, and is a first special lottery obtained by the game ball B being received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004. In accordance with the lottery result and the second special lottery result, the game ball B is accepted on the game ball B which can be received by the game ball B on either the V prize side or the loser side. The first sorting device 2530 for sorting and the gaming ball B which is sorted to the V prize side by the first sorting device 2530 to the first V prize winning port 2007 or the second V prize winning port side A device 2540, and a third distribution device 2550 for distributing the game ball B distributed to the second V winning hole side by the second distribution device 2540 to any one of the second V winning hole 2008 and the lost side ing.

  In addition, the center character 2500 receives the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. A prize winning opening solenoid 2512 opened and closed according to the first special lottery result or second special lottery result, and a prize winning opening sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B accepted by the prize winning opening 2006. The first lost opening sensor 2515 for detecting the game ball B received in the first lost opening 2535 and the game ball B distributed by the second distribution device 2540 and received in the first V winning hole 2007 And a first V winning opening sensor 2514.

  The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center part 2500 as shown in FIGS. 120 and 121 and the like, and the first guide passage 2521 whose upper inlet is provided at the position of the stopper 1006 and , And a second guide passage 2522 provided on the left side of the inlet of the first guide passage 2521 at the upper inlet. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 (the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522) is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the game balls B circulating inside can be viewed from the front.

  The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically short and downward from the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000 and then bends right at a right angle, and when it abuts on the right rail 1005, it bends downward to the right rail 1005. It extends along the left, bends to the left near the height of 3/4 from the bottom of the game area 5a, extends to the left at a loose angle, and plays more than the entrance of the second guiding passage 2522 The ball B is bent downward at a position to the left of the ball B and extends to the center height of the game area 5a, and then bent right and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bent downward and the outlet downward It is formed in the shape opened toward the direction. The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward substantially on the same plane as the front of the game panel 1100.

  The prize winning opening 2006 is provided at a portion of the first guide passage 2521 extending to the left, extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the portion in the left and right direction, and opens upward. ing. The prize winning opening door 2511 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front and back direction and extending left and right so that the left end is low, and the prize winning opening 2006 opened upward and backward by moving back and forth. Can be opened and closed. The prize winning opening door 2511 can close the prize winning opening 2006 by moving forward, and in the state where the prize winning opening 2006 is closed, the part extending to the left in the first guide passage 2521 The game ball B distributed from the upstream side can be guided to the outlet side of the first guide passage 2521 by forming the bottom surface of the first guide passage 2521.

  The prize winning opening door 2511 is released by the actuation of the prize winning opening solenoid 2512 to open the prize winning opening 2006, the gaming ball B which has been circulating through the first guide passage 2521, the prize winning opening 2006 Can be accepted. The prize winning opening door 2511 closes the prize winning opening 2006 when the prize winning opening solenoid 2512 is OFF (during non-energization), and plays the role when the prize winning opening solenoid 2512 is ON (during energization). Make the item winning opening 2006 open.

  The second guide passage 2522 is opened at the right end side of the upper right circumferential wall 2510 at a position spaced apart from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the left, and the inlet is opened upward. The second guiding passage 2522 extends downward substantially straight from the entrance at the upper end, and is bent backward at a height lower than the height at which the first guiding passage 2521 initially bends to the right, A portion of the first guide passage 2521 that extends downward and to the left of the prize winning opening 2006 while being bent downward behind the front of the panel 1100 and aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction It extends downward so that the left and right directions substantially coincide, and is bent rightward in a crank shape at the center height portion of the game area 5a and then bent downward, and the lower right of the first guide passage 2521 It is extended to the lower right side in the first guide passage 2521 in a state where the first guide passage 2521 is on the same plane as the first guide passage 2521 after being bent forward at a portion lower than the portion extending to the side Along the lower side of the site Bent rightward in the building so, then bent downwards so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is formed in a shape of the outlet is open downward.

  The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are overlapped with each other in the front-to-back direction at the portions of the first guide passage 2521 which extend vertically on the left side of the prize winning opening 2006. It has a portion 2520a. In the weight viewing unit 2520a, since both the game ball B circulating in the first guide passage 2521 and the game ball B circulating in the second guide passage 2522 can be favorably viewed from the front, It can be difficult for the player to determine which passage the gaming ball B circulating in the heavyweight section 2520a is circulating.

  In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis on the upper side of the overlap portion 2520a, and on the lower side of the overlap portion 2520a, It is twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis in the opposite direction to the upper side. The respective outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 open downward, above the normal winning opening 2003 in the attacker unit 2400.

  The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are each provided with a plurality of projections 2520b at intervals in the flow direction of the game ball B, and the game ball B contacts the projections 2520b, so that the flow speed thereof Can be suppressed (see FIG. 112).

  The first distribution device 2530 is provided at a height between the prize winning opening 2006 and the lower right portion of the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 (game It is provided behind the front surface of the panel 1100).

  The first sorting device 2530 has an accommodating portion 2531a capable of accommodating only one game ball B on the outer peripheral surface, and a sorting rotator 2531 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a sorting rotator 2531 The first distribution solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 137 etc.) for rotating the distribution rotating body 2531 between the state in which the storage portion 2531a of the housing is facing right and the state in which the storage part 2531a is facing up. The cylindrical peripheral wall 2533 covering the outer periphery of the minute rotation body 2531 and the game ball B received by the prize winning opening 2006 penetrate the upper portion of the distribution rotation body 2531 in the peripheral wall 2533 and are shaken. The first distribution guiding path 2534 for guiding to the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the minute rotating body 2531 and the rear of the lower portion of the first distribution guiding path 2534 are opened to the accommodation portion 2531 a of the distribution rotating body 2531. Yu was not accommodated The first lost port 2535, into which the ball B enters, and the ball B stored in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 flow, and the right side portion of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533 is penetrated And a first atari passage 2536 extending to the side.

  The distribution rotating body 2531 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose outer peripheral surface is narrowed rearward. The right end side of the first atari passage 2536 is bent backward and then bent downward to communicate with the second distribution device 2540 side.

  In the first distribution device 2530, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is off (not energized), the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 faces the right. In this state, when the game ball B received by the prize winning opening 2006 comes in contact with the upper portion of the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotating body 2531 through the first distribution guiding path 2534, the outer periphery of the distribution rotating body 2531 Since the surface is formed in the shape of a truncated cone that is curved backward, the game ball B is guided to the rear by the inclination of the outer peripheral surface and enters the first loser 2535.

  On the other hand, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the distribution rotating body 2531 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the storage portion 2531a is facing upward (FIG. 122 (a)). reference). In this state, when the gaming ball B accepted by the prize winning opening 2006 passes through the first distribution guiding path 2534, only one is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a. In the state where gaming ball B is housed in housing part 2531a of distribution rotating body 2531, when game ball B is further induced from first prize distribution path 2534 from side of prize winning opening 2006, the game ball After the contact of the ball B with the gaming ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a, the B enters into the rear first loser port 2535. The game ball B which has entered the first loss port 2535 is delivered to the back right ball discharge unit 3130 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 and is provided in the back right ball discharge unit 3130. After being detected by 2515, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  With the game ball B being accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a, when the allocating rotating body 2531 is rotated clockwise by the first allocating solenoid 2532 and the accommodating portion 2531a faces right, the accommodating portion The game ball B accommodated in 2531a rolls from the accommodation portion 2531a to the first atari passage 2536 on the right side, and flows in the first atari passage 2536. The game ball B having circulated through the first atari passage 2536 is sent to the next second distribution device 2540.

  As described above, in the first sorting device 2530, the gaming balls B received in the prize winning opening 2006 may be sorted to either the second sorting device 2540 side or the first loser 2535 side. it can.

  As shown in FIGS. 117 and 120 etc., the second distribution device 2540 is provided below the first distribution device 2530 and in the rear near the exit of the guide passage group 2520. The second distribution device 2540 is provided further to the rear than the first distribution guide path 2534 and the first atari passage 2536 of the first distribution device 2530 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in the first distribution device 2530, the second distribution device 2540 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the gaming balls B distributed to the first atari passage 2536 are distributed. Extending from the first V winning opening 2007 to the right from the first V winning opening 2007 which is open at the right side surface of the lower part of the second distributing guiding route 2541. The first V winning aisle which is provided in the first V winning aisle 2542 extending downward and the first V winning aisle 2542 and which detects the game ball B received in the first V winning aisle 2007 And 2514, and.

  In addition, the second distribution device 2540 is provided on the upper side of the second loser port 2543 and the second loser port 2543 which are opened upward at the lower end of the second distribution guide path 2541, and the second Extending to the left from the second distribution solenoid 2545 for opening and closing the second opening 2543 for enabling the opening and closing of the second opening 2543 and for opening and closing the second opening 2543. And a second loss passage 2546 bent downward. The distribution door 2544 is a flat plate that moves back and forth, and is inclined so that the right side is low.

  In the second distribution device 2540, in a state where the second distribution solenoid 2545 is OFF (non-energized), the distribution door 2544 is retracted, and the second missing port 2543 is opened upward. In this state, when the gaming ball B from the first distributing device 2530 flows down the second distributing / guiding path 2541, the gaming ball B enters the second lost port 2543, and passes through the second lost passage 2546. It is sent to the side of the distribution device 2550.

  On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the distribution door 2544 is advanced above the second disconnection port 2543, and the second disconnection port 2543 is closed by the distribution door 2544. The ball B can not be received. In this state, when the game ball B from the first distributing device 2530 flows down the second distributing / guiding path 2541, it abuts on the upper surface of the distributing door 2544, The user is guided to the right by the inclination and enters (accepts) the first V winning opening 2007. The game ball B entering the first V winning opening 2007 flows through the first V winning passage 2542 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and then the light guiding plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the back right ball discharge unit 3130.

  When the ball game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 is received by the first V prize hole 2007 and detected by the first V prize hole sensor 2514, the big prize hole 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern. A "big hit game" to open and close is executed. The second distribution device 2540 can be viewed from the front through the transparent guide path group 2520.

  As described above, in the second distribution device 2540, the game ball B stored in the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotation member 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 is used as the first V winning opening 2007 or the second lost opening. It can distribute to either of 2543 (3rd distribution device 2550) side.

  The third distribution device 2550 is provided above the stage 2503 in the frame of the center part 2500, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 122 and the like. The third distribution device 2550 is in communication with the lower end of the second missing passage 2546 of the second distribution device 2540, and a crank-shaped third distribution / induction passage 2551 for guiding the game ball B to the left, A third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the distribution guide path 2551 for detecting the game ball B circulating inside, and provided above the stage 2503 within the frame of the center character 2500 And a clone 2553 to which the gaming balls B induced by the third distribution guiding path 2551 are supplied in the shape of a downwardly depressed container.

  In addition, the third distribution device 2550 is provided below the clune 2553 and the distribution rotary blade 2554 provided rotatably around an axis in the vertical direction at the center in plan view of the top surface of the clune, so that the distribution rotation is performed. The third distribution drive motor 2555 (see FIG. 115) for rotating the blades 2554, the second V winning opening 2008 opened at the front end of the peripheral wall of the crane 2553, and the second V winning opening 2008 in the peripheral wall of the crane 2553 A third swing ball discharge passage for guiding the gaming ball B received in the third loss port 2556 and the second V winning hole 2008 and the third loss port 2556, which are open on the left and right sides of the And 2557.

  Further, although not shown, the third distribution device 2550 is a spur gear-like rotation gear integrally rotating with the distribution rotation blade 2554 below the clone 2553 and a spur gear shape engaged with the rotation gear. The driven gear, a flat detection piece projecting downward from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the lower surface of the driven gear, and a third distributed rotation detection sensor for detecting the detection piece.

  The third distribution / induction path 2551 extends short and right below the lower end of the second missing passage 2546, and then bends leftward and extends to the vicinity of the right end of the clune 2553 and then downwardly into the clune 2553 It is formed in the shape of a crank, bent into two. The third distribution guide path 2551 is formed to release the gaming ball B at the right front corner in the clone 2553 in plan view. The third distribution detection sensor 2552 is provided at the entrance of the third distribution / induction path 2551.

  The Kroon 2553 is formed in a horizontal oval dish shape having the lowest center. The distribution rotary blade 2554 is provided on the upper portion with a pair of projecting pieces 2554a (see FIG. 108 etc.) projecting at right angles to the rotation axis, and has a gold palm sugar decoration with a plurality of projections projecting from the sphere And a part 2554 b. The distribution rotation blade 2554 is constantly rotated in a fixed direction by the third distribution drive motor 2555, and monitored by the third distribution rotation detection sensor whether the distribution rotation blade 2554 is rotating or not. ing. When the game ball B in the clone 2553 abuts on the projecting piece 2554 a in a state where the distribution rotary blade 2554 is rotating, the game ball B can be repelled to the peripheral wall side of the clone 2553. Third loss openings 2556 provided on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 are formed to have the same size as the second V winning opening 2008, respectively.

  In the third distribution device 2550, the distribution rotary blade 2554 at the center of the Cloune 2553 is constantly rotated by the third distribution drive motor 2555. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the second missing port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540, the game ball B is supplied from the second lost passage 2546 to the clone 2553 through the third distribution / induction path 2551. At this time, the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects the game ball B supplied to the clone 2553. Based on the detection of the game ball B by the third distribution detection sensor 2552, an effect corresponding to the distribution of the game ball B by the clone 2553 is executed.

  When the gaming ball B supplied from the third distribution guide path 2551 to the clone 2553 turns (orgulates) the inside of the clone 2553 while narrowing the turning radius, and abuts against the projecting piece 2554 a of the distribution rotation blade 2554, the clown 2553 Be flipped to the side wall of Then, when the game ball B is flipped forward by the distribution rotary blade 2554, it enters (accepts) either one of the second V winning hole 2008 and the two third losers 2556. In the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B is distributed to the second V winning hole 2008 with a probability of 1/3.

  The game ball B entering the second V winning hole 2008 is delivered to the ball discharge unit 3120 under the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 via the third distribution ball discharge passage 2557, and the ball discharge under the ball After being detected by the second V winning hole sensor 3003 provided in the unit 3120, the sheet is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third loss port 2556 is delivered to the ball discharge unit 3120 under the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 via the third distribution ball discharge passage 2557, After being detected by the third missing port sensor provided in the ball discharging unit 3120, the ball is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  Thus, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B distributed to the second missing port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 can be either the second V winning hole 2008 or the third lost opening 2556. Can be divided into

[5-8 f. Flow of the game ball B in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game balls B in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 117, 120 to 124 and the like. When assembled on the game board 5, the center role 2500 is provided on the upper right of the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge array at a site on the left side and a lower site than the center character 2500 and at a site between the attacker unit 2400 and the center character 2500. It is done. In addition, on the left side of the center character 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill W which is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided.

  A plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center character 2500 is more than the center of the center hole 2500, the warp entrance 2501 of the center character 2500, and the game ball B driven on the left side of the center character 2500. It is adjusted so as to enter mainly to the right side, and is adjusted to approach to the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability.

  A plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between the lower end of the guide passage group 2520 in the center character 2500 and the ordinary winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 are distributed through the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 The ball B is adjusted to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal winning opening 2003, and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability, and the second guiding passage It is adjusted so that the game ball B which circulated 2522 enters the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 and the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is struck from the left along the periphery of the game area 5a at the top. When the game ball B is hit to circulate the left side of the center character 2500 into the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 117, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the left side of the center character 2500. N is induced to enter either the warp inlet 2501 of the center work 2500 or the site on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the site to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than them. Induced to enter the

  The gaming ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility of being accepted by the three general winning openings 2001 provided on the side unit 2200. After being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001 is delivered to the back ball discharging unit 3120 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the general winning opening sensor After being detected by 3001, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a benefit is awarded that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The gaming ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting opening 2002. Then, the gaming ball B which has not been accepted by the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

  The gaming ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is laterally centered by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center work 2500 (first start port 2002) It may be guided to the side and accepted by the first starting port 2002. In addition, the gaming ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through between the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, and the side unit 2200 There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winnings opening 2001 of.

  The game ball B that has entered (received) the warp inlet 2501 of the center character 2500 is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503. The game balls B supplied to the stage 2503 roll on the stage 2503 and move back and forth, and are discharged forward from the center portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central central release portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, since the central discharge portion 2503a is positioned immediately above the first start opening 2002, the first probability is high with a high probability. Accepted at the starting port 2002. When the gaming balls B are released from the side release parts 2503 b on the left and right sides of the central release part 2503 a, they are accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with a certain degree of probability.

  The game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and is then delivered to the back ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 to perform the first start After being detected by the mouth sensor 3002, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed and a benefit such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls B is provided. The game balls B that are released from the stage 2503 and not accepted by the first starting opening 2002 are discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  The game ball B is not likely to be accepted by the normal winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004 on the left side of the center role 2500 in the gaming area 5a, and in rare cases, the large winning opening 2005 is opened. It may be accepted.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit to the left of the center character 2500 has a probability that the game ball B hit to the right of the center character 2500 is accepted by the second start port 2004. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher.

  In contrast to the above, in the gaming board 5 of this embodiment, when the gaming ball B is struck with the strength that the gaming ball B enters above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 (upstream space portion 2505) of the center prize 2500, The game ball B circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  Specifically speaking, the game ball B is driven with strength to abut against the stopper portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 which constitutes a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called, right And the gaming ball B in contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 (see FIG. 121 (a)). The game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the top surface of the prize winning opening door 2511 closing the prize winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, The lower right outlet of the lower portion 2520 is discharged to the lower side of the attacker unit 2400.

  The game ball B discharged downward from the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is subjected to a plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between it and the attacker unit 2400, and the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, a normal winning combination The user is induced to enter with a similar probability to any of the mouth 2003 and the part on the left side of the regular prize mouth 2003.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward and the first guide passage in the overlap portion 2520a. After being aligned in the front-rear direction with 2521, it is twisted forward and discharged from the outlet on the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower side of the attacker unit 2400.

  The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guiding passage 2522 is a part of the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 or the normal winning opening 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between it and the attacker unit 2400. And, rarely, is directed to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  The gaming ball B that has entered the right attack passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is on the lower right rail 1004 from the discharge opening 2435 which is lower than the large winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged to the outside of the game area 5a from the out port 1008. The game ball B entering the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By the detection of the game ball B by the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a bonus such as a normal lottery and a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

  In addition, the gaming ball B which has entered the left side part of the normal winning opening 2003 abuts further on a plurality of obstacle nails N and flows down onto the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421. In addition, the game ball B which entered into the part of the left side of the normal winning a prize opening 2003 rarely passes through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning a prize opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guidance shelf 2421 to the attacker right passage 2430 It may enter. Then, the gaming ball B that has flowed down onto the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 flows down between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 onto the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424. .

  At this time, when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 and the "normal hit" is drawn as a normal drawing result, the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, so the second starting is started. The game ball B that has passed between the mouth induction shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left upright wall portion 2422 may be received by the second starting opening 2004. Then, when the gaming ball B is received by the second starting opening 2004, after being detected by the second starting opening sensor 2402, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 which is outside the gaming area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2402, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a benefit such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

  The game ball B which has flowed down on the large winning opening induction shelf 2424 through the space between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2222 is the large winning opening 2005 from the left end of the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 Released to the upper site of Then, when the game ball B is released from the big winning opening induction shelf 2424, the game ball B is accepted by the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, and as a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result When the "big hit" is drawn, or when the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, the large winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. The gaming ball B discharged to the left from the mouth guiding shelf 2424 will be accepted by the large winning opening 2005 with high probability.

  The game ball B accepted by the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By the detection of the game ball B by the special winning opening sensor 2403, a bonus is awarded that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B released to the attacker unit 2400 through the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is received by any of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005. If not, it is discharged from the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a downward to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

  In the above description, although the case of hitting the right has been described, the game ball B hit with a strength that jumps over the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 opened near the right end of the upper right circumferential wall 2510 is also It enters into the first guide passage 2521 and results similar to the above.

  As described above, with the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B which has flowed through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521 is more effective. The possibility of being accepted by the normal winning a prize mouth 2003 is high.

  By the way, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and the "small hit" is drawn as the first special drawing result or the second drawing result, it is in the middle of the first guidance passage 2521 While the prize product winning opening 2006 provided is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, the sorting rotary body 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 and the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the "small hit" is drawn, the prize winning opening 2006 is opened and closed, so that the player can receive the prize winning in order to receive the game ball B in the prize winning opening 2006. The game ball B can be "right-handed" so that the game ball B can flow in the first guide passage 2521 in which the mouth 2006 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the "small hit" has a higher probability of being drawn than the "big hit", and as the "small hit", the "first small hit", the "second small hit", and the "third small hit" Three patterns are set, and the prize winning opening 2006 roughly divides and opens and closes any of the patterns twice.

  First, the opening and closing of the prize winning opening 2006 in each "small hit" will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 123, in the "first small hit", the prize winning opening 2006 opens for a short time (80 ms) after a predetermined time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, and then it is closed. After a short time (1252 ms) has elapsed, the short time (80 ms) is again opened and closed to complete. In the "second small hit", after a predetermined time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution, the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed to "first small hit". After a long time (5420 ms) has elapsed, the long time (9414 ms) is opened and then closed to complete. In the "third small hit", after a predetermined time (3000 ms) has passed from the start of execution, the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then it is closed and the "second small hit" After a long time (19366 ms) has elapsed, the long time (9404 ms) is opened and closed to complete.

  The second open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the “first small hit” is started later than the time when the “first small hit” is completed. Also, the second open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "third small hit" is started later than the time when the "second small hit" is completed from the start of execution.

  In FIG. 123, eight open states (80 ms) are repeated at constant intervals (1252 ms) in the second long open state of “second small hit” and “third small hit”. . That is, the prize winning opening 2006 opens and closes twice in the “first small hit” and nine times in the “second small hit” and the “third small hit”.

  Next, the operation of the distribution rotating body 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 in the “small hit” is turned counterclockwise at the same time when the execution is started and the storage portion 2531a is directed upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms) 1 When it becomes storable state for the second time and then turns clockwise and becomes unaccommodatable state where the accommodation part 2531a is turned to the right, when a predetermined time (4560 ms) elapses, the second time (13446 ms) longer than the first time After being able to be accommodated for a short time (500 ms) and after being incapable of being accommodated for a short time (500 ms), the same time as the second (13 446 ms) becomes possible to be accommodated, and then it becomes impossible to accommodate.

  The sorting rotatable body 2531 is in the non-accommodable state in which the first accommodation possible state is terminated in the middle of the first opened state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "small hit". In addition, the distribution rotating body 2531 enters the second accommodation-ready state later than the time when the “first small hit” is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "first small hit", the control of the distribution rotating body 2531 is finished before the second accommodation possible state, and the second and third accommodation possible states are not executed. The sorting rotary body 2531 starts the second accommodation possible state before the second opening state of the prize winning hole 2006 in the “second small hit”, and the second opening state is the closing state. It becomes impossible to accommodate after becoming

  In addition, the distribution rotating body 2531 becomes capable of accommodating for the third time after the time when the “second small hit” is completed after the start of the execution. Therefore, at the time of the “second small hit”, the control of the distribution rotating body 2531 is finished before the third accommodation possible state, and the third accommodation possible state is not executed. That is, the distribution rotating body 2531 can be accommodated once in the “first small hit”, twice in the “second small hit”, and three times in the “third small hit”. This third distribution accommodating state is started before the second opening state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the “third small hit”, and the second opening state ends. After being closed, it becomes impossible to accommodate.

  Next, the operation of the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 in the “small hit” is the first closed state in which the second disconnection port 2535 is closed by projecting forward for the predetermined time (3020 ms) simultaneously with the start of execution. It becomes a state where it can be distributed to the 1st V prize winning opening 2007), and then it moves backward to become an opened state (a state of distributing to the third distribution device 2550) in which the second lost opening 2535 is opened for a predetermined time (23006 ms When it passes, it will be in an open state, after being in a closed state for a second time (13 446 ms) longer than the first open state.

  The distribution door 2544 is opened when the first closed state ends midway in the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "small hit". In addition, the second distribution device 2540 starts the second closed state of the distribution door 2544 in the middle of the second opened state of the prize winning hole 2006 in the “third small hit”, and the prize winning hole After the second open state in 2006 is closed, the distribution door 2544 is opened from the closed state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closing state of the sorting door 2544 is executed only in the case of the "third small hit", and in the case of the "first small hit" or the "second small hit". The second closing state of the minute door 2544 is not executed.

  From such a thing, in the "first small hit", opening and closing of the prize winning opening 2006 is performed twice in a short time, so the game being circulated in the first guidance passage 2521 by "right-handed" It is unlikely that the ball B will be accepted by the prize winning opening 2006. In addition, since the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the “second small hitting” and the “third small hitting” is also a short time, the possibility that the game ball B can be accepted for the prize winning opening 2006 Is low. In addition, the time during which the first accommodation possible state of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the “small hitting”, the prize winning opening Since it is shorter than the time of the first open state of 2006, the gaming ball B accepted by the official product prize opening 2006 at the time of the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 is the housing portion of the distribution rotating body 2531 It is even less likely to be contained in 2531a. And since the time when the first accommodation possible state of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the first closed state of the distribution door 2544 in the second distribution device 2540 end is the same, the distribution rotating body 2531 is At the time of the first accommodation possible state, the gaming ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a is not distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 side.

  On the other hand, since the second open state of the prize winning hole 2006 in the "second small hit" and the "third small hit" has a long time, the game ball B wins a prize through the first guide passage 2521 It is likely to be accepted by the mouth 2006. At this time, the sorting rotary body 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 is in a storable state before the prize winning opening 2006 is opened, and then the prize winning opening 2006 is closed from the opened Since it becomes impossible to be accommodated after it becomes, the possibility that the game ball B received by the prize winning opening 2006 in the second open state will be accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotating body 2531 is high. .

  As described above, in this example, the possibility that the game ball B can be accepted by the winning combination 2006 in the first open state of the winning combination 2006 in the "second small hitting" and the "third small hitting" is low. In addition to the above, at the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006, the possibility that the gaming ball B accepted by the prize winning opening 2006 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotating body 2531 is even lower Nevertheless, simultaneously with the start of execution of the small hit gaming state, the distribution rotating body 2531 is turned counterclockwise to place the accommodating portion 2531a upward, thereby enabling the accommodating portion 2531a to be in a predetermined period (3020 ms). After being directed upward, it is turned clockwise so that the accommodation portion 2531a can not be accommodated with the accommodation portion 2531a facing right. That is, although it is unlikely that the sorting rotor 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first atari passage 2536 immediately after the start of the small hit gaming state, the sorting rotor 2531 will play the game ball B at the first atari path 2536 The operation of distributing to the side is executed, and the distribution operation by the distribution rotating body 2531 is shown in advance.

  Similarly, although it is unlikely that the sorting rotator 2531 will assign the gaming ball B to the first atari passage 2536 immediately after the small hitting gaming state starts, the second sorting device simultaneously with the start of execution of the small hitting gaming state The distribution door 2544 of 2540 is projected forward to close the second loss port 2535 so that distribution to the first V prize hole 2007 is possible, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) elapses, the second loss port 2535 is retracted. Is released to the third distribution device 2550. That is, although there is a low possibility that the sorting door 2544 will sort the gaming ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side immediately after the small hitting gaming state is started, the sorting door 2544 sets the gaming ball B to the first V prize opening 2007 The sorting operation by the sorting door 2544 is performed in advance by executing the sorting operation to the side.

  In this example, the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are effects at the same time as the start of execution of the small hit gaming state, that is, the effects at the start of the small hit gaming state. "I aim at 2006" and operate during execution of the presentation where the explanation of the game in the small hit gaming state such as "is performed"), and after the operation of the distribution rotation body 2531 and the distribution door 2544, the prize winning opening 2006 is the first Will be open. As a result, the possibility of sorting the game ball B to the first atari passage 2536 side by the sorting rotation body 2531 and sorting to the first V prize hole 2007 side of the gaming ball B by the sorting door 2544 is lowered. doing. In addition, there is no possibility of the distribution to the first Atari passage 2536 side of the game ball B by the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution to the first V winning opening 2007 side of the game ball B by the distribution door 2544, Alternatively, as long as it is as low as possible, the prize winning opening 2006 may be set to the first open state simultaneously with the operation of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544.

  Alternatively, only one of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, a part of the movable parts of the plurality of movable parts (sorting rotary body 2531 and the sorting door 2544) for distributing the game balls B having won in the prize winning opening 2006 is operated in advance to indicate the sorting operation. The other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, it is not likely to operate the distribution door 2544 having a high possibility of entering the game ball B into the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007) by operation (the V winning expectation is high) in advance. The possibility of entering the game ball B into the V winning opening (the second V winning opening 2008 in this example) is lower than that of the sorting door 2544 (the V winning expectation is low) only in advance for the sorting rotator 2531 It may be operated. As a result, although it is possible to know in advance a part of the distribution destinations of the game ball B that has won the prize winning opening 2006, the other distribution destinations can be unknown, and other distribution destinations are apparent As the distribution destination increases, it is possible to surprise the player and increase the sense of expectation, and to make the game ball B to be distributed be able to pay attention to it and enjoy its movement. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, by not operating the movable part (distribution door 2544) having a high V prize expectation degree by concealing its existence by not operating in advance, making the player think that the game ball B enters the third distribution device 2550 When the third small hit is executed, the movable part (sorting door 2544) with high V prize expectation is operated to make the game ball B enter the V prize opening (in this example, the first V prize opening 2007) In addition to giving unexpectedness, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by the game ball B entering the distribution destination which was not predicted. In addition, distribution to the first V winning hole 2007 side is concealed as a distribution destination, and it can be thought that there are only two, the first missing port 2535 side and the third distribution device 2550 side, from the third small hit Even if the second small hit with a low V prize expectation is executed and the gaming ball B is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 side, the player is not discouraged.

  Further, in this example, the sorting rotation body 2531 is arranged in a mode that can be easily viewed by the player, whereas the sorting door 2544 has a flat plate shape that moves back and forth to the front and back of the game board 5, and the front side area Because it is narrow, it is difficult to notice its operation even if it is operating. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the side of the first V winning hole 2007 that can be entered by the forward of the distribution door 2544. Therefore, it becomes difficult to notice the behavior of the game ball B when the distribution door 2544 operates and the game ball B enters the first V prize hole 2007 when it becomes the third small hit, and the game ball B Without noticing that the player has entered the first V winning opening 2007, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if the V winning was suddenly generated and the 15R big hit was performed.

  In addition, by operating the distribution rotating body 2531 in advance during the opening effect of the small hit gaming state, in addition to the instruction content in the opening effect, for example, "Aim at the prize winning hole 2006", the distribution rotating body 2531 Also by the operation of the player, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the target to be hit, that is, the position to be aimed during the small hit gaming state.

  As described above, when the prize winning opening 2006 is opened by drawing the "small hitting", the game ball B which has flowed down the first guide passage 2521 is accepted by the prize winning opening 2006 After being detected by the prize product winning opening sensor 2513, it is sent to the first distribution guide path 2534 of the first distribution device 2530. When the game ball B is detected by the prize winning opening sensor 2513, a bonus such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

  Among the "small hits", in the "second small hits", the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 is open when the prize winning opening 2006 is in the second open state, so the sorting rotation is performed. When the body 2531 rotates from the storable state to the storable state, the gaming ball B housed in the housing portion 2531 a passes through the first atari passage 2536 and the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. And flow from the second lost opening 2543 at the lower end through the second lost passage 2546 to the third distribution device 2550 side.

  The game ball B sent to the third distribution device 2550 side is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552, and then supplied to the top of the crew 2553 through the third distribution guiding path 2551, and the inside of the crew 2553 Swirl. Then, by being bounced by the distribution rotating blade 2554 which is constantly rotated by the third distribution drive motor 2555, it is accepted in either of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third loser openings 2556. Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning hole 2008 is transferred to the ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 through the third distribution ball discharge passage 2557, After being detected by the 2V winning hole sensor 3003, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third loss port 2556 is delivered to the ball discharge unit 3120 under the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 through the third distribution ball discharge passage 2557, and the third After being detected by the missing port sensor, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 3003, a bonus is provided to open and close the special winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern.

  On the other hand, in the "third small hit", since the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is closed when the prize winning opening 2006 is in the second open state, the distribution rotary body 2531 The game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a flows down the second distribution / induction passage 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first atari passage 2536 when it is turned from the accommodation possible state to the accommodation impossible state. , And is guided to the right by contact with the upper surface of the closed distribution door 2544, and enters (accepts) the first V winning opening 2007. The game ball B entering the first V winning hole 2007 is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514 through the first V winning passage 2542, and then the back right ball of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is discharged. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the unit 3130. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, a bonus is provided to open and close the special winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern.

  From such a thing, in order to open and close the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400, let the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 receive the game ball B, and "small hit", "big hit", etc. It is necessary to make a lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result take place. When the game ball B is driven to flow down the left side of the center character 2500, there is an opportunity to be accepted by the first start port 2002, but no opportunity to be accepted by the second start port 2004.

  On the other hand, when hitting the gaming ball B so as to flow down the right side of the center character 2500, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is on the right side of the center character 2500. Although it is provided and there is an opportunity to be accepted by the normal winning opening 2003 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 even though it passes through the passage, the first guidance is made by "right-handing" which facilitates the driving operation. If the passage 2521 is circulated, the game ball B may be circulated to the second guiding passage 2522 because there is a possibility of entering the attacker right passage 2430 which is sent to the out port 1008 without a chance to be received by the regular winning opening 2003 or the like. In order to achieve this, it is necessary to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B. In addition, in order to make the second starting port 2004 accept the game ball B, it is necessary to make the normal winning opening 2003 receive the game ball B and to derive the normal lottery result of “normal hit”. Of the second start opening 2004 is lower than that of the first start opening 2002.

  Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball B is hit so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center role 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting opening 2002 for the player. The operation can be performed, and the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown to entertain the original game by the pachinko machine 1 and the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 Can increase expectations for the acceptance of

  Then, when the game ball B is accepted to the first start opening 2002 and the "small hit" is drawn as the first special drawing result, the role opening 2006 opens and closes, so In order to receive the ball B, changing the hitting operation of the game ball B to "right-handed" and driving the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 provided with the prize winning opening 2006. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B to the prize winning hole 2006.

  Even if the game ball B hit to the right of the center character 2500 is not accepted by the prize winning opening 2006, it may be accepted by the normal prize opening 2003 on the downstream side, and further, the ordinary winning opening 2003 As well as the possibility of being accepted by the second starting port 2004 that has become open according to the result of the regular lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, and the "small hit" or "big hit" as the second special lottery result May be drawn.

  When the game ball B inserted into the first guide passage 2521 is received by the prize winning opening 2006, it is sent to the first distribution device 2530, so the game ball B is stored in the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531. It is possible to cause the player to be harassing or shocking depending on whether the player is accommodated or not.

  Since the gaming ball B is sent to the next second sorting device 2540 when the gaming ball B sent to the first sorting device 2530 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531 a of the sorting rotation body 2531, the second The player can be excited and excited by whether the game ball B can be distributed to the first V winning hole 2007 or the second loss port 2543 in the distribution device 2540. In this second distribution device 2540, even if the game ball B is distributed to the second loss port 2543, the game ball B is provided with the second V winning hole 2008 through the second loss passage 2546. Since it is sent to the dividing device 2550, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the second V winning hole 2008, and to suppress a drop in interest.

  The game ball B distributed to the second missing port 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 is supplied to the clone 2553 of the third distribution device 2550 and turns on the clone 2553. The player can be snarled and pounded by whether or not it is accepted by the second V prize opening 2008 when it is flipped to the peripheral wall side by the central sorting rotary blade 2554 of the Kroon 2553, and the player is entertained. be able to.

  And, when the game ball B is accepted to the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008, or by the reception of the game ball B to the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004, the first special When a “big hit” is drawn as the lottery result and the second special lottery result, the chance to open a large number of game balls B by opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 in a predetermined pattern, It is possible to cause the game ball B to hit the right side of the center character 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the large winning opening 2005 which is opened and closed.

  At this time, the probability that the game ball B reaches the large winning opening 2005 is higher for the player through the second guide passage 2522 than for the person through the first guide passage 2521. The hitting strength can be adjusted so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 with the "right-handed" being refrained, and the operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

  By the way, since the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center character 2500 has a double-seeing portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-rear direction, Looking at 2520a, it is difficult to determine which passage the game ball B is circulating, so the player should have entered the second guidance passage 2522 but has entered the first guidance passage 2521 The game ball B circulating the guide passage group 2520 can be noticed. In addition, the game ball B which has been hit and aimed at the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 can cause the player to be excited depending on whether the game ball B comes out from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 or not. Can increase the sense of expectation for the game, and when it comes out from the exit of the unexpected first guidance passage 2521, it can surprise the player by giving surprise to the player, making the player entertain It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[5-8 g. Another embodiment of the distribution channel group of the center product]
Subsequently, guide passage groups 2520 of the center product 2500 of a different embodiment from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (d) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from FIG. 117, and FIGS. 126 (e) and (f) are explanatory views showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from that of FIG. It is. In FIGS. 125 and 126, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (a), compared with FIG. 117, the inlet at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522 is separated by a longer distance from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the left. It is The same function and effect as described above can also be achieved by this guide passage group 2520.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (b), the angle of the stopper 1006 is set so that the abutting ball 100 on the front component 1000 can easily bounce back to the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. Of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 between the inlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the inlet of the second guide passage 2522 so that the second guide passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. It is As a result, since the game ball B can easily enter the second guide passage 2522 side, the adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B in which the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 is broadened. The game ball B can be easily hit and operated aiming at the entrance of the second guiding passage 2522.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (c), the inlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are directed upward in the guide passage group 2520 of FIGS. 117 and 125 (a) and 125 (b). The upstream side of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is extended to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center character 2500 while the respective inlets are arranged vertically. In the state, it is made to open toward the left.

  In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) constitutes a part of the first guide passage 2521 and a part of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 is a part of the second guide passage 2522. Make up the department. Moreover, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space portion 2505 between the upper right peripheral wall 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (peripheral of the game area 5a) is the first guide from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 The length to the inlet of each of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is smaller than the upstream space 2505 shown above in FIG. 117 and the like.

  In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving strength of the upper right circumferential wall 2510 that abuts a narrow portion on the left side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, Since it is necessary to hit the gaming ball B with a hitting strength directly entering the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 opened toward the left, compared to the embodiment of FIG. The adjustment range of the impact strength of B becomes narrow. In addition, the game ball B driven into the space portion 2505 on the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 divides the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. When it abuts on the left end (a part between two entrances) of the wall, there is a possibility that it may deviate from the upstream space 2505 depending on the momentum and the angle to the left of the rebounding game ball B. That is, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2505, it does not deviate from the upstream space portion 2505 to the left and enter neither the first guide passage 2521 nor the second guide passage 2522 There is a possibility that the left side of the center character 2500 may be circulated. As such, since the degree of difficulty with respect to the hitting operation of the game ball B becomes high, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player for the hitting operation of the game ball B, and the game medium is hit for the player. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress the decline in interest.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (d), in the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (c), a branch portion 2524 communicating with the second guide passage 2522 in one way is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521. It is. The branch portion 2524 is provided immediately above the portion bent downward from the right end of the portion (upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) extending in the left and right direction in the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is second in the branch portion 2524 depending on the hit strength (if the hit strength is weak). Because it branches to the guide passage 2522 side, the difficulty of the distribution of the game ball B with respect to the second guide passage 2522 can be made lower than the embodiment of FIG. 125 (c).

  In addition, in order to make game ball B enter into the 2nd guidance passage 2522, while it is necessary to hit weakly than the hitting strength of game ball B which enters into the 1st guidance passage 2521, with the 1st guidance passage 2521 Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the downwardly bent portion of the second guide passage 2522, the gaming ball B entering the second guide passage 2522 is bent at the downwardly bent portion. It does not bounce upward (on the side of the branch 2524), and does not enter the side of the first guide passage 2521 through the branch 2524. That is, the branch portion 2524 is in one-way communication from the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522.

  Further, in this embodiment, when entering the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 having the branch portion 2524 in the middle and circulating through the first guide passage 2521, the side of the first guide passage 2521 in the portion of the branch portion 2524 Alternatively, since the game will branch to any of the second guide passage 2522 side, the player can be snarled or pounded by the side to which the game ball B branches in the branch portion 2524, and the first guide The flow of the game balls B in the passage 2521 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even though the player aims at the second guide passage 2522 and strikes the game ball B, the game ball B may enter the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Because there is a possibility of branching to the second guide passage 2522 side at the branch portion 2524 of the first guide passage 2521, it is possible to harass the player depending on whether or not the branch portion 2524 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side. It is possible to make the player happy and to entertain the player, and when branching to the second guide passage 2522 side at the branching portion 2524, the mistake of the player's driving operation is covered and the desired second guide passage 2522 is The game ball B will be distributed, which can make the player feel like he / she has obtained, and can suppress the decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 126 (e), the second guide passage 2522 is provided with a bypass portion 2525 which traverses the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the inlet of the second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right circumferential wall 2510. Therefore, all the game balls B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 flow through the first guide passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center character 2500, so the player side Since it is possible to make the distribution of the game ball B stand out, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good after that when the game ball B circulates the bypass portion 2525. Can be operated to hit the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and the game ball B can be enjoyed to hit and suppress the decrease in interest it can.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 126 (f), the inlet of the second guide passage 2522 is provided at the rear of the first guide passage 2521, and the respective inlets are aligned in the front-rear direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is provided on the front side of the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000 in the upstream space portion 2505, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined to the right and back, and the game ball has circulated along the front surface of the game panel 1100. B is guided to the second guide passage 2522 side. Further, the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000 is inclined so that the portion near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 moves to the right as it goes to the rear, and moves toward the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 It is possible to reflect the game ball B, which has been vigorously driven, to the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, since the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap side by side in the front-rear direction, the game played in the upstream space 2505 above the center character 2500 It can be difficult to determine which passage the ball B has entered, making it possible to draw the player's attention.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The entire configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116 and the like. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a second provided in the starting opening unit 2100 A first start opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in one start opening 2002, and a second V winning opening sensor 3003 for detecting the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 of the center role 2500. And a third loss port sensor for detecting the game ball B received by the third loss port 2556 of the center character 2500 (see FIG. 137).

  Also, the back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 having a box-like opening 3010 a in the back wall and having a square opening 3010 a. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the cage effect display device 1600.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the special winning opening 2005, and the prize winning opening 2006. Out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting game balls B (game balls B for which a benefit is not given) not accepted, a light guide plate effect unit 3100 provided at the front end of the back box 3010, and a light guide effect unit 3100 And a rear effect unit 3200 provided in the rear box 3010 at the rear of the rear cover.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a flat frame which protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010 a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed from the inside to the left in the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the right side in the right and left direction.

  The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the gaming panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes and the like for attaching the light guide plate rendering unit 3100, the back rendering unit 3200 and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9a. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out-of-ball detecting unit 3030 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 127 to 131 and the like. Fig. 127 (a) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a back view of the out ball detection unit, (d) ) Is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit as viewed from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit as viewed from the back, and (f) is a view from the out ball detection unit and the right front lower position It is a perspective view, and (g) is a perspective view which looked at out ball detection unit from lower right rear. FIG. 128 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out-of-sphere detection unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out-of-sphere detection unit as viewed from the back.

  FIG. 129 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the gaming panel and the out-ball detecting unit, and FIG. 129 (b) is a perspective view showing the out-ball detecting unit in contact with the gaming panel. FIG. 130 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board assembled and cut vertically at the center of the out-port right sensor and viewed from the right. FIG. 131 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the out port from the front in a state where the game board is assembled.

  The out ball detection unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the prize. It is for detecting the game ball B (the game ball B to which a privilege is not given, also referred to as “out ball”) not accepted by the winning opening 2006. In the present embodiment, the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is detected. The out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front of the under ball discharge unit 3120 in the light guide plate rendering unit 3100.

  The out ball detection unit 3030 is inserted from the back into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 and attached to the front of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. The unit body 3031 is attached to the unit body 3031. And a cover 3034 attached to the unit body 3031 so as to cover the rear side of the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033.

  The unit body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100, and has a cylindrical tubular portion 3031a extending cylindrically in the longitudinal direction, and a partition portion 3031b that divides the inside of the tubular portion 3031a into right and left. And a flange portion 3031c protruding in a flat plate shape in the left-right direction from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3031a, and an out-port left sensor 3032 and an out-port right sensor 3033 which are recessed forward from the rear end side of the cylindrical portion. And an insertion recess 3031d. The cylindrical portion 3031a is inclined so that the front end has substantially the same size as the out port 1008 in the front component member 1000, is long in the left and right, and the lower inner surface is lower toward the rear.

  The partition portion 3031b is provided near the rear end of the cylinder portion 3031a, and partitions the game ball B into a size that allows one passage on both the left and right sides. The front end side of the partition portion 3031 b is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball B. The insertion recess 3031d is inclined so as to move rearward as it goes upward so that the front side is perpendicular to the lower inclined inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3031a.

  The out-port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B which has flowed through the left side of the partition portion 3031 b in the cylinder portion 3031 a of the unit main body 3031. The out-port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B which has flowed through the right side of the partition portion 3031 b in the cylinder portion 3031 a of the unit main body 3031. The out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

  The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide the gaming ball B having passed through the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 downward, and has a partition plate 3034 a at the center in the left-right direction.

  In the out-of-ball detection unit 3030, the flange portion 3031c of the unit main body 3031 is attached to the front surface of the under-sphere discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 (see FIG. 130). In addition, the cylinder portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 in the state where the out ball detection unit 3030 is assembled on the game board 5, and the front of the flange portion 3031c is the game panel 1100 (See FIGS. 129 and 130).

  In the out-of-ball detection unit 3030, the upper end of the front end of the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 projects more forward than the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 in the assembled state on the game board 5 (FIG. 130). See). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3031 a of the unit main body 3031. Further, the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 (see FIG. 130).

  In the out ball detection unit 3030, the game ball B guided backward by the out guiding unit 1003 after flowing down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, After being supplied to the inside of the cylindrical portion 3031a and detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033, the sheet is discharged downward by the cover 3034. The out ball detection unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed without bringing the game ball B into contact with the substrate holder 1200.

  According to the out ball detection unit 3030 of the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the like are driven into the game area 5a. Since it is possible to detect gaming balls B (“out balls”) that are not accepted by any of the prize winning openings 2006, for example, acceptance of the gaming balls B to a specific winning opening is continuously detected. If the "out ball" is not detected despite the presence, it means that cheating is being performed on a specific winning opening, and it can be informed that cheating is being performed.

  In addition, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, and the bonus item The ratio of "safe balls" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of "safe balls" counted by the detection of the game ball B accepted by the winning opening 2006 and the number of "out balls".

  Furthermore, in the out ball detection unit 3030, since the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 provided on the left and right are partitioned by the partitioning portion 3031b, the gaming ball B which has flowed down the left side of the center character 2500 Can be guided to the out-port left sensor 3032 side, and the gaming ball B flowing down the right side of the center character 2500 can be guided to the out-port right sensor 3033 side, and the out-port left sensor 3032 The game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the object 2500 can be mainly detected, and the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center character 2500 can be mainly detected by the out-port right sensor 3033. Therefore, the number of gaming balls B detected per hour by the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 determines whether the player is tending to "left" or "right". Based on the determination, it is possible to promote the most suitable typing operation for the game situation and enjoy the intended game.

  In addition, since the protrusion of the partition portion 3031b is shortened to make it easy for the game ball B to get over it, when many game balls B enter the out port 1008 per time, the game ball of the partition portion 3031b is relatively large. The game ball B can escape to the left side or the right side where the amount of B is small, and the game ball B can be discharged without delay at the out port 1008.

  In addition, since the lower end of the cover 3034 is protruded lower than the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening The game ball B ("safe ball") that is received by the prize winning opening 2006 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward at the out ball detection unit 3030 and the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor It can be prevented that it is detected at 3033, and only the "out ball" can be detected accurately.

  In the present embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the out ball detection unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1101. While being able to do, it is possible to retrofit to the existing game board 5.

  In addition, in the game board 5, all the game balls B ("global") driven into the game area 5a are detected, or all the game spheres B ("global") discharged from the inside of the game area 5a If the "out ball" is detected by the out ball detection unit 3030, the numbers of "out ball", "safe ball", and "full sphere" are compared. Thus, the occurrence of clogging in the game board 5 can be detected.

[5-9b. Light guide plate effect unit]
Subsequently, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134. Fig. 132 (a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate rendering unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 133 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern substrate in the light guide plate effect unit from the front. FIG. 134 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is made to emit light.

  The light guide plate rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The light guide plate effect unit 3100 includes a square frame shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a transparent flat light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, and a unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102. And a first pattern substrate 3103 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the top surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted, and to the unit base 3101 on the left side of the light guide plate 3102 And a second pattern substrate 3104 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the left side surface of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted.

  In addition, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 covers the front of the transparent plate-like diffusion lens 3105 provided between the first pattern substrate 3103 and the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern substrate 3103 and the diffusion lens 3105. It is attached to the upper side of the unit base 3101 and attached to the left side of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the second design substrate 3104 and the back decoration 3106 having a relief-like decoration on the front And a left substrate cover 3107 in the form of a band plate.

  In addition, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 is attached to the lower front of the unit base 3101, and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, and Attached to the lower back ball discharge unit 3120 that receives the received gaming ball B and discharges it downward to the second V winning opening 2008 or the third loss opening 2556 of the third distribution device 2550 and the lower right side of the unit base 3101 Back right ball discharge unit 3130 for receiving and discharging the game ball B received in the first loss port 2535 in the center character 2500 and the first V winning hole 2007, and the back ball discharge unit 3120. It is attached and cools the third distribution drive motor 2555 of the center work 2500 A cooling fan 3140 because, provided the portion to be the rear of the warp inlet 2501 in the center won game 2500, (the not shown) a magnetic sensor for detecting the magnetism acting improperly are provided with a.

  The light guide plate 3102 includes a first pattern 3102a (see FIG. 134 (a)) formed of an uneven number of first reflecting portions for reflecting only light from above to the front, and light from the left only And a second pattern 3102b (see FIG. 134 (b)) formed of innumerable second reflective portions in the form of asperities. That is, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 can cause the first pattern 3102 a to emit light when the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 is emitted, and the light of the second pattern substrate 3104 emits the second pattern. 3102b can be displayed by light emission.

  In the light guide plate 3102, the asperities are minutely formed in the innumerable first reflecting portions forming the first pattern 3102a and the innumerable second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 3102b. When the LEDs of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the LEDs of the second pattern substrate 3104 are not illuminated, they appear transparent, and the back effect unit 3200 and the effect display device 1600 of the back unit 3000 disposed on the back side The effect image and the like displayed on can be viewed in a good state.

  The first pattern 3102a is a pattern that imitates the periphery of one eye of a predetermined character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 134 (a). Further, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), the second pattern 3102 b is a pattern consisting of the letters “CHANCE!”.

  The light guide plate 3102 also includes a lower notch 3102 c which is cut away upward from the lower side, and a right notch 3102 d which is cut away from the right side to the left. The lower notch portion 3102 c is for preventing contact with the clone 2553 of the third sorting device 2550 in the center character 2500, and the right notch portion 3102 d is the rear in the guide passage group 2520 of the center character 2500. It is for avoiding contact with the second guide passage 2522 which is twisted.

  The first pattern substrate 3103 is divided into three in the left-right direction. The second pattern substrate 3104 is divided into two in the vertical direction. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104 are full color LEDs.

  Back ball discharge unit 3120 is a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects gaming ball B received in general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects gaming ball B received in first starting opening 2002. And a second V winning hole sensor 3003 for detecting the game ball B received by the second V winning hole 2008, and a third loss mouth sensor for detecting the game ball B accepted by the third loss hole 2556. It is provided.

  The back ball discharge unit 3120 can discharge the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loss opening 2556 onto the substrate holder 1200. it can. An out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front of the under ball discharge unit 3120.

[5-9c. Back production unit]
Subsequently, the back effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 113 and the like. The back effect unit 3200 is mounted in the back box 3010 behind the light guide plate effect unit 3100. The back rendering unit 3200 has a plurality of hemispherical decorative bodies so as to surround the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 in front view. Behind the decorative bodies, there is provided a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted. Therefore, by making the LED of the decoration substrate emit light appropriately, it is possible to make the plurality of decorative bodies emit light and decorate, and it is possible to show the player the light emission effect by the decorative body.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 135 and FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the gaming board, in a state in which the second pattern is lighted and decorated by the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the first pattern is lighted and decorated in the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit. In the game board 5, the light guide plate effect of the back unit 3000 is made according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by the game ball B being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The unit 3100 and the back effect unit 3200 perform predetermined light emission effects.

  Specifically, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, it is mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 disposed on the left side of the light guide plate 3102 in front view. The plurality of LEDs being lit are caused to emit light, and the second pattern 3102 b is decorated to emit light. In this way, the character “CHAHCE!” Is lighted and decorated in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, which can indicate to the player the arrival of a chance, which may be good. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by making the user feel as if there is an expectation of the game.

  In addition, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed above the light guide plate 3102 are caused to emit light. , Light emitting decoration of the first pattern 3102a. Thereby, the player can be surprised by the light emission display of the eyes of the predetermined character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the player can be surprised. While being able to give a strong impact, it can be thought that an advantageous gaming state such as a "big hit game" will occur, and the sense of expectation for the game can be heightened.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the light emission effect by the light guide plate 3102 as described above and the light emission effect of the decorative body can be appropriately combined, and the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 It can be combined with an image (display effect). As a result, effects of various patterns can be presented to the player by appropriately combining the light emission effect, the display effect, etc., which can make it difficult for the player to get bored and at the same time, the player can be made by various effects. It can be enjoyed and it can control that a player's interest in a game is reduced.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, as shown in FIG. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the gaming ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU, a setting indicator 1310g for displaying set values and displaying an error, and partitioning into the game board 5 Base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of gaming balls B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the formed gaming area 5a , And a. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

  In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM") in the main control MPU, In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  In addition, the main control MPU incorporates a non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU can extract an ID code from a non-volatile RAM and can refer to it.

  The main control MPU also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU, and forces the main control MPU to be affected by electrical noise if the register changes to inconsistent contents. It is a circuit to reset. Such forced reset by the built-in reset circuit can not be disabled by control by the user program. Therefore, when the main reset MPU is subjected to a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, a check sum (sum value) error of the main control internal RAM always occurs as described later, so the contents of the main control internal RAM are completely erased ( It will be cleared). Even if the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

  In addition, the main control MPU is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “the main control built-in hardware that updates the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether to generate the jackpot gaming state among various random numbers related to gaming. It is described as “random number circuit”. The main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value of 0 to a value of 535 as a minimum and a value of 65535 as a minimum is preset) The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value as the value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first inputs a clock signal (main signal) to the main control MPU, with one value in a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without overlapping, and are within a predetermined numerical range. Once all the values in are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value in the high speed predetermined numerical range is input based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract values one after another without overlapping. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU takes the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and has no reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals when the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit to be

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received by the first start hole 2002, and the second start detects the game ball B received by the second start hole 2004. Accepted in the mouth sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the gaming ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, the large winning opening 2005 Large winning opening sensor 2403 which detects the game ball B which is done, the prize winning opening sensor 2513 which detects the game ball B which is accepted to the winning character prize hole 2006, the gaming ball B which is accepted to the first V winning hole 2007 The first V winning opening sensor 2514 to detect, the first lost opening sensor 2515 to detect the game ball B received by the first lost opening 2535, the first The second V winning hole sensor 3003 for detecting the game ball B accepted in the V winning hole 2008, the third lost mouth sensor for detecting the gaming ball B accepted in the third lost hole 2556, the out mouth 1008 An out port left sensor 3032 and an out port right sensor 3033 for detecting the game ball B, a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting improper magnetism in the game area 5a, and an out port provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 Detection signals from the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033, etc. that detect the game ball B collected by 1008 at any one of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit It is input to the input terminal.

  The detection signals from the setting key 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

  In addition, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are via the payout control board 633 (through, that is, a payout control input circuit and a payout control output circuit described later). When they are respectively input to the main control board 1310, they are respectively input to the input terminals of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

  The detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the second starting opening sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through the other substrate, that is, through the main control input circuit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU. On the other hand, each detection from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the prize winning opening sensor 2513, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor, the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 A signal is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, whereby the main control solenoid drive circuit from the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 The drive signal to each of the prize winning hole solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, and the second distribution solenoid 2545 is output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or predetermined Status display of function display unit 1400 from the output terminal of output port, normal symbol display, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special symbol Outputs each drive signal to the number-of-holds indicator, the round indicator, without passing through the other substrate, that is, directly . Further, the main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change substrate 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

  In addition, the main control MPU outputs various information (gaming information) about gaming to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (gaming information) about gaming from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port By outputting a release permission signal notifying that the release of the game ball B is permitted, a release permission signal notifying that the release of the game ball B is permitted to the payout control board 633 is output. The logic of the release permission signal that indicates that this release is allowed is set to the release permission logic when releasing the release, while the release suspension logic (release non-release permission logic) which reverses the release enable logic when not releasing the release. Set to In addition, the logic of the release permission signal is an initial value (default), and after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power recovery), the release permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt process described later is started The hardware is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permitting logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the special winning opening sensor 2403, the prize winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the second Although non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first missing port sensor 2515, the second V winning port sensor 3003, the third missing port sensor, the out port left sensor 3032, and the out port right sensor 3033 On the other hand, a contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the normal winning opening 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the normal winning Detection of the game ball B by the mouth sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, as the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the normal winning opening sensor 2401, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the gaming ball B enters frequently, so the gaming ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 Detection of B also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch with a high durability and a long life is used for the special winning opening sensor 2403 as well. In addition, since the game balls B fired in the game area 5a are collected in large quantities by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5, the detection of the game ball B by the out port left sensor 3032 The detection of the game ball B by the out-port right sensor 3033 also frequently occurs. Therefore, also for the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the gaming ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used as the general winning hole sensor 3001. In addition, regardless of the fact that the game ball B does not frequently enter the general winning opening 2001, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life may be used.

  In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (gaming information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, etc. To Furthermore, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the main control MPU will be described later in detail, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control substrate 1310 from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620, as described in detail later. The power supply substrate 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. (To describe)). The main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut down by this capacitor. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  In addition, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The power failure notice signal is input not only to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, but also to a payout control board 633 or the like.

6-2. Disbursement control board]
The payout control board 633 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming ball B is a payout control unit 633a for performing various control relating to the payout and a launch control by the launch solenoid 542 A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball during maintenance The ball extraction switch for discharging the gaming ball B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball pulling operation And.

6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a for performing various controls on the payout in the payout control board 633 is a micro not shown in detail but incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout The apparatus includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310 In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball-off detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control via the payout control I / O port. It is input to the MPU.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  In addition, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, a power failure of the main control board 1310 The power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and the error cancellation signal from the error cancellation switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, or displays a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in serial mode via the payout control I / O port. Or, the number of balls of the gaming ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 633), and when the number “1” is displayed, it indicates “ball out” (specifically, the ball is cut off) Informing that there is no gaming ball B in the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, and when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that "the ball is seen" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B gets caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 and notifies that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, "Count "It is a switch error" (specifically, it is informed that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed "Retry error" (specifically, notification that the number of payout retries has reached a preset upper limit) is notified, and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full" (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the far cover unit 150 indicates that the game ball is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number "7" is displayed. At the same time, it informs that it is "CR not connected" (in other words, it indicates that the electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the dispensing control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the gaming ball B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial method, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and sent to the payout control MPU. It is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the lent gaming ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining degree to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is the ball lending unit It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

6-2 b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633 b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not illustrated in detail, the emission control unit 633 b is provided with an emission control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to emission are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for firing the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the above, a firing solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing And a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B per minute are shot toward the gaming area 5a and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. The ball sending reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number, and is output to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or finger touches the handle 182, and whether to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball B according to the intention of the player A detection signal from the one-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the emission control circuit after being input to the emission control input circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the emission control input circuit and input to the emission timing control circuit. A release permission signal from the main control board 1310 which transmits a permission to release the game ball B is input to the release control circuit after being input to the release control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of striking the gaming ball B toward the gaming area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing timing control circuit satisfies firing condition 1 that a palm or finger is touching the handle 182 based on a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and based on the CR connection signal, the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board Is electrically connected, and the firing condition 3 that the firing of the gaming ball B is permitted based on the firing permission signal from the main control substrate 1310 does not hold, the gaming ball B is not established. For example, the launch solenoid drive circuit can not launch the game ball B without outputting a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542, because the launch reference pulse for launching the game area 5a is not output.

  In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the drive current for shooting the game ball B toward the game area 5a with the launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 182, the firing reference pulse In response to the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit is a game ball stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is finished, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current to the ball launching device 540 side send. Thus, while the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, although the discharge control unit 633 b that performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145 is provided in the payout control substrate 633, the power control substrate 633 is provided It may be configured. In this case, the emission permission signal from the main control substrate 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply substrate 630, or may be input to the power supply substrate 630 via the payout control substrate 633, or May be input to the power supply substrate 630 via a relay substrate.

6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 137, the peripheral control board 1510 performs peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of

6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 for effect control in the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces etc. are on one semiconductor chip. A peripheral control IC integrated, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC for performing high-quality music, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects to which the sound source IC refers And a stored sound ROM.

  In the peripheral control IC, a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral is based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC is a game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 serial I / O for lamp driving board For the game board decoration drive board, the game board side drive data for transmitting a drive signal to the drive motor for transmitting to each decoration board of the game board 5 from the port or operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 The operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 or transmitted to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port, and the operation button up and down Door side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the motion motor 367 etc., and a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 Control data indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port and the door display 3 1600. In addition to transmitting the command) to the effect display control unit 1512 from the serial I / O port for display control unit, in addition to outputting a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC Do.

  A detection signal from the third distribution detection sensor 2552 of the center role 2500 provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC. Further, detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

  In addition, the peripheral control IC CPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit is based on the operation signal. It monitors the operation of 1512.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and the vibration speaker 354 and the top center speaker 462 provided on the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 etc. Control is performed so that sounds, such as music and sound effects, matched to various effects flow from the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch projecting rearward from the peripheral control substrate box in which the peripheral control substrate 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4 are acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown), and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used in combination to diagnose whether or not the system is running away.

  The display command output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in this embodiment, 19.2 as the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time). A kilo (k) bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, gaming board side lighting blink command, movable body driving command, etc. outputted from the peripheral control IC CPU to the game board 5 have a plurality of serial input / output different from the display command. It is performed by the port, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

6-3 b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 performs display control of the effect display device 1600 as well as a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands, and various data. (An abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied Have.

  The display control MPU incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. I have control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the image ROM in time series when transferring the various data to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined in advance in the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

  The display control MPU extracts the screen data at the top of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the screen data at the top It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts drawing data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not receive the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. A line buffer method is adopted as VDP. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. Is a method of outputting to

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, as the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as an integrated unit. For example, in the case of displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called "sprite". Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites will be used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. The sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the position to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relation (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap with each other.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, a total of six sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 × 3 Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeats main scanning to set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front, and main scanning in the direction intersecting the one direction It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. The effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line As main scanning, when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, the image data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right.

[7. Game content]
The game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117, FIG. 120 to FIG. 124 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the hit strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously played in one minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nails N While the flow-down speed of B is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball B, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 to the left of the center role 2500.

  When the game ball B inserted into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side (left side relative to the upper right peripheral wall 2510) in the front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, While abutting on the plurality of obstacle nails N, the region on the left side of the center character 2500 will flow down. When the gaming ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game balls B supplied to the stage 2503 roll on the stage 2503 and move back and forth, and are discharged forward from the center portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central central release portion 2503a at the center of the stage 2503, since the central discharge portion 2503a is positioned immediately above the first start opening 2002, the first probability is high with a high probability. Accepted at the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. Be done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 and the large opening 2005 is there.

  By the way, when the gaming ball B which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is brought closer to the center in the left and right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N. There is a possibility of being accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 or the like. Then, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. Be done.

  On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball B struck into the upper part of the center character 2500 is on the right side (upper space above the upper right peripheral wall 2510) than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500. When entering the section 2505), it is discharged above the ordinary winning opening 2003 of the center article 2500 through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520 of the center article 2500, After being in contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted above the normal winning opening 2003, the normal winning opening 2003 is accepted with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center work 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose inlet is open near the stopper 1006 and an opening whose left is spaced from the inlet of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is driven with a strength to abut against the stopper 1006 (so-called right-handed), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and enters the upstream space 2505 and When the game ball B is hit with a non-contacting strength (a strength somewhat weaker than a right-handed hit), the user enters the second guide passage 2522 with high probability. That is, the game balls B driven into the upstream space portion 2505 circulate in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

  In the present embodiment, when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated more than the first guide passage 2521, the normal winning opening 2003 can be received with high probability.

  When game ball B is received in this normal winning opening 2003 and detected by normal winning opening sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) of games from payout device 580 through main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 When the ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201 and a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery result is “normal hit”, the second starting opening in the attacker unit 2400 is closed. The state in which 2004 is open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds) enables the game ball B to be received in the second start port 2004.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B being accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  It should be noted that, when game ball B is accepted by ordinary winning opening 2003 during the period from the acceptance of gaming ball B by ordinary winning opening 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result may be started Since it is not possible, the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is reserved until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The game ball B that has entered the right attacking channel 2430 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is released onto the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 without an opportunity to be accepted by the second starting opening 2004 or the large winning opening 2005. It is discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008. On the other hand, the game ball B which has passed the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 passes between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, and through the special winning opening guiding shelf 2424 , Passing in front of the closed big winning opening 2005 and discharged onto the lower right rail 1004.

  Then, when the gaming ball B passes between the second starting opening upper induction shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, the normal lottery result drawn by the reception of the gaming ball B at the normal winning opening 2003 is “ When the second starting opening door 2411 is advanced in the normal hit, the gaming ball B is guided by the second starting opening door 2411, and the gaming ball B is received in the second starting opening 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633. Be done.

  The game ball B which has not been induced by the second start opening door 2411 falls onto the big winning opening induction shelf 2424, and it passes from the left end of the large winning opening induction shelf 2424 right through the front of the closed big winning opening door 2413 It is discharged onto the lower rail 1004, and discharged from the game area 5a from the out port 1008.

  On the other hand, the gaming ball B which is guided to the second start opening 2004 side by the second start opening door 2411 but has not been accepted by the second start opening 2004 because the second start opening door 2411 retreats midway is the second It enters into the attacker's right passage 2430 from the third opening 2433 on the lower side of the starting opening 2004 and is released onto the lower right rail 1004 without passing through the front of the closed big winning opening door 2413 and It is discharged out of the game area 5a.

  In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second opening 2432 of the right attacking passage 2430 is opened, The game ball B passing through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 enters the right attack passage 2430 through the second opening 2432 with low probability. The game ball B that has entered the attacking right passage 2430 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5 a without being associated with the special winning opening 2005.

  As described above, since the gaming ball B which has circulated the first guide passage 2521 is not generally received by the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 by the reception of the gaming ball B to the normal winning opening 2003. In addition to the fact that a normal lottery result in which the player is in the open state is not derived so much, the game ball B is not well accepted in the second start port 2004. On the other hand, since game ball B which circulated the 2nd guidance passage 2522 is accepted by regular winning a prize opening 2003 with probability higher than the 1st guidance passage 2521, the 2nd starting opening 2004 by passing normal prize opening 2003 of game ball B There is a high probability that a normal lottery result (“normal hit”) in which the player is in the open state is drawn, and the game ball B is likely to be accepted in the second start port 2004.

  From such a thing, since the player performs a hitting operation of the gaming ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the hitting strength that the gaming ball B enters the upstream space portion 2505. And, with the hitting strength that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the hitting strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a. It does not. Thereby, it is possible to make the player hard to get bored by giving a change to the hitting operation of the game ball B, and for the player to enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B to suppress the decrease of interest It can be done.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball B is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, A lottery of special lottery results is performed to generate "small hit" and "shortened time". Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, in the special lottery result drawn by the game ball B being accepted in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, "loss", "first small hit", "second small hit", " There are 3rd small hit ", 2R big hit", "15R big hit", etc. In the present embodiment, the second special lottery result is greater than the first special lottery result in the lottery probability of “small hit” (“first small hit”, “second small hit”, “third small hit”) Is set high.

  If the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 is "small hit", "small hit" According to the type of “,” the winning combination winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern (see FIG. 123). Since the prize winning hole 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center prize 2500, when the "small hit" is drawn, the "right strike" is made and the first guidance aisle The game ball B is thrown into 2521.

  When the "small hit" is the "first small hit", the opening and closing time of the winning feature winning opening 2006 is short, and the game ball B can hardly be accepted. In the case of "second small hit" or "third small hit", the time when the prize winning opening 2006 is open is long, and the game ball B is accepted to the prize winning opening 2006 by "right hitting". Probability is high. When game balls B are received in the prize winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Be done.

  When "small hit" is "second small hit" or "third small hit" and one of the accepted game balls B receives the game ball B when the game ball B is accepted to the prize winning opening 2006, the first distribution It is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531 a of the distribution rotating body 2531 in the device 2530. When the “small hit” is the “second small hit”, the game ball B stored in the storage portion 2531 a of the distribution rotating body 2531 passes the second distribution device 2540 and the third distribution device 2550. Supplied on the Kroon 2553. After that, it is flipped by the distribution rotary blade 2554 and is distributed to either the second V winning port 2008 or the third loss port 2556. When the game ball B is accepted (sorted) in the second V winning opening 2008, “15R big hit” is executed. On the other hand, when the gaming ball B is received in the third loss port 2556, “15R big hit” and the like are not executed, and the state returns to the previous state.

  On the other hand, when "small hit" is "third small hit", the game ball B stored in the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is to the first V winning opening 2007 side in the second distribution device 2540. It is distributed and "15R big hit" is executed.

  Acceptance of gaming ball B to first V winning opening 2007 and second V winning opening 2008, first special lottery result and the first drawn by acceptance of gaming ball B to first starting opening 2002 and second starting opening 2004 (Ii) If the special lottery result is “2R big hit” or “15R big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, or If any of the conditions for receiving a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B in the big winning opening 2005 is satisfied, the open / close pattern (one open / close pattern) that makes the game ball B in an unacceptable closed state A "big hit" game is executed in which one round is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds, for example, two rounds or fifteen rounds).

  Since this special winning opening 2005 is mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center character 2500, allowing the player to hit the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center character 2500. Can. When gaming ball B is received in big winning hole 2005 when big winning hole 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from payout device 580 by main control substrate 1310 and payout control substrate 633 Game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 can receive the gaming ball B, by causing the large winning opening 2005 to receive the gaming ball B, many gaming balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

  The guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center product 2500 is easier to drive than the second guide passage 2522 on the first guide passage 2521 side, while the second guide passage 2522 Because it is less likely to be accepted by the large winning opening 2005 than the player side, it is possible to allow the player to select which passage to perform the striking operation, making it difficult for the player to get bored with various games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, when it becomes “2R big hit” during “15R big hit” or time saving state, after the “big hit” game is over, it is drawn by the acceptance of gaming ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 The variation time of the special symbol for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is shorter than usual until the predetermined number of times of variation (for example, 100 times) is reached. Speed up the time until the "hit" is drawn.

  In the "big hit" game aiming at the large winning opening 2005, since the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 are present on the way until the gaming ball B reaches the large winning opening 2005, the large winning opening 2005 is aimed at. It is highly likely that the game ball B will be received by the second starting opening 2004, and if the next "big hit" or "small hit" is drawn during the "big hit" game, the player has an advantageous gaming state which is advantageous Can last for a long time and make the player more entertaining.

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 indicate the reception of the game ball B from the start of the special drawing to the suggestion of the special drawing result drawn from the start of the special drawing. When the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Be put on hold. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row in which each pattern row is fluctuated and variably displayed in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Is sequentially displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows displayed in the stop pattern become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective symbols are stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is made. An advantageous gaming state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the finalized image is The time until it is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 in the periphery control board 1510 according to the drawn special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, or the rotation operation can be inhibited. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the effect unit 3200, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game can do.

  Furthermore, in the player control type player operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 on the peripheral control substrate 1510, when the operation to be operated by the player is mistaken or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player of that. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed or the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates or the like. The effect display device 1600 displays that effect.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment (first example), the game ball B hit at the top in the game area 5a along the periphery from the left side guides the right side of the center character 2500. A predetermined benefit (predetermined number of games may be received when accepted through the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 in the passage group 2520 and the ordinary winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 provided on the downstream side. The game ball B aiming at the right side of the center character 2500 having the regular winning opening 2003 is given to the player because the normal lottery of whether to open and close the second starting opening 2004 is given along with the payout of the ball B. It is possible to play a game in which the player's typing operation is performed.

  The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center character 2500 are twisted in the longitudinal direction so as to be aligned in the front-rear direction in the middle portion 2520a aligned in the left-right direction On the upper inlet side, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the left-right direction, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly identified. The hitting operation of the game ball B makes it easy to make a break, and the hitting operation of the game ball B aimed at the desired first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 can be enjoyed.

  On the other hand, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the player is opposed to the game ball B circulating the portion because it is twisted so as to be lined up in the back-and-forth direction From which it is difficult to determine which guidance passage is circulating, making the player pay attention to the gaming ball B circulating in the first guidance passage 2521 or the second guidance passage 2522 it can. The first guiding passage 2521 and the second guiding passage 2522 allow the gaming ball B being guided (distributed) to be visible from the front, and the first guiding passage 2521 and the second guiding passage 2522 are formed by transparent members. Since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap with each other at the portion of the hatching portion 2520a aligned in the front and back direction, it is difficult to recognize the route of each guide passage at first glance It can be Furthermore, on the outlet side of the lower part of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted so as to be aligned in the left-right direction. Although the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly distinguished, since they are twisted twice on the upstream side, the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the inlet side The relationship between the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the outlet side can be determined and unclear.

  Therefore, on the right side of the center character 2500, it is difficult to know where it will come out from when the gaming ball B is hit (entered) in one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. It can be difficult to recognize what the game result will be like after the group 2520 is distributed, and when a game ball B is hit in which guide passage of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a regular winning will be made Since it is difficult to know whether the game ball B is likely to be accepted in the mouth 2003, it is possible to care which guiding passage the game ball B is circulating when the game ball B is hit, and the player is distributed It can be made to pay attention to the game ball B which is doing.

  Also, by focusing on the game balls B circulating through any of the first guidance passage 2521 and the second guidance passage 2522, the guidance passage (second guidance likely to be accepted by the normal prize winning opening 2003) The player can be thrilled by whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the passage 2522), and the expectation for the game can be enhanced, and the unexpected exit (the exit of the first guidance passage 2521) ), The player can be surprised by giving surprise to the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, in order to make the game ball B enter the second guide passage 2522 having an exit that is likely to be accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, it is necessary to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B. On the other hand, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted and hit. Therefore, the degree of difficulty can be given to the hitting operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by the change of the hitting operation of the game ball B. This makes it possible to enjoy the operation of B. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have a portion of the overlapping portion 2520a aligned in the front-rear direction, the width of the guide passage group 2520 in the horizontal direction can be made The space can be relatively easily secured on the right side of the center character 2500, and the prize winning opening 2006 and the first distribution device 2530, etc. are arranged in the secured space. Thus, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of further entertaining the player.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 143. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power on process, FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power on process of FIG. 138, and FIG. 140 is an example of the main control timer interrupt process FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process, FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display process, and FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation The display process will be described.

9-1. Various random numbers]
A special random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state as various random numbers used for game control, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine an initial value of this special random number A decision random number, a reach determination random number for use in deciding whether or not to reach when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, and the first special symbol indicator and the second special of the function display unit 1400 A random number for a variable display pattern to be used for determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol variably displayed on the symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400 when generating a big hit gaming state Design random numbers for use in determination of big hit symbols and small hit symbols displayed and derived by symbol display (determination of hit types), and for determination of initial values of this symbol random number Big hit symbol for the initial value determination random number or the like for there are prepared. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, a random number per standard symbol determination for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece that enables the reception of the game ball B of the second starting port 2004, and the general symbol per symbol The initial value determination random for determination per normal symbol for use in determination of the initial value of the random number for determination, and the normal for use in determination of the variation display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A random number etc. for the symbol variation display pattern is prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit makes a first value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs high-speed presetting based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. After extracting other values within the defined numerical range one after another and extracting all the values within the predetermined numerical range, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is supposed to

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number per pattern normally is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one to count up. The counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining the normal symbol to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining the normal pattern. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol per round determination is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is called "initial value update type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal determination per symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated at the time of power on, or various processes stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the main control side power on process described later. The value (sum value) of the checksum obtained by calculating the sum by regarding the information as a numerical value is equal to the value (sum value) of the checksum stored in the main control side power-off process (during power-off) If you do not want to clear the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, etc., the initial value determination random number per normal symbol is determined from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU. The initial value derivation process which always takes out the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter which takes out the ID code and updates the random number for determination per normal symbol based on the taken out ID code And line, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, in the case of the initial value determination random number for determination per normal symbol, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is always overwritten and updated by the execution of the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set for the initial value determination random number per symbol normal determination is derived using the ID code, and the manufacturer of the main control MPU incorporates the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU by the manufacturer. The first security measure that the ID code can not be rewritten even if the external device is stored if the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process when clearing except the specific area out of the entire area of the main control internal RAM A second security measure that derives the same fixed value based on the ID code by execution and a two-step security measure by the second security measure are prevented from being analyzed.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is taken out from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU, and this taken out ID code is used as an initial value determination random number per determination. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire the game ball B paid out as a prize ball acquires the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal pattern and the determination value for the normal pattern match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. The ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number per normal symbol judgment and the normal symbol per-coincidence value match is completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 was completely disassembled and analyzed because it is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. A momentary stop is generated at a predetermined interval obtained, and even if the game ball B passes through the normal winning opening 2003 at every predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed and the game ball B is moved to the second start opening 2004 It is not possible to generate an acceptable gaming state.

9-2. Main control side power on process]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU is configured to set a stack pointer at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under control by the main control MPU, as shown in FIG. 138 and FIG. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting the RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clear process (step S12). In this blackout clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a blackout notice signal from the blackout monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure notification voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). It is done.

  Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear is performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310 f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is performed, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated. In addition, since it is a very short time within the period from the start of the main control side power-on process which is this routine to the determination in step S14, actually, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f.

  In the determination of step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when determining in step S14 that the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU enables execution of the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU for a predetermined time after power-on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, game information related to the game such as probability fluctuation, unpaid award balls, and other information (for example, main award balls number) This flag is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including the information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), etc. It is set to 1 when deleting various information, and 0 when not deleting various information. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in a general purpose storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Subsequently to step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether there is an opening operation of the body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and a detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame The setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and turned on by the first ON. Is performed based on the signal of the setting key ON from the setting key switch 1311 a. The main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch, and the setting key switch 1311 a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. Therefore, it is determined that the main frame 4 is not open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame opening switch while it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. And / or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that a predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

  In the determination of step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU sets the value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, when determining in step S18 that the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not established, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a setting key cylinder of the current setting (setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. Is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time of the first ON operation), and performs the setting change of the setting value The value is set to 1 when permission is given, and to 0 when it is not permitted to change settings of the set value. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system for performing the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is waiting for activation (booting). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state capable of receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. In addition, since the delivery control board 633 completes boot in a short time as compared with the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, the delivery control board 633 is Can receive various commands from).

  Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off or when a power failure or momentary stop occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The determination in step S24 is performed based on the power failure advance signal. When it is determined in step S24 that the main control MPU determines that there is an input of the power failure advance signal, the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the point that the determination of step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process of step S22 will be described later.

  In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure advance notification signal, it determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value 1 when permitting setting change of the setting value, and to a value 0 when not permitting changing the setting of the setting value.

  In the determination of step S25, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, ie, does not permit setting change of the setting value. It is determined (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when erasing various information, and a value 0 when not erasing various information. In the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the various information is not erased, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is to calculate the sum of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU causes the calculated checksum value (sum value) to be the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off process described later (power-off) described later. It is determined whether there is a match (step S30). If the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the values match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in main control internal RAM in main control side power off processing described later It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. In the inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection. Detailed explanation about, is mentioned below.

  In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the values (sum values) of the checksums do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU does not have the backup flag BK-FLG as the value 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. By this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is finished is maintained, and the game can not be progressed at all, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and turned on again. In this error display process, the detailed description will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off If it is determined, it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or it can not be relied upon), and an error display notifying that effect is performed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Note that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is at the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After the pachinko machine 1 is powered on after the first ON operation by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise, the main control side power on process, which is the main routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch in the determination of step S18 described above, and the setting key is set using the signal of setting key ON. By determining that the switch 1311a is turned on with the setting key, it is determined that the predetermined setting change permission condition is satisfied, and the value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to 1 in step S20A described above. In order to set, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has the value 1 in the determination of step S25 described above, that is, it is determined that setting change of the setting value is permitted, and setting change processing of step S37 described later. Subsequently, in the process of step S38 described later, the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area in the entire area. Release the RAM error has to be able to proceed a game by (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error release method").

  As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f. The main control side power-on process, which is a routine, is started. The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated in the determination of step S 14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S 16 A described above. In the determination of step S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 1, that is, it is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later It is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game by clearing and removing (hereinafter referred to as "the second RAM error canceling method").

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines whether If the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, if it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, an error display is performed in step S33 and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When it is reported that there is an abnormality (or something that can not be trusted) in the contents stored in, two cancellation methods of the first RAM error cancellation method and the second RAM error cancellation method Can be done by As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the setting value at all, it is possible to release the RAM error by performing the second RAM error canceling method by the RAM clear switch 1310 f.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control built-in A work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU proceeds with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to the state where the power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary interruption, illegal means (for example, a fraudster is in the hem of an arm) The high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device is irradiated to the main control substrate 1310 to reset the main control MPU itself, and also includes a state where it is restored thereafter.

  Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, since various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed by performing various processes thereafter, the main control side power-off process described later is normally ended and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for the specific area.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, when permitting the setting change of the setting value to be performed, the main control MPU Perform (step S37). In this setting change processing, although the detailed description will be described later, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311 b of the setting changing substrate 1311 is pressed based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b of the setting changing substrate 1311 Every time the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, and the determination key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. The changed set value is determined based on the signal of (4) and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU.

  In the process of step S37 or in the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (it is 1), that is, when it is determined to delete various information, the main control internal RAM The specific area is cleared out of the entire area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control internal RAM (an area excluding the specific area among all the areas of the main control internal RAM). In this embodiment, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG does not have a value of 0 (is a value of 1), that is, in addition to when it is determined to delete various information, the setting control process is always completed. The specific area of the entire area is cleared (a predetermined area of the main control internal RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the entire area of the main control internal RAM)) is cleared. Here, the “specific area” is the area for the setting value only area in which the setting value is stored, and the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5 a sectioned in the game board 5. And an out-sphere counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) is stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set value to be changed in setting change processing to be described later, and the out ball count dedicated area is the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 to be counted in ball count processing to be described later. The counting result (total number) of the number of balls is stored.

  The main control MPU may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Also, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310 f instructs the RAM clear and the various information is to be erased, the main control MPU causes the main control When the power off process is not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and the random number per pattern is determined based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process is always performed to derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned standard symbol determination random number for the initial pattern. Set the decision random number.

  Following step S38, the main control MPU sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading out the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value of 0, for example. In addition, the main control MPU proceeds with the game based on the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the watchdog timer control register”) incorporated in the main control MPU to set an initial value to the main control built-in WDT which monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally. The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register to start the main control built-in WDT and start the timing until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT starts up, clocking by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register (built in the main control MPU) is reached until this timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, when the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is started and clocking is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before this clocked time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The timing by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timing is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting the clocking again. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel) incorporated in the main control MPU In the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to (1), setting of the communication speed and setting of presence / absence of parity etc. are performed, and in the transmission serial port control register, setting of initialization of the transmission circuit and setting of transmission permission are made.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in the testing organization of the gaming machine, the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) etc. when the power is turned on.

  Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers relating to the game, the special random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state is random number in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU to update by hardware. In addition to performing settings such as latching and acquisition, activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is started by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. When all the values in the specified numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract one after another without duplicating other values inside. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control internal hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control internal hard random number circuit, and the main control internal hardware when this latch signal is input The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets this acquired random number value as a special random number.

  Following step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to indicate that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. The power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are created to be transmitted information as the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM Remember to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various kinds of information are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information is completed, the power on state command, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. A detailed description of the point at which reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described later.

  Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). As a result of this setting, a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S54). When shutting off the power supply of pachinko machine 1 or when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure notification as described above. Ru. The determination in step S54 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure advance signal, the main control MPU performs non-coincidence random number update processing (step S56). In this non-coincidence random number update process, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation display pattern, the random number for big hit symbol initial value determination, the random number for small hit symbol initial value determination, etc. are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the software updates random numbers that are not related to the collision judgment (big hit judgment). In addition, the random number per normal symbol judgment, the initial value determination random number per normal symbol judgment, the random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern, etc. described above are also updated by this non-coincidence random number update processing.

  After step S56, the main control MPU returns to step S54 again, determines whether or not there is an input of a power failure advance notification signal, and if there is no input of this power failure notification signal, non-falling random number update processing is performed in step S56. The steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main process".

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S54 that the main control MPU has determined that there is an input of the power failure advance signal, the main control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control MPU starts to output a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing for starting output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear processing of step S12 is performed.

  Following step S60, the main control MPU, for example, stops the drive signals being output to the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the adder solenoid 2414, the base monitor 1310 h, etc. (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the gaming information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the main control internal RAM can not be accessed by the setting of the RAM access prohibition, updating of the contents of the main control internal RAM can be prevented.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU with respect to the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on process again. The process of step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  As described above, the main control MPU is subject to forced reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU can not perform the determination of step S54 and can not perform the main control side power-off process. Therefore, when the main control MPU is subjected to a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and again executes the main control-side power on process. . That is, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, the value (sum value) of the checksum in the main control-side power-off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. When the power is shut off, the value (sum value) of the checksum stored when the main control side power-off process is executed, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit and restarted The value (sum value) can not match, and a check sum (sum value) error occurs in the main control internal RAM without exception, and a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control internal RAM in the process of step S38. It will be completely erased (cleared).

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed when power is restored thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is ended normally. Is examining. As described above, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the game backup information is stored by fraud or not.

  When the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in the determination of step S25, that is, when setting change of the set value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1). When it is determined that the various information is to be erased, the process of step S38 erases (clears) completely except for the specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (precisely, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310 f), the setting value is changed and decided When the setting change that can be performed is performed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change process), the main control MPU always clears the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is, for example, when the operation of the game hall is finished when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310 f is pressed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation) If it is a hit, etc.), it is necessary to delete (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information by the start of the next business, so a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like should use RAM clear switch 1310f. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of In addition, in the case where the setting value is determined to be changed, when the setting changing process is performed (even when the current setting value is maintained as a result, it is obtained by the setting value before the setting changing process is performed). It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information including various information such as game information etc. from the main control built-in RAM As described above, the setting key is currently set in addition to the change of the setting value. Since it is an important key that allows confirmation of setting values, etc., possession of only a limited person, including the store manager of the game hall, is permitted and limited to 2 to 3. In this embodiment, the setting values Even if the change is not determined, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed by only a limited specific person, the clerk of the game hall clerk or the like needs to erase (clear) the game backup information. Clear switch 13 By performing the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing portion is pressed in 0f, thereby making it possible to erase from the main control chip RAM game backup information (clear).

  Here, the point which performs determination of the presence or absence of the power failure alerting | reporting signal of step S24 following the wait time waiting | standby process of step S22 is demonstrated. First, with regard to the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notification signal in step S24, that is, after the wait time standby processing in step S22, the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined and the subsequent processing is advanced. Explain the problems in

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU receives a charge in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or an instantaneous interruption occurs and the power from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. It is designed to be applied as direct current +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. That is, even if the power from the island facility of the game hall is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the island charged with the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as direct current +5 V to make the island of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is shut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, while performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and an island facility of the game hall The main control side power-off process can be reliably completed when the power supply from the above is shut off.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power recovery, the standby time until the system performing drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots) (boot timer: in this embodiment) 2.5 seconds has been set), and if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs immediately before the standby time is reached, hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 at the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU Charge is charged as DC +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even when the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, Kicking it may not be able to complete processing upon the main control side power-off. For this reason, based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM, the value at which the checksum is calculated is not stored, and the main control side power-on process is started again at power recovery.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time standby process at step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is processed at step S28. If the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occur in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for the specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated by a staff such as a game hall at the time of power recovery, and it is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if there is no intention indication by a staff such as a game hall staff called RAM clear. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information will be erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure advance signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure advance signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the input of the power failure notification signal continues. Thus, the game can not be progressed. Although the value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is, as described above, mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all even if the setting of RAM access permission is performed in step S10.

  Thus, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination of step S24, the game can not be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) Can be prevented from being updated, and no change occurs in the calculation result of the checksum. Thus, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being initialized immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power recovery.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure advance signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure advance signal is not input (that is, step S22 Pachinko machine when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game, if it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process) Even if the power supply to 1 is shut off, the power supply from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, causes the game to proceed according to the progress of this game and other information A step of backup processing for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing at the time of main control side power supply interruption configured with the processing of 58 to step S68 and the infinite loop, the main control MPU of the main control MPU When rebooting, it is determined that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64). Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby causing the contents of the main control built-in RAM It is possible to start the main control side power-off process again without updating the key at all, but immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is not input The main control side power-off process can be reliably completed within the "temporary power failure securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and the power from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs. In the case where the main control side power-off process can not be completed within the “instant interruption or power supply securing period” of approximately 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. If the power failure notification signal is input, the processing returns to the determination in step S24 again. As long as remain input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game.

  Since the progress of the game can not be performed by such software, the step after the step S24 (specifically, the interruption initialization is performed in the step S42, and thereafter, the interruption permission is made in the step S52) Content of main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment) by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later A mechanism was adopted in which it is possible to prevent various information (including information indicating the value of the counter value) from being updated. In this way, when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination To ensure that the main control side power-off process is completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and so on) By dividing the information into two parts, a part to be covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) is not changed at all , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.)) are surely prevented from being changed So that the can.

  Next, the point will be described where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery) To communicate, create a power on state command classified as power on, a power on main control return destination command, and a power on main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command and send it as main information with built-in main control It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, the problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and the information for instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414, that is, A problem will be described in the case where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when power is turned on at the time of power on at the time of power on is not performed in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit gaming state screen (for example, a big hit gaming effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 performs main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored to start driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes. It will shift to the state open from the state closed by the member.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a big hit gaming state as the gaming state, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main power control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the big hit gaming state I can not show at all which round of. That is, for example, the game winning ball 1 enters the big winning opening 2005 and is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403, and the big winning opening 1 count display command to convey the number of gaming balls B entering the big winning opening 2005 is mainly used Even if the control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives, the peripheral control board 1510 is the ball of the gaming ball B that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it can not be displayed at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds it is).

  In such a situation, when the main control board 1310 ends, for example, the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (the fourth round), the driving of the attachment solenoid 2414 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral winning control board 1510 from the main control board 1310 a large winning opening 1 closing display command instructing to shift to the closed state (that is, start closing the round between the big winning port 2005 of the attack unit 2400). When the main control board 1310 starts five rounds (fifth round) of the big hit gaming state, it starts to drive the attacher solenoid 2414 and opens the big winning opening 2005 from being closed by the opening / closing member. To shift to the state where the game is being played (that is, the fifth round of To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above, and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, the game state where the game ball B becomes acceptable to the second start port 2004 becomes a game state that indicates that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the movable piece is open The main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece and causes the second start to be performed, while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600). When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the port 2004 is in the open state, and the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of, thereby starting the driving of the starting opening solenoid 2412 and moving the movable piece So that the migrating second start hole 2004 is operated to the state for closing.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the gaming state and the gaming ball B can be received in the second start port 2004 so that the gaming ball B can be received and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary stop or power failure occurs. When the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the power recovery. Can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, but the gaming ball B can be accepted to the second start port 2004 and the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player. The peripheral control board 1510 can not display the screen notifying the effect on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball B is sent to the second starting port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. It may be forgotten that it is a gaming state that can be accepted, and in such a case, it is restored to the gaming state in which the gaming ball B can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Despite that, the screen for instructing the game in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen for instructing the game of entering the game ball B into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed As a result, there is also a problem that the player can not understand what kind of game the player plays.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there has been a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can not be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. There was a problem that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to power on), the power on state command In order to transmit the power on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the power on state command classified as power on in step S50, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on A main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thus, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, for example, in the above-described example, in the fourth round of the big hit gaming state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts being driven by the attachment solenoid 2414 as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the big winning opening 2005 is released from being closed by the opening / closing member The peripheral control board 1510 can notify the peripheral control board 1510 that it should shift to the state, so the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is a big hit gaming state and the A screen (for example, "It is a big hit. A big winning opening is open. The big winning opening is open. The game ball B is displayed on the big winning opening. Please display the message telling the player the message "Please play the game so that the player can enter the ball" in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine has a big winning opening after power recovery. It is possible to instruct a game to make the game ball B enter the ball game in 2005, and for example, in the above-mentioned example, the game state in which the game ball B can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player In the game state, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power returns, the drive of the starting port solenoid 2412 is started as the return destination of the main control board 1310 to open the movable piece. Make a screen to tell that it is in the state of opening the second starting opening 2004 (eg, "the movable piece is open. Play the game so that the game ball B enters the second starting opening For the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine by displaying on the display area of the effect display device 1600 a screen to transmit the message "Please give the player a message of A game of entering the ball B can be instructed.

  As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, it is possible to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of a manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28. The calculation and the determination of step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, a main composed of the processing of step S58 to step S68 which is the backup processing described above and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, the process proceeds to step S30. In the comparison determination, there is no possibility that the values of the checksums will match, and it is always cleared except for a specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in step S38.

  As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at the time of power on is performed in step S50, the power on state command classified as power on, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, the power on status command, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball Only three commands, ie, the number information output judgment counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt process described later, these commands are first sent a power on status command, then a power on primary control return destination command is sent, and then the power on main notification ball number An information output determination counter notification command is to be transmitted. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power on state command from the main control board 1310 is taken as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, in the power-on state command, the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated when the power is turned on (in addition to power-on, it also includes power-on recovery due to power failure or momentary power failure). Information to instruct that when performing RAM clear and the above mentioned at power on (In addition to power on, it also includes power recovery when power failure occurs due to power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to recover from among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-time saving state, and high probability non-time saving state, and model code of pachinko machine And information to be shown. Here, the problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  When creating a so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type as a pachinko machine 1 (precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is for which copyright of the work, In addition to the game specification that the game specification is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like) in which probability fluctuations occur in the state of

  In the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker of the production line is the master of the copyright of any work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). The main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of a work of movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works can not be known whether the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310 Although the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for the work of cartoon F). There are also misconceptions and misconceptions that flow to the manufacturing line.

  For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line It is not possible to confirm to which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs, and which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, etc.) for the same work copyright It is also impossible to confirm whether it is a type, and what game specifications (a game specification or a ST machine in which, when probability fluctuations occur, the state is continued until a next big hit gaming state occurs).

  As a result, when manufacturing the main control substrate 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control substrate 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexists, the main control substrate for the copyrights of multiple types of works It will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while 1310 is mixed. Therefore, a worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5 in some cases. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, it also includes the power recovery due to a power failure or a momentary power outage). To transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on state in step S50, the power-on state command divided into the power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line, and the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine that is included in the power-on state command received from the device, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is configured. And the sweet digital type, the serial code for specifying which type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state is In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation is in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited The main control board 1310 is for the copyright of any work by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) It is possible to determine which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which type) the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine in which, when probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs.

  As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of multiple types of works coexists, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually distinguish the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work by being able to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by visually observing the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not compatible with the game board 5 for the copyright of the work It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

9-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control power-on process shown in FIGS. 138 and 139.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 140 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power on process is selected from the first register bank Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Following step S100, the main control MPU performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lighted in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process. The main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted in addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric symbol control process described later When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has properly received various commands is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is reduced by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the ACK signal input determination time is accurately counted. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU, for example, detects the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402 Detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, a detection signal from the prize winning opening sensor 2513, a detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, a detection signal from the first lost opening sensor 2515, the second Detection signal from V winning opening sensor 3003, detection signal from third missing opening sensor, detection signals from out-port left sensor 3032 and out-port right sensor 3033, detection signals from magnetic sensor 2010, operation from RAM clear switch Signal (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from body frame open switch, setting key A signal from the switch 1311a, a signal from the setting switching button 1311b, a detection signal from the out-port left sensor 3032, a detection signal from the out-port right sensor 3033, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later A payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which indicates that the signal 633 is normally received is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 are read respectively, the starting opening winning command divided into the other corresponding to this is used as the transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. It stores in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second starting opening sensor 2402 When there is a detection signal of (1), the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the state (including the case where the vacant terminal process is performed) being input to all the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU is started. First, each reading is performed as a first reading, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, reading is performed again as a second reading. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. Among the comparison results, it is determined whether there is one that is the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. Among the comparison results, it is determined again whether or not there is the same result. The same results and those that are not treated are treated as having no game ball B entering or ignoring the input.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the states (including those subjected to the idle terminal process) being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are covered for the first to third times. Therefore, false reading due to the influence of chattering or noise can be avoided by performing two readings, ie, two readings to compare and two readings comparing to the second to fourth times. The detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, A detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, a detection signal from the prize winning opening sensor 2513, a detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, a first lost opening sensor A detection signal from 2515, a detection signal from the second V pay-port sensor 3003, a detection signal from the third missing-port sensor, a detection signal from the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033, a detection from the magnetic sensor 2010 Signal, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from body frame open switch, signal from setting key switch 1311a, signal from setting switching button 1311b, out A signal from the payout control board 633 which indicates that the payout control board 633 has normally received the detection signal from the mouth left sensor 3032, the detection signal from the out mouth right sensor 3033, and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal can be enhanced.

  Following step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU, the status of the terminal subjected to the idle terminal processing is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to ground (GND) as an idle terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is whether the logical state of the input terminal subjected to the vacant terminal process among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW or not. Do based on When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to the free terminal processing is not LOW, it is classified into a notification display that indicates that a fault is occurring in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The trouble command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU performs a rapid random number update process (step S106). In the present random number updating process, the above-described symbol random numbers are updated. Moreover, in addition to these random numbers, random numbers for jackpot symbol initial value determination updated in the non-falling random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are further improved in the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing by being updated in randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number involved in the hit determination (hit determination), each counter counts up only when the hit random number updating process is performed. In addition, the random number per normal symbol determination described above and the initial value determination random number per normal symbol determination are also updated by this success random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number per pattern determination is an initial value updating type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value Is incremented by one each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The symbol is counted up from the initial value determination random number for determination per symbol normally to the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determination per symbol normally. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the initial value determination random number for collision determination is updated by this success random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for extracting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal determination per symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are not displayed in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. Although updating is performed in the current random number update processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing that is the main routine in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the processing time of the present routine is uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions of the non-match random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol And as a mechanism to update the random number for the initial value determination for small hit symbols only in the non-falling random number update process in step S56. .

  Following step S106, the main control MPU performs ball number counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, a detection signal from the out-port left sensor 3032 is input, and the game area 5a is sectioned in the game board 5 When the out-port left sensor 3032 detects the gaming ball B recovered by the out-port 1008 provided in the value, the value of the recovered-ball counter counts the number of balls of the gaming ball B recovered by the out-port 1008 The game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a which is divided by the detection signal from the out port right sensor 3033 is input while performing (incrementing) calculation by 1 When the out-port right sensor 3033 detects a count of the number of balls of the game ball B collected by the out-port 1008 The value of the recovered ball counter adds the value 1 (increments) performs computation. That is, in the ball number counting process, the out-port left sensor 3032 detects the gaming ball B collected by the out-port 1008, and the out-port right sensor 3033 detects the gaming ball B collected by the out-port 1008. In the calculation, the value 2 is added to the value of the collection ball counter. The main control MPU uses the value of the collection ball counter which is the calculation result as the counting result (total number) of the number of balls of the gaming ball B collected by the out port 1008, and the out ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. The output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310 h is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. In addition, the main control MPU, when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by 10, that is, every time the number of balls of the game ball B collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, the ball collection command to notify that effect It is created and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. In addition, when the main control MPU reaches the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value 65535) of the value of the collection ball counter which is the calculation result and further adds (increments) the value of the collection ball counter by the value 1, the collection ball The value of the counter overflows to a value of 0, and an operation of adding from this value of 0 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU performs a winning ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out the gaming ball B is created based on the input information, or the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Create a self-check command to check the connection between the board and the board. Then, the created prize ball command and the self check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, it creates a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the number of balls of the game ball B scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is 10 balls Therefore, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or Self-check to confirm the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the dispenser ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has received the award ball command normally is not input within a predetermined time A command is created and sent to the payout control board 633 or the like.

  Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached ten balls based on the input information by reading the input information from the above-described input information storage area In this case, a main prize ball number information output command, which is divided into other areas, is created to convey that effect, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter reads out the input information from the above-described input information storage area and based on the input information, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2003, and the like provided on the game board 5. Based on gaming ball B entered into various winning openings (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on game board 5") such as first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, and large winning opening 2005 etc. The number of balls of the game ball B scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball is counted, and stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control processing of step S108. ing. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determining counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determining counter The input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of balls of the game ball B scheduled to be paid out as a winning ball is added to the above-mentioned input information storage area. When it is over 10 (that is, when the number of balls of the game ball B scheduled to be paid out as a winning ball reaches 10 balls), a main prize ball number information output command is created and transmitted to convey that effect. The value indicating the exceeded ball number is stored in the output information storage area as information, and the value of the main prize ball number information output judging counter is used as the value of the prize ball schedule information storage of the main control built-in RAM described above. It is adapted to store updates to pass.

  Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error cancellation navi command, and a frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as the payee serial data, information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 633 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control internal RAM as output information. Also, the main control MPU reshapes the command received normally as the payee serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancel navigation command, And frame status 2 command)), and stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU performs a fraudulent activity detection process (step S112). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. If it is determined that a fraudulent action by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation goto") is performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation got counter is incremented by one. The value of the radio wave got counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation got is performed in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation lot counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the cheating detection process is performed on the main control side timer interrupt process). And a radio wave irradiation goto notification command divided into a notification display that tells that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and stores it as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Further, in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor is input, the fraudulent activity using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnetism") To be described), and increment (increment) the value of the magnet Goto counter by one. The value of the magnet got counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation got is performed in the injustice detecting process, is included in the game backup information, and is cleared when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet got counter reaches the upper limit (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the cheating detection process is performed on the main control side timer interrupt process). A magnet magnet notification command divided into a notification display notifying that radio wave irradiation sound is being generated is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a clerk such as a salesclerk of the game hall can discover the magnet got at an early stage by reliably detecting and reporting the magnet goto by such a mechanism. It has become.

  Further, in the injustice detecting process in step S112, for example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when it is not the big hit gaming state (big winning opening When a game ball B enters a ball in 2005), etc., for a special winning opening abnormal winning occurrence, create a winning abnormality display command classified as an alarm condition as an abnormal state, and store it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. Do.

  In the fraud detection process in step S112, when radio wave irradiation goto and / or magnet goth are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud, while radio wave radiation goto and magnet When the got is not detected, the value of the cheating detection flag FD-FLG is set to 0 as no cheating detection. The fraudulent action detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Also, when the occurrence of the special winning opening abnormal prize occurrence is detected, the value of 1 may be set to the injustice detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of the injustice.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU performs an emission permission signal setting process (step S113). In the launch permission signal setting process, the logic of a launch permission signal is transmitted that transmits a permission to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to launch the game ball B. Specifically, the main control MPU determines that the cheating detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the cheating is not detected, based on the above-mentioned cheating detection flag FD-FLG. When the firing permission logic is set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal and stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud When it is determined that the detection of the fire is permitted, the fire permission logic is set to the fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverted as the logic of the fire permission signal, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU reads input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input, and the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4 If the door open switch is detected, the detection signal from the main frame open switch is input, and the main frame open switch detects that the main frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, The firing permission logic is set to the inverted firing stopping logic (fire non-permitting logic) as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. The logic of the firing permission signal is, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power recovery) The hardware is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permitting logic) which reverses the firing permission logic until it is started.

  Subsequent to step S113, the main control MPU performs a special symbol and special electric combination product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special motorized product control process, the latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is It is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match It is judged whether or not the game state is to be generated (referred to as "special lottery"), or the value of the counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and small hit type It is judged (determined the hit type) which of the hit type judgment values matches.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are from the first starting opening sensor 3002, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second starting opening sensor 2402 If it is based on the special figure 2 create various commands related to the tuning effect, store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and determine the variation display pattern of the special symbol based on the above-mentioned random number for variation display pattern First special symbol display or second special symbol of function display unit 1400 to light the first special symbol display or second special symbol display of function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbol The output of the lighting signal to the display is set, and stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big hit game state, various commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, large win) A winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or, for example, of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening / closing member When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times that the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state (round) is two, 2 of the round display of the function display unit 1400 Of the lighting signal to the 2 round indicator lamp to light the round indicator lamp A lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp to light up the 15-round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400 when the power is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information or when the round is 15 times The output of the lighting signal to the status display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the output of the function display unit can be stored in the output information storage area as the output information, or the presence or absence of time reduction is lit in a predetermined color. Or stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric combination product control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and an ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on the input information. In the normal winning a prize opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the normal winning a prize opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per normal symbol judgment is extracted and main control built-in as ordinary winning opening winning information It is stored in the normal winning opening winning combination information storage area of the RAM.

  In the normal winning a prize opening winning information storage area, the 0th section to the 3rd section (4 sections) are provided, and the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section in the order of the normal winning opening Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning a prize opening winning information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the normal winning a prize opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the normal winning a prize mouth sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port The winning opening winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

  The normal winning a prize opening winning information stored in the zero section of the normal winning a prize opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning a prize opening winning information is set, the ordinary winning a prize opening winning information of the first section of the ordinary winning a prize winning information storage is in the 0 th section of the ordinary winning a prize opening information storage, a second of the ordinary winning a prize winning information storage The normal winning opening winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is in the second of the normal winning opening winning information storage. It is shifted and the 3rd division of usual winning a prize mouth winning a prize information storage becomes empty space. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning In the 0th section of the mouth winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information of the 2nd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is shifted to the 1st section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the 0th of the normal winning opening winning information storage The second section and the third section of the normal winning a prize opening winning information storage become an empty area. Here, when the ordinary winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third divisions of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, the ordinary number of the ordinary winning opening winning information stored is taken as the holding ball and the ordinary of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information so as to turn on the hold indicator, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area.

  Following the normal winning opening winning processing, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol winning is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as a "normal lottery"). Whether to open and close the movable piece or not is determined based on the determination result (lottery result from the normal lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the open state, and the gaming ball B can be accepted to the second start port 2004, and the gaming state becomes advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into a common figure synchronization effect relationship are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variable display pattern of the normal symbol while storing in the area, and the output information Are stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands relating to the ordinary electric part production are created and transmitted. The output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece as information and stored in the transmission information storage area, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. If the value of the random number per symbol judgment does not match the normal symbol judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned random symbol display pattern random number pattern , While creating various commands classified in relation to a common figure tuning effect, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to illuminate the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the decided ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the output information storage area mentioned above as output information Remember to In this example, the probability of winning in the normal lottery (probability of hitting normally) is one half.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S117). In this set value confirmation display process, the detailed description will be described later, but the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected based on this input information. The detection signal from the main frame opening switch and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is at the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to turn off the setting key switch 1311a) The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the first ON by turning 60 degrees clockwise from the)) and the setting key is turned on from the setting key switch 1311a, and the outer frame It is determined that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to No. 2, and the setting key switch 131 is set by the signal of the setting key ON. Since it is determined that the setting key is ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting display permission condition is satisfied, while the main frame 4 is detected with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame opening switch. Is determined to have not been opened, and / or that it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the signal of the setting key ON, and thus the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied. judge. In the setting value confirmation display process, a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g when the setting value display permitting condition is satisfied. Is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, and when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the present routine.

  Following step S117, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal as the payout control substrate 633 when the various commands from the payout control substrate 633 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. Output a drive signal to an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005 when it is in a big hit gaming state, and outputs a drive signal to a start opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes a movable piece In addition to 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output signal, starting opening winning information Output various information (game information) related to the game such as output signal to the payout control board 633, or release permission logic The base outputs a release permission signal set in the release stopping logic (missing non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, or displays the counting result (total number) of the number of balls of the gaming ball B collected by the out port 1008. A display signal is output to the monitor 1310 h, and a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310 g is output.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various commands classified in special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified in special figure 2 synchronous effect related, big hit related Various commands (for example, when the game ball B entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected, the large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the large winning opening count command based on the detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 ), Various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general drawing tuning effect related, various commands classified as ordinary electric wave director related, various commands classified as notification display, status display Various commands classified into various commands, test related and various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 is provided on the game board 5 The main prize ball number information output signal as the main prize ball number information whenever the number of gaming balls B scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls based on the game ball B entering the various winning openings Through the external terminal board 558, a main prize ball number information output command etc. instructing to transmit to the hall computer, and various commands divided into the specific history (for example, the game ball B collected at the out port 1008) There is an abnormality (or trust) in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, a sphere recovery command to notify that effect each time the number of spheres reaches 10 spheres, a setting change command to notify that the settings have been changed. To the effect that an error display command to the effect that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area described later in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is to be confirmed is transmitted. ON operation command or the like of the setting key) it is stored. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is configured into 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the various commands are configured as main cycle serial data, and are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, in the event of a power failure or an instantaneous interruption. The main transmission serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU must at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and complete transmission as main transmission serial data from the transmission shift register It is possible to When power is turned on to pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary interruption after power on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control power-on process shown in FIG. The power on state command divided into power on, power on main control return destination command, and power on main prize ball number information output judgment counter in order to convey that power recovery is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be executed A notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, as the main cycle serial data, the power-on state command is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value. Send to peripheral control board 1510 and then configure the power-on main control return destination command, status, mode, and sum value Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information is completed, the power on state command, the power on main control return destination command, and the power on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC in peripheral control board 1510 transmits a ball collection command to notify peripheral control board 1510 every time the number of gaming balls B collected at out port 1008 reaches 10 balls. The ball collection information (counted value (i.e., the out port) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown) by counting the number of balls of the gaming ball B recovered in the out port 1008 for each received ball recovery command. Information in which the total number of the game balls B collected in 1008) and the updated date and time are associated is updated. In addition, when the operating time of the game hall ends and the pachinko machine 1 is powered off without receiving the ball collection command, the value finally counted (that is, the game ball collected at the out port 1008) as a result The sphere collection information in which the total number of spheres B is associated with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown). When power is turned on when pachinko machine 1 is turned on when starting the operation of the game hall, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in peripheral control board 1510 transmits the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of real time clock IC not shown. The ball collection information is created again from the day when it was started, and the ball collection information is stored and held as ball collection history information in a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown). Note that the counted value stored as sphere collection information in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown) may use the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or the value 0 (zero) on that day Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values may be used.

  Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. Clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. This clears the timing by the main control built-in WDT. Then, the main control MPU is not forced to be reset by the main control built-in WDT by starting the timing by the main control built-in WDT again.

  Note that, as described above, when the main control board 1310 is in the process of proceeding with the game, the above-described backup for storing the game information by the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 or the adder solenoid 2414 which is an electric drive source by the port output process of step S118 in this routine. It can be done. That is, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 139, main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. The power-on state command divided into power-on to indicate that power has been turned on (power-return) based on the power-on time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area. The main control return destination command at power on and the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command at power on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and step S120 in this routine. In peripheral control board command transmission processing, a power on state command is configured as main cycle serial data, Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value to configure the power-on main control return destination command. Subsequently, when the power is turned on, the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output determination is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value.

  Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery as the display area of the effect display device 1600. Can be displayed on the screen. By this, when the player is playing a game, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power loss or power failure is restored promptly after power recovery. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for being seen and broken down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by returning to the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, and returning promptly after power recovery.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the power of the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. In the step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown, it is always cleared except for the specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 139, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on, the power-on state command is classified as power on. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command at power on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output judgment at power on are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information. A state in which only three commands, status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As the peripheral serial data, configure the power-on state command, send to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configure the power-on main control return destination command, The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in this order, and then, when the power is turned on, the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command is configured. Status, mode, and sum value Transmit to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process constructs information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 The above-mentioned series code for identifying which of the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, the copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs when the probability change occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times of the special symbol change is limited Machine) and display detailed model information on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying It has become.

9-4. Setting change process]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 141 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the setting value is acquired, it may be read or taken out, but when the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

  Subsequent to step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is used to calculate the sum of various information stored in the main control internal RAM as numerical values, and the checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 138. Is the same process as the calculation of.

  Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control power-off process (power-off) in the main control power-on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the value of the checksum (sum value) (step S204). If it is determined in step S204 that the main control MPU matches, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 138, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG includes the main control built-in processing in the main control side power-off process to be described later, including game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value. It is a flag indicating whether the data is stored and held in RAM, and is set to 1 when the main control power-off process has ended normally, and to 0 when the main control power-off process has not ended normally. Be done.

  In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the values (sum values) of the checksums do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU does not have the backup flag BK-FLG as the value 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208) . Here, the “normal range” is a value to which the setting value can be changed. In the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting The values up to 6 are preset. If the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that the contents of the main control internal RAM have an abnormality, or if it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally upon power-off. Because of this, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or can not be trusted). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU determines that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is the normal range. It is determined whether the value is any of the above, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S208 that the main control MPU determines that the range is not within the normal range, the main control MPU sets the setting value 1 which is an initial value to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of setting values 1 to 6 in which the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is a normal range. Although it is determined whether or not the value is determined, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. Or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (the value is 0) in the determination of step S206, that is, it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. At the same time, the process proceeds to step S210, and setting value 1 which is an initial value may be set to the setting value acquired in step S200. .

  In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1, that is, determines that the main control side power-off process has ended normally, or in the determination of step S208, the main control If the MPU determines that it is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

  Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

  Subsequent to step S214, the main control MPU determines whether the setting switching button 1311b is operated (step S216). In this determination, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b is read, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311 b is input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input, while the setting switching button when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is not input. It is determined that 1311 b has not been operated.

  If it is determined in step S216 that the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value (step S218). At this time, when acquiring the set value in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

  Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g, and updates the setting value on the setting indicator 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Subsequent to step S220, or when it is determined in step S216 that the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the main control MPU determines whether or not the determination key is operated (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU sets the setting key counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a. The key cylinder is turned by 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) (that is, the setting key cylinder of turning off the setting key switch 1311a Setting key switch by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) and turning it off, and then turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning it on the second) 1311 a is turned on by the decision key, and the decision key is turned on from the setting key switch 1311 a. When the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the decision key is operated, while when the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input It is determined that the enter key has not been operated.

  When it is determined in step S222 that the main control MPU determines that the determination key is not operated, the process returns to the determination of step S216 again, and determines whether the setting switching button 1311b is operated. When it is determined in step S216 that the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated, the processing of step S218 and step S220 is performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the determination key is operated. When it is not determined, the process returns to the determination of step S216 again, and when the setting switching button 1311b is operated until the determination key is operated, the setting value is incremented by one each time it is operated, and the setting display is displayed. If the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the setting switching button 1311b is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. In addition, until it is determined that the decision key is operated in the determination of step S222, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the setting value updated immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure occurs is main control Because the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM is not stored, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S222 that the main control MPU determines that the determination key is operated, the updated setting value is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM (step S224). At this time, when acquiring the set value in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area Since the setting value set in is updated, the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After completion of the process in step S224, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated set value when the determination key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control internal RAM Are stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of.

  Subsequent to step S224, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the initial position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder (that is, the setting key) The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees so that the switch 1311a is turned back to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning it off, and the setting key switch 1311a While it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. When the setting key is turned OFF It determined that there is no.

  If it is determined in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned off, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S226 again, and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned off.

  On the other hand, when determining in step S226 that the main control MPU determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal for displaying the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

  Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

  Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is the first ON It is a flag indicating whether or not to change the setting of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of operation), and it is permitted to change the setting of the set value. Value 1 is set to 0 when no setting change of the set value is permitted. In the process of step S232, setting the value of the setting change allowance flag CS-FLG to 0 makes it impossible to change the setting of the setting value thereafter.

  Following step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as in the determination of step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting The values up to 6 are preset. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU normalizes the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is not an abnormal value. It is determined whether the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is a range, and when it is determined that the range is a normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  If it is determined in step S233 that the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initialization (step S234), and subsequently creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is ended. The serial communication initialization in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initialization in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 139, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is the same as FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is performed prior to the serial communication initial setting in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, it is prioritized before the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 139. To notify the peripheral control board 1510 that a setting value has been changed by a setting change command. The setting change command is a command for conveying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the completion of storing the setting value. When receiving the setting change command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in peripheral control board 1510 updates the setting value history information (information in which the setting value is associated with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC not shown. Do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S233 that the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, an error display process is performed (step S240), and an infinite loop is entered. By this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is finished is maintained, and the game can not be progressed at all, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and turned on again. In this error display process, the detailed description will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off If it is determined, it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or it can not be relied upon), and an error display notifying that effect is performed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

9-5. Set value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value 0, as shown in FIG. 142 (step S350). The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and when the set value is confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set Each value is set to 0 when the value is not displayed.

  In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the set value is not displayed, the main control MPU determines whether the main frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON. It is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, detects a detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is directed clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first turning ON operation and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first turning on operation, and the main frame 4 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 by the signal of the setting key ON It is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the signal of the setting key ON and it is determined that the setting key is open. While it is determined that the preset set value display permission condition is established, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not open with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. By determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the signal of the setting key ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied.

  If it is determined in step S352 that the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main routine is ended as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting value is to be confirmed, the value 1 is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S356, the main control MPU determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 in the setting change process of FIG. 178 and the determination in step S233, and as described above, in the present embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting The values up to value 3, set value 4, set value 5 and set value 6 are preset. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU re-confirms whether the setting value is not an abnormal value, the setting value acquired in step S356 (that is, the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) It is determined whether or not the setting value stored in is in any of the setting values 1 to 6 that is in the normal range, and when it is determined that it is in the normal range, the setting value is used as it is Do.

  When it is determined in step S357 that the main control MPU determines that the range is the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S 358).

  Following step S360, the main control MPU creates an ON operation command of the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the ON operation command of the setting key ), End this routine. The setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process which is this routine has been started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed) It is a command to convey.

  When the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the setting key ON operation history information (setting value is checked and stored in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC not shown). Information that associates the effect with the date and time).

  In addition, when the peripheral control IC in peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the above-described sphere collection history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information The predetermined specific history information display permission condition of being able to display specific history information such as is established. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 performs a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 by a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied. By performing the above, control is performed to switch from the image that has been displayed so far to the specific history information display image for selecting and displaying the specific history information and to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, when the set value is confirmed and displayed, whether the setting key is operated OFF It is determined whether or not it is (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder whose decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by performing an OFF operation, and it is performed by a signal of OFF from the setting key switch 1311a, and it is determined that the setting key is turned OFF when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input. While setting key switch 1311a Setting key when the signal of the OFF is not input is determined not been OFF operation.

  When it is determined in step S362 that the main control MPU determines that the setting key is not operated OFF, the main routine is ended as it is, while when it is determined that the setting key is operated OFF, the setting value is not confirmed and displayed. The value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g is stopped. Setting display 1310g does not display the acquired setting value (step S366), and then creates a setting key OFF operation command and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. , Set the setting key OFF operation command (step S 368), and end this routine.This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process which is this routine has been completed (that is, confirmation of completion of confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) Is a command to convey

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 has performed control to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image Control is performed to switch to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and restore the original image.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S357 that the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, the interrupt non-permission setting is performed (step S370). By this setting, the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 140, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

  Following step S370, the main control MPU performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT is continuously cleared (step S374). This infinite loop will continue to clear the main control built-in WDT. This can not be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started, so by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, the main Setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the control MPU clears the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, and restarts the clocking by the main control built-in WDT. The MPU is not forced to be reset. In addition, this infinite loop keeps the state in which the error display process is finished, and the game can not be progressed at all, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and turned on again. In this error display process, the detailed description will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off process has not ended normally when the power is shut off If it is determined, it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or it can not be relied upon), and an error display notifying that effect is performed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

9-6. Error display process]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 138, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control power on process shown in FIG. 138 (FIG. 141). And the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the emission permission signal as shown in FIG. 143 (step S400). The release permission signal, as described above, informs the release control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 that the release of the game ball B is permitted, and when the logic thereof is set to the release permission logic, the release is generated. Can be signaled that the firing is to be stopped (disallowed) if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which reverses the firing permission logic. .

  The process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 138 or the error display process which is this routine is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 138 Specifically, when started as (the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 141), the main control MPU interrupts the step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting can not be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 140 can not be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process can not be performed. The discharge permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the discharge control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 through the main control output circuit with reset function, so that the power is restored with the reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the fire stop logic (fire non-permit logic) which is the reverse of the fire enable logic.

  Therefore, the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 138 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. If it is started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 141), the main control MPU displays an error, which is the present routine after power recovery in step S400. Even after the processing is started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired, and its predetermined output port The output terminal of the control signal is output to the discharge control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 through the main control output circuit with a reset function.

  When the error display process which is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU proceeds to step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. It is determined in the determination that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 139, it has already been shown in FIG. 142 before the error display process which is this routine is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display process, when the error display process which is this routine is ended, the main control side shown in FIG. The timer interrupt process can not be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process can not be performed.

  Therefore, when the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU determines that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal in step S400. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired under certain conditions, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permitting logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port The signal is output to the emission control unit 633 b of the payout control substrate 633 via the function-added main control output circuit.

  Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

  Subsequent to step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all of the various displays of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Subsequent to step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S406), and subsequently creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and subsequently sets it in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main cycle serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is ended.

  The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 141 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 141 and the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S120. The process performed in step S33 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 138, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 138 (FIG. 141) When it is started and completed as the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 142 and the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 142, as described above, the infinite loop is entered. By this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has ended is maintained, and the game can not be progressed at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initial setting of step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S410 is used as the peripheral serial data as the peripheral data. It is sent to 1510.

  The error display command is a command that indicates that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or something that can not be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, error display history information (information in which error display command (error display command and received date and time are associated) stored and held in built-in RAM of real time clock IC not shown Update).

  In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, "RAM error has occurred in the blue background image in the display area of effect display device 1600. Call an employee." In addition to performing control to display the message image of the white character, the announcement “The RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff.” Is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Control is performed such that the sound is forced from the various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, body frame speaker 622, etc.) without being dependent on the volume and forcedly set to the maximum volume. The process of notifying the RAM error by the error display command is the process with the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command notifying another error, the RAM Error notification is given top priority.

[10. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit, FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the continuation of processing at power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

10-1. Processing when the dispensing control unit is turned on]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 by the payout control MPU, as shown in FIGS. . When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is to set the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output setting (input / output setting of I / O) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

  Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs weight timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power interruption occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), the voltage decreases and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 receives a power failure notification signal as a power failure warning . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable after power on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

  Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). In this determination, based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear. While it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated while the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, the RAM clear is determined to be instructed and the RAM clear is instructed. It determines that the switch is operated.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU enables execution of the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control internal RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the CR communication information storage area is set. This flag is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. is to be erased, and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

  Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). By this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, writing (storage) or reading of the payout information can be performed.

  Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and the process returns to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (described at power-off) described later. (Step S526). When it is determined in step S526 that the payout control MPU matches, it is determined whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is ended normally, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not ended normally.

  In step S528, when the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, the power is restored when the power is restored. The work area of is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the ROM for payout control) and at power recovery. Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Thus, the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, an award stored in the prize ball information storage area) PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. and CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time etc. stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes the state where power is turned on after the power is shut off, as well as the state where power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1), that is, when it is determined to clear the payout information, or in the determination of step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the values of the checksums do not match, or when the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is the value 0) in the determination of step S528, that is, If it is determined that the processing at the time of power-off of the payout control unit is not normally ended, the entire area of the payout control internal RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, initial information is read out from the dispensing control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM.

  Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S540). When shutting down the power supply of pachinko machine 1 or when a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs, as described above, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure notification when the voltage falls below the power failure notification voltage. Be done. The determination in step S540 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  If it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure advance signal, the payout control MPU determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. When 2 ms has elapsed, the value 1 and 2 ms have not elapsed. It is set.

  In the determination of step S 542, when the payout control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S 540, and the payout control MPU inputs a power failure advance signal. It is judged whether it is done or not.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 2 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when it is determined that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, ie, 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that indicates that various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self check command) are normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 is performed. Various information such as driving information, ball number information of the number of balls for which the payout motor 584 actually paid out the gaming ball B, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout is based on this output information. When various commands relating to the payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU, a payout ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584 The number of balls for which the payout motor 584 actually paid out the game ball B is used as an external ball terminal number signal output signal for the external terminal board 558. The output or (embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls B.

  Specifically, a counter for judging the number-of-balls information output judgment for judging whether or not to output the number-of-balls information is provided. The number of balls of the game ball B paid out is counted based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in a port input process of step S550 described later, and the payout motor 584 actually pays out the number of balls It is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a counter for judging the number-of-balls information output stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the memory is updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded) The display value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the award ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

  Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read, and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, an operation signal of a RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from a payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from a CR unit, Reads the BRDY signal and CR connection signal, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310, etc., which indicate that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, and inputs them as input information Store in the information storage area.

  Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, when it is determined whether or not the ball arm state is generated by the discharge blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the motor 584 is transmitted, the ball arm judgment time set as the judgment condition, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed is set as the determination condition when it is determined whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the gaming ball B stored therein. During the full tank determination time, it is determined whether or not the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the induction passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as the out-of-round determination time set as the determination condition at that time, the number of balls of the game ball B that has been received by being received by the ball accommodating portion 589 b Whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of the game ball B, which is inconsistent due to the mismatch between the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591, is repeated. When performing determination, time management of the inconsistency counter reset determination time set as the determination condition is performed. For example, since the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms when the ball set determination time is set to 5005 ms, the ball set determination time is reduced by 2 ms each time this timer update processing is performed, and the subtraction result is a value By becoming 0, it is measuring the ball gambling judgment time correctly. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication process, the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input or not judge. The payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags which are payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage area (For example, the number of ball stock PBS, the number of real ball count PB, the number of drive command DRV, the number of misaligned counters INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information on the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or power failure, values such as the number of ball stock PBS, actual ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The values can be restored to values such as the winning ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the driving command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous stop or power failure. As a result, even when the payout operation of gaming ball B is being executed by payout device 580, even if the payout operation can not be continued due to a momentary stop or power failure, the payout operation is continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls B can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU exchanges momentary signals with the CR unit, and while the gaming ball B is being paid out to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, a momentary stop or power failure causes CR to occur. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit is interrupted and the payout of the game ball B can not be continued, the number of ball stock PBS, real ball count PB, number of drive commands DRV, mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery. Etc. by being restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored as payout backup information. Continue to exchange various signals between Pachinko machine 1 (delivery control MPU) and CR unit just before power failure, just before the momentary power failure or power failure. It is, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls B.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop upon power recovery even if the momentary stop or stop occurs. Various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of a momentary stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

  Also, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power returns, the PRDY signal output setting information is read out from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is set in the process for setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530. For example, when the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal which indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the payout control of the PRDY signal is performed. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the award ball information storage area stored in the payout control internal RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. It is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH based on and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation operates abnormally. It is determined that the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is abnormal, that is, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1, and the payout ball seam operation determination processing is performed. , As an output of the error status to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit The dispensing operation for out There are a PRDY signal informing of a possible logic state (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area.

  Thus, in the CR communication processing, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. Output to the CR unit. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary stop, if the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, since the state is restored at the time of power recovery, it is extremely important after power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, which informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, and the payout device to the CR unit It can be informed that the payout operation of the game ball B by 580 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output of BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal from the CR unit, at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  Also, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the logic is HI based on this CR connection signal, that is, pachinko machine When the power is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to indicate that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible. While the signal logic state is HI and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, it is informed that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible. For the outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW to CR unit. The state of the logic of the EXS signal that indicates that one dispensing operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control internal RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-balls check processing (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the gaming ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 It is determined whether or not the tank is full at B, or the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more It is determined whether or not For example, it is determined whether or not the game ball B in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full, using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms from the full detection sensor 154 in the current full / full out check process. Detection signal is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF to ON If it is determined that the timing of the full tank determination time described above has been started in the timer updating process of step S552, the counting of the full tank determination time is started. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check process It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the state information storage area described above has full tank information that indicates that the lower plate 202 is full with the gaming ball B stored therein. Remember. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, full information is transmitted to the state information storage area to indicate that the lower plate 202 is not full with the gaming ball B stored therein.

  It is also determined whether or not the number of balls of the gaming ball B taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms to check the full tank and running out of balls this time. When the detection signal from the ball breakage switch is ON in the process and the detection signal from the ball breakage switch is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball breakage check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 When the state changes from OFF to ON, counting of the ball out determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the ball out determination time has become 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball out determination time has come, whether the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out of ball check process It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is ON, the ball is informed that the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is a predetermined number or more. While storing the break information in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball breakage detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is a predetermined number or more In the state information storage area, sphere out information notifying that is not stored is stored.

  Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self check command) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, a connection error is reported to indicate that the connection between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operations such as winning balls, lending balls, dropping balls, and ball gloves are set, determination of retry operation is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (number of winning balls stock) is monitored. .

  Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored in the above-described output information storage area as LED display information. Do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball breakage information is read out from the state information storage area, and the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number based on the ball breakage information, Display data (in the present embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navi command and frame state 2 command) to be classified into the state display based on the various information are created. Then, it transmits to the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball out information is read out from the state information storage area, the frame state is not reached when the number of balls of the game ball B taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number based on the ball out information. 1 command is generated and transmitted to the main control board 1310 or the like.

  Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, so that the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the payout control MPU returns to step S539 again, sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether or not the power failure notification signal is input, and this power failure notification If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when this 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, and port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. At step S554, the timer update process is performed. The communication processing is performed, the full tank and ball out check processing is performed in step S556, the command reception processing is performed in step S558, the command analysis processing is performed in step S560, the main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, and the LED is A display data creation process is performed, a command transmission process is performed in step S566, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU fluctuates. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control substrate 1310 a payment acknowledgment signal indicating that various commands related to the payment from the main control substrate 1310 have been properly received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that the other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU has determined that there is an input of the power failure advance signal, the interrupt control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the payout control internal RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game ball B is stopped.

  Following step S 574, the payout control MPU performs setting for clearing the watchdog timer (step S 576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL as described above.

  Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG calculated in step S524.

  Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU performs setting to prohibit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control internal RAM is inhibited and writing and reading can not be performed, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S 582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. The process of step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off process".

  The pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU) is reset when a power failure occurs or when the power failure occurs momentarily, and the payout control unit performs power-on processing when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and in step S528, whether or not the processing upon power-off of the payout control unit has been normally completed. Is examining. As described above, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM in duplicate, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

10-2. Disbursement control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 147, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to be inhibited and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing.

  Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time 2 ms of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, a value of 0 when 1 ms or 2 ms has not elapsed when 2 ms has elapsed. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[11. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 150 is an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interruption processing. First, peripheral control unit power on processing will be described, and then peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing will be described. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing is set highest as the priority of the interrupt processing, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit It is set in order of V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, in the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[11. Peripheral control unit power-on process]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the power-on process of the peripheral control unit is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself, but the time taken for the processing to initialize the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC takes a very short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the peripheral control IC CPU enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, for example, a command related to control of a game effect, which is output from the main control board 1310 in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command regarding the state of pachinko machine 1, or.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour, minute, and second are acquired from a built-in RAM of a real time clock IC (not shown), and the current RAM Set calendar information and current time information.

  In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC only once at the time of power on. Further, after performing the current time information acquisition processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT (not shown) so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing to be described later is to be performed, and has a value of 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control unit steady processing The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC as a V blank signal indicating that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be executed, which will be described later, which is triggered by the event. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 (step S1006). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (is the value 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1 It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, it will be in the state which waits until peripheral control part steady processing is performed. Also, after the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset. ing.

  If it is determined in step S1006 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, that is, peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting and the initialization of the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also performed. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs rendering operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 Based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381, the elevation detection sensor 382, etc., the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and Various information (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300, and pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 and the like) Operation history information of section 303 etc.) is set based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Monitoring the presence or absence of an operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 parts 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode according to the adjusted brightness Rewrite generation schedule data. Thereby, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the effect is advanced by the volume and the brightness after the adjustment.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp pallet setting processing as one processing of the rendering operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table including the designated luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. Set each. While the effect is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or the clerk of the game hall or the like) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one luminance designation value ranging from the luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance is set, the floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set to be the set luminance designation value. The key information can be updated.

  Here, the luminance designation values, the normal pallet values, and the special pallet values that constitute the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. The designated luminance value may be set to one designated luminance value within a range of 32 steps ranging from the zeroth designated luminance value which is the minimum luminance (turned off) to the 31st designated luminance value which is the maximum luminance. It is possible values, and a normal pallet value and a special pallet value which will be described later in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value are respectively set in advance. The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the operation effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) which can be operated, and the 31st brightness from the first brightness designated value to the maximum brightness One designated brightness value can be set up to the designated value.

  For example, a player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) is the case where the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, and the current brightness is temporarily set to the minimum brightness (turns off). When the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is higher than the value is set, a predetermined equation (for example, linear) is set from the first luminance designation value toward the 31st luminance designation value which is the maximum luminance. While changing the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light along the tone curve or spline curve tone curve, the rotation operation unit 302 is reversed In the case of rotating clockwise, when the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined equation (for example, the first brightness specified value) from the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness is set. Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) rotationally operates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and press the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In the present embodiment, it is prepared in advance that the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) can set the luminance while the effect is in progress. And the like) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a clerk at a game hall or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position of the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness By displaying a bar-like indicator indicating the position up to the designated value, it is possible to visually indicate as an image how much the desired luminance of the player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) is. It can be done. Further, in the present embodiment, a fourteenth designated luminance value is set as an initial value (default).

  The normal pallet value is set as the gradation information described above for the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. is there. For the normal pallet values, one of 17 steps in 5% steps from the minimum pallet value (20%) which is the minimum value to the maximum pallet value (100%) which is the maximum value is selected, and the luminance described above A mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve) in which a pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation is predetermined in a range of 32 steps ranging from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is a designated value Or spline curve-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance specification among the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) luminance specification value to the 31st luminance specification value which are the luminance specification values described above It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and the other pallet values are similarly the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the luminance designation value described above (%) described in parentheses Of the 32 levels ranging up to the 31st luminance designation value, this is the value for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance for the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side. Among various decoration boards provided on the game board side, which are set as the gradation information described above and which are irradiated as direct light, a pallet (not shown) for a specific decoration board (an LED that feels dazzling to the player) The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

  The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information as to the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates used for a light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal pallet value, the special pallet value is present in only one step, and is one of 32 steps ranging from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which are the luminance designation values described above. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the gradation information described above along a predetermined equation (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

  If the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the luminance of the LED used as the direct light as described above, the indirect light from the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is set using the special pallet value instead of the normal pallet value set for the luminance of the LED used as the direct light. To visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light, the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is higher than the 0th (zero) luminance designation value which is the minimum luminance (turned off). As the lowest possible luminance, the normal pallet value is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designation value in the case where the pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%), and the range from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value One of the designated luminance values and the corresponding pallet value are set along a predetermined equation (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table including the designated luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light when setting the brightness of each of The player (or a clerk of a game hall clerk or the like) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light while being set along the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value The designated luminance value and the corresponding special palette value are set according to the operation 303. Thereby, when the brightness of the LED used as direct light is felt to be dazzling, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used as the light. Set the luminance of the LED to be used to the lowest luminance (that is, the first luminance designation value at which the luminance is at a stage where the luminance is higher next to the 0th (zero) luminance designation value for minimum luminance (turn off)) The brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specification value at which the brightness is higher than the 0th (zero) brightness specification value at which the minimum Also, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is normally set to a value substantially equal to the 18th luminance designation value in the case where the pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side separately from the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it does not set, the flow of the effect by the light emission aspect of the various LEDs mounted on the various decoration substrates provided on the game board side and the various decoration substrates provided on the door frame side by setting the light emission aspect according to the flow of the effect After setting the palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) usually for a particular decoration substrate that is too dazzled (or a slightly darker luminance can exhibit more rendering effects), By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission aspect can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a clerk in the game hall or the like) operates the operation effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) which can be operated to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness designated value 31st Even if one luminance designation value ranging up to the luminance designation value is set, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one luminance designation value is set for a specific decoration substrate. For the other decorative substrates, one luminance specification value and the corresponding maximum pallet value (100%) are set respectively, so that the relationship between the light emission modes set mutually (bright or dark) It is possible to adjust the brightness extremely easily without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although the indirect light by the light guide plate is difficult to adjust the luminance as compared to the direct light, it is different from the normal pallet value for the LED used as the indirect light (that is, a special pallet value different from the ordinary pallet value) The brightness can be set by the Thus, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special pallet value, and the luminance of the LED used as direct light is normally managed by the pallet value, so the LED used as indirect light And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. The drawing data of one minute (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate. Thus, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed which exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, outputting of the generated drawing data of one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. Although this can prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropouts may occur, but the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main frame by sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism which can give priority to the effect by the rendering sound such as the music and the sound effects adapted to the various effects from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as “various speakers”).

  Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the sound data creation process described later, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct the screen data of the first screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC from the screen data at the top among the screen data arranged in time series that configures the schedule data for screen generation. To update the pointer.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to indicate which light emission data is to be output starting from the light emission data at the top among the light emission data arranged in time series that configures the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  In the scheduler update process, of sound command data for instructing sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series configuring the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC from the head sound command data.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, it is assumed that the drive data of the first one is output target Update the pointer to indicate what to do. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the data is forcibly updated so as to designate the driving data to be originally designated in the scheduler updating process.

  Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, and the various commands received are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for the play-ahead-related effect). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC Analyze the various commands Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads out screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM. (Extract) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp pallet setting table configured from the above-described designated luminance value, normal pallet value, and special pallet value And, respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp pallet setting process. The player (or a staff member of the game hall or the like) operates the rendering operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the above-described first brightness designated value When one luminance designation value ranging up to the 31st luminance designation value is set, the gradation information described above may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to become the set luminance designation value. It can be done.

  In addition, the peripheral control IC CPU receives a command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing start of start opening winning effect, a normal symbol Normal pattern memory command to identify the number of reservations (0 to 4), fluctuation pattern to instruct start of fluctuation effects such as fluctuation display of decoration symbol in effect display device 1600 in synchronization with fluctuation display of special symbol Analyze the symbol memory command that is output when the number of pending start changes, and whether it is a large winning opening 1 count display command that is output each time the game ball B is accepted in the large winning opening 2005, currently, which Recognize the gaming state.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze various commands. The various commands include various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effects, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effects, various commands classified into big hit relation, various commands classified into power on, Figure: Various commands classified into a related to the tuning effect, Various commands classified into the common electric wave production related, Various commands classified into the notification display, Various commands classified into the status display, Various commands classified into the test related, There are various commands divided into others. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing for notice etc. based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  In the periphery control ROM, various control programs for controlling the periphery control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data are stored in advance. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging the light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of the various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of an electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in time series, and defines the operation of the electrical drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification display, they are set to an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed from the highest priority registered in advance to the abnormality notification, and the abnormality is automatically resolved to another abnormality notification that has been resolved. It is supposed to By this, it is possible to simultaneously monitor a plurality of abnormalities without losing information that one abnormality has occurred after another abnormality has occurred and before the other is resolved. Can.

  Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, time, minute, second, which is time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is displayed in the peripheral control ROM among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data. Read out (extracted) and output to VDP of the peripheral control IC.

  When screen data is input from the peripheral control IC CPU, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 Minute (one frame) drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, among the sound command data arranged in time series that the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and that is the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It reads out (extracts) from the peripheral control ROM and sets it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound according to the track number specified in the sound command data. Set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed). Are identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and the output set in this sound data creation processing in the sound data output processing of step S1018 Output sound data from various channels to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are made to flow from various speakers according to various effects.

  Specifically, the resistance value is changed by turning the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value 0 It has been converted to 1024 levels up to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 stages are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled to obtain the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the body frame speaker 622 for low frequency of the body frame 4 Music and sound effects are flowing from the As described above, music and sound effects flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for low frequency of the main body frame 4 by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch. It is supposed to be.

  Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value to adjust the volume, adjust the sound data of the notification sound and its volume to notify the store clerk etc. of the occurrence of the trouble of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 Subvolume values are incorporated.

  Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch is set as a sub-volume value, and for notification sound, the volume adjustment switch is rotated. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation at all. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after power on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display For a certain period (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the container (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) Or 0.5 seconds after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol after receiving the variation pattern command, or 0.5 seconds after the final display of the decoration symbol after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit The adjustment can be made by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for the above.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined period after power on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) A fixed period (the peripheral in this example) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) After the variation pattern command is received by the control unit and 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the start of variation display of the decorative symbol, or after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit, 0.5 is determined after the decorative symbol is displayed. The resistance at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for the lapse of seconds). The voltage divided by this is converted into seven levels of values of substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the rotation operating unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 is further converted to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, the substrate volume value can be increased or decreased to set the substrate volume so that the subvolume value of the effect sound can be adjusted. It has become.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of built-in sound sources of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is Actually, it amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the volume that flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for low tone of the body frame 4 and serializes this amplified effect sound Output as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at the maximum volume, the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side is amplified by amplifying to the master volume value. The volume flowing from the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the used track and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the used track The volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value to adjust the rotation is composited with the substrate volume adjusted by the rotation operation, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is actually the top center of the door frame 3 side Amplify up to the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker 462, the topside speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the body frame 4, serialize this amplified effect sound, and output it as audio data for notification sound In order to adjust the volume of the notification sound incorporated into the used track and the volume of the notification sound incorporated into the used track, It does not depend on the volume adjustment at all based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the volume value, and synthesizes the maximum volume and the volume of the synthesized notification sound, actually, the top center of the door frame 3 side It amplifies up to the master volume value which becomes the volume flowed from the speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4, serializes this amplified alerting sound and outputs it as audio data.

  Here, when the effect sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4, occurrence of a malfunction or pachinko machine of the pachinko machine 1 A brief explanation will be given of the control of sending a notification sound to notify a store clerk in the hall of the fraudulent action against 1. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this effect sound is The sound data of the built-in track, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track incorporating the notification sound, and the sub-volume value at which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually displayed on the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 of the door frame 3, and the body frame 4. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from the main body frame speaker 622 for sound, and outputs the audio data to the amplified effect sound and alarm sound and serialized. In other words, only the notification sound with the maximum volume flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4. At this time, since the effect sound is muffled, although it does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, the effect sound is the above Proceed according to the schedule data for sound generation.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for low frequency of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute so far is adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch and the substrate volume is adjusted. At this time, when the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub of the adjusted effect sound is set. (Set to the volume value), the top center speaker 462 on the side of the door frame 3, the top side So that the flow from mosquitoes 622.

  As described above, when the effect sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4, occurrence of a problem or pachinko machine of the pachinko machine 1 When a notification sound flows to notify a store clerk in the hall of the fraudulent action against the machine 1, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, the body frame Although the effect sound that has become muffled although it flows from the body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has progressed for a predetermined period and the top central speaker on the door frame 3 side When the sound ceased to flow from the top-side speaker 462, the low-pitched main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, the notification sound began to flow Rather than begin to flow again from the time, so that begins to flow again from where it started to alarm sound to flow proceeded according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of peripheral control IC controls the volume from the mute to the maximum volume by the program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is designed to be able to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall turns the volume adjustment switch to set the volume small, the pachinko machine 1 is reduced in the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from various speakers. An alarm sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be made to flow when a failure occurs or when the player is performing a fraudulent act. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for a clerk such as a salesperson in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM can be provided in the SDRAM Copy to the regular processing backup area and back it up.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the flag SP-FLG under steady process processing to the value 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady process (step S1038), and returns to step S1004 again to detect the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value V is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to S1008 The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The process of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, starting from setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing, and in step S1010 the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing , And step S1036 and finally, in step S1038, when the value in the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as the completion of the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process, the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG can receive screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed in response to input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 It is 3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly performed about every 33.3 ms.

11-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed when a V blank signal is transmitted from the peripheral control IC's VDP to indicate that it is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control IC's CPU. Will be explained. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0, as shown in FIG. 149 (step S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 148 is being executed. When execution of the process is completed, they are set to 0 respectively.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is a value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, the peripheral control IC CPU directly End the routine On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU in the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. When it is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being performed. If the value of 1 is set to V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady process is currently executed, assuming that peripheral control unit steady process is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the process is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit in FIG. The peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 in step S1008 in the source activation process (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to V blank signal interrupt processing, in step S1038 in peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. In the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the present routine, the stationary processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is determined by the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is the present routine. It is determined whether the value is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. To have. In other words, the peripheral control unit steady processing can not be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input.

  Thereby, in the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time, when the processing is not completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the determination in step S1006 in the processing of turning on the peripheral control unit power in FIG. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later, which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit power on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is 64 times It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is processed, the consistency between the advancing state of the effect by the peripheral control steady processing and the advancing state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control is It does not collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing is dropped, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

11-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 148 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 150, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 It is 3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially It will occur.

  In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started If it is determined, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the thirty-third 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1100 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid driving processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drive an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, update the pointer to the next drive data defined in time series, and update the pointer each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed Do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 ) Are driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to determine history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, the original Position history information, movable position history information etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is an original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC By grasping the movable position by setting or acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs rendering operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this rendering operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors is determined by determining whether detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300 are input (for example, a rotation operation unit The rotation (rotation direction) history information 302 and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 by operating the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to adjust the brightness of the various LEDs mounted in plural on the various decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are stored in the SDRAM Copy and backup to the provided backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in and the backup area for steady processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effect of step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as progress of effect within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 148, various processing relating to the effects of step S1014 to step S1032 is executed as progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than value 33 in step S1100, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt Division 1 ms timer It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, the progressing state of the effect can be reliably aligned.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also produced in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control substrate 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes a little, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

11-4. Peripheral control command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control IC CPU starts transmission of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, and uses this as a trigger to set the main cycle serial data to 1 byte (8 bits) at the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC The information in (1) is taken into the receiving buffer, and when the taking-in is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1 byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 151 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When it is determined in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has 1 byte (8 bits) of information in the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that it is within the time that can be received, 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of serial I / O port of peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times of extraction from the reception buffer, and has a value of 1 when the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data is extracted from the reception buffer, and a mode of the second byte of the main cycle serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value 2 is obtained, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 at power on or the like.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, from the reception buffer It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is the mode which is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data. If it is determined that the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1 byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, the status of the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC follows the second byte of the main cycle serial data. If it is determined that a sum value, which is a third mode of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer in a certain mode and the main cycle serial data, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and their sum (sum value Calculate).

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 Therefore, it should be consistent with the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with the game balls B from the island facility of the game hall, and when the game balls B rub against each other to be charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is noise Under the influence of the file.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are regarded as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the main peripheral serial data has been changed to main peripheral serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510. It can be determined.

  In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. If it is determined, the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), End this routine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1200 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC does not time out the 1 byte reception period timer, that is, 1 byte (8 bits) of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period for which information can be received is exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine ends.

11-5. Peripheral control unit blackout notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing that is executed when the power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control substrate 1310 is input from the main control substrate 1310 will be described. When this peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer as shown in FIG. 152 (step S1300), and a blackout notification signal is input or not. It is determined (step S1302). If it is determined in step S1302 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notification signal is not input, the routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure advance signal is input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. In step S1304, when 2 macro seconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 and determines whether or not a power failure notification signal is input, and the power failure notification signal is not input. When it is determined, while this routine is ended as it is, when it is determined that a power failure advance signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is the present routine is started.

  When it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing which is this routine is started, the power saving processing is performed. The operation is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the effect display device 1600, the turning off of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, the turning off of various LEDs By suppressing, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds which is a time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up to a steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

  Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S1312). If it is determined in step S1312 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power failure advance signal is input, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notification signal is not input, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again, and whether or not the power failure notification signal is input. Determine if That is, it will be judged infinitely whether the power failure notice signal is input. By continuously determining in this manner, the CPU of the peripheral control IC can not output the clear signal to the external WDT when it is determined in step S1312 that the power failure notification signal is not input. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, while the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal is input in the determination of step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 to select the peripheral control IC. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the power-on process of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 148 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state is caused by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. It is supposed not to catch it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, and the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[12. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (in particular, the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special motorized prize control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 153, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is firstly controlled by the first starting opening sensor 3002 described above. The first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter on condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the first start opening 2002 is entered) (step S231) A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S232). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number on condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2402 is in the on state (there is entering the second starting opening 2004) (step S233) The second starting opening passage processing such as storing it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the big hit execution flag is set, control of the big hit game state is performed A big hit control process (step S235A) is performed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the stop of the change display of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) becomes the mode that suggests "15R big hit", 15R A process of controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big hit gaming state. In addition, when it becomes the feature which suggests “2R big hit”, processing which controls opening and closing of the special winning a prize opening 2005 according to 2R big hit game state is executed.

  In the big hit control process (step S235A), after the release control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is a time saving state, and the 2R big hit game based on the result that the result of the lottery processing at the time of the variation stop of the first special symbol becomes "2R big hit" during the time saving state. When ending the state, it is set when ending the 15R big hit gaming state during time saving state and non time saving state. The time saving flag is the next big hit, or when the time saving counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 164 described later or the second special symbol stop (not shown) described later. It is reset by processing.

  In addition, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time saving state, and controls the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state In this case, when the big hit gaming state is ended, the number of continuation times of the short state is set. And, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but before the counter value becomes "0", it became the next big hit Sometimes, it is reset in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 164 described later or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to “0”).

  In addition, if the big hit execution flag is not set, the condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0" (Step S237) The first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol storage area The second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter showing the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237) Process processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0".

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S232).

  Now, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 3002 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the first starting opening 2002 in the process of step S231, it is shown in FIG. 154. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to S24 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 corresponds to the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the memory area of the main control built-in RAM Store in

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the first special random number acquired in step S241, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the display result of the first special symbol variation display based on the variable random number. Whether the jackpot is a big hit or not, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, or the reach type as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit After the effect pre-determination process of determining the prior determination information such as the type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning combination (step S245), the process ends.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S242 that the first number of pending storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245.

  In addition, when the number of first reserved memories changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special number-of-retentions indicator in the function display unit 1400 is suspended for the first A command to instruct the first hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the storage number (first hold number specification command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 .About.4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the periphery control IC of the periphery control board 1510 displays the first number of pending storages on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first number of pending designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage commands 0 to 4). It is supposed to be.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in the above step S241, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, reach random number, fluctuation Whether it will be a big hit by comparing it with a random number, the type of big hit if it is big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it does not become a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

  Then, the identified prior determination information (whether or not to be a big hit, the type of big hit if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, or According to the type of game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of held memories (value of the held number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the pre-decision command. For example, in the effect prior determination process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified prior determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been acquired, and the first pending storage number A first special symbol predetermination command according to one special suspension number counter value) is set (step S262).

  Then, a preliminary determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), so that it is stored corresponding to the first starting port 2002 where the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of pending storage, whether or not the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the starting winning a prize is made a big hit or not, the type of big hit if it is big hit, the effect display device 1600 if it is not big hit Peripheral control to be carried on the peripheral control board 1510 prior to starting variable display according to the start winning, such as executing reach effect as the game effect to be executed or prior determination information such as the type type of the game effect to be executed IC will be able to understand.

  When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first holding storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first pending storage area has one to four storage areas corresponding to the pending storage number, and the peripheral control IC stores the first (first) prior determination information indicated by the received prior determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the prior determination information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the prior determination information notified to the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area when the a priori determination command is received Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first pending storage area according to the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (in the pending storage area Shift stored pre-decision information). Thereby, the prior determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the variable display start has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest prior determination information.

  As described above, when the variable display control is put on hold, although the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (pending), the jackpot expectation of the variable display control (pseudo-winning probability) ) Can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing such as, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold termination. .

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passing process (step S234).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S233 that the second start port sensor 2402 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, this is shown in FIG. 156. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on this counter value. It is judged whether or not it is "1" (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following step S253 to the next to put the variable display control of the second special symbol a new pending state. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, in the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S254, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, each random number acquired in the step S251. Store in

  However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of step S253 to step S254.

  In addition, when the number of second reserved memories changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting opening 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special number-of-retentions indicator in the function display unit 1400 is suspended second A command to instruct the second pending storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the stored number (second pending number specification command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 1) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the periphery control IC of the periphery control board 1510 displays the second storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second storage number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1). It is supposed to be.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to “4” based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, while the second starting opening 2004 is played The upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on the ball B entering is set to “1”. In addition, since the second start port 2004 allows a large number of game balls B to enter during the short time state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened than in the normal state, the second reserved memory number Even if the upper limit of “1” is set to “1”, the second special opening pattern will not be displayed for a long time, or the second pending storage number will continue to be long for the second start opening 2004 Even if the game ball B enters the game, it is suppressed that the player is not in a state of being disadvantaged because the chance of winning the big hit is not obtained.

  FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S238). The first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S239 of the special symbol process processing are program modules similar to each other, and random numbers used for determination Since only the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process treatments will be selectively executed in accordance with the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is subjected to lottery processing etc. for the display mode at the time of stop of the fluctuation control of the first special symbol. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol )
3. The fluctuation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the fluctuation random number, and the fluctuation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process where the lottery process etc. for the subject is performed (step S282)
4. First special symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283)
5. The mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 First special symbol stop processing to stop the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S284)

  The first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 138).

  FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 158, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S301. As processing of, it is judged whether there is fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension, then it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the main control MPU as the processing of step S302 next. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol . Then, next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special holding number counter is counted down, and the first one stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the processing of step S305, the hit determination processing, which is a lottery processing for the above-mentioned big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S281), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the hit determination table and the special random number shown in FIG. 185 (A) (the first special random number read out in step S302 when the first special symbol normal processing is being executed, If two special symbol normal processing is being executed, the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing is compared with the second special symbol (step S311).

  The hit determination table shown in FIG. 160A is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). And, in the hit determination table to be referred to for comparison with the first special random number, there are three types of coinciding with the big hit judgment value indicating that one kind of first special random number is won in the big hit and different from the big hit judgment value. The first special random numbers respectively match the big hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number has been won in the small hit, and the loss judgment value showing that the first special random number of 315 types is the loss. It is related (big hit probability; 1/319 / small hit probability; 3/319). Further, in the present example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table to be referred to for comparison with the second special random number, with the big hit determination value indicating that one kind of second special random number is won in the big hit It is consistent with the small hit judgment value which indicates that 144 kinds of second special random numbers different from the big hit judgment value match the small hit judgment value, and the lost judgment which indicates that the 174 second special random numbers are the above-mentioned loss The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value (big hit probability; 1/319, small hit probability; 144/319). That is, in the determination table referred to compare with the second special random number compared to the hit determination table referred to compare with the first special random number, the probability of being determined to be a small hit is configured to be higher When the second special symbol variation display based on the start winning combination to the second starting opening 2004 is executed than when the first special symbol variation display based on the starting winning combination to the first starting opening 2002 is executed One is in a state of being advantageous to the player.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the contact determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special special symbol read in the second special symbol normal processing As a result of the comparison with the random number), when it is determined to be a big hit (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the change is won as a big hit is set (step S313), and the hit determination processing is ended.

  Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won in a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if neither the big hit nor the small hit has been won, that is, if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table and the reach random number read out in step S302 are compared (step S316).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the reach determination table in the short time state to be used when the gaming state is the short state, and the non time short used when the gaming state is the short time state And a reach determination table at the time of state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the above reach is made such that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating reach, and the 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating no reach The random numbers are associated with one another.

  Further, the reach determination table in the non-time-short state matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-short state are reached, The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the non-time-short state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than that in the time-short state.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random numbers read in step S302 (step S316), the change is determined to be the end of the reach (step S317). A reach flag indicating that a reach will be made is set, and the process is ended (step S318).

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 161, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first of all, The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether the big hit flag is set (step S321) or whether the small hit flag is set (step S324).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 160 (B). The type of the big hit is determined by the above, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of the big hit is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. After opening the big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or opening / closing pattern to be closed 15 times when it is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 that 10 game balls B have won in the big winning opening 2005 (15 rounds) It controls the game ball B to enter the big winning opening 2005 by repeating (easy) 15R big hit gaming state, and after the big hit gaming state ends special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) If a big hit does not occur before the fluctuation display of 77 is executed, the time is controlled to be short. After opening the big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or opening / closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 that 10 game balls B have won in the big winning opening 2005 (Round 2) Repeat to control the game ball B can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy) 2R big hit gaming state (easy), if it is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R big hit gaming state big hit gaming state After the end of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) until the variable display of 77 times to be executed is controlled to be short-lived state if it does not become a big hit, before the start of 2R big hit gaming state If it is controlled to the non-short time state 2R big hit which controls to the normal state after the end of the big hit game state, it decides to be either big hit from among 2 types of big hits.

  In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, eight judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R jackpot and 192 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 2R jackpot. That is, when the lottery result of making a big hit is obtained by the drawing based on the first special random number, it becomes a 15R big hit with 4% probability and a 2R big hit with 96% probability. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 196 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R jackpot, and 4 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 2R jackpot. That is, when a lottery result for making a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, it becomes a 15R big hit with a probability of 98% and a 2R big hit with a 2% probability. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of being determined as a 15R big hit is high in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared to the big hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number Configured as described above, when the second special symbol variation display based on the starting winning combination for the second starting opening 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning combination for the first starting opening 2002 It is in an advantageous state for the disabled.

  Moreover, if the kind of big hit is determined, the stop design according to the kind of big hit will be determined as a mode at the time of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is decided to be 2R big hit, it is decided to be 2R big hit symbol as a big hit symbol. In addition, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process not shown, if it is decided to 15R big hit, it is decided to be 15R big hit symbol as a big hit symbol, and if 2R big hit symbol is decided to be 2R big hit symbol as a big hit symbol.

  Further, when the big hit flag is not set in step S131 and the small hit flag is set in step S131 (step S324), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 reads out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number with the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 160 (C), and the variation control stop time of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit Of the first special symbol (the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. The opening and closing pattern for closing the winning combination winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed twice, and the gaming ball B is controlled to a small hit gaming state where it can enter the winning combination winning opening 2006 (easy) Accepting the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 by guiding all the game balls B that have won the prize winning opening 2006 during the small hit gaming state to the first lost opening 2535 The first small hit that is difficult The opening and closing pattern is closed nine times after opening the prize winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms), and the gaming ball B is controlled to a small hit gaming state where it can enter the prize winning opening 2006 (easy). Second V by guiding one of the gaming balls B of the gaming balls B that have won in the prize winning opening 2006 during the small hit gaming state to the third distribution device 2550 after closing the prize winning opening 2006 The game ball B can be accepted into the winning opening 2008, and when the game ball B is accepted by the second V winning opening 2008, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time after the small hitting gaming state (for example, 29 The game ball B is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) by repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed when the game ball B is detected by the above-mentioned large winning hole sensor 2403 after having made 10 winnings in the large winning hole 2005 Winning a prize It is controlled to 15R big hit game state which can enter the ball in 2005 (easy), and after the big hit game state is over, until the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times The second small hit to control to the short time state is terminated if it does not become a big hit 3. The game ball B is controlled to a small hit game state where it is possible (easier) to enter the prize winning hole 2006 by executing the opening / closing pattern to be closed nine times after opening the prize winning hole 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) The game ball B is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 after the closing of the winning combination winning opening 2006, one of the gaming balls B of the gaming balls B winning the winning combination winning opening 2006 during the small hit gaming state After the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) after the small hitting gaming state based on the fact that B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007, or ten gaming balls B are winning in the large winning opening 2005 The game ball B can enter the big winning opening 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 15 times (15 rounds) (easy) 15R big hit gaming state control And, after the end of the big hit gaming state concerned, if it does not become a big hit before the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, it is controlled to a short time state which is ended One of three types of small hits is determined to be a big hit.

  In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 199 judgment values are distributed in the second small hit, and one judgment value is distributed in the third small hit. ing. That is, when the lottery result of making a small hit is obtained by the drawing based on the first special random number, the second small hit takes place with a probability of 99.5% and the third small hit takes place with a probability of 0.5%. I won't win in a small hit. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 130 judgment values in the case of the second small hit In the case of the third small hit, 50 judgment values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result of making a small hit is obtained by a drawing based on the second special random number, it becomes a first small hit with a probability of 10% and a second small hit with a probability of 65%, a probability of 25% It becomes the third small hit. Thus, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number compared to the small hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the prize winning prize hole 2006 was won By guiding one game ball B of the game balls B to the first V winning hole 2007, the probability of being determined to the third small hit which is always 15R big hit gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state becomes high Configured as described above, when the second special symbol variation display based on the starting winning combination for the second starting opening 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning combination for the first starting opening 2002 It is in an advantageous state for the disabled.

  Moreover, if the kind of small hit is determined, the stop design according to the kind of small hit is determined as the mode at the time of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, if the second small hit is determined, the second small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and if the third small hit is determined, the third small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol. . In addition, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting processing not shown, when it is decided to be the first small hit, it is decided to be the first small hit symbol as the small hit symbol, and when it is decided to be the second small hit, the small hit symbol The second small hit symbol is determined as the second small hit pattern, and the third small hit pattern is determined as the second small hit symbol when the third small hit is determined.

  If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that it is an off design (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects any of the above lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, reach lost, or lost) as the process of step S328. Set a judgment result notification command according to each lottery result so that an instruction (which may indicate the stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328) ). After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282) as the process of step S329, this process is ended.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 performs display control of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the change pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration symbols are changed and displayed) and the left decoration pattern → the right decoration pattern → middle The stop symbols are displayed in the order of the decoration symbols (in addition, the left, middle, and right decoration symbols may be synchronously displayed with the same symbol, and may be simultaneously stopped). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the small hit The symbol ("final battle") is decided, and the 2R jackpot symbol (the left, middle and right decorative symbols are the same even symbol among the symbols from "0" to "9" when the 2R jackpot is specified) If the 15R big hit is specified, the 15R big hit symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd symbol among the symbols "0" to "9") is determined. In addition, when the reach out is specified, the out pattern with reach (the left and right decorative symbols are a combination of the same symbols from “0” to “9” and a combination of symbols different in the inside decorative symbol; reach loss) If it is decided to be a symbol) and the detachment is specified, it is decided to be a different symbol (a combination of at least the left and right decorative symbols among the left, middle and right decorative symbols) with reach reaching When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect is ended), the stop symbol determined is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control in a short time until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times after the big hit gaming state, but the time saving state The time saving state may be ended based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after being transition-controlled. Specifically, when the big hit gaming state is controlled to the short time state, and then the big hit of a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) occurs, it is not controlled to the short time state after the big hit gaming state ends a predetermined number of times It may be controlled to the normal state. In addition, even if the number of occurrences of the big hit is less than a predetermined number of times, the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the non-short time state, and the big hit gaming state may be controlled again after the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 162, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit decided at step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing is selected (step S342), small hit flag Is set and entered (step S343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hitting according to the kind of small hitting decided at step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing is selected (step S344) If the reach flag is set (step S345), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach If it is selected (step S346) and neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, if there is a normal loss (a loss for which the reach effect is not performed), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the loss Is selected (step S347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, effect control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is It is stored in a form associated with each of the variable random numbers. Thus, the main control MPU selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing. Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in the present example, it is set so as to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed with the change random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

  In addition, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined as the process of step S351 whether or not the count value of the time counter is "0" when the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Do. Then, if the counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is to be ended is set (step S354).

  If it is determined in step S 351 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, if it is determined in the process of step S 353 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, then Then, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol variation processing (step S283), this processing is ended.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection, while the time is short, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), The variation pattern of the special symbol is set in the form that the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the above special symbol random number (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) in the short time state. . That is, as compared with the variation pattern at the time of non-shorting state, the variation pattern at the time of shorting is selected so that the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short. The fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S371. As processing of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the above first special symbol stop processing (step S284) in the processing of step S373, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 164, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S381. The display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed as the processing of the first special symbol stop symbol, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

  Next, when the time reduction end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time reduction end flag (step S384) and resets the time reduction flag (step S385). In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), time saving control (control of time saving state) is ended and non-time saving control It will start (control of the normal state).

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S 386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is to be started (step S 387). A standby time until start (time to display a message to start a big hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S 388, processing for setting the number of rounds according to the type of big hit to the big hit number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The big hit counter is decremented by 1 each time the round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit counter becomes “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified round number. Control to end the big hit game. Specifically, the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S401) and the big winning opening opening processing (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hitting counter becomes "0" in the big hitting control processing described later The big hit number opening post-processing (step S403) is executed based on the big hit number counter being decremented by 1 when ending the round in the mouth open process (step S402) and the big hit game ends Execute control.

  Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that a big hit game is being executed is set (step S 389). The jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S 387, a big hit start command (15 R big hit start command, 2 R big hit start command) according to the type of big hit (15 R big hit, 2 R big hit) is set. As a result, the effect of the big hit game according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing as well, set the big hit start command (15R big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) according to the type of big hit (15R big hit, 2R big hit) It has become.

  In addition, the big hit execution flag which shows that the big hit game is being executed, when the big hit game ends, specifically, the big winning opening opening post-processing (step S403) of the big hit control processing (step S235A) the big hit Opening and closing control of the special winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or that 10 game balls B are winning in the special winning opening 2005 When it is detected that it is detected that it is closed (opened and closed control is repeated twice or 15 times), it is reset (all rounds that can be performed in the big hit game). While the big hit execution flag is reset, the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric combination control process (step S114), while the first of the function display unit 1400 It becomes possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

  Also, when the big hit flag is not set (step S 386), if the small hit flag is set (step S 390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates to start the small hit game The small hit start command is set (step S391), and the standby time until the start of the small hit game (the time for displaying the small hit game etc. is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that a small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of the small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit) according to the small hit type (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) Set the start command). Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker and the like. In addition, similarly to the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, the small hit start command (the first small according to the type of the small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) The hit start command, the second small hit start command, and the third small hit start command) are set.

  In addition, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically the small hit during the small hit control process (step S236A) described later (step S411) Opening and closing control of the prize winning opening 2006 according to the type of small hit (for example, opening and closing control of repeating the opening and closing pattern twice or nine times to be closed after opening the prize winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example 80 ms)) Reset when While the small hit execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not performed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric combination control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 It becomes possible to execute the first special symbol display variation display of the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display variation of the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

  Also, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it is lost, set the interval timer to the waiting time (time to display the stop symbol of the special symbol) before starting the next variable display of the special symbol. (Step S394), it transfers to step S395.

  When the processing of step S386 to step S394 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so as to be process transition to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. In step S395, the process ends.

  FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes will be selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The above peripheral control board is informed to the player that the game is to shift to the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes the big hit symbol. Waiting for being performed by 1510, or waiting for the next round to be started A large winning opening opening pre-processing (step S401)
2. The big winning a prize port 2005 is controlled to an open state based on the mode at the time of the change display stop of the special symbol becoming a big hit symbol, or the big winning a prize port 2005 is opened based on the next round being started. A large winning combination that is controlled and opened after a long time opening the large winning opening 2005 (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 that ten gaming balls B have won in the large winning opening 2005 Open mouth processing (step S402)
3. The big winning opening opening post-processing which stands by until notification to the player that the big hit game state ends when all rounds are finished is performed by the peripheral control board 1510 (step S403)

  The big hit process flag is operated to indicate that the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. Further, in the above-mentioned process of opening the special winning opening (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the special winning opening 2005 in the open state, the big hit round start command according to the number of rounds is set, and the special winning opening 2005 is closed. At the end of the round to control the state, set the jackpot round end command according to the number of rounds. In addition, the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the production of the big hit game according to the number of rounds instructed by the big hit round start command and the big hit round end command is displayed The apparatus 1600 is implemented by a lamp, an LED, a speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart of the small hit control process (step S236A). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed depending on the small hit process flag.

1. Small hit start processing which executes setting processing in order to start small hit game state (step S410)
2. During a small hit during the small hit game state monitoring the entering and opening time of the game ball B (step S411)

  The small hit process flag is manipulated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S410) should be performed in the process of step S42. In addition, when the entry of the game ball B into the specific area is detected in the small hit middle processing, the big hit execution flag is set, and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit game state (15 rounds in this example) is hit big hit Set the number counter to end the process. As a result, the big hit gaming state will be started following the small hit gaming state.

  FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric product control process (step S116).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed to the normal winning opening 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the ordinary symbol hold storage area of the RAM. Execute a mouth winning process.

  Then, in the normal symbol process processing, one of the following five process operations is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU, and the normal symbol normal processing in which the lottery process or the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803)
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in which lottery processing or the like for the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed based on the common pattern fluctuation random number (step S804)
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the above normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805)
4. The pattern of the normal symbol at the time of the fluctuation control stop determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display pattern at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Normal symbol stop processing to stop the variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process about the mode at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol becomes the mode which suggests “per common figure”, 2nd starting opening door 2411 retreats, game ball B to 2nd starting opening 2004 Motorized electric product release processing (step S 807) that executes processing to control the acceptance of

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 138).

[13. Games in the small hit gaming state]
Next, the game in the small hit gaming state will be described. As mentioned above, in this example, when the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol becomes the small hitting, the small hitting game which executes opening and closing pattern which closes after closing the prize winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example 80ms) The game ball B which is controlled to the state and entered the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hitting gaming state and detected by the prize winning hole sensor 2513 is all the first lost mouth sensor 2515, the third lost mouth sensor, A small hit game state is detected when detected by any of the first V prize opening sensor 2514 and the second V prize opening sensor 3003, that is, when discharged from the inside of the prize winning opening 2006 to the rear of the game board 5 It is supposed to end. In addition, the game ball B which entered the prize winning opening 2006 during the small hitting gaming state is accepted by the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, and the first V winning opening sensor 2514 and the second V winning When it is detected by the mouth sensor 3003, the game ball B which is controlled to the big hit game state after the small hit game state and entered the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hit game state is the first lost port 2535 or the third lost port. When it is received by 2556 and detected by the first missing port sensor 2515 or the third missing port sensor, the small hit gaming state is controlled to the normal state or the time saving state according to the control state before the small hit.

  Also, as described above, in the present example, the first small hit is controlled so that all the game balls B that have won in the winning combination winning opening 2006 are guided to the first lost opening 2535, and the winning combination in the winning combination winning opening 2006 After one game ball B of the balls B is controlled to be guided to the third sorting device 2550 and turned in the crown 2553, the second V winning hole 2008 and the two third missing holes 2556 The second small hit which is controlled to be accepted in any way and the one game ball B of the game balls B that have won the prize in the prize winning opening 2006 are controlled to be guided to the first V winning opening 2007 The third small hit and is to be controlled to any small hit gaming state.

  In addition to the fact that the number of opening and closing times of the prize winning opening 2006 is smaller in the first small hitting compared to the second small hitting and the third small hitting, all the game balls B winning in the prize winning opening 2006 are prize winning The execution period of the small hit gaming state (period from the start to the end of the small hit gaming state) is short because it is guided from the mouth 2006 to the closest first loser port 2535 and detected by the first lost port sensor 2515. In the third small hit, one of the game balls B among the game balls B that have won the prize winning opening 2006, the distance from the prize winning opening 2006 to the first V prize opening 2007 which is next to the first lost opening 2535 The execution period of the small hit gaming state becomes shorter next to the first small hit, since the first V prize hole sensor 2514 is induced and detected. On the other hand, in the second small hit, one game ball B out of the game balls B winning in the prize winning hole 2006 is guided to the third sorting device 2550 farthest from the prize winning hole 2006, The game ball B accepted by the second V winning hole 2008 after the game ball B induced to the allotment device 2550 is swirled within the crowne 2553 is detected by the second V pay hole sensor 3003 or the third loss Since the game ball B received in the mouth 2556 is detected by the third loss mouth sensor, the execution period of the small hit gaming state is the longest among the three types of small hits.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second small hit and the small special hit are determined based on the first special random number in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state. The ratio is set high, and the second small hit is performed in most cases in the normal state, whereas the small display of the second special symbol performed in the above-mentioned short time state is the small hit based on the second special random number The rate at which the third small hit is executed is higher than in the normal state when it is determined that the third small hit is performed at a rate of once per four small hits in the time saving state. .

  That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if the game ball B is accepted in the second V prize opening 2008 during the small hit gaming state, it is advantageous for the player of the time saving state after the 15R big hit gaming state. In order to be controlled to transition to the state, the second V winning a prize by turning one of the gaming balls B of the gaming balls B that entered the prize winning opening 2006 during the small hitting gaming state into the Kroon 2553. While making you pay attention over a fixed period while making you thrilled whether it is accepted in the mouth 2008 or accepted in the third lost mouth 2556, in the variation display of the second special symbol executed in the short time state during the small hit game state Even if the game ball B is accepted in the 2V winning opening 2008, it is only controlled to the short time again after the 15R big hit gaming state, Which may lead to rather decrease in the gaming interest when one game balls B of the ball B is pivoted within Kroon 2553. Therefore, in the present example, in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, by increasing the proportion of the third small hitting of the execution period of the small hitting gaming state, the small hitting game state is shortened during the time saving state. It is supposed to end in time.

  Further, as described above, when the distribution rotary body 2531 is turned from the accommodation possible state to the accommodation impossible state in the third small hit, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531 a of the distribution rotation body 2531 is the first atari. The second distribution / induction passage 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 flows down through the passage 2536 and is brought into contact with the upper surface of the closed distribution door 2544 to be guided to the right, and enters the first V winning opening 2007 Do. Therefore, in the third small hit, the game ball B distributed to the first atari passage 2536 is turned to the back of the game board 5 in a short time by rotating from the accommodation possible state to the accommodation impossible state of the distribution rotating body 2531. As a result, the player can not visually recognize. In addition, although it becomes possible to enter into the first V winning opening 2007 when the sorting door 2544 is moving forward above the second missing port 2543, the sorting door 2544 operates in the front-rear direction. Because there is, it is difficult to see the operating state. That is, the presence of the distribution door 2544 is hard to be recognized (difficult to see) by the player, and the game ball B distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 by the distribution door 2544 is of the game board 5 in a short time. Since it is difficult to recognize the existence of the first V prize opening 2007 combined with discharging it backward, the player is that the game ball B is guided to the first V prize opening 2007, in other words, the first V prize opening 2007 It is hard to notice that the game ball B passes. In this manner, in order to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game ball B is induced to the first V winning opening 2007 when the third small hit occurs in the time saving state, the small hit game state The small hit gaming state is executed without making the lottery (whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the V winning opening (the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008)) executed, the small hit game After the end of the state can be executed 15R big hit gaming state. As a result, the small hit gaming state and the 15R big hit gaming state will be generated continuously in a short time, and the game interest can be improved.

  Also, when the game ball B is distributed to the third sorting device 2550 as a second small hit, and when the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 as a third small hit, and the effect display device The effects of the small hit gaming state executed in 1600 are different. Specifically, when it becomes the second small hit, whether the gaming ball B distributed to the third sorting device 2550 enters the second V winning opening 2008 or enters the third lost opening 2556, The effect is performed such that the third small hit is performed while the second small hit does not make the rotational movement of the distribution rotating body 2531 conscious (for example, the third small hit is a big hit It is realized to the player that the small hit gaming state will be executed by performing the same notification (in the case of the third small hit, notifying that it is not the small hit but the big hit etc.) It is difficult to make a bonus ball acquisition opportunity similar to the small hit gaming state as a special bonus chance to obtain a different winning ball different from the winning balls obtainable in the big hit gaming state, such as being executed before the start of the big hit gaming state. You may choose to execute the effect. Thus, the player who recognizes that he has won the 15R big hit is improved in the game interest because the special bonus chance is executed before the start of the 15R big hit gaming state and a bonus ball different from the 15R big hit gaming state can be obtained. Do.

  In addition, if the arrival time to the V winning opening is shorter in the third small hitting than in the second small hitting, the route until the gaming ball B induced by the second small hitting is accepted in the V winning opening The length of (the first route) and the route (second route) until the gaming ball B induced by the third small hit is accepted by the V winning opening becomes longer in proportion to the arrival time to the V winning opening Not limited to the above, if the reaching time to the V winning opening is longer than the third small hitting, the path (first route) until the gaming ball B induced by the second small hitting is accepted to the V winning opening The game ball B induced by the third small hit may be shorter than the path (second path) until it is accepted in the V winning hole. For example, by providing the speed reduction means for reducing the rolling speed of the gaming ball B in the first path, the arrival time to the V winning opening may be longer than the gaming ball B passing the second path.

  Further, in the above-described example, the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are provided with a plurality of V winning openings, and in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the prize winning opening 2006 One of the game balls B among the game balls B that have won a prize is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 having the second V prize hole 2008, and the feature is displayed on the second special symbol variation display executed in the time saving state By guiding one of the gaming balls B of the gaming balls B that have won in the winning opening 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007 closer to the next to the first losing opening 2535 from the first winning opening 2535 Although the execution period of the hit gaming state is made different, the distance to the V winning opening, the number of V winning openings, etc. are not limited to those described above. For example, a gaming machine having only one V winning opening The technical idea of the present invention applies to It is a function. Specifically, for example, means (obstacles, etc.) are provided for blocking or delaying the acceptance of gaming ball B to the V winning opening such that the gaming ball B can be accepted to the V winning opening after turning in the clone 2553 Means that there is no means to block or delay the acceptance of gaming ball B to the V winning opening by providing a second small hitting with a long time to reach the V winning opening, and at least the number provided more than the second small hitting As long as it is small, the third small hit of the arrival time to the V prize opening and the normal state (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol) according to the arrival time to the common V prize opening. You may make it change the execution ratio in time saving state (the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol).

13-1. Error notification in the small hit gaming state]
Next, error notification in the small hit gaming state will be described. In this example, the time until the game ball B winning a prize in the prize winning opening 2006 is discharged in the small hit gaming state is monitored, and if it is not discharged even after the predetermined period, an error notification is performed .

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart of the small hitting start process (step S411). In the small hit start process, a setting process for starting the small hit game state is executed.

  When the small hit start process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first subtracts one from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process and the second special symbol stop process (step S421). When the time-out (step S422), that is, when the waiting time from the stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) to the start of the small hitting gaming state has passed, the small hitting gaming state is started An initial value "0" is set to the elapsed timer which measures the elapsed time since then (step S423).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects the open / close pattern data according to the type of small hit being executed (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) (step S424), The control of the winning combination winning opening 2006, the distribution rotary body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 is started based on the opened / closed pattern data (step S425), and the process is shifted to the small hit middle When the small hit process flag is updated (step S 426), the process ends. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the processing ends without executing the subsequent processing.

  The open / close pattern data is provided for each type of small hit, and indicates the operation mode of the prize winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the small hit gaming state start. It is a thing. In this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the prize winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 based on the open / close pattern data corresponding to the small hit type selected in step S424. Then, in the mode shown in FIG. 123, the prize winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are operated.

  FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit middle process (step S412).

  When the small hit middle process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first adds 1 to an elapsed timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the small hit gaming state, and the discharge monitoring timer described later is set. Then, the timer value of the discharge monitoring timer is decremented by 1 (step S431). When the elapsed timer is incremented by 1, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects the open / close pattern corresponding to the elapsed timer (the elapsed time from the small hit gaming state start) among the open / close pattern data selected in step S424 of the small hit start process. Data is read, and based on the read open / close pattern data, opening / closing control of the winning combination winning opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 is performed (step S432).

  In addition, if the main product MPU of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received in the product game winning hole 2006 and the game winning hole sensor 2513 is on (step S433), ie If the game ball B is accepted, the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls not yet discharged from the inside of the prize winning hole 2006 among the gaming balls B having won the prize winning hole 2006 is incremented by 1 (step S434) .

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the case where the game ball B is first accepted in the winning combination winning opening 2006 after the small hit gaming state is started (when the first game ball B enters) (Step S 435), is provided corresponding to each small hit type as the longest period assumed until all the game balls B that entered the prize winning opening 2006 including this game ball B are discharged The estimated longest period is set to the discharge monitoring timer (step S436).

  In this example, in the case of the first small hit, the game balls B received in the prize winning opening 2006 are all distributed to the second lost opening 2535 without being distributed to the first atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531. In order to enter, the shortest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 10000 ms). In the case of the second small hit, one game ball B of the game balls B received in the prize winning hole 2006 is distributed to the first atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531 and the first atari passage The game ball B, which has entered the third sorting device 2550 through 2536, turns in the clone 2553 and then enters either the second V winning hole 2008 or the two third losers 2556, so the longest possible period of time The longest period of the three types of small hits is set as (for example, 180000 ms). Also, in the case of the third small hit, although one of the gaming balls B of the gaming balls B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first atari passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531, the first atari is In order to receive the game ball B that has passed through the passage 2536 at the second V pay-out port 2008 without entering the third distribution device 2550, a short period next to the first small hit is set as the assumed longest period (for example 60000s).

  The discharge monitoring timer is decremented in step S431 above, and the mismatch between the number of gaming balls B winning in the winning combination winning opening 2006 and the number of gaming balls B discharged from the inside of the winning combination winning opening 2006 causes the discharge monitoring timer to time out. When continuing to a later date, it is determined that some abnormality (error) or cheating is being performed.

  It should be noted that if the elapsed time from the start of the small hit gaming state is monitored and if this elapsed time reaches the estimated longest period according to the small hit type being executed, it is assumed that some abnormality (error) or cheating is being performed The elapsed time from the first opening timing of the prize winning opening 2006 in the small hit gaming state may be monitored, and this elapsed time is an estimated longest period according to the small hit type being executed. It may be determined that some abnormality (error) or cheating is being performed when it becomes the timing when the distribution of the game ball B is actually performed by the distribution rotating body 2531 (in the case of the first small hit) The first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned on (energized) with the start of the small hit gaming state, and the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is directed upward from the first distribution solenoid. Timing at which 532 turns OFF (non-energized) and operates so that the accommodation part 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 turns to the right (first distribution operation timing of the distribution rotating body 2531), second small hit Then, after the first distribution operation timing of the distribution rotating body 2531, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is again turned ON (energized), and the accommodation portion 2531 a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is directed upward. The timing at which the distribution solenoid 2532 is brought into the OFF (non-energized) state so that the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotation body 2531 is turned to the right (the second distribution operation timing of the distribution rotation body 2531), At the third small hit, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is again turned ON (energized) after the second distribution operation timing of the distribution rotary body 2531. When the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) from the state in which the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotation body 2531 is directed upward, the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotation body 2531 is directed to the right. If the elapsed time from the operating timing (the third distribution operation timing of the distribution rotating body 2531) is monitored and this elapsed time becomes the estimated longest period according to the small hit type being executed, some abnormality ( It may be determined that an error (error) or cheating is being performed.

  In addition, when detecting the discharge of the game ball B accepted in the prize winning opening 2006, ie, when discharging the gaming ball B accepted in the prize winning opening 2006, the first lost port sensor 2515, the first When the game ball B is detected in any of the V winning hole sensor 2514, the second V winning hole sensor 3003, and the third lost hole sensor (step S437), the residual ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S438). .

  Then, whether the residual ball counter is "0" or not, that is, the number of gaming balls B accepted in the prize winning opening 2006 matches the number of gaming balls B discharged from the prize winning opening 2006 It is determined whether or not it is (step S439), and if the remaining number counter is "0", it proceeds to step S442 as an abnormality or cheating has not occurred.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S439 that the residual ball counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in order to determine whether there is an abnormality or an illegal act (step S440). . As described above, the discharge monitoring timer is provided corresponding to each small hit type as the longest period assumed from the start of the small hit gaming state to the discharge of all the game balls B from the prize winning opening 2006. Indicates the remaining period of the longest possible period. If it is determined in step S440 that the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out, the processing ends without executing the subsequent processing. As a result, when the special symbol of the main control side timer interrupt processing and the special motorized control object control processing (step S114) are executed again, the small hitting middle processing is executed and the residual ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out. It will be.

  Further, if the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in step S440 when the residual ball counter is not "0", it is determined that an abnormality or a fraud has occurred, and a discharge error notification is issued (step S441). It is supposed to finish the process during the hit. For the discharge error notification, an error display on the effect display device 1600, an output of notification sound by the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., lighting in a predetermined mode by lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3. Flashing is included, and in this example, a display such as “discharge abnormal” is displayed in a partial area of the effect display device 1600 and the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 are not output. That is, the state where the residual ball counter is not “0” indicates a minor abnormality such that most of the game balls B that have entered the prize winning opening 2006 are not discharged, etc. In order to prevent the player from making an annoyance or an annoyance, the display is made. After the discharge error notification is given in step S441, the small hit middle process is ended without updating the small hit process flag, and then the special symbol of the main control side timer interrupt process and the special electric bonus game control process (step When the step S114) is executed, the small hit middle process is executed again. That is, all the game balls B received in the prize winning opening 2006 are discharged, or the RAM clear switch is operated by the game clerk to completely erase the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. The discharge error notification is executed without the small hit gaming state ending (until reset).

  If it is determined in step S439 that the residual ball counter is "0", it is determined whether the gaming ball B has entered the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (step S442). When the game ball B does not enter the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008 in the step S 442, that is, the game ball B enters the first loser 2535 or the third loser 2556 and the first loser If it is detected by the mouth sensor 2515 or the third lost mouth sensor, the small hitting end command which instructs execution of the effect when the small hitting gaming state ends is set (step S443), and the small hitting start processing (step S411) When the small hit process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to (step S447), this process is ended.

  If the game ball B enters the first V prize opening 2007 or the second V prize opening 2008 in step S 442 and is detected by the first V prize opening sensor 2514 or the second V prize opening sensor 3003, the start of the big hit game After setting the standby time until the interval timer in the interval timer (step S444), the small hitting execution flag is reset and the big hit execution flag is set (step S445). In addition, the V winning big hit start command is set to instruct the execution of the effect at the start of the big hit gaming state based on the acceptance of the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (step S446) When the small hit process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the hit start process (step S411) (step S447), the process ends.

  Thus, in this example, when game ball B is accepted in winning combination winning opening 2006, the value of the residual ball counter is incremented by one, and every time gaming sphere B is discharged from the winning combination prize opening 2006, the value of residual ball counter The number of gaming balls B remaining without being discharged from the winning combination winning opening 2006 (center combination 2500) can be grasped by subtracting one. In addition, according to the small hitting classification, in other words according to the distribution place of game ball B period (presumed longest period) until execution of discharge error notification is made different, the game ball B which passes 1st atari passage 2536 In the third small hit accepted at the second V prize-winning opening 2008 without entering the third distribution device 2550, the third small distribution device 2550 causes the game ball B to enter and makes a turn from the second small hit which makes a turn in the clown 2553 Also, the period until the emission error notification is performed (the estimated longest period) is shortened. That is, in the case of a small hit with a short time (distance) to reach the V winning opening, the period until the discharge error notification is performed is shortened.

  Since the game ball B is not normally left in the prize product winning opening 2006, some abnormality (when the game ball B remains in the prize product winning opening 2006 for a long period of time) It can be determined that an error has occurred. In addition, when it is detected that the game balls B are discharged more than the number of the game balls B that have won the prize prize winning opening 2006, a fraudulent act such as making the game sphere B win a prize in the prize winning opening 2006 It can be determined that there is a possibility that In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, occurrence of these abnormalities and cheating is monitored, and when there is a suspicion of these, a discharge error notification is performed.

  Further, in this example, it is detected that game balls B remain in the prize winning opening 2006 or that a greater number of gaming spheres B have been discharged than the gaming balls B winning in the prize winning opening 2006. Therefore, even after the discharge error notification is issued based on the fact that the discharge monitoring timer has timed out when the residual ball counter is not “0”, it is small every time the main control timer interrupt processing is executed without stopping the game. Execute processing during the hit to monitor the value of the residual ball counter, and if the value of the residual ball counter is “0”, that is, return to the normal state, the first V winning hole 2007 and the second The state is automatically returned to a state where it is determined that the game ball B has entered the 2V winning opening 2008, and the small hit gaming state is ended.

  In this example, even if the value of the residual ball counter does not become “0” after the discharge error notification is performed in step S 441 of the small hit middle processing, a more serious abnormality occurs. The error notification regarding this serious abnormality is prioritized and executed. As a serious abnormality, for example, when the magnetism which acts improperly in the game area 5a is detected by any of a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 (magnetic detection error notification), when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio signal detection error notification ), There is a high possibility that fraudulent acts such as door opening error notification (door opening error notification) are detected. When such a serious abnormality occurs, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit gaming state is ended, and the error notification related to these serious abnormalities (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification Etc.) and may resume the discharge error notification in step S 441 in the small hit gaming state again after the end of the error notification related to the serious abnormality, the error notification pertaining to the serious abnormality may be small hit gaming state The discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit gaming state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the output of the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., and the game board by overwriting the discharge error notification in step S441 in step S44. It is reflected in lighting, blinking, etc. of the lamp, LED, etc. provided on 5 and the door frame 3. Although it is not performed (viewable) (during the back side), the content of the discharge error notification is progressed with the passage of time while the error notification related to the serious abnormality is being performed, and the serious abnormality is The display on the effect display device 1600, the output of the speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., the game board 5 or the door frame so that the discharge error notification is viewed or viewed with the progressed content when the error notification related to the end is completed. It may be made to reflect in lighting and blinking etc. of the lamp, LED etc. provided in 3 (For example, an error notification relating to a serious abnormality 5 seconds after starting the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit gaming state If it is started and this error notification is executed for 30 seconds, step S441 in the small hit gaming state after ending the error notification relating to a serious abnormality To resume from the contents of the 35 seconds after the start of the discharge error notification).

  Further, the mode of the discharge error notification may be made different between the case where the residual ball counter is “1” or more and the case where it is less than “0” in step S439 of the small hit middle process. When the residual ball counter is “1” or more, it only indicates a minor abnormality that the gaming ball B entering the winning combination winning opening 2006 is not discharged, while the residual ball counter is less than “0”. In this case, it indicates a serious abnormality in which more game balls B are ejected than the number of game balls B entered into the prize winning hole 2006, and illegally enter the game ball B into the prize winning hole 2006. There is a possibility. Therefore, when a minor abnormality occurs such that the game ball B that has entered the winning combination winning opening 2006 is not discharged, the discharge error notification 1 is output to a partial area of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 170, for example. The error sound is not output by continuously displaying the effect sound from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 by displaying "It is abnormal." Etc., and part of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 When a serious abnormality occurs in which the game balls B more than the number of game balls B entered are caused to emit light partially and a discharge error notification 2 occurs, for example, "a fraud occurs in the entire area of the effect display device 1600! Etc., while suppressing the volume of the effect sound from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464, as an error sound, "It is illegally performed." Outputs an amount may be notified of the occurrence of fraud by causing further light emission across the door frame 3 by emit all of the LED provided on the door frame 3.

  Further, in this example, a detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution / induction path 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second distribution device 2540 When the game ball B induced to the three-way distribution path 2551 is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution path 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the effect display device 1600 and the speaker 622, 354, 462, 464, the game ball B which turns the clone 2553 in the third distribution device 2550 by controlling the lamp, LED and the like provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 and the second V winning opening 2008 and An effect is created to enliven which of the third loss port 2556 is acceptable.

  A detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided in the middle of the third distribution induction path 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310, in which case the third distribution detection sensor 2552 In accordance with the detection of the game ball B by the above, whether or not an abnormality has occurred may be determined. For example, when the game ball B is detected at a V winning opening or losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the small hitting type in the small hitting middle processing, or according to the small hitting type When there is a possibility of detecting the game ball B at a V winning opening or losing opening different from the planned V winning opening or losing opening (different from the passage expected or winning opening depending on the type of small hit) In the case where the game ball B has headed to the passage or the winning opening), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the distribution error notification may be executed in step S441 of the small hitting process.

  Specifically, as the V winning opening and the missing opening scheduled according to the small hitting type, the first missing opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the first small hitting, and in the case of the second small hitting, the second In the case of the third small hit, the first V winning opening 2007 is scheduled. Then, when it is detected that the game ball B is accepted in any of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loss opening 2556 in the small hit middle processing in the case of the first small hit, If it is detected that the game ball B is accepted in one of the first lost port 2535 and the first V prize port 2007 in the small hit middle processing in the case of the second small hit, the small hit middle in the case of the third small hit When it is detected that the game ball B is accepted in any of the first missing port 2535, the second V prize-winning port 2008, and the third missing port 2556 in the process, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown at 170, the display of "incorrect occurrence!" Etc. is performed over the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and the volume of the effect sound is suppressed from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464, and "incorrect line I am A distribution error notification may be executed to notify the occurrence of a fraudulent action by causing the entire door frame 3 to emit light by outputting all at a large volume and further causing all of the LEDs provided in the door frame 3 to emit light. . In this case, it is possible to immediately notify of the occurrence of the cheating and to detect the cheating early.

  In addition, the second distribution detection sensor is provided with a second distribution detection sensor for detecting the game ball B circulating in the second distribution induction path 2541 in the middle of the second distribution induction path 2541, and the detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor The main control board 1310 may be input, and in the case of the first small hit, the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third lost opening 2556 may be played in the small hit middle processing If there is a possibility that the ball B will be accepted, that is, if it is determined that the gaming ball B has entered the second distribution guiding path 2541 by the second distribution detection sensor detecting the gaming ball B, the second The second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit middle processing in the case of small hits, but the third distribution detection sensor 2552 can not detect the game ball B, so it passes through the second distribution guide path 2541. Game ball B toward the first V winning hole 2007 If it is determined that the second distribution detection sensor detects the gaming ball B in the small hitting middle processing in the case of the third small hitting by detecting the gaming ball B by the third distribution detection sensor 2552 When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading to the third distribution device 2550, a V winning opening or a loser different from the scheduled V winning opening or the lost opening, etc. If there is a possibility of detecting the game ball B in the mouth, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and the distribution error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify when fraudulent activity is likely to occur, and to detect fraudulent activity early.

  The distribution error notification may be made different depending on the degree of abnormality (incorrect level), for example, because the second distribution detection sensor detected the gaming ball B in the case of the first small hit. If it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guide path 2541, or if the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hitting middle processing in the case of the second small hit, but the third swing The degree of abnormality is high when it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading to the first V winning opening 2007 because the minute detection sensor 2552 can not detect the game ball B. For example, while displaying "Improper occurrence!" Etc. in the whole area of the effect display device 1600, the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 output "Ludition is being performed." In the occurrence of cheating In the case of the second small hit in the case of the second small hit in the case of the third small hit in the case of the third small hit in the process of the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the third distribution detection sensor 2552 When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading to the third distribution device 2550 by detecting the ball B, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is low, for example, the effect By displaying “Ejection error.” Or the like in a partial area of the display device 1600 and not outputting the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464, the occurrence of an anomaly different from the fraudulent activity is reported. It is also good. That is, when the game ball B passes through the path where the game ball B enters the V winning opening at a rate higher than the entering ratio of the game ball B to the V prize opening preset according to the small hit type (When V prize expectation is improved more than V prize expectation set in advance according to the small hit type being executed) It is judged that the degree of abnormality is high and cheating is conducted. The game ball B passes through the path where the game ball B enters the V winning opening at a rate lower than the entering rate of the game ball B to the V prize opening preset according to the small hit type If it is (if the V prize expectation is lower than the V prize expectation set in advance according to the type of small hit being executed), it is judged that the degree of abnormality is low and fraudulent The occurrence of an abnormality different from the above may be notified. Also, if the V prize expectation is lower than the V prize expectation set in advance according to the type of small hit being executed, the player suffers a disadvantage but the gaming shop side is damaged. Since no occurrence occurs, the distribution error notification may not be performed when the degree of such abnormality is low.

  In addition, the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening and the losing opening different from the V winning opening and the losing opening scheduled according to the small hitting classification, and the V winning scheduled according to the small hitting classification During the small hit in the process during the small hit during the distribution error notification based on the possibility of detecting the game ball B in the V winning opening and losing mouth different from the mouth and missing mouth, the prize winning opening in the process Even if it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred that the game ball B that has entered into 2006 has not been discharged, it is different from the V winning opening and the losing opening scheduled according to the small hitting type and the V winning opening and the losing opening Based on the fact that the game ball B has been detected, and the possibility of detecting the game ball B with a V prize opening or lost mouth different from the V prize opening or lost opening scheduled according to the small hit type has occurred. Distribution error notification that is currently being , It continues to be performed. However, the discharge error notification 1 based on the fact that it is determined that a minor abnormality has occurred that the gaming ball B that has entered the winning combination winning opening 2006 in the small hit middle processing is not discharged is in a visible / viewable state Although it is not performed, it is performed behind the scenes and advances the contents of the discharge error notification 1 with the passage of time. Also, in this case, when the game ball B entering the winning combination winning opening 2006 is discharged and the value of the residual ball counter becomes “0”, the gaming ball B entering into the winning combination winning opening 2006 is not discharged. Discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred is ended. As described above, even if a minor abnormality occurs during a period in which an error notification (in this example, distribution error notification) is performed based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality, an error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality ( In this example, the discharge error notification 1) is not executed so as to be visible and viewable. However, the error notification based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality (in this example, distribution error notification) is executed silently, and when the minor abnormality disappears, the error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality (this In the example, the discharge error notification 1) is ended.

  In this example, even when the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state is not generated, the prize winning hole sensor 2513, the first V winning hole sensor 2514, the first lost mouth sensor 2515, the second V winning hole sensor 3003, Detection of the game ball B by the third lost mouth sensor is monitored, and when the game ball B is detected by any of these, it is determined that cheating is being performed and the occurrence of cheating is notified It has become. It should be noted that the detection of the game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor or the third distribution detection sensor 2552 may be monitored in a state in which the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state is not generated. When the game ball B is detected by any of the minute detection sensor and the third distribution detection sensor 2552, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high, that is, it is determined that an illegal act is being performed, and the occurrence of the illegal act is notified. May be That is, in a state in which the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state is not generated, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the game ball B entering the V winning opening, any passage in the prize winning opening 2006 is played Even if the ball B passes, it may be determined that an illegal act is being performed, and the occurrence of the illegal act may be notified.

  In the above example, when the discharge error notification is executed in step S 441 or the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the small hitting type Based on the possibility of detecting the game ball B in the V winning opening or losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the small hitting classification, the sorting error notification is performed In this case, while the small hit process is repeatedly executed to monitor the value of the residual ball counter, the progress of the game may be stopped without monitoring the value of the residual ball counter. In addition, even when the progress of the game is not stopped, the value of the residual ball counter is monitored, and when the value of the residual ball counter becomes normal ("0"), the abnormal state is automatically recovered and the small hit The gaming state may not be ended. This makes it possible to reliably detect the occurrence of an abnormality.

  In addition, after the distribution error notification is performed, if the game ball B is detected at the V prize opening or the missing opening (regular reception) scheduled according to the small hit type, or according to the small hit type When the game ball B rolling on the planned route (the regular route) is detected (for example, when the third distribution detection sensor 2552 is detected in the case of the second small hit), distribution error notification You may complete the process. In addition, after the discharge error notification is performed, if the game ball B is detected at the V prize opening or the missing opening (regular reception) scheduled according to the small hit classification, or according to the small hit classification If the game ball B rolling on the route being played (the regular route) is detected (for example, if the third distribution detection sensor 2552 is detected in the case of the second small hit), the discharge error notification is ended You may In addition, it detects the game ball B which rolls the route (the regular route) which is scheduled according to the small hitting classification with the measurement value of the discharge monitoring timer which causes execution of the discharge error notification (for example, the second small In the case of a hit, the third distribution detection sensor 2552 may be reset each time), and in this case, the discharge monitoring timer is measured again after the reset and the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer is being executed. The emission error notification may be made executable when the estimated maximum period according to the small hit type of the item is reached.

[14-1. Volume control]
The volume adjustment switch is a predetermined period after power on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), a special symbol display (the A fixed period (in this example, the variation pattern in the peripheral control unit) when the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped in one special symbol display, second special symbol display) Until 0.5 seconds have passed after the start of the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol since the command was received, or until 0.5 seconds have passed since the finalized display of the decorative symbol since the peripheral control unit received the stop display command Except for the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4, the volume of the presentation sound such as music and sound effects An integer switch so that the can be adjusted by rotating operation. As described above, the volume adjustment switch is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by turning operation, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter has a resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch. The voltage divided by the above is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The sound source IC is controlled to obtain the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music is generated from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. And sound effects are flowing. As described above, music and sound effects etc. are generated from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4 by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch The directing sound of is flowing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the presentation sound such as music and sound effects, the notification sound for notifying the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 Or, to notify the contents and the like about the game effect (for example, to render the screen developed in the effect display device 1600 as more powerful, and to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to a game state advantageous to the player And so on.) Also flows from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the body frame 4, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume It is a mechanism that does not depend on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the switch at all, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is adjusted by controlling the peripheral control IC by the program. So that the can be.

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-described seven levels, and can be changed in five levels from the mute to the maximum volume. Thereby, for example, even when the store clerk or the like in the hall turns the volume adjustment switch to set the volume small, the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame 4 Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound is reduced, a large volume is generated when the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble or the player is performing an illegal activity In the mode, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be made to flow. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined period after power on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit ends the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or special A fixed period (in this example, peripheral control) when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped in the symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) After the variation pattern command is received by the unit and 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the start of variation display of the decorative symbol, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and the final display of the decorative symbol In addition to the fact that the volume of the sound of the music or sound effects is adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch except for the lapse of time, the predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, Special symbol in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) or the period until the side control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002) A fixed period for starting or stopping the variable display of (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) (in this example, 0.5 after the variation pattern command is received by the peripheral control unit and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started) Until the second elapses, or 0.5 seconds after the display of the decoration symbol is confirmed after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command), and the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 set in the variation effect. Operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 (the effective period for accepting the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in a so-called button effect) ) Or the like, except, thereby making it possible to adjust the volume of the effect sound music and sound effects by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pushing operation section 303 of the staging operation unit 300. Specifically, a predetermined period after turning on the power (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), a special symbol display (first A fixed period (in this example, the change pattern command in the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol display, second special symbol display) Or until 0.5 seconds have passed after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or until 0.5 seconds have passed after the final display of the decorative symbol since the peripheral control unit has received the stop display command), Operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 set in the fluctuation effect (a so-called button rotating operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 in a so-called button effect) When the rotary operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 is rotated except for the effective period of receiving the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, etc., the indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the rendering operation By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the unit 300, the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effects can be changed to adjust it to a desired volume (one of the minimum volume 1 to the maximum volume 5). .

  Specifically, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300, and the volume of the effect sound is 1 when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount. The volume is changed to a level that has been raised, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated left without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount The volume is reduced by one step.

  FIG. 171 shows the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 for the door frame 3 and the low-pitched body frame 4 according to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300. In the state where the volume of the effect sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 is set to the volume 5, the change effect to change and display the decorative symbol is started in the effect display device 1600, and in the middle of the change effect It is a timing diagram which shows the example when the pressing operation part 303 is pressed operation, and the case where the rotation operation part 302 of the presentation operation unit 300 is rotated operation after that.

  As shown in FIG. 171, in order to change the volume of the effect sound from volume 5 to volume 4 in the middle of the fluctuation effect executed by the effect display device 1600, without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the left and the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the effect sound is lowered by one step from the volume 5 to the volume 4, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. The change according to the operation is immediately reflected on the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. That is, in order to change the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4 The volume after this change is reflected in the output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4 at the timing of t1 when the 302 is rotated. It has become.

  Further, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is configured to change the scale according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. Thereby, it is possible to determine the current set volume through vision. Further, in the present example, the indicator displayed in response to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 where the effect by the decorative symbol or the like is executed. In addition, this indicator is displayed on the outermost surface among the images displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, by displaying the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a semi-transparent manner, it is possible to recognize an image such as a variation effect to be executed on the back. Note that a sub-display device different from the effect display device 1600 in which the change effect by the decorative symbol etc. is executed may be provided, and in this case, in accordance with the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. The indicator may be displayed on the sub display device. Further, in this example, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears. Note that after the indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. You may make it The indicator described above may be displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600, or in the display region of the effect display device 1600, the lower right display region or the like not overlapping the effect image or the like is divided. An indicator may be displayed in the lower display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and an indicator may be displayed on this display device.

  In addition, when the scale of the indicator and the volume of the effect sound of music or sound change by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the specific sound according to the changed volume (such as "beep") changes. Electronic sound is output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. As a result, when the rotational operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to rotate, the effect sound of music and sound effects is the main body for the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 of the door frame 3 and the low frequency body of the main body frame 4. Even if it is not output from the frame speaker 622, the actual volume is generated by the specific sound output from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the body frame speaker 622 for low frequency of the body frame 4. You can adjust the volume while checking. Note that the specific sound may not be output during the execution of the fluctuation effect. That is, the effect sound according to the content of the change effect is output during the change effect, and it is possible to check the actual volume without outputting the specific sound. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the inhibition of the fluctuation presentation being performed by outputting the specific sound unrelated to the contents of the fluctuation presentation during the fluctuation presentation.

  The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC and the rendering sound Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly turning the sound volume adjustment switch, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 or the pressure operation unit 303 By adding or subtracting a predetermined value to or from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch according to the operation, the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume There are two ways to do this. Since the volume control switch is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, only the store clerk in the hall can turn the volume adjustment switch. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the staged sound of music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud the staged sound of music and sound effects. is there. Therefore, when the rotary operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. It is supposed to be. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the music or the sound effect to a desired volume, so that it is difficult for the store clerk in the hall to feel the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall and hear the effect sound of the music or the effect sound. The volume can be increased to a desired volume by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300, and the volume of the store clerk in the hall feels large to produce the presentation sound of music or sound effects. If the user feels loud, the user can operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 does not play a game is continued for a predetermined time, and when waiting for a customer and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the previous time, The volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game is cancelled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall directly turning the volume adjustment switch is adjusted. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to feel the volume adjusted by the player playing the game and hear the music and sound effects produced this time, this time, the front of the pachinko machine 1 The player who is seated in the game and plays the game can operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 to increase the volume to a desired level, and sit on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time If the player who was playing a game feels loudly at the adjusted volume and feels the loud sound of the music and sound effects, the player who is sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game this time operates operation unit 300 The volume operation can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303.

[14-2. Volume control of specific frequency band]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 is operated, a predetermined value is added to or subtracted from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch, In addition to adjusting the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume, the volume of a specific frequency band can be adjusted. Specifically, the sound output of the high range (more than a predetermined frequency range) can be suppressed (or muffled).

  That is, a predetermined period after power on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit ends the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display (first special symbol) Display a variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the display, the second special symbol display) for a certain period (in this example, the peripheral control unit receives the fluctuation pattern command) Then, until 0.5 seconds have passed after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or until 0.5 seconds have passed after the display of the stop display command has been received by the peripheral control unit), Operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 set in (the so-called button operation of the rendering operation unit 300 When the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 is pressed except for the effective period for receiving the operation of the operation unit 303, various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (presence or absence of high sound output, light emission of the LED of the door frame 3) The effect display device 1600 is configured to display a screen for performing an environment change mode in which the presence / absence of the character etc. is set. On the screen for performing the environment change mode, the environments which can be changed (presence or absence of high sound output, presence or absence of light emission of the LED of the door frame 3, etc.) are displayed as a list. By operating the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where one of the environment settings is selected, it is possible to execute the process of changing the environment setting. As described above, by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 according to the screen of the environment change mode, the sound output of a specific frequency band can be suppressed, or the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch It is possible to output at the sound volume set according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. Further, although the screen in the environment change mode is displayed on the outermost surface among the images displayed on the effect display device 1600, the image on the back can be recognized by being displayed semi-transparently.

  Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operating unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, in the state where the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is selected by operating the rotation operation part 302, the state and the specific frequency band for suppressing the sound output of the specific frequency band by pressing the pressing operation part 303. A selection screen with a state in which sound output is not suppressed is displayed (for example, a mini character for volume setting is displayed, and "high range cut-on" or "high range cut-off" is displayed in the balloon of the mini The display is switched every time the part 302 is rotated by a predetermined amount of rotation), the state of suppressing the sound output of the specific frequency band by operating the rotation operation part 302 again and the state of not suppressing the sound output of the specific frequency band In the state where one of them is selected, the change to the selected state is determined by pressing the pressing operation unit 303, and the determination screen is displayed (the volume setting mini-computer Balloon within the displays either "You there cut of the high-frequency range," or "I no cut of the high range" of). After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the environment change mode is ended by making the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappear. In addition, after the determination screen is displayed, the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be erased based on the pressing operation unit 303 being operated. The screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the determination screen may be displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600, or the effect image or the effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A lower left display area or the like not overlapping with the indicator display at the time of adjusting the sound volume may be divided, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen and a determination screen may be displayed in the lower left display area. In addition, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 is provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a determination screen are displayed on this display device. May be

  In addition, after the screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 without rotating the rotation operating unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300, the rotation operation is performed. Even if the rotation operation of the unit 302 is performed, the volume adjustment of the effect sound is invalidated, and the indicator is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. Then, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated without pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 after the end of the environment change mode, the volume adjustment of the rendering sound becomes effective and the indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600 Will be

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 171, the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during the fluctuation effect performed by the effect display device 1600 is the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300. When the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 is operated to suppress the volume set according to the operation, the rotation operation of the rendering operation unit 300 is performed at the timing of t2 when these operations are completed. Changes according to the operation of the unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are not reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4 . Then, the decorative symbol is decided and stopped based on the reception of the stop display command instructing the derived display of the display result of the decorative symbol from the main control MPU at the timing of t3 when the variation effect executed by the effect display device 1600 is ended To reflect the change according to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 performed during the fluctuation effect), that is, the volume adjustment switch of the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band The sound volume is suppressed more than the volume set according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300.

  It should be noted that after the timing of t2 when the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are completed in the volume control of the effect sound of the specific frequency band in the middle of the fluctuation effect, the volume control of the effect sound of the specific frequency band is invalidated Ru. Then, when the change of the volume control of the effect sound of the specific frequency band according to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected at the timing of t3 when the fluctuation effect ends, the specific Volume control of the effect sound of the frequency band is effective. Further, in this example, even if the volume adjustment of the effect sound of the specific frequency band is invalidated, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operating unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300, the environment Although a screen for performing the change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to select the volume control of a specific frequency band. Note that the environment change mode is performed even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operating unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 in a period in which the volume adjustment of the rendering sound of the specific frequency band is invalidated. The screen of may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rotation operation unit 302 of the presentation operation unit 300 or the pressing operation is performed to adjust the volume of the presentation sound of the specific frequency band in the middle of the fluctuation presentation performed by the presentation display device 1600. When the section 303 is operated, the change according to the operation is reflected immediately after the end of the change effect performed by the effect display device 1600 without immediately reflecting the change. Usually, from the start to the end of the fluctuation effect, the effect sound according to the contents of the fluctuation effect is continuous from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass of the body frame 4. When adjusting the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band in the middle of the fluctuation effect (when the effect sound being output continuously is interrupted for a moment, the sound volume of the specific frequency band is thereafter output. The player may feel discomfort due to, for example, the output of the suppressed effect sound or the output of the unsuppressed effect sound of the specific frequency band being resumed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band in the middle of the change effect, the change effect is By reflecting after the end of the fluctuation production without reflecting the change according to this operation until the end, the production sound continuously flowing during the fluctuation production is output with contents set in advance, and fluctuation After the end of the effect and the output of the effect sound flowing continuously according to the content of the fluctuation effect being stopped, the volume of the specific frequency band by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 In order to enable output of the effect sound reflecting the adjustment, the player does not feel discomfort. That is, during the fluctuation effect in which the effect sound is continuously output, the effect sound which is continuously output is stopped without reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band, and the next effect sound is output. By reflecting it at the switching timing until output, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without discomfort.

  On the other hand, when the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band during the period in which the change effect is not performed, Corresponding changes are immediately reflected, and the effect sound with the adjusted volume of the specific frequency band is output from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the body frame speaker 622 for low frequency of the body frame 4. Be done.

  As described above, while the volume control of the staged sound during the variation production is immediately reflected, the volume control of the staged sound of the specific frequency band is not immediately reflected. In other words, for sound related information that may adversely affect the planned effects of the on-going fluctuation effects such as giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the change of the effect sound, the change in the fluctuation effects is prohibited and the effect of the effects is reduced. It is supposed to be deterred.

  Further, when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected, the player may be notified by displaying that effect on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the rotation operating unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the rendering sound of the specific frequency band during the fluctuation rendering, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is Although it does not reflect immediately, the mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the standby display such as "Wait a minute" is displayed in the balloon of this mini character to adjust the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band. The player may be notified that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to be performed is normally received. In addition, the standby display for notifying the player that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band is properly received is specified. It may be made to change according to the remaining time until the timing to reflect the volume control of the frequency band of, for example, a mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and “wait for a while in the balloon of this mini character The player is normally receiving an operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band by performing the standby display 1 such as “ne”. When the remaining time until the timing of reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band after the notification to the predetermined time is reached, the effect display device 1600 "3" in the balloon of this Minikyara to display the Minikyara for volume setting, "2", may be performed stand-by display 2 to perform a countdown, such as "1". Furthermore, when the timing to adjust the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band is reached, that effect may be notified. For example, a mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to display this mini character. Reflection display such as “selection reflection start!” May be performed in the balloon.

  Further, in the above-described example, as the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band, the equalizer setting A in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed and the equalizer setting B in which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed Is stored, and by switching the equalizer setting A and the equalizer setting B by performing the volume adjustment of the effect sound of the specific frequency band, a state where the sound volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed, and a specific frequency There are two stages (on and off) in which the band volume is suppressed. A plurality of equalizer settings having different degrees of suppression of the volume of a specific frequency band are stored in advance as setting patterns of the equalizer, and a plurality of equalizer settings having different degrees of suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band are stored by switching these equalizer settings. It may be switched to the state. For example, the equalizer setting A in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed, the equalizer setting B in which the volume of the specific frequency band is muted, and the volume operation of the volume band of the specific frequency band Equalizer setting C suppressed to half the volume of the volume set according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 (for example, if the volume set is volume 6, it is changed to volume 3) in advance Is stored as a setting pattern, and the volume adjustment of the effect sound of the specific frequency band is performed, thereby switching to any of the equalizer setting A, the equalizer setting B, and the equalizer setting C, so that the volume of the specific frequency band is Adjust the volume of the specific frequency band and the state of unsuppressed, mute the volume of the specific frequency band, and And while suppressing half the volume of the volume that is set in accordance with the rotating operation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the turning operation and staging operation unit 300 of the switch may be set so as to be switched to three stages of. This makes it possible to make settings that match the preferences of various players.

  In addition, the effect sound of a specific frequency band is not limited to the one described above, but includes the frequency band of the sound, the bass range, etc., and, for example, it is possible to adjust the volume of serifs emitted from the character etc. (A plurality of characters may be collectively adjusted, or may be individually adjusted), or the volume of the bass region may be adjusted. In addition, it may be possible to adjust also the effect sound (decision sound) for informing the big hit decision, the payout sound at the time of prize ball payout, and the like. Further, the volume of a plurality of frequency bands may be adjusted as a specific frequency band, and for example, the volume of both the high range and the low range may be adjusted. In this case, each of the high range and the low range may be adjusted collectively (for example, an operation to switch to one of a state where the high range is not suppressed and a state where the high range is suppressed and a state where the low range is not suppressed). The operation to switch to one of the state and the operation to be switched to one side collectively is performed in one operation) (for example, the operation to switch to one of the state not suppressing the high range and the state to suppress The operation to switch to one of the state and the operation may be performed separately). That is, the player may be allowed to select one of a plurality of setting modes (treble cut, cut-out sound cut, big hit confirmed sound cut, etc.). This makes it possible to make settings that match the preferences of various players.

  In the case of outputting a continuous effect sound during the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state, etc., the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side for adjusting the volume of the effect sound. While the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4 is immediately reflected, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band may be reflected after the end of the big hit gaming state and the small hitting gaming state. As a result, the output of the continuous effect sound is stopped, and the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is performed at the switching timing until the next effect sound is output, by the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, By reflecting the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without a sense of discomfort. In addition, during the big hit gaming state and small hit gaming state, the degree of attention to the effect contents of the player is lower compared to the fluctuation effect, so the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is also the door frame similar to the volume adjustment of the effect sound. The output from the top center speaker 462 on the three side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4 may be immediately reflected.

  In addition, when outputting a continuous effect sound in a gaming state different from the normal state such as during the time saving state, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 of the door frame 3 side for volume control of the effect sound. The output operation from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 is immediately reflected, and the volume control of the specific frequency band is performed in order to adjust the volume of the presentation sound of the specific frequency band in the middle of the fluctuation effect. When the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 300 is operated, the change effect is reflected after the end of the fluctuation effect without reflecting the change according to the operation until the fluctuation effect is ended, and the fluctuation effect is The rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the operation operation unit 300 are operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band when not being Top center speaker 462 of the door frame 3 side when the a top-side speaker 464, may be caused to immediately reflected on the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for low body frame 4. That is, it is specified when the player is not paying much attention by reflecting after the end of the fluctuation effect without reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band during the execution of the fluctuation attention effect of the player most noticed The volume adjustment of the frequency band may be reflected so that the effect sound can be changed without a sense of discomfort according to the adjustment.

  Even when the volume control of a specific frequency band is reflected, the effect sound is actually produced from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. Output of the effect sound after the change is not performed until is output. Therefore, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band in the middle of the change effect, the specific frequency after the end of the change effect Even if the volume control of the band is reflected, the effect sound after the change is the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4 after the start of the next variable effect. Output from That is, the actual output comes to be performed after the lottery process (the hit determination lottery etc.) for starting the next variation effect is performed. Similarly, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band during the demonstration in the effect display device 1600. Although the volume control of the staged sound of the specific frequency band is immediately reflected, if the staged sound is not output as a demonstration, the staged sound after the change is the door frame 3 until the next variation stage is started. It is output after the start of the fluctuation effect without being output from the top center speaker 462 on the side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4.

  Also, the volume control of a specific frequency band is initialized at the same time as the volume of the effect sound is initialized. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 does not play a game is continued for a predetermined time, and when waiting for a customer and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeated (for example, ten times), the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time The volume adjusted by the player sitting in the room and playing a game is canceled, and at the same time the volume is initialized, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed State) is supposed to be.

  In addition, in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during execution of the error notification in which the notification sound is output at a large volume (the maximum volume may be used), the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit 300 When 303 is operated, it may be appropriately set whether or not to adjust the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band to the notification sound according to the degree of abnormality (incorrect level) that caused the error notification. Good.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 172, when a minor abnormality (full tank error) as detected by the full tank detection sensor 154 that the inside of the lower plate 202 of the unit 200 is full of gaming balls B occurs. When the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the specific frequency band during the full error notification to be executed, the notification sound of the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is immediately issued. If a minor abnormality (full error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, the state where the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound is continued, and the top center of the door frame 3 side The changed notification sound may be output from the speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4. In this example, sound output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side and the top side speaker 464 (for example, "Please pull off the ball!", Etc.) as the full error notification reflects the volume control of a specific frequency band. It is changed into a thing (For example, it outputs with a female voice, when the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, and outputs it with a male's voice when suppressing the volume of a specific frequency band).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 173, the volume of the specific frequency band during the door opening error notification performed when a serious abnormality (door opening error) such as detecting that the door frame 3 is opened occurs. In order to adjust when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 is operated or when a serious abnormality (door open error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, a specific frequency band The volume control of may not be reflected on the notification sound. In this example, it is possible to adjust the sound volume in a specific frequency band of the sound (for example, “the door is open!”) Output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side as door opening error notification. (For example, it outputs with a female voice when the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, and outputs it with a male voice when the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed) When an abnormality occurs, the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band is invalidated, and a notification sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 172, the fullness at the time of the minor abnormality (full tank error) occurrence as detected by the full tank detection sensor 154 that the inside of the lower plate 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of gaming balls B When the rotary operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume during the tongue error notification, although the operation is accepted as effective, the volume adjustment is not reflected on the notification sound. For the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band, reflect the notification sound, and change the notification sound from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 Output. Further, as shown in FIG. 173, during the door opening error notification when a serious abnormality (door opening error) occurs, such as detecting that the door frame 3 is opened, the rendering operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume. When the user operates the rotary operation unit 302, although the operation is accepted as effective, not only the volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound, but also the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected in the notification sound. It is supposed to be. By appropriately setting whether or not to adjust the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound according to the degree of abnormality (incorrect level) that caused the error notification as described above, it is possible to reliably set about a serious abnormality. Become discoverable.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 173, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated to suppress the volume of a specific frequency band, and the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side and the top side speaker In the state where the effect sound after the change is output from the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4, a serious abnormality occurs according to the operation of the environment change mode or the operation unit 300 The suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band is forcibly canceled (turned off) without performing the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band, and the notification sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As described above, the notification sound is output for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and in the case of resuming the output of the effect sound after the stop of the notification sound, the specific according to the environment change mode or the operation of the rendering operation unit 300 Without the volume adjustment of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band that has been forcibly canceled is set (turned on) again, and the effect sound of which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed is on the door frame 3 side. It is outputted from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low frequency of the main body frame 4.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is enabled, and the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the rendering operation unit 300 is reflected. When it is possible to immediately output the effect sound or the notification sound, and without immediately reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the output of the effect sound. The timing is delayed to enable output of the effect sound and the notification sound after the change, and the state is appropriately set according to the state (playing state, error state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, it is possible to suppress a drop in the rendering effect or to surely detect a serious abnormality.

[15. Setting change such as winning probability etc]
In the pachinko machine 1 described above, an example will be described in which the probability of a big hit, a small hit, etc. is changed according to the set value. In the following, it is assumed that operation signals from the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting determination switch on the setting board are output to the payout control board 633. Although the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 in this example, the setting board may be connected to the power supply board 630 in the power supply board cover 631 or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting substrate may not be an independent substrate, but may be a part of the payout control substrate 633, the power supply substrate 630, or the main control substrate 1310. That is, the setting key, the setting change switch, the setting determination switch, and the setting indicator may be mounted on any of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630 or the main control board 1310.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the substrate unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a setting board for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a acquires the operation state of each switch provided on the setting board, and displays the setting or the selected setting value. Control the

  The setting board includes a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, a setting change switch for changing the setting value, a setting determination switch for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and And a setting display for displaying the setting value selected or selected, and functions as a setting change operation unit that receives an operation of setting change. As described above, the setting substrate is provided on the substrate unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are lined up This enables operation of setting change.

  In the present embodiment, operation signals of the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting determination switch on the setting substrate are taken into the payout control unit 633a. Further, the setting display is controlled by the payout control unit 633a. The determined settings are sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU is set as a table used for special lottery etc. Select the table you A table used in the special lottery or the like is provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least a part of the values is different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 174, in this example, “big hit probability”, “small hit probability”, “small hit type”, “normal pattern probability”, and “second according to spread type” The opening / closing pattern of the starting opening is set corresponding to each of the set value 1 to the set value 6.

  The jackpot probability (ratio of jackpot judgment value indicating that a jackpot has been won among the judgment tables) is set to a different value for each setting value, and the setting value 1 is "1/319" and the setting value 2 " “1/1/309” is the setting “3”, “1/299”, the setting 4 and the setting 6 are “1/279”, and the setting 5 is “1/289”. In this example, in the set value 1 to the set value 5, the big hit probability is increased as the set value becomes higher, but in the set value 6 having the highest set value, the big hit probability is made lower than the set value 5 There is. The jackpot probability may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the set value may be set to be higher as the set value becomes higher for set values 1 to 6.

  In addition, the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is selected among the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, Setting values 1 to 4 are "one-hundredths" and setting values 5 and 6 are "one-sixty" and in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, setting values 1 to 1 are used. Up to the set value 5 is "50/100", and the set value 6 is "66/100". In this example, in the case of the high setting value (setting value 5 or setting value 6), the occurrence frequency of the big hit gaming state is indirectly increased by raising the small hitting probability more than other setting values (low setting value) It has become. Thus, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, while changing the small hitting probability according to the setting value, in the normal state, the setting value is estimated by the winning frequency of the small hitting, while the second special symbol In the table used for the special lottery, by making the small hitting probability substantially the same for all set values, it is possible to enjoy the continuation of the time saving state purely in the time saving state.

  Also, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol mainly executed in the normal state, the small hitting probability of the setting value 5 and the setting value 6 is set higher than the setting value 1 to the setting value 4 On the other hand, in the table used for the special drawing of the second special symbol mainly executed in the time saving state, only the small hitting probability of the setting value 6 is set higher than the setting value 1 to the setting value 5. Therefore, in the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state with the setting value 4 and the setting value 5, the lottery is performed with a small hit probability different, but in the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state The small hit lottery is performed with the same probability. However, the determination ratio of the big hit probability and the small hit type to be described later is set so that the setting value 5 is higher than the setting value 4 so that the setting value 5 is more advantageous than the setting value 4 as a whole. It is done.

  Moreover, while the big hit probability in the normal state is high while the small hit probability is low, it is highly possible that the hit as a trigger for transition control to the short time state as in the setting value 4 is "big hit" A game with a low probability of becoming a big hit through the "small hit" and a "small hit" while the possibility of being hit as a trigger to be controlled to a short state as in the setting value 5 is unlikely to be a "big hit" It is possible to realize a game with a high probability of becoming a big hit through the setting value change, and to provide a new game characteristic that makes the setting value inferred according to the type of hit as a trigger for transition control to a time saving state Can.

  Note that the small hit probability may be improved in proportion to the set value, and in this case, it may be set so that the small hit probability becomes higher as the set value becomes higher with set values 1 to 6 . In addition, the small hitting probability according to a part of the setting values among the setting values 1 to 6 is lower than the small hitting probability according to any setting value of a low setting value than the partial setting value. You may do it. For example, the small hitting probability of the set value 4 may be set to 1/100, and the small hitting probability of the set value 3 of the set value lower than the set value 4 may be set to 1/90. In this case, by setting the ratio determined as the small hit type (third small hit in this example) which is advantageous in the case of a small hit, so that the set value 4 is higher than the set value 3 The setting value 4 may be more advantageous than the setting value 3.

  In addition, as a result of the above special lottery (hit determination process (step S305)), the determination ratio in the case of determining the small hitting type based on having been determined to be a small hit (set in the small hitting symbol determination table Selection rate) and a different value for each setting value. In this example, when it is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the first special symbol, in the setting value 1 to setting value 3, it is determined to be a second small hit at a rate of 9/10 and 10 minutes Is determined to be the third small hit at a rate of 1 and is determined to be a second small hit at a rate of 8/10 with the set value 4 and the set value 5 and determined to be a third small hit at a rate of 2/10 In the setting value 6, it is determined to be the first small hit at a rate of 1/10, determined to be a second small hit at a rate of 6/10, and determined to be a third small hit at a rate of 3/10 It is supposed to be.

  In addition, when it is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, in the setting value 1 and the setting value 2, it is determined to be the first small hit at a ratio of 3/10 and 6/10 Determined to be the second small hit in proportion, determined to be the third small hit in proportion of 1/10, and determined to be the first small hit in proportion of 2/10 with set value 3 and set value 4, 10 minutes Is determined to be the second small hit at a rate of 6 and is determined to be a third small hit at a rate of 2/10, and is determined to be a first small hit at a rate of 1/10 in the setting values 5 and 6 The second small hit is determined at a rate of 6/10, and the third small hit is determined at a rate of 3/10.

  In addition, as described above, the first small hit is to guide the game ball B accepted to the prize winning opening 2006 to the first lost port 2535, there is no possibility of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, or the big hit gaming state Is extremely unlikely to occur. And in this example, when it is decided to make it a small hit as a special lottery result of the first special symbol, the first small hit is selected only when the set value is 6, and another set value (set value If it is the setting value 1 to the setting value 5 when it is a small hit in a state disadvantageous to the player compared with the time saving state of the normal state by not selecting in the 1 to the setting value 5), the big hit game It is possible to execute the small hit gaming state while generating the second small hit or the third small hit having the possibility of occurrence of the state and having expectation for the big hit gaming state. That is, in the case of setting value 1 to setting value 5, when the player hits the small hit in a state that is more disadvantageous than the time saving state of the normal state, he focused on the small hit gaming state while holding expectation for the big hit gaming state The player's discouragement increases when it is recognized that all the gaming balls B accepted in the prize winning opening 2006 are guided to the first lost opening 2535 and there is no possibility of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, By generating a second small hit or a third small hit that has at least the possibility of occurrence of a big hit gaming state during the small hit gaming state can be expected to attract attention to the big hit gaming state, it is a game entertaining You can suppress the decline. On the other hand, although the first small hit may be selected in the case of the set value 6, since the first small hit is executed in the normal state, it can be determined that the set value 6 is the highest set value. The player can be given more pleasure than the discouragement of having won the first small hit, and the decline in amusement can be suppressed.

  In addition, when it is decided to make it a small hit as a special drawing result of the second special symbol, the first small hit is selected. In the time saving state, the small hitting probability is increased more than the normal state, so the execution frequency of the small hitting gaming state is high. Therefore, the first small hit is executed, and all the gaming balls B accepted in the winning combination winning opening 2006 are induced to the first missing opening 2535, and it is recognized that there is no possibility of occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Also not discourage the player. In addition, when it is decided to make small hitting as the special drawing result of the 2nd special symbol, with low setting value (setting value 1 and setting value 2) the decision ratio of 1st small hitting is high, with high setting value The rate at which the first small hit is determined is to be reduced. That is, in the high set value, the percentage determined as the small hit type disadvantageous to the player is lowered when it is determined to be the small hit as the special lottery result of the second special symbol compared to the low set value. The high setting value is more advantageous to the player than the low setting value.

  Also, as described above, the third small hit is to guide the game ball B accepted to the prize winning hole 2006 to the first V winning hole 2007, and it is determined that the third small hit is a big hit It is almost the same state as what you did. That is, increasing the determination rate of the third small hit is equivalent to increasing the winning probability of the big hit, and in the present example, the third setting of the third set value (the set value 5 or the set value 6) is determined. The probability of occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is indirectly improved by increasing the ratio.

  In addition, the selection probability of the normal lottery (the ratio of the determination value per normal symbol indicating that it is the normal collision among the random numbers per determination per symbol) is set to a different value for each setting value, and in setting value 1 to setting value 5 In the setting value 6, it is set to "one half." Therefore, with setting value 6, when game ball B is accepted in normal winning opening 2003 and a normal lottery is performed, second start opening door 2411 is always advanced to be able to receive game ball B to second start opening 2004. And is more advantageous to the player than other set values.

  Also, in this example, when it is determined to be a normal hit as a result of a normal lottery, a normal symbol A (flat symbol per symbol A) and a normal symbol B (flat symbol per symbol B (flat symbol per symbol B1 to B) It is decided to decide from among several ordinary symbols per type of common pattern per pattern B5) and normal pattern C (per symbol C), according to the determined type per common symbol A mode (design symbol A, symbol symbol B, symbol symbol C) is derived and displayed on a normal symbol display. In addition, the opening and closing mode of the second start opening door 2411 is made different for each set value. Specifically, when it becomes a normal symbol A in the normal state, execute "open once for 0.1 s" opening and closing mode with all set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and save time At the time, when the symbol per symbol A was reached, the "perform opening 6s once" opening / closing mode is executed with all set values (set values 1 to 6), and when the symbol per symbol B is reached in the normal state Execute an open / close mode of “open twice for 0.1 s” with an odd set value (set value 1, set value 3, and set value 5) and execute an even set value (set value 2, set value 4, set) Execute the opening and closing mode of "perform opening once for 0.1 s" with value 6), and when it is per symbol per symbol at the time saving state, set value 1 to setting value 3 execute "one opening for 6 s" "Perform opening and closing mode", set value 4 and setting value 5 execute "open 3 seconds twice" and execute setting mode In running the "Run once 3s open" opening and closing manner.

  Also, in the case of setting value 1 to setting value 5, while it is determined as one of the two types of normal symbol per type of normal symbol per symbol A and normal symbol per symbol B as a type per normal symbol. In the case of setting value 6, as a type per symbol normal type per symbol A as a type normal symbol per symbol B and a standard symbol per type C are to be determined from among three types of types per type standard symbol . And, when it becomes the normal symbol per C in the normal state, execute the opening and closing mode "do 0.1s opening 6 times" with the setting value 6, and set it when the regular symbol per unit C becomes in the time saving state A value of 6 is used to execute the "perform 1s opening 6 times" opening / closing mode.

  As described above, the operation mode of the second start opening door 2411 (the open / close mode of the second start opening 2004) for setting the second start opening 2004 based on the normal lottery result being a normal hit is set for each set value. Therefore, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested by the operation mode of the second start opening door 2411.

  The setting key is a trigger for inserting the predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion portion) and maintaining the short circuit or open state of the contact by the operation of turning the key to the setting position, and changing to the setting change mode It is a switch that outputs a signal. Note that another switch may be used in common without providing the setting key. In this case, the setting change mode is started by operating the setting change switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or more (long press), and the setting change mode is ended by long pressing the setting change switch in the setting change mode. May be

  Also, the setting change mode may be started / ended by the operation of the RAM clear switch. For example, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the setting change mode is started by continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the RAM clear processing is executed if the continued operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be ended by long-pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting change mode.

  In this way, even an employee who does not have a key for setting key can change the setting, so handling of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall becomes easy. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation at the fall of the setting change switch.

  The setting change switch is, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to switch and select setting values (1 to 6) in order. That is, when the setting change switch is pressed once, the setting value increases by one, and when the setting change switch is operated when the setting value = 6, the setting value = 1. The setting value may be selectable by the operation of the RAM clear switch without providing the setting change switch. The set value may not be six stages, but may be smaller (for example, two stages) or more (for example, eight stages).

  The setting value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the probability of hitting a special symbol). Setting value = 1 is low in hitting probability, and setting value = 6 is high in hitting probability. In addition, depending on the setting value, the ratio of probability big hit, percentage of time (ST) after big hit, number of shorts, number of rounds and count of big hit, probability per common drawing, general winning opening, starting opening and winning opening prize balls Various parameters related to the game may be changed, such as the number, to change the number of winning balls that the player can earn.

  The setting determination switch is, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for determining the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch and inputting the setting value to the pachinko machine 1. The setting determination switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch and the setting determination switch may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so as not to operate both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch may be configured of a push button switch, and the setting determination switch may be configured of a momentary toggle switch.

  The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch. Further, the setting value selected may be determined in response to the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, the contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 by touching the handle 182, the operation of the one-shot button operation sensor 194, the operation of the ball lending button, the operation of the return button, The selected setting may be determined by detecting the winning of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, or the like. The operation unit that substitutes the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for playing a game) or a switch that can not be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

  That is, in order to set the gaming performance to the pachinko machine 1 of this example, three switches (including the setting key) are provided on the setting substrate, but providing one or two switches on the setting substrate is sufficient .

  Furthermore, the setting change operation may be enabled only by the RAM clear switch without providing any of the setting key, the setting change switch, and the setting determination switch. For example, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the setting change mode is started by continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the RAM clear processing is executed if the continued operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time. Furthermore, in place of the setting change switch, the setting value can be selected by an operation less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) of the RAM clear switch in the setting change mode. The set value can be determined by the above operation (long press). Furthermore, the setting change mode may be ended by long-pressing the RAM clear switch after the setting determination.

  The setting display is constituted by, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the setting key). The setting display may be configured not by the 7-segment LED but by an LED having a settable value. In this case, the LED corresponding to the setting value is turned on to display the setting value.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an error type indicator by a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of the payout error is provided on the payout control board 633, but this error type indicator also serves as a setting indicator. The set value or the current set value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the setting value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off in the display of the error type, and the dot may be turned on in the display of the setting value. Further, the display of the error type may be on (not blinking) and the setting value may be displayed on and off.

[15-1. Setting change process]
Next, processing related to setting change will be described. FIG. 175 is an explanatory view showing a procedure of changing the set value.

  In this example, the main control side power on process is executed based on the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the setting change mode start condition is satisfied in the main control side power on process. The above setting values are to be changed.

  Specifically, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and start setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process, then determines the state of the setting key, and the setting key is turned on. If it is operated, the setting change mode for changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. When the setting key is operated, the setting control signal is outputted from the payout control portion 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU determines that the setting key is turned on when the setting key operation signal is received. . In addition, the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 is operated, detection by the handle touch sensor 192 is performed by touching the handle 182, or a prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit (prepaid card balance is present) The setting change mode may not be started when there is a balance inserted into the cash sand. The setting change mode may not be started even when there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 1 has been subjected to some fraudulent action (for example, a magnetic error has been detected).

  When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU is data other than the gaming state (for example, information related to the probability changing state, the time saving state, and the winning ball) in the game control area (also referred to as a specific area) of the built-in RAM. A first RAM clear process is executed to clear data indicating setting value information of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, setting value 1 to setting value 6 are switched by performing a setting change operation. That is, when the main control MPU finishes the first RAM clear process, it sends a first RAM clear process end command to the payout control unit 633a, and when the first RAM clear process end command is received, the payout control unit 633a sets the setting value to the setting indicator. The initial value (for example, setting value 0) is displayed in a blinking manner, and the setting value displayed on the setting display is switched each time the setting change switch is operated (loop with setting value 1 to setting value 6).

  When the main control MPU executes the first RAM clear process, the set value is cleared and becomes unset. In addition, the setting change mode can not be ended when the setting value is not set, and if the power is cut off during the setting change mode with the setting value not set, the power is turned on again. Then, the setting change mode will be performed. At this time, if the setting key is turned off, loop processing is performed to monitor the state of the setting key until the setting key is turned on, and the setting change mode is changed in response to the setting key being turned on. It will be started.

  Further, the payout control unit 633a checks whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, that is, whether the main body frame open switch is off, and the main body frame open switch is on (the main body frame 4 is the outer frame 2). If the switch is not open, the loop is performed until the main body frame open switch is turned off, and the operation of the setting confirmation switch is not accepted. That is, the setting change operation is not completed until the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

  When the main frame opening switch is off, or when the main frame opening switch is off, the payout control portion 633a displays the setting value displayed on the setting display when the setting determination switch is operated. The blinking display is terminated and turned on), and a setting change end command indicating the set value decided on is sent to the main control MPU.

  When the main control MPU receives the setting change end command, the main control MPU stores the setting value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. As a result, a lottery process or the like according to the determined set value is performed.

  When the setting change mode end condition is satisfied, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the main control MPU performs a power failure clear process (step S14).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting value is changed by the above-described process.

  When the setting change mode ends, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a ends the display of the setting value on the setting display (does not display the setting value). May be In addition, when the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode ends, although the setting change mode is not executed, the present setting value is displayed on the setting display. As a result, the gaming staff can change the setting value after grasping the current setting value.

  Also, when the setting change mode is executed, that effect may be notified. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is operated to ON, a setting change mode start command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 to start the setting change mode is transmitted, and the setting change mode start command is received. Based on the peripheral control unit 1511 may perform predetermined display (during setting change, etc.) on the effect display device 1600. In this case, when the setting change mode is ended, that is, when the setting key is turned off, a setting change mode end command is transmitted to notify the peripheral control unit 1511 that the setting change mode is ended, and the setting is performed. The peripheral control unit 1511 may end the predetermined display performed by the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the change mode end command. The setting value determined as the predetermined display or the setting value displayed on the setting display may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the setting change mode is terminated even when the setting change mode is ended. Good.

  Further, in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the periphery control unit 1511, the main control MPU may also notify the setting change mode. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be a display of a special mode which does not appear during a normal game (for example, all special symbol indicators are turned off or on).

  On the other hand, after performing the initial value setting and start setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT on the main control side power-on process, the state of the setting key is determined and if the setting key is not operated, step The process after S14 is performed.

  Then, in the main control side power-on process, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to delete various information, or the determination in step S30. When the value of the checksum (sum value) is determined not to match or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0) in the determination of step S32, that is, the main control side power-off process When it is determined that the game has not ended normally, it is data other than the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 in the game control area in step S38, and the information regarding the gaming state (for example, the probability change state ) After executing the second RAM clear process to clear the data indicating “)”, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set (step S40). . As described above, in the second RAM clear process, unlike the first RAM clear process, the setting value information is not initialized. That is, when the power is turned on, the first RAM clear process can be executed to clear the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting key ON, and when the power is turned on, the second RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. The processing can be executed to clear the information on the gaming state (for example, information regarding the probability change state, the time saving state, and the winning balls). Also, when the power is turned on, the setting key is turned on to execute the first RAM clear process to clear the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clear switch is operated to execute the second RAM clear process. Clear the information about the state (for example, information about the probability change state, the time saving state, the award ball), that is, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 and the information about the gaming state (for example, the information about the probability variation state It is also possible to clear both. As described above, one or both of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process can be selectively executed according to the information to be cleared.

  In the present example, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control unit 633a may also determine. In addition, the setting key operation signal transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, transmits a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency), or is grounded at the power supply voltage. It is also possible to output an intermediate potential signal that is not a voltage. This is a signal that can not be generated by the short circuit of the terminal to prevent the illegal operation of short-circuiting the terminal of the setting key and activating the setting change mode, and a signal relating to the operation of the setting key from the main control board 1310 It is preferable to send to

[15-2. Variation production according to the set value]
Next, the fluctuation presentation according to each set value is explained. FIG. 176 is a fluctuation pattern table referred to in fluctuation pattern setting processing (first fluctuation pattern setting processing, second fluctuation pattern setting processing).

  In this example, a variation pattern table is provided for each set value, and the variation pattern type selected according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is different. Specifically, when the first special lottery result is out of reach in the normal state, the special figure 1 referred to in the case of determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the first fluctuation pattern setting process is the deviation fluctuation pattern table ( In FIG. 176 (A), for example, a mini character for setting suggestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and “Is it low?” Or “1 or 2 or 3?” Or the like is displayed in the balloon of the mini character. By performing “low setting suggestive effect” that suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is either 1, 2 or 3, the outlier fluctuation pattern 25 can be selected by setting value 1 to setting value 3 For example, while displaying a mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying “Is it high?” Or “Are any of 4, 5, 6?” Etc. in the balloon of the mini character Off variation pattern 26 for executing the "High Set suggesting demonstration" suggests that the set value of the slave unit 1 is one of 4, 5, 6 are selectable setpoint 4 setpoint 6. Therefore, when “high setting suggestion effect” is executed in the fluctuation effect, it is possible for the player to recognize that the setting value is 4 or more at the minimum, so that the game interest can be improved.

  Further, for example, while displaying a mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600, the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying "may it be even?" Or "is it any of 2, 4, 6?" The outlier fluctuation pattern 27 for executing the “even setting suggestive effect” which suggests that the setting value of is either 2, 4 or 6 is selectable with the setting value 2, the setting value 4, the setting value 6, for example, The setting display value of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying a mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying “Is it an odd number?” Or “1 or 3 or 5?” In the mini character balloon. The outlier fluctuation pattern 28 for executing the “odd setting suggestive effect” which suggests that “1”, “3” or “3” is selectable with the setting value 1, the setting value 3 and the setting value 5. Therefore, it is one of setting value 2, setting value 4 and setting value 6 when "even setting suggestion effect" is executed in fluctuation production, and setting value 1 and setting value when "odd setting suggestion effect" is performed. The player can recognize that the value is either 3 or the setting value 5. In addition, it becomes possible to estimate a setting value by combining with the execution history of "low setting suggestion effect" or "high setting suggestion effect". That is, if "Odd setting indication effect" and "Low setting indication effect" are executed, it is setting value 1 or setting value 3, and "Odd setting indication effect" and "High setting indication effect" are executed. If it is, it is the setting value 5, and if the "even setting suggestion effect" and the "low setting suggestion effect" are being performed, it is the setting value 2, and "the even setting suggestion effect" and the "high setting suggestion effect" If is executed, it can be inferred that the setting value is 4 or the setting value 6. As described above, in this example, a new game feature is provided in which the setting value is estimated by the combination of the executed setting indication effects among the plurality of setting indication effects.

  Further, in this example, for example, while displaying a mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying “Is it the best?” Or “6 may?” The outlier fluctuation pattern 29 for executing the “highest setting suggestive effect” indicating 6 is selectable only with the setting value 6. Therefore, when the “maximum setting suggestive effect” is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the setting value is the setting value 6 of the maximum setting, and the fun of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, in the case of out of reach or in the case of out of reach, it is possible to select the outlier fluctuation pattern 31 for executing the "maximum setting determined effect". It is possible to notify that the setting has been made with the setting value 6 of the highest setting, and by making the player recognize that the highest setting has been set, it is possible to improve the game interest.

  Also, when the first special lottery result is a small hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 176) to be referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the first fluctuation pattern setting process. In (B), for example, while displaying a mini character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600, setting of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying “maximum setting confirmed!”, “6 confirmed!”, Etc. in the balloon of the mini character The small hitting fluctuation pattern 33 and the small hitting fluctuation pattern 34 for executing the “highest setting decision effect” notifying that the value is 6 can be selected only at the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting finalization effect" is executed in the fluctuation effect when the small hitting is made, the player can recognize that the setting value is the setting value 6 of the maximum setting, and the game interest is improved. .

  Also, when the first special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 176 (C) is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the first fluctuation pattern setting process. In the)), the big hit fluctuation pattern 34 which executes “the highest setting decision effect” can be selected only at the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting finalization effect" is executed in the fluctuation effect when the big hit is made, the player can recognize that the setting value is the setting value 6 of the highest setting, and the big hit gaming state is executed. Since it is possible to give the player double pleasure by being played, the fun of the game is improved.

  Also, when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time saving state, the special figure 2 small hitting variation pattern table (FIG. 176) to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the second variation pattern setting process. In (D), the small hitting fluctuation pattern 34 for executing the “maximum setting determined effect” is selectable only at the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting finalization effect" is executed in the fluctuation production in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the setting value is the setting value 6 of the highest setting, and further, the prize winning opening By inducing the game ball B entered in 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007 and winning a third small hit that generates a big hit gaming state, it is possible to give the player double pleasure, Game interest is improved.

  As described above, in the present example, the small hitting probability is changed in accordance with the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the normal state, while the set value 1 to the set value 4 has the small hitting probability of "one hundredth", the set value 5 and the set value 6 are higher than the set value 1 to the set 4 "90 minutes It is considered 1 Similarly, in the time saving state, the set value 1 to the set value 5 has a small hitting probability of "one tenth", whereas the set value 6 is "one nineth" higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5 It is assumed.

  In addition, small hitting fluctuation pattern 34 which executes “highest setting decision effect” which can be selected in second fluctuation pattern setting processing when second special drawing result becomes small hitting in time saving state, over long period (155s) It is executed and is longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern which can be selected by setting value 1 to setting value 5 lower than the setting value 6. Further, in the setting value 6, the selectivity of the small hitting fluctuation pattern 20 having a long fluctuation time is made higher than the setting values 1 to 5 lower than the setting 6 compared to the small hitting fluctuation patterns 1 to 3. That is, at the setting value 6 where the small hitting probability is higher than the other setting values, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect executed in the time saving state is long. As described above, in the setting value 6, the small hitting probability is higher than the setting value 1 to the setting value 5, and the game ball B entering the prize winning opening 2006 when the small hitting becomes the first V winning opening Since the ratio determined for the third small hit that causes the jackpot gaming state to be induced in 2007 is also set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5, it will be possible to acquire a large number of prize balls in a short time . Therefore, by increasing the selectivity of the small hitting fluctuation pattern 20 or the small hitting fluctuation pattern 34 where the fluctuation time longer than that of the other small hitting fluctuation patterns is set in the case of the setting value 6 higher than the setting value 1 to the setting value 5 By suppressing the number of times of execution of the fluctuation effect per unit time, the improvement of the irritability is suppressed.

  Further, in this example, although the variation pattern determination random numbers are distributed substantially the same for all setting values, the variation patterns specific to setting value 6 in the variation pattern table corresponding to setting value 6 Since the pattern 31, the small hitting fluctuation pattern 33, the small hitting fluctuation pattern 34, and the big hitting fluctuation pattern 34) are provided, the distribution of the fluctuation pattern determination random numbers is different. Therefore, in this example, in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6, only the fluctuation pattern determination random numbers allocated to the specific fluctuation pattern (adjustment fluctuation pattern) are adjusted to distribute the fluctuation pattern determination random numbers. As described above, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6, only the variation pattern determination random numbers assigned to specific variation patterns are adjusted without changing the assignment of variation pattern determination random numbers for all variation patterns. As a result, the load in addition and deletion of fluctuation patterns is reduced, and design of the gaming machine becomes easy. Note that the specific variation pattern is such that the appearance frequency above a certain level is maintained even if the number of distributions of the variation pattern determination random numbers is decreased, and at least the variation pattern determination random numbers set in other setting values. It may be adjusted to have 60% or more with respect to the number of allocations, and the appearance rate may not be excessively reduced as compared with other set values.

  As described above, in this example, the small hitting probability and the variation time of the variation effect to be executed when the special lottery result is a small hit are made different according to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, and the balance with the proviso is thereby made. I am taking

  In addition, the above-mentioned setting indication effect (low setting indication effect, high setting indication effect, even setting indication effect, odd setting indication effect, maximum setting indication effect, maximum setting finalization effect), the first special lottery result at the time of normal state is lost Or, it is the easiest to execute when the reach is lost, and there are many types of setting suggestion effects that can be performed. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result in the time saving state is out or the reach is out, or the special lottery result in the normal state and the time saving state (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is a small hit or a big hit In such a case, the first special lottery result in the normal state is more difficult to be executed than in the case where the first special lottery result is out or the out of reach, and the number of types of setting suggestion effects that can be performed are also small. That is, attention is paid to acceptance of the game ball B to the V winning opening by reducing the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect as compared to the case of becoming out of time or reaching out in the normal state during time saving state or small hitting. ing.

[16. Guide passage group consisting of the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
[16-1. Regarding the case where the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the case where the right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 among the guide passage group 2520 of the center character 2500 is provided, as shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage 2521, and FIG. 178 is a specific effect example at the time of execution of a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404. .

  As shown in FIG. 177, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of the gaming ball B is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the gaming ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 always passes. That is, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with strength to enter the upstream space 2505 and abut against the abutment 1006, it enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. On the other hand, when the game ball B is hit with a strength (a certain degree of strength weaker than a right strike) which enters into the upstream space 2505 and does not abut against the stopper 1006, it enters the second guide passage 2522 with high probability When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the right detection sensor 2404 detects the game ball B because the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the first guide passage 2521. There is no.

  The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Then, based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the gaming ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the right detection sensor 2404 detects a game. If the passage of the ball B is not detected, it is determined that the gaming ball B is not in a state of being driven into the first guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the manner in which the game ball B is hit (launch strength) in accordance with the gaming state, and to vary the area or passage into which the game ball B is hit. First, during a small hit game, the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 is opened, and the gaming ball B is allowed to enter the prize winning opening 2006 that has been opened. Is required. Therefore, during a small hit game, the game ball B is in strength to enter the upstream space portion 2505 and abut against the stop 1006 so that the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 among the guide passage group 2520. It is necessary to drive B (so-called, hit right).

  In addition, during the big hit game, it is required that the big winning opening 2005 provided at the lower right of the center character 2500 is in the open state, and the game ball B is made to enter the big winning opening 2005 that has become open. However, it is configured to enter the special winning opening 2005 with a higher probability that the game ball B is discharged from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 than the exit of the first guide passage 2521 among the guide passage group 2520. ing. In addition, during the time saving state, the second start opening 2004 provided at the lower right of the center character 2500 is opened based on entry to the normal winning opening 2003 provided at the lower right of the center character 2500. It is required that the game ball B be inserted into the second start port 2004 in the state and the open state, but the second guide passage 2522 than the exit of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 It is configured to enter the regular winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 at a higher probability that the game ball B is discharged from the exit of the second game. Therefore, during the big hit game and the time saving state, the game ball B enters the upstream space portion 2505 and does not abut against the abutment 1006 so that the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 among the guide passage group 2520 It is preferable to hit the game ball B at a certain strength (a somewhat weaker strength than a right hit).

  In addition, during the normal state, it is required that the game ball B be inserted into the first starting opening 2002 provided below the center character 2500. Therefore, during the normal state, the highest among the outer peripheral surfaces of the center prize 2500 so that the game ball B can flow into the first starting opening 2002 to flow down the area on the left side of the center prize 2500 It is necessary to hit the gaming ball B (so-called, hit left) with a strength to enter the left side in the front view (the left side of the upper right circumferential wall 2510) than the part that has become.

  In the present embodiment, it is necessary to change the hitting manner (launch strength) of the game ball B according to the game state, and to make the area and the passage into which the game ball B is hit different. When B is not driven, a warning is issued to the player so that the game ball B is driven into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B when it is not in the gaming state where the game ball B should be hit into the first guide passage 2521 among the guide passage group 2520 When the above state continues for a predetermined time, the player is alerted.

  First, during the big hit game and the time saving state, it is recommended that the game ball B be thrown into the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B is hit in the first guide passage 2521, and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds) And warns the player that the game ball B should be driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), in the effect display device 1600, the first warning effect of notifying the message "Please drive in the second guide passage" is executed. Thereby, during the big hit game and the time saving state, the hitting method is changed to the strength (a certain degree of strength weaker than the right hitting) by entering the upstream space portion 2505 and not contacting the stop portion 1006, and the second guidance The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. Then, after the execution of the first warning effect, when the state where the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game ball B is sent to the first guide passage 2521 It is determined that the state in which the driver has been driven in has been eliminated, and the first warning effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the big hit game and the short time state, it is determined that the game ball B has been driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the monitoring timer At the same time as the start, the count value is counted up each time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the state where the gaming ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, when five or more gaming balls B are detected in 5 seconds), (1) When the state does not continue for a predetermined time while the warning effect is executed (for example, when the game ball B ends with detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the game is played in the first guidance passage 2521 The first warning effect is not executed on the assumption that the state in which the ball B has been hit is eliminated, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, the gaming state switches from the big hit game or the time saving state, and the information such as the monitoring timer or the count value is cleared even when the game ball B is not in the second guide passage 2522 ing. Then, after execution of the first warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to ending the first warning effect assuming that the state where the game ball B is thrown into the guide passage 2521 has been eliminated, the second guide passage 2522 is also switched to the game state when switching from the big hit game or time saving state. The first warning effect is ended on the assumption that the game ball B should not be hit.

  Also, during normal conditions, it is recommended that the game ball B be hit in the area on the left side of the center character 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B Then, it is determined that the gaming ball B has been hit into the first guidance passage 2521, and if the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more gaming balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the center role is played. The player is warned that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the object 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), a second warning effect of notifying the message “Please left-hand” is executed in the effect display device 1600. Thereby, during the normal state, the striking method is changed to the strength to enter the left side in the front view (the left side from the upper right peripheral wall 2510) than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500. The player can grasp that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center character 2500. When the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 is cancelled. It is determined that the second warning effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the gaming ball B in the normal state, it is determined that the gaming ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer is started, Every time the right detection sensor 2404 detects the gaming ball B during monitoring by the monitoring timer, the count value is counted up. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the state where the gaming ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, when five or more gaming balls B are detected in 5 seconds), 2 While executing the warning effect, when the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), the game is played in the first guidance passage 2521 The second warning effect is not executed on the assumption that the state in which the ball B has been hit is eliminated, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. In addition, even after the start of the monitoring timer, the gaming state switches from the normal state, and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared even when the game ball B is not to be struck into the area on the left side of the center role 2500 ing. Then, after execution of the second warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the gaming ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first In addition to ending the second warning effect on the assumption that the state where the game ball B has been driven into the guide passage 2521 has been cancelled, also in the area on the left side of the center character 2500 even when the gaming state is switched from the normal state. The second warning effect is ended on the assumption that the game ball B should not be hit.

  As described above, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of the game ball B when it is not in the gaming state where the game ball B should be hit into the first guide passage 2521 among the guide passage group 2520 When the above state continues for a predetermined time, a warning screen (first and second warning effects) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but the content of the warning is changed according to the game state. Thereby, even when the game ball B is hit into the first guide passage 2521 when the game ball B should not be hit into the first guide passage 2521, which is the recommended area or passage? , The player can accurately grasp.

  On the other hand, during a small hit game, it is recommended that the game ball B be thrown into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is the game ball B If it is not detected that the game ball B has been hit in the first guide passage 2521, it is determined that the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game is played in the first guide passage 2521 Warn the player that ball B should be hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (C), in the effect display device 1600, the third warning effect of notifying the message "Please drive in the first guide passage" is executed. In this way, during the small hit game, it is possible to change the way of hitting into the upstream space portion 2505 and the strength to abut against the stop portion 1006, and play the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521. The person can understand. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B is not hit into the first guide passage 2521 is eliminated, and the third warning effect is ended. I have to.

  More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit in the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer Have started. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state where the gaming ball B is not struck into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the third warning effect is executed, but the predetermined If the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the state in which the game ball B is not struck into the first guide passage 2521 is cancelled. The effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, the game state changes from the small hit game, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared even when the game ball B is not in a state to be struck into the first guide passage 2521. Then, after execution of the third warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the gaming ball B, the gaming ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521. In addition to the termination of the fourth warning effect as having been canceled, also when the gaming state has been switched from the small hitting game, the third warning effect is determined that it is not in a state to hit the gaming ball B into the first guide passage 2521 Have finished.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. However, the gaming ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 must Any position may be provided as long as it passes through, for example, the inlet at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, the outlet at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and the inside of the first guide passage 2521.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the prize winning opening 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the prize winning opening 2006 that has become open. Thus, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side decreases, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively and causing a problem in the right detection sensor 2404.

  In the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the gaming ball B is displayed in any manner in each gaming state. In the case where a hitting area instruction display (for example, a right hitting display consisting of a right arrow image or a left hitting display consisting of a left arrow image) for making a player always know that the player should hit is separately It is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to disturb the included region indication display. For example, in the upper right portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, a "display area for displaying the input region indication display" is provided in a divided manner, and among the display areas of the effect display device 1600 different from that area. It is desirable to provide "a display area for displaying the first to third warning effects" in the upper left portion of the section so as to prevent each guidance from being superimposed and obstructed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified to display a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings are realized not as a display but as a sound effect. In this case, the priority of assignment to channels provided finitely to output sound is higher than that of various effect sounds set during the normal state, during the big hit game, or during the time saving state. It is desirable to set as such and to output as much as possible even in a situation where there are no vacant (unused channels) in the finitely provided channels. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively suppress the player who is not used to the game nature having various types of game balls B from being disadvantaged.

[16-2. About the case where a detection sensor is provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, the right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center character 2500 and the second guide passage 2522 are entered. The case where the left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the played game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180. FIG. 179 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and FIG. 180 is a warning presentation using the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. It is an example of a concrete effect at the time of execution.

  As shown in FIG. 179, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. A left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the guide passage 2522. The right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the gaming ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 always passes. That is, when the game ball B is hit (so-called right-handed) with strength to enter the upstream space 2505 and abut against the abutment 1006, it enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, When the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

  On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided at a position where the gaming ball B which has entered the second guide passage 2522 always passes. That is, when the game ball B is hit with a strength (a certain degree of strength weaker than a right strike), which enters the upstream space 2505 and does not abut the abutment 1006, it enters the second guide passage 2522 with high probability. When the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B is detected by the left detection sensor 2405.

  The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 detects detection signals from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. Has been entered. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the gaming ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, and based on the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405. Thus, it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 and the left detection sensor 2405 plays a game. When the passage of the ball B is detected, it is determined that the gaming ball B is driven into the second guide passage 2522, and the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the gaming ball B. It is determined that the gaming ball B is not in a state of being driven into any of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  In this embodiment, as described above in detail, it is necessary to change the hitting manner (firing strength) of the game ball B according to the game state, and to vary the area and passage into which the game ball B is shot. In the case where the game ball B is not shot into the area or passage, the player is warned so that the game ball B is hit into the recommended region or passage. Specifically, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a normal state in which the game ball B should be driven into the area on the left side of the center character 2500 , The state in which the passage of the game ball B is detected by either the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 or the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 is a predetermined time When continuing, it is possible for the player to be alerted.

  More specifically, in the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B in the area on the left side of the center character 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is When the passage is detected, it is determined that the gaming ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521, and the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B. It is determined that the gaming ball B has been hit into the guiding path 2522, and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, the gaming ball B is displayed for 5 seconds by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405). If five or more balls are detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center character 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180 (A), in the effect display device 1600, the fourth warning effect of notifying the message "Please left-handed" is executed. Thereby, during the normal state, the striking method is changed to the strength to enter the left side in the front view (the left side from the upper right peripheral wall 2510) than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500. The player can grasp that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center character 2500. When the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the game ball B for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 It is determined that the state in which the gaming ball B has been hit has been eliminated, and the fourth warning effect is ended.

  More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B in the normal state, the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 It is determined that the monitoring timer is started, and the count value is counted up each time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state where the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds) In the case where the fourth warning effect is executed, but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B ends with detection of less than 5 balls in 5 seconds), The fourth warning effect is not executed on the assumption that the state in which the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 is cancelled, and information such as a monitoring timer or a count value is cleared. In addition, even after the start of the monitoring timer, the gaming state switches from the normal state, and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared even when the game ball B is not to be struck into the area on the left side of the center role 2500 ing. Then, after execution of the fourth warning effect, when the monitoring timer is started and the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) In addition to the termination of the fourth warning effect on the assumption that the state where the game ball B has been driven into the first guidance passage 2521 or the second guidance passage 2522 has been cancelled, the gaming state has been switched from the normal state. Also, the fourth warning effect is ended on the assumption that the game ball B should not be hit into the area on the left side of the center character 2500.

  In the small hit game, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 is the game ball B If it is not detected that the game ball B has been hit in the first guide passage 2521, it is determined that the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game is played in the first guide passage 2521 Warn the player that ball B should be hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180 (B), a fifth warning effect of notifying a message “Please drive in the first guide passage” is executed in the effect display device 1600. In this way, during the small hit game, it is possible to change the way of hitting into the upstream space portion 2505 and the strength to abut against the stop portion 1006, and play the game ball B into the first guide passage 2521. The person can understand. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B is not hit into the first guide passage 2521 is eliminated, and the fifth warning effect is ended. I have to.

  More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small hit game, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit in the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer Have started. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the state where the gaming ball B is not struck into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the fifth warning effect is executed, but the predetermined If the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B within the time (for example, 5 seconds), the fifth warning that the state in which the game ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521 is canceled The effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, the game state changes from the small hit game, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared even when the game ball B is not in a state to be struck into the first guide passage 2521. Then, after execution of the fifth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the gaming ball B, the gaming ball B is not driven into the first guide passage 2521. In addition to ending the fifth warning effect as having been canceled, the fifth warning effect is that the game ball B should not be driven into the first guide passage 2521 even when the gaming state is switched from the small hitting game. Have finished.

  On the other hand, during the big hit game and time saving state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520, but the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 If passage of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not in the second guide passage 2522 and the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the second guide passage The player is warned that the game ball B should be hit in 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180 (C), in the effect display device 1600, the sixth warning effect of notifying a message "Please drive in the second guide passage" is executed. Thereby, during the big hit game and the time saving state, the hitting method is changed to the strength (a certain degree of strength weaker than the right hitting) by entering the upstream space portion 2505 and not contacting the stop portion 1006, and the second guidance The player can grasp that the game ball B should be driven into the passage 2522. Then, when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not hit in the second guide passage 2522 has been eliminated, and the warning effect is ended. There is.

  More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the big hit game and the short time state, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit in the second guide passage 2522 , Monitoring timer has been started. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, when the state where the gaming ball B is not hit in the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the sixth warning effect is executed, but the predetermined time is If the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B within a time (for example, 5 seconds), the sixth warning is assumed that the state in which the game ball B is not struck into the second guide passage 2522 is cancelled. The effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Also, after the start of the monitoring timer, the gaming state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared even when the game ball B should not be thrown into the second guide passage 2522. Then, after execution of the sixth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the gaming ball B, the gaming ball B is not driven into the second guide passage 2522 In addition to ending the sixth warning effect as being canceled, the game ball B should not be driven into the second guide passage 2522 even when the gaming state is switched from the big hit game or the time saving state, the sixth Warning production has ended.

  In the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. However, the gaming ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 must Any position may be provided as long as it passes through, for example, the inlet at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, the outlet at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, and the inside of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance) which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522 so that the game ball B which has entered the second guide passage 2522 must pass Any position may be used, and for example, the inlet at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, the outlet at the lower end of the second guide passage 2522, and the inside of the second guide passage 2522 may be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but on the downstream side of the prize winning opening 2006. It may be provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the first guide passage 2521 during the small hit game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the prize winning opening 2006 that has become open. Thus, the frequency at which the gaming ball B passes through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, so that the right detection sensor 2404 can be prevented from having a defect due to the gaming ball B passing excessively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, detection sensors (right detection sensor 2404 and left detection sensor 2405) are provided in any of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520. One detection sensor may be provided at a position where the game ball B entering the passage group 2520 necessarily passes. For example, by providing one detection sensor in the passage on the front side of the game ball B entering the upstream space portion 2505 being branched to either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 Whether or not the game ball B enters the passage group 2520 can be detected by one detection sensor. That is, when one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B is hit in the guide passage group 2520, and one detection sensor does not detect the passage of the game ball B Thus, it can be determined that the gaming ball B is not in a state of being driven into the guide passage group 2520. Even in such a case, when the one detection sensor continues to detect passage of the game ball B for a predetermined time while the game ball B is in a normal state to be struck into the area on the left side of the center character 2500, By alerting the player, it is possible for the player to grasp whether or not the game ball B should be hit at least in the area on the left side of the center character 2500.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are illustrated to display a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the gaming ball B is displayed in any manner in each gaming state. In the case where a hitting area instruction display (for example, a right hitting display consisting of a right arrow image or a left hitting display consisting of a left arrow image) for making a player always know that the player should hit is separately It is desirable to execute the fourth to sixth warning effects so as not to disturb the included area indication display. For example, in the upper right portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, a "display area for displaying the input region indication display" is provided in a divided manner, and among the display areas of the effect display device 1600 different from that area. It is desirable to provide "display areas for displaying the fourth to sixth warning effects" in the upper left portion of the section so as to prevent each guide from being overlapped and obstructed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are illustrated to display a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings are realized not as a display but as a sound effect. In this case, the priority of assignment to channels provided finitely to output sound is higher than that of various effect sounds set during the normal state, during the big hit game, or during the time saving state. It is desirable to set as such and to output as much as possible even in a situation where there are no vacant (unused channels) in the finitely provided channels. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively suppress the player who is not used to the game nature having various types of game balls B from being disadvantaged.

16-3. About the case where the ball clogging elimination hole is provided in the double-headed portion where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are arranged in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, a ball that can remove a clogged ball in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side in the double-dashed portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction The case where the jam clearance hole 2523 is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182. FIG. 181 and FIG. 182 are explanatory views showing an embodiment in which the ball jam clearance hole 2523 is provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  Although the details are described above, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction with each other at a portion extending vertically on the left side of the prize hole 2006 in the first guide passage 2521 It has a watching portion 2520a which can be seen overlapping. In the overlap portion 2520 a, the second guide passage 2522 is located on the rear side of the first guide passage 2521.

  As shown in FIG. 181 and FIG. 182 (A), a predetermined rod-like member is placed from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 in the overlap portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. It is insertable, and it is provided with the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 which can remove the ball clogging in the back 2nd guide passage 2522 by inserting the rod-shaped member. Specifically, ball clogging elimination holes 2523 are provided in the front side of the first guide passage 2521 and in the portion where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent. Further, the ball clogging eliminating hole 2523 provided in the part where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent is provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 as viewed from the front. It is positioned to coincide with the ball jam clearance hole 2523, and is provided to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Thus, the rod-like member can be smoothly inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. That is, when a ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, a rod-like member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, whereby the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side The rod-like member can be brought into contact with the game ball B clogged, and the clogged ball in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed by moving the rod-like member in the front-rear direction.

  When the cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 including the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the cover member also visually recognizes from the front, and the first guide passage The ball clogging elimination hole 2523 may be provided at a position that coincides with the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided on the front side of 2521. Thereby, when a ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the rod-like member can be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the second guide passage 2522 without removing the cover member.

  Further, the ball clogging eliminating hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly larger than that of the rod-like member. Thus, when the rod-like member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-like member can be freely moved not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical and horizontal directions. . That is, when the ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 is easily removed by moving the rod-shaped member not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical direction and the left-right direction. be able to.

  In addition, a plurality of ball jam clearance holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals in a portion extending in the vertical direction of the overlap portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. Thereby, even if the ball clogging occurs in any position of the second guide passage 2522 in the check portion 2520a, it is preferable to insert the rod-like member from the ball clogging eliminating hole 2523 provided at a position near from that position. , Ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed.

  While the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 is bent only in the left and right direction, the second guide passage 2522 is a complex in which the passage is bent not only in the left and right direction but also in the front and back direction The second guide passage 2522 is more likely to clog the ball than the first guide passage 2521. In addition, the double-gage portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction is either the inlet which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 Since it is a part after being bent from the inlet and the outlet, the rod does not reach the part even when the rod is inserted from the inlet and the outlet. In this respect, the rod member may be inserted toward the second guide passage 2522 from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 in the overlap portion 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A possible ball jam clearance hole 2523 is provided. Thus, the rod-like member is inserted not only when the ball is clogged in the first guide passage 2521 on the front side of the heavy-duty portion 2520a but also in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side. Ball clogging can be easily removed.

  In the above, in the overlap portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-rear direction, the ball is penetrated in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 Although the unclogged holes 2523 are provided, another example of the unclogged holes 2523 which can remove unclogged balls in the rear second guide passage 2522 will be shown below.

  As a first alternative example, as shown in FIG. 182 (B), on the left surface side of the second guide passage 2522 in the overlap portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, A predetermined rod-like member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, and by inserting the rod-like member, a ball clogging eliminating hole 2523 can be provided which can remove a ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 May be In such a case, when a ball jam occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B jammed in the second guide passage 2522 is inserted by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. It becomes possible for the members to come in contact, and by moving the rod-like members in the left-right direction, it is possible to remove the clogging in the second guide passage 2522. In the present embodiment, a transparent plate-like light guide plate 3102 is provided on the left of the guide passage group 2520 including the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, but the light guide plate 3102 is It is located to the rear of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and allows the rod member to be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 without being blocked by the light guide plate 3102.

  Further, as a second alternative example, as shown in FIG. 182 (C), in the overlap portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, the front side of the first guide passage 2521 is The ball clogging eliminating hole 2523 is provided to penetrate from the front to the second guide passage 2522 in the front-rear direction, but the shape of the ball clogging eliminating hole 2523 is not circular but a slit shape extending in the vertical direction It may be formed in In such a case, when the rod-like member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-like member can be largely moved in the vertical direction, and the ball in the second guide passage 2522 Clogs can be easily removed.

  In the vicinity of the inlet, which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided side by side in the left-right direction. And as a 3rd another example, as shown to FIG. 182 (D), in the location where the 1st guidance channel | path 2521 and the 2nd guidance channel | path 2522 were located in a line with the front-back direction, a predetermined rod-shaped member is made into the 2nd guidance channel 2522 A ball clog eliminating hole 2523 may be provided, which can be inserted from the left side of the head and by removing the clogged first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side) by inserting the rod-like member. That is, the ball jam clearance hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate in the left-right direction from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 toward the first guide passage 2521. In such a case, when ball clogging occurs in the first guide passage 2521, the rod-like member is inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, whereby the ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (rear side) The rod-like member can be brought into contact with the game ball B, and the ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 can be removed by moving the rod-like member in the left-right direction.

  When the ball clogging eliminating hole 2523 is provided on the left side of the second guiding passage 2522 as in the first and third variants, the ball clogging eliminating hole is located from the left side of the second guiding passage 2522. By inserting the rod-like member through 2523, it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522, but the light guide plate 3102 is provided at the adjacent position of the one behind the second guide passage 2522. Since the rod-like member is inserted through the ball jam clearance hole 2523, the rod-like member may come into contact with the light guide plate 3102. Then, when the light guide plate 3102 is damaged by the rod-like member, the light emitting plate of the light guide plate 3102 (first pattern 3102a, second pattern 3102b) is decorated by emitting light, even a portion having a scratch unrelated to the pattern Although light is guided (light is reflected), there is a problem that when the damaged part overlaps the pattern, the pattern becomes difficult to visually recognize. For this reason, it is desirable not to provide a light guide decoration area where a design is exposed in the right area portion of the light guide plate 3102 which is a part adjacent to the second guide passage 2522. In addition, although the light guide plate 3102 is attached to the square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, the light guide plate 3102 is manually left so that the light guide plate 3102 is separated from the second guide passage 2522. When inserting the rod-shaped member through the ball clogging eliminating hole 2523, the rod-shaped member can be moved to a position not contacting the light guide plate 3102 as a step before that. You may In addition, on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, a movable member capable of moving to a position where the ball clogging eliminating hole 2523 provided on the left surface side of the second guide passage 2522 is concealed and a position not concealed. When the rod-like member is inserted through the ball jam clearance hole 2523, the movable member may be moved to a position where the ball jam clearance hole 2523 is not hidden. In such a configuration, when it is not necessary to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522, the movable member is located at a position where the ball clogging eliminating hole 2523 is concealed, and the player visually recognizes the ball clogging eliminating hole 2523 This has the advantage that it is difficult and the overall decorativeness including the second guide passage 2522 is not lost.

16-4. About the ball clogging prevention structure near the outlet of the 1st guidance passage and the 2nd guidance passage which were installed in parallel]
As described in FIG. 121 (a), the game ball B is driven with strength to abut against the stopper 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 which constitutes a part of the periphery of the game area 5a ( When so-called right-handed), the game ball B in contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the top surface of the prize winning opening door 2511 closing the prize winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, The lower right outlet of the lower portion 2520 is discharged to the lower side of the attacker unit 2400. The gaming ball B discharged downward from the outlet of the first guiding passage 2521 is moved to the first opening 2431 of the right attacking passage 2430 by the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the first guiding passage 2521 and the attacking unit 2400. The user is induced to enter with a similar probability to any of the normal winning opening 2003 and the portion on the left of the normal winning opening 2003.

  On the other hand, as described in FIG. 121 (b), when the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2505 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it twists backward. After being aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the overlap portion 2520a, it is twisted forward and discharged from the outlet on the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 to the lower side of the attacker unit 2400. The gaming ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guiding passage 2522 is the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 or the normal winning opening 2003 by the plurality of obstacle nails N embedded between the attacking unit 2400 and the game ball B. It is induced to enter any of the sites of (1) and, rarely, to the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

  It should be noted that the gaming ball B which has entered the right attacking passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is on the lower right rail 1004 from the outlet 2435 which is lower than the big winning opening 2005. It is discharged and discharged to the outside of the game area 5a from the out port 1008.

  At the lower end of the guide passage group 2520, the respective outlets are juxtaposed so that the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is on the right side and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 is on the left side. Near the exit of the passage 2521 and the second guiding passage 2522, the gaming balls B discharged from the exit flow in a large amount in a short time, and ball clogging tends to occur below the exit. At this point, below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the first opening 2431 When the game ball B enters, it is guided to the out port 1008 through the attacker right passage 2430. Thereby, in the vicinity of the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, part of the gaming balls B discharged from the outlets are guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008. In the vicinity of the exit of the game ball, the game ball B is less likely to stagnate, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be prevented. Further, even if ball clogging occurs below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game balls B discharged from the outlets are guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008. As a result, the game balls B can be prevented from being stacked up to the inside of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  As described above, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, but the position is the same as the outlet of the second guide passage 2522. The outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is closer than the first guide passage 2521. In the first guide passage 2521, there is provided a prize winning opening 2006 which is opened during a small hit game, but due to a ball jam below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the first When the gaming ball B is stacked up to the position of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the guiding passage 2521, more than expected gaming balls B flow into the prize winning opening 2006 that has been opened, and the player is unfair Be able to gain In this respect, since the first opening 2431 of the right-hand attachment channel 2430 is disposed so that the outlet of the first guide channel 2521 is closer to the outlet of the second guide channel 2522, the first guide channel 2521 and the Even if ball clogging occurs below the outlet of the second guiding passage 2522, the gaming ball B in the vicinity of the outlet of the first guiding passage 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the out opening 1008, It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being stacked up to the position of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the one guide passage 2521.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 below the exit of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522 on the right side of the normal winning port 2003. Although the first opening 2431 of the passage 2430 is provided, the attacker right passage 2430 is provided with an out port different from the out port 1008, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 is You may make it discharge | emit out of the game area 5a from an out mouth. Even in such a case, a portion of the game ball B discharged from the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided out of the game area 5a from the out port different from the out port 1008. It becomes difficult for the game balls B to stagnate in the vicinity of their outlets, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging.

  In addition, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 at a position near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 below the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. The first opening 2431 of 2430 is provided, but also to a passage where the game ball B can be guided to the out port 1008 and to the outside of the game area 5a even at a position near the exit of the second guide passage 2522 An out port other than the out port 1008 capable of discharging the game ball B may be provided. Even in such a case, a part of the game balls B discharged from the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided out of the game area 5a, and in the vicinity of those outlets. It becomes difficult for the game ball B to stagnate, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be prevented.

  In the above, near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 is provided. However, also in the vicinity of the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the passage where the game ball B can be guided to the out port 1008 or the game ball B can be discharged out of the game area 5 a An out port other than the possible out port 1008 may be provided. In the following, another example is provided for the case where the second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B out of the game area 5a is provided in the vicinity of the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Show. FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 is provided in the vicinity of the inlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

  As shown in FIG. 183, it is possible to discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5a between the inlet which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the inlet which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522 A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when entering the upstream space 2505 and hitting the gaming ball B with a strength to abut against the abutment 1006 (so-called, hitting right), it enters the first guide passage 2521 with high probability. A part of the game balls B that have been driven in enter the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, when the game ball B is hit with a strength (a certain degree of strength weaker than a right strike) which enters the upstream space 2505 and does not abut against the stopper 1006, it enters the second guide passage 2522 with high probability. However, a part of the game ball B thrown in enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. That is, a part of the game balls B driven to enter the upstream space portion 2505 enter the second out port 1013. Thereby, even when the player aims at either the entrance of the first guidance passage 2521 or the entrance of the second guidance passage 2522, a part of the game ball B driven to enter the upstream space portion 2505. However, since the game is guided from the second out port 1013 to the outside of the game area 5a, the number of game balls B entering inside from the entrances thereof decreases, and the ball is clogged inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 Can be prevented.

  In addition to the above, the out-port 1008 is also capable of discharging the game ball B out of the game area 5a only when a ball jam occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. Another outlet may be provided. In the following, another example of the case where the second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B out of the game area 5a is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521 will be described. FIG. 184 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 is provided in the vicinity of an outlet inside the first guide passage 2521.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (A), slightly above the exit which is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, on the front of the game area 5a (game board 5) which is flush with the rear surface of the first guide passage 2521. A second out port 1013 is provided which can be opened and the gaming ball B can be discharged out of the game area 5a. In addition, inside the first guide passage 2521 there is provided a prize winning opening 2006 which is opened during a small hit game, but the second out mouth 1013 is on the downstream side of the prize winning opening 2006 Provided at the In such a configuration, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 when no ball clogging occurs below the second out port 1013, such as under the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the second out It comes to pass through the front of the second out port 1013 as it is without entering the port 1013.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 184 (B), when a ball clog occurs below the second out port 1013, such as under the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the game is performed up to the second out port 1013 When the balls B are stacked, the gaming balls B which have further flowed through the first guide passage 2521 come to enter the second out port 1013. That is, in the inside of the first guide passage 2521, the gaming balls B are not stacked up to a position above the second out port 1013. As described above, the prize winning opening 2006 which is opened during the small hit game is provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but it is caused by a ball clogging near the exit of the first guide passage 2521. As the game ball B is stacked up to the position of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, more than expected gaming balls B flow into the prize winning opening 2006 that has become open, It will be possible for the player to obtain an illegal profit. In this respect, discharging the game ball B out of the game area 5a only when a ball jam occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 on the downstream side of the prize winning opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521. Since the second out port 1013 which can be used is provided, even if ball clogging occurs near the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the prize winning opening 2006 provided in the inside of the first guide passage 2521 Before the game ball B is stacked up to the position, the game ball B can be discharged from the second out port 1013 to the outside of the game area 5a, and a situation occurs in which the player can obtain an illegal profit. Can be prevented.

[17. About out-of-mouth detection at the time of abnormality occurrence]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, the ball entrance provided on the game board 5 (a first start port 2002, a second start port 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a prize winning opening 2006, etc.) When the game ball B enters the ball and when the game ball B enters the out port 1008, the number of each ball is counted to perform a predetermined calculation, and the calculation result is used as information regarding the pachinko machine 1 It is made to display on a predetermined display device (for example, base monitor 1310 h). If an abnormality occurs, whether the operation is continued or stopped (stopped) is differentiated depending on whether the abnormality is mild or severe, and if a serious abnormality occurs, the operation is calculated. It is made to stop (stop). The execution state of the operation when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is an explanatory view showing an execution state of calculation when an abnormality occurs.

  First, on the main control board 1310, as a ball entry port provided on the game board 5, the general winning port 2001, the normal winning port 2003, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, a prize When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2006, the normal winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the special winning opening sensor 2403, a prize winning combination The mouth sensor 2513 detects the game ball B, and adds it to the ball entry number counter corresponding to each. It is possible to grasp the number of ball entry of the game ball B which has entered into each ball entry port among the game balls B which are hit into the game area 5a by such a ball entry number counter.

  In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 is the game ball B. And all are added to the out number counter. It is possible to grasp the number of ball entry of the game ball B which entered the out port 1008 among the game balls B which are driven into the game area 5a by the out number counter.

  Then, in the main control board 1310, predetermined calculations are performed using the ball number counter and the out number counter. As a specific example, the total number of game balls B entered into the ball entry port provided on the game board 5 among the game balls B launched into the game area 5a by adding all of the ball entry counters Can be calculated. Further, the total number of the game balls B thrown into the game area 5a can be calculated by adding all of the ball number counters and the out number counter.

  The calculation result described above is displayed on a predetermined display device as information regarding the pachinko machine 1. However, as the information to be displayed on the predetermined display device, the number of ball entry of the game ball B entered into each ball entry port or out port 1008 is as it is based on the respective ball number counter and out number counter. It is also possible to output. Further, as the predetermined display device, there is a presentation display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, a hall computer externally controlled by the hall side, and the like. In addition, a monitor (base monitor 1310 h) may be mounted on the main control substrate 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and displayed on the monitor (base monitor 1310 h). Among them, when information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it can be grasped at a position at which both the player and the hall side can visually recognize, but the monitor of the hall computer or the main control board 1310 When information is displayed on (base monitor 1310 h), it can be grasped at a position where only the hole side can be visually recognized.

  In addition, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the total number of gaming balls B entered into the ball entrance provided on the game board 5 and the total number of gaming balls B entered into the out port 1008 are displayed. In such a case, it can be determined from the ratio whether or not the extent to which the game ball B enters the ball entrance or the out-port 1008 is within the normal numerical range. When a normal game is being played, the game ball B thrown into the game area 5a is designed to enter the ball entrance at a predetermined rate, but, for example, it enters into the out port 1008 If the total number of game balls B entered into the ball mouth is too large, it can be suspected that the ball has been entered against the ball entry gate by unfair acts, On the other hand, if the total number of gaming balls B entered into the out port 1008 is too large, it can be suspected that the out port 1008 has been entered in an illegal act.

  In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the payout detection sensor 591 detects the game ball B and adds it to the number-of-payouts counter. The number of payouts of the game ball B paid out to the player can be grasped by the payout number counter. Since the total number of game balls B thrown into the game area 5a calculated by all of the ball number counters and the out number counter is the total number of game balls B used by the player, By calculating the difference with the number of payouts of the game balls B paid out, it is possible to calculate the net increase number of the game balls B, and displaying such a net increase number of the game balls B on a predetermined display device. Can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B entered into the ball entry port and the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge port 629 provided in the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 There is provided a frame-side out-port sensor capable of detecting the game ball B which is discharged to the rear outside (the island equipment side of the game hall) (see FIG. 94) but passes through the ball discharge port 629. . When the frame-side out port sensor detects the gaming ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629, a detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, on the main control board 1310, after the game ball B enters the ball entry port or out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the joined game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 The frame-side out sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame-side out number counter. With this frame-side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of ball entry of the game ball B thrown into the game area 5a.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 is also the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower full ball After being discharged to the ball extraction guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620 from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extracting passage 610c through the lower ball extracting passage 610c of the path unit 610, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball outlet 629 Is discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall), and is discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 as well as the game ball B driven into the game area 5a. The game ball B is also configured to be detectable by the frame side out-port sensor. Here, in consideration of the purpose of grasping the number of balls of the game ball B thrown into the game area 5a, the number of the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is It is highly desirable to eliminate (invalidate) and perform various calculations. In the configuration in which the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is also detected in response to this, the frame side out port sensor detects it separately from the frame side out port sensor. A ball extraction sensor (not shown) for detecting the game ball B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 by the ball extraction sensor, and further detecting by the ball extraction sensor It is desirable to be configured to subtract the number of game balls B that have been played out from the out number counter. Thus, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball removal detection sensor and temporarily subtracted from the out number counter, and then detected by the frame-side out port sensor. It will be added to the number-of-outs counter, and the number of gaming balls B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be substantially not reflected in the number-of-outs counter. In addition, such a form is in the case where the game ball B is discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not energized (when the ball withdrawal action of the payout device 580 is made). There is no problem because neither the ball withdrawal detection sensor nor the frame side out-port sensor can detect itself, but in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is energized, the game is made downward from the ball withdrawal passage 580b of the payout device 580 When the ball B is released (when the dispensing device 580 pulls out the ball) or when the pachinko machine 1 is not energized, the gaming ball B is discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 Although the ball pulling action of the dispensing device 580 is performed, the problem in the case where the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is energized while the ball is being pulled out is eliminated. In addition, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling out passage 580b of the payout device 580 are not combined with each other through the different paths and the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 The frame side out-port sensor may be configured to discharge only the game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a. In such a configuration, a configuration in which the number of gaming balls B detected by the above-described ball out detection sensor is subtracted from the out number counter becomes unnecessary.

  As described above, the frame-side out number counter can grasp the number of balls in the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, but it is also possible to add all the number-of-balls counters and the out number counter. It is possible to calculate the total number of game balls B thrown into the game area 5a. That is, in the state where the game is not performed and the game ball B is not hit in the game area 5a, the frame side out number counter matches the numerical value obtained by adding all the ball number counters and the out number counter. It will be done. On the other hand, in a state where the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, a frame-side out port separated by a predetermined distance after the game ball B passes a detection sensor provided at the entrance or out port 1008. Since it passes through the sensor, the numerical value obtained by adding all of the number-of-balls-count counter and the number-of-outs counter shifts slightly in comparison with the frame-side out number counter.

  In the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether to continue addition or calculation to the counter or to stop (stop) is different depending on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. As shown in FIG. 185A, when a slight abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are continued without stopping (stopping). As this minor abnormality, the gaming ball B is full on the upper plate 201, and the gaming ball B can not be paid out from the payout device 580, or the gaming state in which the gaming ball B should be driven into the right area of the center role 2500 There is a situation where you are not hitting right. In these states, an effect to warn the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to be guided to the lower plate 202 or an effect to warn the player to hit the right are executed. Also, in these states, with the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 not being released from the outer frame 2, against the ball entry port and the out port 1008 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this state, the gaming ball B can not be artificially entered. For this reason, when a minor abnormality occurs, the ball number counter and the out number counter do not increase due to an unfair act, and it is possible to continue without stopping (stopping) addition and calculation to the counter. There is.

  On the other hand, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped). As this serious abnormality, the state in which the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are open | released from the outer frame 2 is mentioned. In these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are open from the outer frame 2, and artificially with respect to the ball entrance and the out port 1008 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. The game ball B can be entered. For this reason, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped) so that the ball number counter and the out number counter do not increase due to an unauthorized action.

  Also, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the counter and the calculation are stopped (stopped), but the detection sensor itself provided in the ball entry port or out port 1008 passes the game ball B. It is detected. In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs, the numerical values of counters such as the number-of-balls counter and the number-of-outs counter before the occurrence and the calculation results are stored. After a major abnormality has been eliminated, such as being closed, the addition to the counter and the operation are resumed. In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs and addition to the counter or stopping (stopping) the calculation, the addition or calculation to the counter is performed by image display on a predetermined display device or voice output from the speaker. A cancellation effect is given to notify that the cancellation has been made.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 185 (B), with respect to the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 and the calculation regarding the out number counter, occurrence of severe abnormality. Until the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the time, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation regarding the out number counter continue without stopping (stopping), and when the predetermined time passes, the out number counter Arithmetic operations on the addition to and the out number counter are stopped (stopped). Thereby, at the time of occurrence of a severe abnormality such as the door frame 3 being released from the outer frame 2, it is possible to grasp the number of ball entry of the game ball B into the out port 1008 until the predetermined time passes. .

  For example, when the game ball B becomes grape-like in the game area 5a and clogged, it is impossible to play a normal game, the person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and the grape-like game ball B Is likely to flow into the out port 1008 at the lower end as it is. Such a grape-like game ball B is a game ball B which is likely to have been discharged from the out port 1008 if it does not become grape-like originally. In this respect, when the door frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to remove the grape-like game ball B, addition to the out number counter and calculation concerning the out number counter until the predetermined time elapses Since the grape-like game ball B flows into the out-port 1008 without interrupting (stopping), it is possible to grasp the number of balls entered into the out-port 1008, and the reliability of the information regarding the out-port 1008 can be improved. In addition, there is a low possibility that the grape-like game ball B will flow into the out-port 1008 after a predetermined time has passed, and it is suspected that the ball will enter the out-port 1008 by an unfair act, so the out number counter It is decided to stop (stop) the addition to and the operation regarding the out number counter.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 185C, with respect to the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 and the calculation regarding the out number counter, occurrence of severe abnormality. Until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the time, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation regarding the out number counter continue without stopping (stopping), but the predetermined time passes Even if before, when a large number of gaming balls B are detected continuously by the out-port left sensor 3032 or the out-port right sensor 3033 in a short period, addition to the out number counter or the out number counter at that time Arithmetic operation is canceled (stopped). In such a case, when the door frame 3 is opened, it is possible that more than the number of balls assumed to flow into the out-port 1008 when the grape-like game ball B is removed flows into the out-port 1008 Since it is suspected that the player is allowed to enter the out port 1008 due to a high and improper behavior, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation regarding the out number counter are to be stopped (stopped).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (D), when the door frame 3 is opened out of the case where a serious abnormality occurs, the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 With regard to the calculation concerning the addition and the number-of-outs counter, the addition to the number-of-outs counter and the calculation concerning the number-of-outs counter are stopped (stopped) until the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the time of opening the door frame 3. While the operation is continued without doing, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the addition to the out number counter and the operation regarding the out number counter are stopped (stopped) at that time. This is considered to be open for the purpose of removing the grape-like game balls B in the game area 5a when the door frame 3 is opened, whereas in the game area 5a when the main body frame 4 is opened. This is because the main unit frame 4 which does not need to be opened for the purpose of removing the grape-like game balls B is opened. That is, when the main frame 4 is opened, it is opened for another purpose such as removing the ball clogging on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so the addition to the number-of-outs counter and the calculation for the number-of-outs counter are stopped (stopped) It is supposed to be done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after the game ball B enters the entrance and out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the joined game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 While the frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B, the frame-side out-number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame-side out-port sensor is detected as shown in FIG. 185 (E). With regard to the calculation regarding the addition and the frame-side out number counter, the addition to the frame-side out number counter and the calculation regarding the frame-side out number counter are stopped (stopped) when a serious abnormality occurs. For this reason, when the person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-like game ball B, the out corresponding to the detection by the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 in a predetermined period. While addition to the number counter is performed, addition to the frame-side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame-side out-port sensor is not performed. From the difference between the added value and the value of the frame-side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of ball-entering game balls B removed at the time of opening the door frame 3. In addition, about the number of ball entry of such a grape-like game ball B, it is possible to display on a predetermined display as information about the pachinko machine 1 concerned.

  Further, as described above, in the state where the game is not performed and the game ball B is not hit in the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter includes all the ball number counters and the out number counter. It will match the added value. On the other hand, in a state where the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a, a frame-side out port separated by a predetermined distance after the game ball B passes a detection sensor provided at the entrance or out port 1008. Since it passes through the sensor, the numerical value obtained by adding all of the number-of-balls-count counter and the number-of-outs counter shifts slightly in comparison with the frame-side out number counter. As described above, as long as a normal game is being performed, a difference of a predetermined number or more may occur as compared with the frame-side out number counter for the numerical value obtained by adding all of the ball number counters and the out number counter. Since there is no difference, it is possible to determine whether or not a normal game is being performed by monitoring whether or not a predetermined number or more of differences have occurred.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 186, when a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs as compared with the frame-side out number counter, a numerical value obtained by adding all of the ball number counter and the out number counter is special. It is judged that the abnormality of has occurred, and the addition to the counter and the operation are stopped (stopped). In addition, when a special abnormality occurs and addition to the counter or calculation is stopped, the addition to the counter or calculation is stopped by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting sound from a speaker. The effect is given at the time of cancellation to notify that it is present. Then, when a difference of a predetermined number or more is generated in comparison with the frame-side out number counter, for a numerical value obtained by adding all of the ball number counters and the out number counter, for example, illegal action is made on the game board 5 After the game ball B passes a detection sensor provided in the ball entry port or out port 1008 that an object other than the game ball B is allowed to pass only to the ball entry port or out port 1008 provided It is possible to suspect that ball clogging may have occurred before passing through the frame side out sensor. As a result, it is possible to detect early that a failure such as an illegal act or a ball jam has occurred, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are illustrated as being open from the outer frame 2 as a serious abnormality, but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it detects a situation in which it is assumed that the game is progressing due to an illegal act even if the frame is not released from the outer frame 2, the addition to the various counters and the operation are canceled (stopped) You may For example, it is determined that a normal game is not performed, for example, when magnetism of a level that adsorbs the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a or a predetermined vibration (impact) to the game area 5a is detected. Then, it can be exemplified that the addition to various counters and the operation are stopped (stopped). Further, any of the case where the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2 and the case where the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are not opened from the outer frame 2 detect incorrect magnetism or vibration. Even in this case, addition to various counters and calculation are stopped (stopped), but it is considered as invalid only when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2 and illegal magnetism or vibration is detected. It may be determined that the progress of the game including the launch of the game ball B is immediately stopped.

[17-1. About out-of-port detection when multiple out-ports are provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, the second out port 1013 is provided on the upstream side and the third out port 1014 is provided on the middle stream side separately from the out port 1008 provided on the downstream side of the game area 5a. The case where a detection sensor capable of detecting the game ball B to be discharged is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 and 188. FIG. 187 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 and a third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008. FIG. 188 is an explanatory drawing showing the state of execution of calculation when the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008.

  As shown in FIG. 187, it is possible to discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5a between the inlet which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the inlet which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522 A second out port 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, when entering the upstream space 2505 and hitting the gaming ball B with a strength to abut against the abutment 1006 (so-called, hitting right), it enters the first guide passage 2521 with high probability. A part of the game balls B that have been driven in enter the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, when the game ball B is hit with a strength (a certain degree of strength weaker than a right strike) which enters the upstream space 2505 and does not abut against the stopper 1006, it enters the second guide passage 2522 with high probability. However, a part of the game ball B thrown in enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. That is, a part of the game balls B driven to enter the upstream space portion 2505 enter the second out port 1013.

  Further, below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, but in the attacker right passage 2430 A third out port 1014 different from the out port 1008 is provided, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third out port 1014 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  Note that the second out port 1013 is provided around the entrances of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522 in the guide path group 2520, and the third out port 1014 is provided around the exit. Although the details are described above, the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 are provided to block the ball in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, a second out-port sensor capable of detecting the gaming ball B discharged to the outside from the second out-port 1013 and a gaming ball B discharged to the outside from the third out-port 1014 are detected. And a third out-port sensor that can be detected. When the second out-port sensor detects the game ball B having entered the second out-port 1013, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, whereas the third out-port sensor detects the third out-port sensor. When the gaming ball B entering the out port 1014 is detected, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013, the second out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter. On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014, the third out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. While the second out number counter grasps the ball count of the gaming ball B entering the second out port 1013, the third out number counter determines the gaming ball B entered in the third out port 1014. You can grasp the number of ball entry.

  In the main control board 1310, predetermined calculations are performed using the second out number counter and the third out number counter, as well as the ball number counter and the out number counter. As a specific example, by adding the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter, the first provided on the game board 5 among the game balls B driven into the game area 5a The number of gaming balls B discharged to the outside can be calculated without entering the ball entrance such as the starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. Further, the total number of gaming balls B thrown into the gaming area 5a can be calculated by adding the ball number counter, the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the game ball B is hit in the right area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 balls or more out of 100 balls which can be fired in 1 minute) It is designed not to enter 1013. Therefore, in the time saving state or the big hit gaming state, the second out number counter is used to determine whether or not the number of balls entered into the second out port 1013 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time. It is determined that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game when it is monitored and the predetermined number per unit time is reached or more.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 188 (A), when the number of balls in the game ball B entering the second out port 1013 reaches a predetermined number per unit time, the image display on a predetermined display device And by the voice output from the speaker, a warning effect that warns that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game is executed. Then, this warning effect is ended when the number of balls in the game ball B entering the second out port 1013 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

  For example, when the number of balls entered into the second out port 1013 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the ball is located downstream of the second out port 1013 in the right area of the game area 5a. The game ball B has less chances of entering the ball mouth (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, role winning opening 2006), which is a disadvantage for the player It becomes. In this respect, when the number of ball entry of the game ball B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board can be easily entered into the second out port 1013 It can be doubted that 5 may have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to early discover that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  In the above, in the time saving state or the big hit gaming state, it is monitored whether or not the number of balls in the game ball B entering the second out port 1013 is a predetermined number or more per unit time, but per unit time The number of balls in the game ball B that entered the second out port 1013 and the number of balls entered in the entrance and out port (out port 1008, third out port 1014) downstream of the second out port 1013 It is also possible to calculate a ratio to the number of ball entry of the game ball B and to monitor whether the ratio is equal to or more than a predetermined ratio. Even in such a case, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game when the pitch of the game ball B entering the second out port 1013 per unit time is too high.

  Similarly, in a state where the gaming ball B is driven into the right area of the gaming area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 balls or more out of 100 balls that can be fired in 1 minute) It is designed not to hit the ball. Therefore, in the time saving state or the big hit gaming state, the third out number counter is used to determine whether the number of entering balls of the game ball B entering the third out port 1014 is a predetermined number or more per unit time. It is determined that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game when it is monitored and the predetermined number per unit time is exceeded.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), when the number of balls in the game ball B entering the third out port 1014 reaches a predetermined number per unit time or more, image display on a predetermined display device And by the voice output from the speaker, a warning effect that warns that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game is executed. Then, this warning effect is ended when the number of balls in the game ball B entering the third out port 1014 is less than a predetermined number per unit time.

  For example, when the number of balls in the game ball B entering the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, it is more downstream than the third out port 1014 in the right area of the game area 5a. The opportunity for the game ball B to enter the ball mouth (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005) decreases, which is a disadvantage for the player. In this respect, when the number of balls in the game ball B entering the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the game board can be easily entered into the third out port 1014 It can be doubted that 5 may have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to early discover that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  In the above, in the time saving state and the big hit gaming state, it is monitored whether the number of balls of the game ball B which entered the third out port 1014 is more than a predetermined number per unit time, but per unit time The ratio of the number of balls in the game ball B entering the third out port 1014 to the number of balls in the ball entering the ball entrance and out port 1008 downstream of the third out port 1014 May be calculated and monitored to determine whether the ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio. Even in such a case, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game when the pitch of the gaming ball B entering the third out port 1014 per unit time is too high.

  In this embodiment, in the time saving state or the big hit gaming state, when the number of ball entry of the game ball B entering the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 becomes a predetermined number or more per unit time, Although the addition to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and the calculation regarding those out number counters are continued, as in the above-described embodiment, when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time. It may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and addition to the second out number counter or the third out number counter or operation on the out number counters may be stopped. In such a configuration, even if the game ball B is made to enter the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 in an unfair manner, the second out number counter or the third out number counter does not increase. The reliability of the information on the second out 1013 and the third out 1014 can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, the game ball B should be driven into the left side area of the game area 5a, but if the game ball B is driven into the right side area of the game area 5a, the second in the right side area The game ball B may enter the out port 1013 or the third out port 1014. For this reason, when the second out-port sensor or the third out-port sensor detects the gaming ball B in the normal state, the image is displayed on a predetermined display device or the sound is output from the speaker. The instruction effect of instructing to change to is executed.

[18. Regarding light emission history after light emission effect using light guide plate]
In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control substrate 1310 to the peripheral control substrate 1510, variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the effect display device 1600, but during the variation display, the effect display device 1600 The light guide plate 3102 provided on the front of the display area is decorated with light emission for a plurality of times, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is changed stepwise in a plurality of times, thereby light emission suggesting a big hit expectation for the variable display It is possible to perform the production. In addition, when the light guide plate 3102 is light emitting decorated, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (around the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010) have the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102 Although it is made to emit light, even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, as a history of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102, a history effect of continuously emitting the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 with the light emission color just before the light guide plate 3102 It is made feasible.

  Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (the starting condition is satisfied), the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis processing in step S601, whether to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command Decide. In addition, when it is determined that the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is performed, the light emission color pattern table is referred to based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern command, and the light emission color of the light One of a plurality of types of luminescent color patterns set multiple times is determined.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 changes the emission color of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed on the upper side thereof, thereby making the light guide plate any one of white, green, blue and red. It is possible to embellish the pattern 3102a (see FIG. 136), but in the light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is specified three times with the light emission color set in the light emission color pattern. It is made to emit light at the timing. In addition, the time for light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 at one timing is a short time (for example, less than one second), and after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is performed, the light emission decoration is not performed until the next light emission decoration Time is longer. In addition, although the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is performed only once at one timing, the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 may be performed plural times at each timing.

  Moreover, although the light-emission production using the light-guide plate 3102 is performed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed among the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol, it is at the timing during the reach production after the reach formation. For example, 1 to 3 out of 3 times of light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 may be performed at the timing during reach effect after the reach formation.

  Also, while it is possible to cause the light guide plate 3102 to emit light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed on the upper side thereof, the first pattern 3102 a can be decorated to emit light. It is possible to make the plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 disposed on the left side of the front view emit light and to make the second pattern 3102 b emit light, but the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 Then, the first pattern 3102a is decorated to emit light. Thereby, it can be made to grasp clearly that 3 times of light emission decoration of the first pattern 3102a in the light emission production is a series of effects.

  Next, a light emission color pattern table in which the light emission color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set will be described with reference to FIG. The emission color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 189 is a light emission color pattern table in which the light emission color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set.

  As described above, a plurality of light emission color patterns are set in the light emission color pattern table, but the light emission color patterns include the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 for the number of times of light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102. It is set how to change. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, the light emission pattern is set in the light emission color pattern table so that the light guide plate 3102 can be changed twice after the light emission decoration is performed with a predetermined light emission color.

  The light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 set to the light emission color pattern is set so that the light emission decoration is performed in any of four colors of white, green, blue and red. When the light emission color pattern is determined from the light emission color pattern table, as a result of the change of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 to the end, the big hit expectation is set to be high in the order of white → green → blue → red. It is done. That is, when the lottery result specified from the fluctuation pattern is a big hit, a light emitting color pattern to be a light emitting color (for example, red) having a high hit probability as a final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is determined with high probability. When the lottery result specified from the fluctuation pattern is a loss (loss, reach loss), a light emission color pattern which is a light emission color with a low probability of big hit (for example, white) as a final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is high probability. It is decided to decide. As a result, when the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated to emit light with a light emission color with a high degree of expectation, the player's expectation for the big hit is increased.

  In the light emission color pattern, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 does not change in the reverse order of white → green → blue → red, and next time light emission decoration is performed after light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 The light emission color is set to be maintained or to be a light emission color with high expectation for a big hit. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emission color with a low expectation for a big hit, the possibility of changing to a light emission color with a high probability for a big hit remains unless three timings of light emission effects end. Thus, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 can be focused on with expectation, until the light emission effect is finished.

  Also, the light emission color pattern does not necessarily have to change in the order of green → blue → red after the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in white, and starting from a light emission color other than white or It is also set so that the above-mentioned luminescent color is skipped to change to the next luminescent color (for example, change from white to red). As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emission color with a low probability of big hit, it can not be predicted which light emission color will change to the next light emission color, and the light guide plate The emission color of 3102 can be noticed with expectation.

  Next, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the back effect unit 3200 has a plurality of hemispherical decorative bodies 3210 so as to surround the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010, that is, to surround the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view. There is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600, four decorative bodies 3210 are provided so as to be vertically arranged. In addition, on the rear of the decorative body 3210, a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward is mounted is provided. In addition, in the plurality of decorative bodies 3210, similarly to the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to perform light emission decoration with any of white, green, blue and red.

  Then, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated for light emission in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 emit light with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102. Also, in the light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated by emitting light at a predetermined timing three times, but even after the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off at each timing, a plurality of decorative bodies The light emission of 3210 is maintained. As described above, when the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is performed, as a history of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102, the history effect of continuously emitting the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 with the light emission color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 is performed. Running.

  Specifically, at the first or second timing of light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, the plural decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same light emitting color as the light guiding plate 3102 and light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is performed next time The light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the light emission decoration timing. In addition, at the third timing of light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in light emission production, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102, and after light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 The light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until then. As a result, although it is a short time (for example, less than one second) as the time for light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 at one time, light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102 Even when the light emission color is overlooked when the light guide plate 3102 is light emitting and decorated, the light emission color can be grasped after the light guide plate 3102 is light emitting and decorated.

  In addition, as the plurality of decorative bodies 3210, a number corresponding to the number of light emission colors capable of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102 by the light emission effect is provided. In addition, the number of light emission of the decorative body 3210 is different depending on the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210 is a plurality In order from the lower side of the decorative body 3210, the number of light emitting elements of the decorative body 3210 is set to increase. Specifically, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 to be lighted and decorated by the light emission effect is white which is the lowest light emission color of the big hit expectation, four on each of the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 Of the decorative bodies 3210, the lower one of the decorative bodies 3210a is set to emit light in white. When the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is green, the lower two decorative bodies 3210 a and 3210 b are set to emit green light. When the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is blue, the lower three decorative bodies 3210 a to 3210 c are set to emit blue light. In addition, when the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red which is the highest emission color of the big hit expectation, all the four decorations 3210 a to 3210 d are set to emit light in red. As a result, even when the big hit expectation can not be grasped from the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, the big hit expectation can be easily grasped from the number of luminous elements of the decorative body 3210.

  In addition, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102 and can emit light forward. Then, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated for light emission in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light with the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102, but the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are positioned behind the light guide plate 3102 Light is irradiated to the light guide plate 3102 not only by the plurality of LEDs for light emitting decoration of the first pattern 3102 a on the light guide plate 3102 but also by the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emitting light. As a result, the first pattern 3102 a to be illuminated and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 is further emphasized, and the effect using the light guide plate 3102 can be made more noticeable.

  In addition, while the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is performed during the normal change before the reach is formed among the change display of the decorative symbol, during the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102, It is arranged not to start another preview effect using the effect display device 1600 anew. That is, at the timing at which the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated by light emission, another advance notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is started. Thus, although the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not prevent the visual recognition for other notice effects, and other notice effects are started. As well as never miss. That is, it is possible to make the player firmly grasp the light-emitting effect for light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 and the other preliminary effects.

  Next, a specific example of effects by the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 at the time of execution of light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 shows a specific effect example of the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 at the time of execution of the light emission effect.

  In FIG. 191, a case where a light emission color pattern in which a light emission color for light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is changed from white to green to red in the light emission effect is determined will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 191 (A), variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), at the first timing of light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 by the light emission effect, the light guide decoration of the second pattern 3102 b in white is performed on the light guide plate 3102. Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, the lower one of the four decorative bodies 3210 emits light, but the light emission color is white, which is the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102 . Then, as shown in FIG. 191C, although the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is extinguished for a short time (for example, less than 1 second), the decoration body 3210a that emits light in white is already The white light emission is maintained until the second timing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 191 (D), at the second timing of light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 by the light emission effect, the second pattern 3102 b is light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in green, and Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, the lower two decorative bodies 3210 a and 3210 b are increased to emit light, but the emission color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102 It emits light in green. Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (E), the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but a decorative body 3210 that emits light in green already, a decorative body For the 3210b, the green light emission is maintained until the third timing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 191F, when it is the third timing of light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 by the light emission effect, the light guide decoration of the second pattern 3102 b in red on the light guide plate 3102 is performed. Of the four decorative bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, the four decorative bodies 3210 a to 3210 d are increased to emit light, but the emission color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102 It emits light in a certain red color. Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (G), the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is extinguished for a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but a decorative body 3210 to a decorative body already emitting in red. As for 3210 d, as shown in FIG. 191 (H), the light emission in the red color is maintained until the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished.

  In the present embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated for light emission in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same light emission color as the light guide plate 3102 but at this time point the light guide plate A plurality of light emitters may be made to emit light in the emission color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 from the time of turning off the light emission decoration 3102. Even in such a case, after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the light emission color can be grasped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the light emission color of the decorative body 3210 is set to be different depending on the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission body 3210, and the light emission color with high expectation for the big hit Although it is indicated that the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 has been illuminated and decorated may be indicated among the three timings of emitting and decorating the light guide plate 3102. For example, at the first timing of light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect, the lower one decoration body 3210 a of the four decoration bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is emitted So that the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b emit light at the second timing, and the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c emit light at the third timing. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated to emit light at a predetermined timing three times by the light emission effect, but the light guide plate 3102 is decorated to emit light at the first timing but the light guide plate is arranged at the second and third timings. It is also possible to provide a pattern in which the light emitting plate 3102 is not light emitting and decorated, or a pattern in which the light guiding plate 3102 is light emitting and decorated at the first and second times but not the light guiding plate 3102 at the third time. In such a case, it is not possible to know how many times the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 continues by the light emission effect, and it can be noticed how many times the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed as the effect showing the big hit expectation for the variable display of the decorative symbol, but the first starting opening 2002 Or light emission using the light guide plate 3102 across a plurality of changes from when the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 (starting condition is satisfied) until variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by the entering the ball An effect may be performed. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (starting condition is satisfied), a predetermination command is transmitted from the main control substrate 1310, and in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the prior determination command When it is determined that the light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is to be performed or if it is determined that the light-emitting effect is to be performed based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the prior determination command, It may be configured to make a decision. In addition, in the light-emitting effect using such a light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated by emitting light at a predetermined timing among a plurality of times each of a plurality of changes, and the light guide plate is turned off The light emission of the plurality of light emitters may be continued with the light emission color immediately before 3102. In such a case, it can be expected to pay attention to how the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes until the light emission effect ends over a plurality of changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed on the upper side are caused to emit light to decorate the first pattern 3102a. However, when a failure or the like occurs and a plurality of LEDs stop emitting light, the light emitting decoration is not performed at the timing of light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102, and the big hit expectation shown by the light emitting color is grasped I can not In this respect, after the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is performed, since the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same light emitting color as the light guiding plate 3102, even if the light guide plate 3102 can not emit light decoration, A big hit expectation can be grasped | ascertained by the luminescent color of the decoration 3210.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred is executed with priority over other effects. For example, it is determined that a normal game is not performed, for example, when magnetism of a level that adsorbs the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a or a predetermined vibration (impact) to the game area 5a is detected. Then, the alert production is performed. In this respect, when an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing of light emission decoration by performing the light emission effect, the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 or the light emission of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is prioritized by giving priority to the warning effect. In the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 (before the end of the variation display of the decoration pattern), the light emission of the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 is started when the abnormality is eliminated. There is. As described above, even in the case where the warning effect is given priority over the light emission effect, the big hit expectation can be grasped by the light emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 after the abnormality removal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit expectation is suggested by the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emission colors of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 in light emission effect and history effect, but light emission effect and history effect The setting value may be suggested by the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 or the emission color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210. In such a configuration, for example, when the light emission color pattern is determined from the light emission color pattern table, the setting value is high in the order of white → green → blue → red as a result of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end. It should be set to indicate that. That is, as the high setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect, the light emission pattern in which the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 becomes red is executed, and as the low setting suggestion effect, the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is It suffices to execute a light emission pattern which becomes white. Thus, if the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 or the light emitting color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is set to the light emitting color that suggests that the setting value is high, the player can set the high setting value (setting value 6). Expectations can be raised.

[19. About the image effect similar to the light emission decoration of the light guide plate]
In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, the light guide plate 3102 not only emits light and decorates a predetermined pattern, but also guides light in the display area of the effect display device 1600. By displaying a design that is a visual recognition mode similar to the design to be lighted and decorated on the light plate 3102, it is possible to execute an imitation effect that makes it look as if there are a plurality of light guide plates. In this imitation effect, a pattern to be lighted and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 and a pattern to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally any pattern is displayed. The reach effect to be executed after that is different.

  Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (the starting condition is satisfied), the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the fluctuation pattern command is received in the command analysis process of step S601, the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern command, but the fluctuation pattern for executing the first reach effect is specified. In this case, a pattern to be lighted and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 and a pattern to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally the light guide plate 3102 is lighted and decorated By performing the effect, it is made to proceed to the first reach effect after that. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern for executing the second reach effect is specified, the pattern to be lighted and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. In this way, by performing an imitation effect that finally displays a pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second reach effect is subsequently advanced.

  In addition, the imitation effect mentioned above is performed during the usual fluctuation | variation before a reach is formed among the fluctuation display of a decoration symbol. Further, the first reach effect among the reach effects is set so that the big hit expectation is higher than the second reach effect. Thus, in the imitation effect during the normal fluctuation, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally decorated by emitting light, it proceeds to the first reach effect with a high expectation of the big hit, so the light guide plate 3102 is finally made the pattern It can be noticed whether or not to decorate the light.

  Next, the patterns displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 at the time of execution of the imitation effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 shows a pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 192 (A), the light guide plate 3102 in which the imitation effect is being executed has the second pattern 3102 b and the light emission decoration of the effect pattern in the periphery along with the characters “CHANCE!” In the center. . Note that it is possible to cause the light guide plate 3102 to emit light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102, thereby allowing the first pattern 3102a to emit light and decorate. It is possible to make the plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 disposed on the left side of the front view emit light and to make the second pattern 3102 b emit light, but the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102 In this case, only the light emission decoration of the second pattern 3102 b is used.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 192 (B), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during execution of the imitation effect, an imitation pattern 1600a, an effect pattern around the center portion together with the letters "LUCKY!" it's shown. In addition, it is possible to display a moving image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but during execution of the imitation effect, a still image is displayed like the imitation picture 1600a described above.

  In addition, the light guide plate 3102 emits and decorates the character "CHANCE!" As the second pattern 3102b, whereas the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the character "LUCKY!" As the imitation pattern 1600a. However, with regard to the characters of the imitation pattern 1600a, the thickness of the line, the type of font, and the size are the same as compared with the characters of the second pattern 3102b. As described above, in the imitation effect, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used because the character forms are the same.

  The light guide plate 3102 emits and decorates the effect pattern as the second pattern 3102 b, whereas the effect pattern is displayed as the imitation pattern 1600 a in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the imitation pattern 1600 a About the effect pattern which is a part, it is set as the same pattern as the effect pattern which is a part of 2nd pattern 3102b. As described above, in the imitation effect, since the effect pattern that is made common as a part of the pattern is displayed, it can be difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  Further, while the second pattern 3102 b is decorated with a plurality of LEDs to emit light in a single color on the light guide plate 3102, the imitation pattern 1600 a is similarly displayed in a single color in the display region of the effect display device 1600. Further, in the light guide plate 3102, when the second pattern 3102 b is decorated with light emission, the light emission decoration of the second pattern 3102 b is colored by the distance from the plurality of LEDs. It is displayed so as to produce shading in the pattern 1600a. In addition, when the second pattern 3102 b is light-emitting decorated on the light guide plate 3102, a black image without displaying any information is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area, a black image is displayed as the background image. As described above, in the imitation effect, it is difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used since the visual recognition mode of the pattern as a whole is the same.

  The light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is configured to be larger than the display area of the effect display device 1600. The area for emitting and decorating the second pattern 3102b in 3102 is substantially the same as the area for displaying the imitation picture 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, it is difficult to grasp which one of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used because the areas where the patterns are displayed are substantially the same.

  Further, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102 b emitting and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, but the display per time The time is the same for all. In addition, during execution of the imitation effect, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a, or around the light guide plate 3102 or the effect display device 1600. A complex effect of operating the provided members in a predetermined operation mode (for example, lighting of a lamp provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, operation of a movable member, etc.) is executed, but Even at the timing of displaying the picture of, the common effect is executed as the combined effect. However, at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3102b and the imitation pattern 1600a, the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are turned on, but the light emission color is turned on in different colors. May be As described above, in the imitation effect, there is no difference in the effect between the light emission decoration of the second pattern 3102 b on the light guide plate 3102 and the display of the imitation pattern 1600 a on the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can be made difficult to grasp which one of the light plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

  Next, a specific rendering example of the light guide plate 3102 and the rendering display device 1600 at the time of the imitation rendering will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 shows a specific example of effect by the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 at the time of executing the imitation effect.

  In FIG. 193, a fluctuation pattern for executing either chance reach effect as the first reach effect or lucky reach effect as the second reach effect is determined, and imitation effects are performed before those reach effects are performed. The case of execution will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 193 (A), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 193 (B), when the imitation effect is started, the light guide plate 3102 is used as the second pattern 3102 b, with the characters “CHANCE!” In the center and the effect pattern around it for a predetermined time ( For example, the light emission decoration is red in less than one second). Then, as shown in FIG. 193 (C), when the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the effect display device 1600 serves as the imitation pattern 1600a, along with the letters "LUCKY!" The effect pattern is displayed in blue around the periphery for a predetermined time (for example, less than one second). The display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the display time for emitting and decorating the second pattern 3102b on the light guide plate 3102.

  As described above, while the second pattern 3102 b is decorated with red light emission on the light guide plate 3102, the imitation pattern 1600 a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As described above, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are used for light emitting decoration of the second pattern 3102 b on the light guide plate 3102 and displaying the imitation pattern 1600 a on the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is difficult to grasp which of the two is used, but it is possible to grasp which of the second pattern 3102 b and the imitation pattern 1600 a is displayed from the display color.

  Also, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102 b emitting and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately repeated several times (for example, five times) Although it is displayed, after repeating a plurality of times, as shown in FIG. 193 (D), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and a black image without displaying any information is displayed. There is. Thereby, as a result of the imitation effect, attention may be paid to which one of the second pattern 3102 b lighted and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped. it can.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 193E, after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the second pattern 3102b is light-emitting decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102, the variation display of the decorative pattern is reached. As a reach effect corresponding to the second pattern 3102 b, the process proceeds to chance reach effect (first reach effect). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 193 (F), after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol After the reach is formed, the game proceeds to lucky reach effect (second reach effect) as reach effect corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a. In addition, the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 193 (F) is also the same as the display time for emitting and decorating the second pattern 3102b on the light guide plate 3102 in FIG. (For example, 3 seconds).

  In the present embodiment, characters and an effect pattern are displayed by the second pattern 3102 b illuminated and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is sufficient to display a pattern whose visual recognition mode is similar so as to coincide with the elements of, for example, a pattern of a character having a similar style of drawing or the like may be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, a second pattern 3102 b which is lighted and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 and an imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600; The first reach effect and the second effect are displayed without displaying either the second pattern 3102 b or the imitation pattern 1600 a after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600. You may set the pattern which does not advance any with reach production. In such a case, as a result of the imitation effect, more attention can be given to what result is notified after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the imitation effect, the second pattern of the second pattern 3102 b illuminated and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Although the light emission decoration of 3102b is started, you may set the pattern which starts from the display of the imitation pattern 1600a. Further, in the imitation effect, while the second pattern 3102b is decorated with red light emission on the light guide plate 3102, the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but any or all is displayed For color development, a pattern may be set to be executed with a different color. As described above, when imitation effect is performed with a display or color different from normal, the light emitting decoration is performed on the light guide plate 3102 by setting so that the big hit expectation for the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes high. Not only which of the second pattern 3102 b and the imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 stops, but also the effect contents can be noticed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of execution of the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102 b emitting and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. However, other than the imitation effect, the effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed. For example, as a production other than the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is caused to emit and embellish the second pattern 3102b without displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102 b is embellished in red on the light guide plate 3102 while the imitation pattern 1600 a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to such patterns, the second pattern 3102b is light-colored and decorated in blue on the light guide plate 3102 so as to reverse the coloring, while a pattern in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600 It is set. In these patterns, red is a color that indicates that the expectation for big hit is higher than that for blue, and for example, when the second pattern 3102 b is light-emitting decorated with red on the light guide plate 3102, it is a big hit than light emitting decoration in blue. In the case of notifying that the degree of expectation is high, and similarly displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it notifies that the degree of expectation of big hit is higher than displaying in blue. As described above, in the imitation effect, it is possible to display in blue and red for any pattern of the second pattern 3102 b and the imitation pattern 1600 a, so either of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 It can be difficult to figure out if you are using

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the imitation effect, the second pattern 3102 b emitting and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. By displaying one of the patterns in an orderly manner, it suggests the reach effect to be executed subsequently, but by performing the imitation effect as the setting suggestion effect described above, and finally displaying any one of the patterns , And may be configured to indicate a set value. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestive effect among the setting suggestive effects, the light guide plate 3102 is finally subjected to an imitation effect in which the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in red, and as a low setting suggestive effect, It is sufficient to execute an imitation effect in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As a result, when the second pattern 3102 b is light-emitting decorated with red on the light guide plate 3102 at the time of execution of the imitation effect, the player's expectation for the high setting value (setting value 6) can be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to cause the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 disposed on the upper side to emit light and to decorate the first pattern 3102a. However, it is possible to cause the plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 disposed on the left side of the front view to emit light and to decorate the second pattern 3102 b. The player can change the setting by operating the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the brightness of. That is, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be weak, the second pattern 3102 b lighted and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 has a dark display mode, whereas the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is strong. When set, the second pattern 3102 b illuminated and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode. Then, in the imitation effect, when the second pattern 3102 b lighted and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 is in the dark display mode, the imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in the dark display mode. On the other hand, when the second pattern 3102 b lighted and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 is in the bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600 a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in the bright display mode. As described above, in the imitation effect, the effect is performed such that the brightness corresponds to any of the second pattern 3102 b and the imitation pattern 1600 a, so either of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 It can be difficult to figure out if you are using In the brightness adjustment, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303, the setting of both the brightness of the plurality of LEDs on the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is changed. It is also good.

[20. Various commands related to sending and receiving of main control board]
Next, a part of various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 194 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIGS. 195 and 196 show continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 194. It is a table.

[20-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 194 to 196, status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  In addition, as for various commands, as shown in Figure 194-Figure 196, special figure 1 tuning production related, special figure 2 tuning production related, big hit related, power on, general drawing tuning production related, general electric part production related, notification indication , Status display, and others.

[20-1-1. Special figure 1 tune production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 194, it relates to the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. 1 consists of the commands named start of tuning effect, special symbol 1 specified, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and variable state specification. These various commands are assigned status "A * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number.) ("*" Is a specific hexadecimal number. , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is removed, a specific big hit, A non-specified big hit is designated, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command is an instruction to finish the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the fluctuation state designation command is to designate a gaming state. In addition, the gaming state includes a time saving state indicating that the time saving state, a probability changing state instructing the probability changing state, and a normal state instructing not the time saving state or the probability changing state. It is done.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and a special figure 1 tuning effect end command are provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1. Then, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special view tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special view 1 tuning effect end command, the main control MPU 1310a Select and send a command according to the stored setting value. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided by changing the modes of the special view tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special view tuning effect end command conventionally used. The set value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted, and the set value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 so that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is supposed to be.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, the special symbol 1 specification command is sent immediately after the special figure 1 tuning effect start, special figure 1 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol falling information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[20-1-2. Special figure 2 tune production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 194, the special display related to the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 2 consists of commands named start of tuning effect, special symbol 2 designated, and special figure 2 ending of tuning effect. For these various commands, "B * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 tuning effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern (fluctuating pattern) specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is removed, a specific big hit, A non-specified big hit is designated, and the special figure 2 tuning effect end command is an instruction to finish special figure 2 tuning effect.

  Also, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 tuning effect end command are pachinko machine 1 like the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect end command. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a special figure 2 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and a special figure 2 tuning effect end command, the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is provided. The command corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in is selected and transmitted. The special figure 2 tuning effect (the variation effect of the second special symbol based on entering the second start opening 2004) is mainly performed in a probability changing state and a time saving state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is pachinko by changing the modes of the special view 2 tuning effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special view 2 tuning effect end command conventionally used. The set value information of the machine 1 can be transmitted, and the set value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 even in the positive and negative states, and the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It is possible to grasp the setting value of.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special symbol 2 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 2 tuning effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[20-1-3. Jackpot related]
In the category of big hit related, as shown in FIG. 194, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N-th display, big winning opening 1 closed indication, big winning opening 1 count indication, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command instructs the big hit opening start, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command is starting during the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 15th rounds It is to instruct during opening or opening start, and the big winning opening 1 closing indication command instructs starting during large winning opening 1 closing between rounds (closing closing or closing starting between rounds of big winning opening 2005) The special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of balls of the game ball B having a count of 0 to 10 has been counted. The big hit ending command indicates the big hit ending start, and the big hit symbol display command is a big hit symbol. It is an indication of the broadcast display.

  Also, the small hit opening command instructs the small hit opening start, and the small hit open display command instructs the small hit open start (during the small hit, the opening or opening of the prize winning opening 2006). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium large winning opening winning combination staging (in the small hit, when the game ball B which entered the bonus winning opening 2006 is detected by the bonus winning opening sensor 2513 In the V pass command, the game ball B that has won the prize winning opening in the V winning opening winning presentation (small winning hit in the small hit in the first 2006 winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008) The small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending. In addition, the V passing command corresponding to each of the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (first V winning opening command when the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening 2007, second) A second V winning opening command may be provided when the gaming ball B is detected by the V winning opening 2008.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is at the big winning opening 1 opening of the first to fifteenth rounds (big winning opening 2005 The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted at the opening of the Nth round), and the special winning opening 1 count display command is transmitting at the closing of the special winning opening 1 (when the closing of the special winning opening 2005). Sent when winning opening 1 is open and when count change to big winning opening 1 (when opening big winning opening 2005 and when game ball B entered the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403) The big hit ending command is transmitted at the start of the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is when the big winning opening is open (when the big winning opening 2005 is open It is sent to.

  Also, the small hit opening command is sent at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is sent at the small hit open (when the prize winning opening 2006 is opened at the small hit), and the small hit count display The command is transmitted at the time of small hit medium large winning a prize winnings (when small game ball B entering the prize winning hole 2006 during the small hitting is detected by the prize winning point sensor 2513), the small hitting ending command Is sent at the beginning of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[20-1-4. Power on]
In the power-on category, as shown in FIG. 195, names of power-on state, power-on main control return destination, setting key ON operation command, setting key OFF operation command, setting change command, error display command It consists of commands. These various commands are assigned status "D * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number.) ("*" Is a specific hexadecimal number. , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command includes the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 195 at power-on (including power-on and power-on recovery as well as power on and power failure). Information that indicates that the RAM clear is performed when the RAM clear switch 1310 f is operated, and also when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power outage In the above, the information indicating which of the normal state, the short time state, and the positive change state is to be returned, and the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  In addition, for example, when creating a so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type, the model code of the pachinko machine is for which copyright of the work, which game specification (for example, probability variation When it occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is specified whether the specification (so-called ST machine or the like), or whether there is a plurality of setting values of the pachinko machine or only one setting value. In other words, the information of the model code of the pachinko machine is a series code for identifying which type among max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. In addition to the game code of the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs, the probability fluctuation with the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited. The game specification code is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine) or the like, and a setting value code indicating whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is one or more.

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2412 and information instructing the driving state of the attachment solenoid 2414 and the prize winning opening solenoid 2512.

  The ON operation command of the setting key instructs to confirm the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the control internal RAM, and the OFF operation command of the setting key is of the main control internal RAM. It indicates that the confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area is completed.

  The setting change command indicates that the setting value changed and the setting value have been changed. In this example, setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by changing the mode of the setting change command, and on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the pachinko is changed by the received setting change command. The set value of the machine 1 can be grasped. The setting change command may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on regardless of the change of the setting value, or if the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on, the current setting value A setting notification command may be sent to indicate. As a result, whenever the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the latest set value.

  The error display command indicates that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  The transmission timing with these commands is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, it also includes power restoration when power failure occurs due to power failure or momentary power failure). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when returning from a power failure or momentary interruption, the main control built-in RAM is transmitted by the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side game control main processing. It is stored in the information storage area, and the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-5. General drawing tuning production related]
The regular drawing tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401. In that category, as shown in FIG. 195, the regular drawing tuning effect related to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started , It is composed of a command named "general symbol designation", "general drawing synchronization effect end", and "changed state designation". These various commands are assigned status "E * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The common drawing synchronization effect start command (common drawing fluctuation pattern command) is an instruction to start the common drawing synchronization effect with the presentation pattern (common drawing fluctuation pattern) specified in the mode, and the common pattern designation command is out of phase, specified A big hit, a non-specified big hit is designated, a common figure tuning effect end command is a command of ending the common figure tuning effect, and a variation state designation command is a command indicating a gaming state. In addition, as described above, the gaming state is configured of a time saving state instructing that the time saving state is made, and a normal state instructing that the time saving state is not made.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, a common figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of normal symbol variation start, a common pattern designation command is transmitted immediately after the common pattern synchronization effect start, and the common pattern synchronization effect end command is It is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is determined), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[20-1-6. Regular Drama Director Related]
The regular electric rendition related is related to the second start opening door 2411 which is advanced and retracted by driving the start opening solenoid 2412, and in that category, as shown in FIG. And it consists of a command named Ending per popular map. These various commands are assigned status "F * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per drawing is an instruction to start the opening per drawing, and the release command for general release is started during the opening of the power (the second start opening door 2411 protrudes forward by driving the start opening solenoid 2412 And an end command per common figure indicates a start of ending per common figure.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is used when the common power is open (the second start opening door 2411 drives the start opening solenoid 2412 (When projecting forward), and the ending command per common figure is transmitted at the beginning of the ending per common figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[20-1-10. Other]
The other divisions, as shown in FIG. 196, are starting opening winnings, designation of fluctuation shortening operation termination, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, special symbol type pre-reading, fluctuation pattern pre-reading 1, fluctuation pattern pre-reading 2, fluctuation pattern It is comprised of commands of names such as pre-reading 3, fluctuation pattern pre-reading 4, fluctuation pattern pre-reading 5, fluctuation pattern pre-reading 6, normal winning a prize winning, and normal symbol storage. These various commands are assigned status "9 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The starting opening winning combination command is for instructing the start opening starting winning effect start, the start of the effect when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 And the start of the effect when the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the variation shortening operation end designation command , To indicate the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state, the special symbol 1 memory command is a special symbol 1 suspension 0 to 4 (the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002) The first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) not yet used for the variable display of special symbols, and the special symbol 2 memory command is a special symbol Hold 0 to 4 (The game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 and the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of special symbols on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (the number of held)) The special symbol type pre-reading command is used to pre-read the special symbol 1 hold before it is used for the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. The first special symbol display based on the display results (disappeared symbol, big hit symbol) and before special symbol 2 suspension is used for the variation display of the special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, read ahead The second special symbol display based on the special symbol 2 suspension is used to designate the display result (small hit symbol, big hit symbol), respectively.

  Also, before the variation pattern pre-reading command 1 to variation pattern pre-reading command 6 is used for the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the special symbol 1 suspension is pre-readed and its special symbol (1) The variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol based on suspension and the special symbol 2 suspension is read ahead before it is used for the variation display of the special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 The fluctuation pattern pre-reading command 1 is a command according to the setting value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, and the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command 2 is used to designate the fluctuation pattern used in the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the symbol 2 suspension. Is a command corresponding to the setting value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, and the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command 3 corresponds to the setting value 3 of the pachinko machine 1 The fluctuation pattern prefetch command 4 is a command corresponding to the setting value 4 of the pachinko machine 1, and the fluctuation pattern prefetch command 5 is a command corresponding to the setting value 5 of the pachinko machine 1. The fluctuation pattern prefetch command 6 Is a command corresponding to the setting value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the command including the setting value information of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 1 (special figure 1 tuning effect start command, special figure 1 tuning effect end command, special figure 2 tuning effect start command, special figure 2 tuning effect end command, setting change command Is an example, and other commands may be provided for each set value.

  In addition, the normal winning a prize opening winning command, is the acceptance indication of game ball B to normal winning a prize opening 2003, normal symbol memory command, normal pattern retention 0-4 (normally game winning a prize opening 2003 gaming ball B accepted In the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the number of balls (reserved number) not used in the variable display of the normal symbol is transmitted.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the starting opening winning combination (when the starting opening winning a prize command (the first starting opening sensor 3002 When the game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, the main center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main frame speaker 622 mainly indicate by voice Is sent to notify that the variation shortening operation termination designation command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the suspension suspension period) after the variation is settled that has settled the prescribed number of variations shortening, and the special symbol 1 storage command is Special symbol 1 operation pending ball number change (When the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 and the number of pending increases, or the special symbol with the first special symbol indicator from the number of pending) The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of reserved items decreases by using variable display, and special symbol 2 operation pending ball number change (game ball B enters the second starting opening 2004 and is suspended) When the number is increased, or when the number of reservations is reduced by using the second special symbol display to change the special symbol display and the number of reservations decreases), the special symbol type pre-reading command is the special symbol 1, 1 (2) Transmitted when the operation ball number increases (when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and the number of holdings increases), the variation pattern pre-reading command is a special symbol type pre-reading command Sent immediately after sending Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  In addition, the normal winning a prize opening winning command is transmitted when the game ball B is accepted to the normal winning a prize opening 2003, the normal symbol memory command, when normal symbol operation retention ball number change (generally game winning a prize opening 2003 gaming sphere B is accepted It is transmitted when the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the normal symbol display for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol from the number of reservations. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is the time of starting opening winning (when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or the second starting Based on the detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402, when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2004), the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main frame speaker 622 notify that mainly by voice However, how the peripheral control board 1510 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specification of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to audio notification from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622, the specification is also used for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. is there. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, even if the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 do not notify by voice. is there.

[21. Setting information error notification]
Next, processing to notify when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal based on the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 among various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 described above Will be explained. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing a procedure of setting information determination processing executed when a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the received command analysis processing (step S1022).

  When the setting information determination process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether a setting abnormality notification flag described later is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is a flag that is set when the setting value abnormality is notified. If the setting abnormality notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that the setting value abnormality is notified, and the process proceeds to step S1507. If the setting abnormality notification flag is not set in step S1500, the setting value abnormality is And the process proceeds to step S1501.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the received command is the setting change command (step S1501), and if the setting change command is received, the pachinko machine indicated by the setting change command The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the setting information storage area based on the setting value information of 1 (step S1502), and the process ends. As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 set at the time of power on is stored in the setting information storage area, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

  In addition, when the received command is not the above setting change command (in this example, special figure 1 tuning effect start command, special figure 1 tuning effect end command, special figure 2 tuning effect start command, special figure 2 tuning effect end command, fluctuation pattern In the case of receiving the prefetch command 1 to the variation pattern prefetch command 6), the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502. (Step S1504) If it does not match, it reports that an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information (step S1504), and a setting abnormality notification flag indicating that an abnormality notification of the setting value information is in progress. Then, the process ends (step S1505).

  If it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, that is, when notification of abnormality of the setting value information is in progress, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command is set in step 1502 It is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the information storage area matches (step S1507), and if not, abnormality notification of the setting value information is continued.

  On the other hand, if the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step 1502, the notification of abnormality of the setting value information is ended (step S1508) The setting abnormality notification flag is reset, and the process ends (step S1509).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is set on the peripheral control board 1510 side. If there is an abnormality in the set value information indicated by the command including the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 to be grasped, specifically, normal processing (set value change processing) has not been performed. Regardless of this, when the setting value is changed, it is determined that an error or injustice has occurred, and processing to notify that effect is executed. In addition, a game progresses also during abnormality alerting | reporting of setting value information, and a fluctuation display etc. are performed in the effect display apparatus 1600. FIG. Therefore, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is performed so as not to disturb the execution of the fluctuation effect performed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, control to display “setting error!” Or the like in a region not overlapping the fluctuation effect performed in the effect display device 1600, and to enable visual recognition of the fluctuation effect executed in the effect display device 1600 Control to display "setting error!" Etc. semi-transparently in the area overlapping with the fluctuation effect, control to sound out "setting error has occurred." From the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 and body frame speaker 622, game A lamp, an LED and the like provided on the panel 5 and the door frame 3 are combined and executed with one or more controls of light emission control and the like in a predetermined mode (for example, flashing red).

  When there is an abnormality in the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the notification of the abnormality of the setting value information is not performed, or the abnormality notification of the setting value information is performed. At the same time, the effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 described later is not executed, and when the effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is performed, the execution of this effect is stopped You may That is, a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 may be affected by noise or the like to change the setting value information indicated by this command to an abnormal value, or the peripheral control board 1510 Setting of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area is changed to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise or the like. If there is an abnormality in the consistency between the value information and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect that indicates the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is reliable for this effect descend. Therefore, in such a case, the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may not be performed, and if it is in execution, the decrease in reliability may be suppressed by stopping this effect. .

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether or not an abnormality occurs in the set value information, and in this case, the game is stopped when the abnormality occurs in the set value information. You may For example, when the set value is changed in the set value changing process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in a reference area different from the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Also stores the changed setting values, and for setting values and reference values stored in the setting value dedicated area at an arbitrary timing (for example, the timing to transmit the special figure 1 tuning effect start command or the special figure 2 tuning effect start command) It may be determined whether or not the setting value stored in the area matches, and if it is determined that the setting value does not match, the game may be stopped to notify the abnormality of the setting value information.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after the abnormality notification of the setting value information is started, when the abnormality is eliminated, the game clerk automatically ends the notification of the setting value information without any operation. Therefore, when the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like and the setting value information is changed to an abnormal value, it is stored in the setting information storage area. If a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state after starting notification of abnormality of the setting value information by not matching the setting value information, the setting is immediately made. Abnormal notification of value information can be ended.

  In the above example, when the setting change process changes the setting value, a setting change command indicating the setting value changed is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value instructed by the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side. Is configured to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information according to whether or not the stored setting value is matched, but whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information The method of determining the condition is not limited to this. For example, when a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, setting indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 received previously and the setting value information indicated by the command It may be determined whether or not the values match, and when the values do not match, notification of abnormality of the setting value information may be performed. In this case, when the setting change command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received based on the change of the setting value, notification of abnormality of the setting value information may not be performed.

  In addition, a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 multiple times in relation to the fluctuation effect, and when at least a part of the commands does not match, notification of abnormality of the setting value information You may do so. Specifically, it is indicated by the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the special view 1 tuning effect start command and the special view 2 tuning effect start command, the special view 1 tuning effect end command, and the special view 2 tuning effect end command It may be determined whether or not the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 matches, and when it does not match, notification of abnormality of the set value information may be performed.

  Further, in the above-mentioned example, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command, the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, and the fluctuation pattern prereading command are setting values of the pachinko machine 1 Although what is provided for each is shown, if the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is notified from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The command to notify is provided separately from the special figure 1 tuning effect start command, special figure 1 tuning effect end command, special figure 2 tuning effect start command, special figure 2 tuning effect end command, and fluctuation pattern look-up command, and the main control Whenever a command is sent from the substrate 1310 to the peripheral control substrate 1510, or when a specific command is sent, Command for notifying the setting information of the Nko machine 1 also may be transmitted. For example, a setting notification command 1 to setting notification command 6 for notifying setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is provided, and a setting notification command according to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 at an arbitrary timing from the main control board 1310 (setting value 1 If it is the setting notification command 1, if the setting value 2, the setting notification command 2... If the setting value 6, the setting notification command 6) may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to change the command design for each model (one with a plurality of set values and one with a single set value), and it is possible to save the design effort.

  Further, in this case, a command (for example, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command) involved in the effect (special figure tuning effect, hold notification effect described later, etc.) executed by the effect display device 1600, Not only at the time of transmission of the special figure 2 tuning effect start command, the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, fluctuation pattern look-up command, etc., but a command not related to the effect executed by the effect display device 1600 When sending), the command to notify the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is also sent and the consistency between the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 It may be determined whether or not there is an abnormality. With such a configuration, it can be frequently determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal. Accuracy can be further improved.

[22. Hold notice effect]
Next, the on-hold notice effect will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the number of first reserved memories changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, a command for instructing the first number of reserved memories (first reserved Based on the fact that the game ball B enters the second start port 2004, the number designating command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600. When the second pending storage number changes, a command (second pending number specification command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1)) instructing the second pending storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 The second hold storage number is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 When the special symbol type pre-reading command and the variation pattern pre-reading command are received from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the special symbol type pre-reading command and the variation pattern pre-reading command The display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special lottery result for which the start of the suggestion is held based on the above is changed to the special drawing result It is possible to execute a reserve announcement effect that suggests a big hit expectation at the time of the execution of the suggestion of.

  In this example, the first pending storage number instructed by the first pending number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second pending storage number instructed by the second pending number storage command, the variation pattern prefetch command, and the special Peripheral control board 1510 according to each of the prior determination information (lost, small hit, big hit, etc., and may also notify the type of big hit such as probability variation big hit or normal big hit etc.) instructed by the symbol type pre-reading command. Is provided with a hold notice determination table for determining the presence or absence of the hold notice and the hold notice pattern type when executing the hold notice.

  Then, the decision to execute the hold notification is made, and the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d and the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the hold notification pattern type to be executed is determined are different from normal. It is displayed in a display mode (in this example, a display color different from normal). In this example, normally, the first holding memory 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a are displayed in white which is the basic color, and when the holding notice is executed, the display is made in blue, green, red, or ladybug Do. In addition, the display modes of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a are set so that the jackpot expectation degree becomes high in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern.

  In addition, when the lottery result is identified as the big hit as the pre-judgment information, the pending notice pattern to be a high hit expected aspect (for example, red or ladybug pattern) is determined with high probability as the final pending display mode. When the lottery result specifies a loss result as the judgment information, the final notice is made by determining the preliminary notice pattern with a low probability (for example, blue) with a low probability of big hit as a final aspect of the preliminary display. When an aspect with a high hit probability is displayed as an aspect, the player's expectation for the jackpot gaming state is increased.

  In addition, every time the indication of the special lottery result (variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol)) is performed during execution of the suspension announcement effect in the suspension announcement pattern (every time the suspension is digested), the demonstration display It is set how the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a displayed on the device 1600 changes. In addition, the display mode of the first holding storage 1700a to 1700d and the second holding storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is reverse to the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern in the holding notice pattern It is set so as not to change in order (that is, the big hit expectation does not decrease), and the suggestion of the special lottery result (variation display of the decoration symbol (variation display of special symbol)) is performed (pending is digested The display mode of the first holding memory 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the big hit expectation mode is high. Is set as. For this reason, even if the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d or the second hold storage 1701a is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low degree of big hit expectation, the suggestion of the special lottery result which is the target of the hold notice Until it is done, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display changes to a mode with a high hit probability, and the mode of the hold display can be watched with expectation to the end.

  In addition, it is not necessary to change in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern after displaying the first reserve memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserve memory 1701a in white (basic color) in the reserve notice pattern, Starting from the display mode in the middle (for example, based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the first holding memory 1700c is displayed in red based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002) ), Change to the next display mode without going through the display mode in the middle (for example, when the first reserve memory 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the special lottery result is finished and the next special lottery result When moving the first holding storage 1700d to the first holding storage 1700c in response to the start of (1), it changes from white to a ladybug pattern). For this reason, even if the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a changes little (the number of holdings), the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and The second reserve storage 1701a can be displayed. Moreover, even if the first holding storage 1700a to 1700d and the second holding storage 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low level of jackpot expectation, it can not be predicted which display mode will change to the next. With respect to the display modes of the retention memories 1700a to 1700d and the second retention memory 1701a, attention can be paid to the end with expectation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the first holding memory 1700a to 1700d or the second holding memory 1701a is different from the above-mentioned holding notice together with the holding notice effect indicating the big hit expectation mentioned above By changing to, it is possible to execute a setting value retention suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

  In this example, according to the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the presence / absence of setting value holding indication effect and setting value holding indication effect And a setting value hold indication determination table for determining a setting value hold indication pattern type in the case of Then, while the determination to execute the setting value suspension suggestion effect is performed, and the setting value suspension indication pattern type to be executed is determined, the first suspension storage 1700 a to 1700 d or the second suspension storage 1701 a displayed on the effect display device 1600 Is displayed in an unusual display mode (in this example, an unusual shape).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 198 (A), normally, the first holding storage 1700a to 1700d and the second holding storage 1701a are displayed as circles having a basic shape, and the setting value holding suggestion effect is executed. It is displayed as a square shown in the first storage 1700c of FIG. 198 (B), a triangle shown in 1700c of FIG. 198 (C), or a star shown in 1701a of FIG. 198 (D). Further, in the display modes of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a, the expectation for the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 (the degree of expectation for the high setting value) becomes high in the order of circle → square → triangle → star Is set as.

  In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6 based on the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, the setting value holding becomes an aspect (for example, a star) with high expectation to the high setting value as a final holding indication aspect. A setting value that indicates an aspect (for example, triangle) with which the expectation for the high setting value is medium as a final suspension display mode when the suggestion pattern is determined with high probability and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4 Setting value that becomes the mode (for example, a square) with the lowest degree of expectation for high setting value as the mode of final holding display when the setting for holding suggestion pattern is determined with high probability and the setting value of pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2. By determining the pending suggestion pattern with high probability, when the high pending value is displayed as the final pending indication mode, the high suggested value is used. Player's expectations is adapted to increase that.

  In addition, every time the indication of the special lottery result (variation display of the decorative symbol (variation display of the special symbol)) is performed during execution of the setting value suspension indication effect in the setting value retention indication pattern (every time the suspension is digested) And how the display modes of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 change. In the setting value hold suggestion pattern, the display modes of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are in the reverse order of the order of circle → square → triangle → star It is set so as not to change (that is, the expectation for the high setting value does not decrease), and the suggestion of the special lottery result (variation display of the decoration symbol (variation display of the special symbol)) is performed (hold is digested Each time the display mode of the first holding storage 1700a to 1700d and the second holding storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the expectation for the high setting value It is set to be a high aspect. Therefore, even if the first holding storage 1700a to 1700d or the second holding storage 1701a is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which the degree of expectation for the high setting value is low, the special for which the setting value holding suggestion effect is to be executed Until the suggestion of the lottery result is started, there is a possibility that the mode of the hold display changes to a mode with high expectation for the high setting value, and the form of the hold display is expected to pay attention to the end it can.

  Moreover, it is not necessary to change the order of squares → triangles → stars after displaying the first reserve memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserve memories 1701a in a circle (basic shape) in the setting value reserve indication pattern, but it is not Start from the display mode (for example, the first storage memory 1700d is displayed as a square based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002), It changes to the next display mode without going through the display mode on the way (for example, when displaying the first reserve memory 1700d as a square, the suggestion of the special lottery result is finished and the start of the next special lottery result) Are also set to change from squares to stars when moving the first holding storage 1700d to the first holding storage 1700c. For this reason, even if the opportunity (number of reservations) in which the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a changes is small, the first holding memories 1700a It is possible to display 1700d and the second holding storage 1701a. In addition, even if the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for the high setting value, it can not be predicted which display mode is to be changed next. , And the display modes of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a can be watched with expectation to the end.

  In addition, since the above-mentioned suspension notice pattern of the suspension announcement effect and the setting value suspension indication pattern of the setting value suspension suggestion effect are determined separately, the first displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the suspension announcement pattern of suspension announcement effect While changing the display mode of the one pending storage 1700a to 1700d and the second pending storage 1701a to a mode with high expectation to the high setting value, it is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the setting value retention indication pattern of setting value retention indication effect Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notification pattern of the hold notification effect when the display mode of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a is changed to a mode with high expectation for the high setting value. The display mode of the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d or the second pending storage 1701a to the high setting value While changing to a mode with a high degree of waiting, the display mode of the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the setting value hold indication pattern of the setting value hold indication effect is maintained In the case where the display mode of the first hold storage 1700a to 1700d or the second hold storage 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect is maintained and the setting value hold suggestion effect setting is made There are cases where the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the value holding suggestion pattern is changed to a mode with high expectation to the high setting value.

  For example, when the display mode of the hold notification effect is “white” and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is “circle”, the first hold storage 1700 a to 1700 d or the second displayed on the effect display device 1600 is digested. When moving the second hold memory 1701a, change the display mode "white" of the hold preview effect to "red" and change the display mode "round" of the setting value hold suggestion effect to "square" (color and shape The first hold memory 1700a is displayed on the effect display device 1600 where the hold is digested when the display mode of the hold preview effect is “red” and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is “circle”. While maintaining ~ 1700 d and the second reserve memory 1701a without changing the display mode "red" of the hold notice effect, while changing the display mode "circle" of the set value hold indication effect to "square" If the display mode of the hold notification effect is “white” and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect is “triangle”, the hold is digested and displayed on the effect display device 1600 While changing the display mode "white" of the hold notification effect to "blue" when moving the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d or the second hold memory 1701a, the display mode "triangle" of the setting value hold suggestion effect May be maintained without changing (changing the color and maintaining the shape).

  That is, in this example, the determination process of the suspension notice pattern of the suspension notice effect and the determination process of the setting value suspension suggestion pattern of the setting value suspension suggestion effect are separately performed, and the special lottery result is suggested based on each change pattern ( Display of the first holding memory 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (the fluctuation display of the special symbol) is performed (every time the suspension is digested) It is intended to maintain the aspect (do not change the display aspect) or to change the aspect to a high expectation for the high setting value.

  In addition, the final display mode of the suspension announcement effect and the setting value suspension suggestion effect is determined separately, and a change scenario of the display mode of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a according to the determination result is shown. Any one of a plurality of change patterns may be executed.

  In addition, the start timing of the setting value retention suggestion effect (the timing at which the display mode is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode) is based on the fact that the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Not only the timing at which the retention memory 1700a to 1700d or the second retention memory 1701a is displayed, but also the timing after that (at the timing after displaying in the basic shape, for example, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts) In response, the first pending storage 1700b-d is also started, etc.) when it is moved to the first pending storage 1700a-c. As a result, even if the setting value hold suggestion effect is not executed, the first hold memories 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a can be watched with expectation to the end.

  The execution frequency of the setting value hold indication effect is set to be lower than that of the hold notification effect. That is, the on-hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, and the content of the on-off notice effect is reset when the special lottery result is suggested based on the on-off lottery result based on the on-hold memory executing the on-hold notice effect. In contrast to this, the content of the set value hold indication effect continues without being reset until the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, so the execution frequency of the set value hold indication effect is lower than in the hold notification effect The setting prevents the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

  In addition, as shown in the first hold storage 1700c of FIG. 198 (A) and FIG. 198 (B) and the second hold storage 1701a of FIG. 198 (D), the setting value hold suggestion effect is executed simultaneously with the above hold notice effect While there is a case, as shown in the first holding memory 1700c of FIG. 198 (C), the setting value holding suggestion effect may be executed independently. Note that the change notice pattern of the setting value hold indication effect may be included in the hold notice pattern, and in this case, it may be provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1 as a hold notice determination table.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of image data combining the display mode of the suspension notice effect described above and the display mode of the setting value suspension suggestion effect as shown in FIG. The target pending storage is displayed based on the image data according to both the pattern and the setting value retention suggestion pattern of the setting value retention suggestion effect. That is, after determining the color as the display mode of the suspension notice effect of the target storage and the shape as the display mode of the setting value suspension suggestion effect, a display mode combining these is generated, and this synthesized display mode Is displayed as pending storage.

  Specifically, in the example of FIG. 199 (A) in which only the hold notification effect is executed and the hold storage in which the set value hold suggestion effect is not displayed is displayed, the first hold memory 1700a, 1700b The first reserve storage 1700 c is displayed based on the “composite pattern blue 1” image data. In addition, in the example of FIG. 199 (B) in which the pending storage is executed in which both the pending advance presentation effect and the setting value pending suggestion effect are executed, the first pending storage 1700a and 1700b are image data of “composite pattern white 1”. , And the first holding storage 1700 c is displayed based on the image data of “composite pattern blue 2”. Further, in the example of FIG. 199 (C) in which each of the pending storage in which only the pending advance presentation effect is executed and the pending storage in which only the setting value retention suggestion effect is executed is displayed, The first holding storage 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern white 1" and the first holding storage 1700c is based on the image data of "composite pattern white 3". Is displayed.

  Further, also in the second hold storage 1701a, a hold notice effect and a setting value hold indication effect are executed, and a hold memory in which both the hold notice effect and the setting value hold indication effect are executed is displayed (D). In the example of, the second holding storage 1701a is displayed based on the image data of “composite pattern red 4”.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pawnko machine 1 and the suspension notice effect suggesting the big hit expectation by controlling the display of the first reserve memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserve memory 1701a in a mode different from normal. It is possible to execute a setting value holding indication effect that suggests a setting value. Note that, while the on-hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, the setting value on-hold indication effect is not based on the prior determination information. That is, while the hold notification effect can be executed by acquiring the reserved special lottery result in advance, the set value hold indication effect can be executed without acquiring the suspended special lottery result in advance. is there.

  In addition, it is not limited to what displays the special lottery result on which the start of suggestion is suspended as the first suspension storage 1700a to 1700d or the second suspension storage 1701a on the effect display device 1600, and a special lottery in which the suggestion is under execution The pending storage corresponding to the result may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a pending storage. In this case, it may be possible to display the final display mode in the hold notification effect or the setting value hold indication effect in the hold memory during execution, and by thus configuring, the suggestion of the special lottery result is made. It is possible to have expectation for a big hit or a high set value by focusing attention to the on-hold notice effect and the setting value on-hold indication effect until the time of execution, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in amusement for the game.

  In the example described above, the display color of the suspension memory is changed as the display mode of the suspension notice effect, and the shape of the suspension memory is changed as the display mode of the setting value suspension suggestion effect. It is not limited to the one described above as long as it can be determined that it is being executed. For example, the display color of the suspension notice effect is changed as the display mode of the suspension notice effect, and the value according to the setting value suggested without changing the shape of the pending memory as the display mode of the setting value suspension suggestion effect Additional information such as effect modes (glimmering effects and effects of fire) and the like may be displayed in association with the pending storage.

  Also, when displaying the first storage 1700a to 1700d based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002, or based on the game ball B entering the second starting opening 2004 second When displaying the pending storage 1701a, when updating the first pending storage 1700a to 1700d or the second pending storage 1701a based on the pending being digested (the first pending storage 1700b to 1700d is displayed as the first pending storage 1700a to The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested by outputting a sound when moving to 1700c or moving the first holding storage 1700a and the second holding storage 1701a to a holding storage during execution). . For example, when suggesting that the setting value is “1”, an effect sound (for example, “pi”) corresponding to the setting value “1” among a plurality of types of sound effects is output, and the setting value is “2” To indicate that the sound effect (for example, "pipi") according to the set value "2" among a plurality of types of sound effects, ... suggest that the set value is "5" In the case of a plurality of types of sound effects, a sound effect corresponding to the set value "5" (for example, "pipi pi pi pi") is output, and when it is suggested that the set value is "6", a plurality of types of effects It is also possible to output a sound effect (for example, “Pampa Capang”) corresponding to the setting value “6” among sounds.

  In addition, when the on-hold notice effect or the setting value on-hold indication effect is executed, the setting of the big hit expectation or the pachinko machine 1 according to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 A value may be suggested, and in this case, after displaying on the effect display device 1600 an operation instruction image for instructing the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 According to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300, the big hit expectation or the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested. In addition, the operation instruction image may be made common to the case of maintaining the jackpot expectation degree or the suggested setting value and the case of further increasing the jackpot expectation degree or the suggested setting value, whereby the on-hold notice effect or the setting value It can not be determined whether the jackpot expected degree or the suggested setting value is enhanced by the effect (effect of displaying the operation instruction image) which is a precursor to the execution of the hold indication effect, and the rotation of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be actively operated.

  In addition, it may be possible to select the presence / absence of the on-hold notice effect and the presence / absence of the setting value on-off indication effect during the demonstration (demonstration effect to be performed in the player waiting state). As a result, it is possible to execute effects suitable for the player's preference, and hold announcement effect or setting value hold indication effect is executed even for the player who does not want to suggest the big hit expectation or the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 etc. It can be suppressed that the jackpot expectation degree and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 are suggested.

  In addition, an explanation (such as an aspect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and not an aspect that suggests the big hit expectation degree) will be demonstrated (the player will be in the waiting state). (Demonstration effect) which is to be performed or when the suggestion of the special lottery result is executed (during the display of the variation of the decoration symbol). As a result, when the setting value retention suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation from being mistaken as the jackpot expectation and improving the jackpot expectation.

  In addition, during execution of the time saving state or the probability changing state, the prior determination indicated by the variation pattern pre-reading command and the special symbol type pre-reading command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 Prior determination indicated by the variation pattern look-ahead command and the special symbol type look-ahead command sent from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 without executing the hold notice effect based on the information It may be possible to execute only on-hold notice effect based on information. In addition, setting values are held in relation to the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the ball entry of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 even during execution of the time saving state or the definite variation state. You may make it perform suggestion production. As a result, even when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 during the time saving state or the probability changing state, it is possible to have an expectation for the setting value retention suggestion effect.

[23. Set value continuous suggestion effect]
Next, setting value continuous suggestion production is explained. In this example, setting value continuous suggestive effects can be executed that suggest setting values of the pachinko machine 1 over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not limited to what is executed once for one variation display of a special symbol, but is executed a plurality of times for one variation display of a special symbol (so-called pseudo continuous) Fluctuation).

  In this example, according to the special figure 1 tuning effect start command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the special figure 2 tuning effect start command, the peripheral control board 1510 suggests setting values continuously. There is provided a setting value continuous suggestive effect table for determining a setting value continuous suggestive effect pattern type when presence or absence of effect and setting value continuous suggestive effect is executed. Then, when the determination to execute the setting value continuous suggestion effect is performed and the setting value continuous suggestive effect pattern type to be executed is determined, the setting value is displayed every time the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the effect display device 1600. According to the above, one of the plurality of setting suggestion characters 1702 having different display modes is caused to appear.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 200 (A), when variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600, “1” is drawn on the head as a setting suggestion character 1702 according to the setting value 1. The set suggestion character 1702 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 200 (C), when the next variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600, "3" is drawn on the head as a setting suggestion character 1702 according to the setting value 3. When the next variation display of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 200 (E), the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed as the setting suggestion character 1702 according to the setting value 4. A setting suggestion character 1702 with “4” drawn on its head is exposed.

  In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as "6" based on the special figure 1 tuning effect start command and the special figure 2 tuning effect start command, the setting indication for the setting value "6" as a final mode A setting value continuous suggestive effect pattern to be the character 1702 is determined with high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1, setting indication character 1702 according to the setting value “1” is set as the final mode When the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the high setting value is displayed as the mode of the final setting suggestion character 1702 by determining the value continuous suggestive effect pattern with high probability, the player's expectation for the high setting value The degree is getting higher.

In addition, in the setting value continuous indication effect pattern, the display mode of the setting indication character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed each time the variation display of the decorative symbol is started while the setting value continuous indication effect is being executed. The change to is set. In the setting value continuous indication effect pattern, the display mode of the setting indication character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 ( That is, the degree of expectation for the high setting value is not lowered), and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained each time the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. (The display mode does not change) or the mode according to the high setting value is set. Therefore, even if the setting indication character 1702 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the display mode corresponding to the low setting value, the setting indication character 1702 has a high setting value until the setting value continuation suggestion effect ends. There is a possibility of changing to the aspect according to, and the aspect of the setting suggestion character 1702 can be noticed with expectation to the end.

  In addition, it is not necessary to change in the order of 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 after displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 in the mode according to the setting value “1” in the setting value continuous suggestion effect pattern, and it is not Start from the display mode (for example, start the setting value continuous suggestion effect and display the setting suggestion character 1702 as the setting value “2” first), and change to the next display mode without passing through the intermediate display mode (Eg, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value “2” is displayed, the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to “4” is displayed according to the start of the next variable display of the decorative symbol. It is also set to let out. For this reason, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in a display style according to the low setting value, it can not be predicted which display mode will change to next, and the display style of the setting suggestion character 1702 It can be made to pay attention with hope to the end.

  In addition, the execution frequency of setting value continuation suggestion production is set up low compared with on-hold notice production like the above-mentioned setting value retention indication production. That is, the on-hold notice effect is executed based on the prior determination information, and the content of the on-off notice effect is reset when the special lottery result is suggested based on the on-off lottery result based on the on-hold memory executing the on-hold notice effect. On the other hand, since the content of the setting value continuous suggestion effect continues without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the setting value continuous suggestion effect is lower than that of the hold notification effect. The setting prevents the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol to execute setting value continuous suggestive effects that suggest setting values of the pachinko machine 1. It is supposed to get. In addition, since the set value continuous suggestive effect is not based on the prior determination information as in the case of the set value hold suggestive effect, it is possible to execute the special lottery result without acquiring it in advance.

  In addition, the setting value continuous suggestive effect that causes the character 1702 for suggesting setting can be executed beyond the upper limit of the number of pending storages (the upper limit of the first pending storage number is 4 and the upper limit of the second pending storage number is 1). For example (for over 5 variations of the decorative symbol). In addition, when the number of holding memories becomes 0 during the execution of the setting value continuous suggestion effect, the variation of the decorative design based on the game ball B entering the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 When the display is started, it is sufficient to restart the setting value continuous suggestion effect to expose the setting indication character 1702, and in this case, the setting indication character 1702 is continued until the setting value continuous indication effect is resumed. It may be made to continue displaying on the effect display device 1600. Thereby, the player can be made to recognize that the set value continuous suggestion effect is continuing and the game can be continued, and even if the game is ended, the setting value continuous suggestion effect being continued to the new player To make them interested in and to play on the gaming machine.

  In addition, the setting value continuous indication effect may be performed in parallel with the setting value hold indication effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a new game in which the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be estimated from both of the effect mode in the setting value suspension indication effect and the effect mode in the setting value continuous indication effect. Also, a plurality of setting suggestion characters 1702 may be provided to cause any setting suggestion character 1702 to be displayed according to the big hit expectation.

[24. Use of surplus setting other than big hit probability and small hit probability]
In the present embodiment, it is possible to change the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) by pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b while the setting values can be changed. There is a table corresponding to the determined set value as a table used in the special lottery or the like (a collision determination table, a big hit symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, etc.). In the above-described embodiment, the table corresponding to each set value includes "big hit probability", "small hit probability", "small hit type", "normal pattern probability", and "general spread figure according to type" The combination of the opening and closing patterns of the second starting opening is set to be different, but as another example, although the “big hit probability” and the “small hit probability” are the same set values, the “big hit probability” and “small hit As information other than the hit probability, the fraud monitoring system may be set to be different.

  As described above, in the fraud detection process in step S112, various frauds are monitored. Specifically, various winning openings and gate portions (gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 by changing the course of the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a which is divided into the game board 5 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 Magnetic sensor (not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity such as entering the ball), the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor, and the fraudulent activity due to the magnet Is monitoring. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 vibrates or strikes the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the gaming area 5a defined in the game board 5 by applying vibration to the game board 5. The main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor by providing a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent activity such as entering into various winning openings and gate portions (gates) provided. Monitors fraudulent activity by vibration. In this example, as a fraud monitoring system, the detection sensitivity of a detection sensor (magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) for detecting fraud is changed, or a detection sensor (magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) for detecting fraud is a fraud. It is possible to change the part (target area) judged to be or to change the condition for canceling the error state when it is judged to be an illegal act and transition to an error state.

  As shown in FIG. 201, in this example, “big hit probability”, “small hit probability”, and “cheating monitor system” are set values 1 to 3 and set values 1 ′ to 3 ′, respectively. It is set correspondingly.

  Specifically, as the big hit probability (the ratio of the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won in the hit determination table), set value 1 and set value 1 ′ as “1/319”, set value 2 and set value “1/1/309” is set to 2 ′, and “1/299” is set to the setting value 3 and the setting value 3 ′. In this example, for each of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1 ′ to 3 ′, the larger the set value, the higher the jackpot probability.

  In addition, as a small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that a small hit is selected among the hit determination table), in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set value 1 to 3, the set value 1 In the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, each of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1 ′ to 3 ′ is set to “one hundredth” for each of “3” to “3”. "50" is set to. In each of the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1 ′ to 3 ′, the small hit probability may be set to be higher as the set value is higher.

  Moreover, as the monitoring system of fraudulent activity, "incorrect monitoring A" is set to the setting values 1 to 3, and "incorrect monitoring B" is set to the setting values 1 'to 3'. In the present example, the monitoring system is set to be strengthened in the “cheating monitor A” rather than the “cheating monitor B”.

  In this example, “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” are the same set values for set value 1 and set value 1 ′, set value 2 and set value 2 ′, and set value 3 and set value 3 ′, respectively. However, the surveillance system for fraudulent activity is set to either “fraud surveillance A” or “traffic surveillance B”. For example, in the setting change board 1311 provided with the setting key switch 1311 a and the like, when it is possible to set six setting values, assuming that only three types of “big hit probability” need be set, three types In addition to the three setting values corresponding to the “big hit probability” of the above, three surplus setting values are generated. As described above, when the setting change substrate 1311 capable of setting six setting values is diverted to another gaming machine, a surplus setting value may be generated, but as in this example, the surplus setting is performed. By using the value also to change the fraud monitoring system, it is possible to effectively utilize the surplus setting value and minimize the program change point.

  In settings 1 to 3, "1", "2" and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display as the display mode of the selected set value at the time of the operation relating to the setting change. While the 7-segment LED is displayed so as to blink normally, “1”, “2”, and “3” are displayed on the setting display 1310g in settings 1 ′ to 3 ′, and 7 The segment LED is displayed to flash at a high speed (blink faster than settings 1 to 3). Thus, when the operator changes the setting of the setting value, it can be clearly distinguished whether the setting value being changed is setting 1 to 3 or setting 1 'to 3'. However, when the setting value is determined after changing the setting of the setting value, the normal blink or high speed of the 7-segment LED as the display mode of the setting value in any of the settings 1 to 3 and the settings 1 'to 3'. It stops blinking and is displayed with normal lighting. Therefore, when the operator determines the setting value after changing the setting, it becomes unclear whether the setting value is the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 1 ′ to 3 ′.

  Further, as another example of the above, regarding the display mode of the selected setting value at the time of the operation relating to the setting change, in the settings 1 to 3, “1”, “2” "3" is displayed, but settings 1 'to 3' are compared with settings 1 to 3 so that "1." "2." "3." is displayed on the setting display 1310g. You may add dots. In the case of such another example, even if the 7-segment LED normally blinks during the change, it is clearly distinguished whether the setting value being changed is setting 1 to 3 or setting 1 'to 3'. be able to. In addition, when the set value is determined after changing the setting of the set value, the set value determined is set even if the normal blinking of the 7-segment LED is ended and the normal lighting is displayed as the display mode of the set value It can be clearly distinguished whether it is ̃3 or setting 1 ′ to 3 ′.

  Next, as a specific monitoring system of “injustice monitoring A” and “injustice monitoring B”, first to fifth specific examples may be mentioned. In this example, any one or more of the first to fifth specific examples may be executed as the “injustice monitoring A” and “injustice monitoring B”. First, as a first specific example, a case where detection sensitivities of detection sensors (magnetic sensors, vibration sensors) for detecting fraudulent activities are made different will be described below.

  As a first specific example, in “cheating monitor A”, the detection sensitivity of a detection sensor (magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) that detects cheating is increased, while in “cheating monitoring B”, cheating is detected The detection sensitivity of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor, vibration sensor) is lowered. If the detection sensor for detecting fraudulent activity detects excessiveness due to individual differences in the pachinko machine 1 or the installation location in the hall, selecting "inappropriate surveillance B" prevents the excessive detection. be able to. On the other hand, when the detection by the detection sensor for detecting the fraudulent activity is dull, it is possible to prevent dull detection by selecting the “traffic monitoring A”. In addition, when it is desired to strengthen the measures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraud due to the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting the “cheating act A”.

  In addition, in "cheating monitor A", when a detection signal is input from a detection sensor (a magnetic sensor or a vibration sensor) that detects fraud, the time when the detection signal is input is short, or a detection signal is input. Even if the number of times it is used is small, it is judged to be fraudulent, while in “cheating monitor B”, the time for which the detection signal is input is long or the number of times for which the detection signal is input is large In this case, it may be determined that the act is fraudulent. Even in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above in the case where the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors for detecting fraudulent activities are made different.

  Next, as a second specific example, a case where a detection sensor (a magnetic sensor, a vibration sensor) for detecting a fraudulent activity makes a part (target region) judged to be a fraudulent activity different will be described below.

  In this example, a setting operation unit that can detect the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 as a magnetic sensor for detecting an illegal act by a magnet. A sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Then, depending on the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, it monitors whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided, and those other than those who perform setting change of the setting value and confirmation display perform the setting. Monitors fraudulent activity such as trying to change or confirm. On the other hand, depending on the game area magnetic sensor, it monitors whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a, changes the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a, and is provided on the game board 5 It monitors fraudulent acts such as entering a winning opening or a gate.

  Similarly, as a vibration sensor for detecting cheating due to vibration, a setting operation unit vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 And a game area portion vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third distribution device 2550 of the center combination 2500 provided on the game board 5. Then, depending on the setting operation unit vibration sensor, it monitors whether the vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided, and those other than those who perform the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display It monitors fraudulent activity such as trying to change settings or display confirmation. On the other hand, depending on the game area vibration sensor, it is monitored whether vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, and the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 is changed to make the second V winning opening 2008 Cheating the game ball B, etc. are monitored.

  As a second specific example, in "injustice monitoring A", using all of the detection sensors (magnetic sensors, vibration sensors) for detecting fraudulent activity, while increasing the number of sites judged to be fraudulent activity, " In fraud monitoring B ", only the setting operation unit magnetic sensor that is a part of the detection sensor (magnetic sensor or vibration sensor) that detects fraudulent activity, and the setting operation unit vibration sensor are used to determine the part that is judged to be fraudulent activity. It is less. That is, in "injury monitoring A", not only the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is detected, but also the game area located on the front side of the game board 5 While it is possible to detect the occurrence of magnetism and vibration in front of 5a, "injustice monitoring B", the magnet around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 It is possible to detect only the occurrence of vibration and vibration. For example, if there is a defect in the game area magnetic sensor or the game area vibration sensor and there is no fraudulent activity, if such a detection sensor frequently detects, then the "cheating monitor B" By selecting it, it is possible to prevent its frequent detection. In addition, if you want to strengthen the measures of magnet Goto and vibration Goto, by selecting "cheating monitor A", cheating is also monitored to the front of the game area 5a, and cheating due to magnet Goto or vibration Got Monitoring can be strengthened.

  In this example, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor, are provided as magnetic sensors for detecting a fraudulent action by a magnet. One of the magnetics that can specify the setting change board 1311 located behind the board 5 or the setting key switch 1311 a or the front of the game area 5 a located on the front side of the game board 5 A sensor may be provided. Similarly, two vibration sensors, a setting operation unit vibration sensor and a game area vibration sensor, are provided as vibration sensors for detecting cheating due to vibration. It is possible to specify whether it is the periphery of the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side, or the periphery of the third distribution device 2550 of the center role 2500 provided on the game board 5). One vibration sensor may be provided. Even in such a case, in "injustice monitoring B", it is an injustice only when it is identified that magnetism or vibration has occurred around setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of gaming board 5 By judging that there is an effect, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Next, as a third specific example, a case will be described below where the condition for canceling the error state is changed when it is determined that the operation is an illegal act and the state is shifted to the error state.

  As a third specific example, in the case of "injustice monitoring A", when it is determined that the act is improper and it shifts to an error state, it is possible to cancel the error state by turning on the power again. In "illegal monitoring B", when it is determined that the activity is fraudulent and it shifts to an error state, it is possible to automatically cancel the error state when a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) elapses. ing. That is, in "injustice monitoring A", when it is determined that the act is illegal and it shifts to an error state, the hall clerk opens the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and operates the power switch 630a. The error state can not be canceled unless the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again. In addition, when the detection sensor (a magnetic sensor, a vibration sensor) which detects a fraudulent action detects generation | occurrence | production of magnetism or vibration, it transfers to an error state and is based on the image from the effect display apparatus 1600, a lamp, and a speaker. An abnormality occurrence effect of notifying that it is an abnormal state due to the generation of magnetism or vibration is executed, and it becomes difficult to properly grasp the progress of the game. For this reason, when "injustice monitoring A" is selected, it is necessary to work by the store clerk when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and it shifts to an error state, and the hall clerk must grasp the fraudulent act. Can increase the deterrence against fraud. In addition, when it is desired to strengthen the measures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent action due to the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting “the fraud monitoring A”.

  Next, as a fourth specific example, when it is determined that it is an illegal act and it shifts to an error state, information about the error state is installed in the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 The case where the output to the computer is different will be described below.

  As a fourth specific example, in the case of "injustice monitoring A", when it is determined that it is an illegal act and it shifts to an error state, information regarding the error state is sent to the gaming hall via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine While outputting to the hall computer installed on the side, “illegal monitoring B” outputs information on the error state to the hall computer even if it is judged that it is an illegal act and it shifts to an error state I try not to. In other words, in "injustice monitoring A", when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and it shifts to an error state, since the store clerk can immediately grasp the fraudulent act even if it is not on the spot, The deterrence can be increased. In addition, when it is desired to strengthen the measures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent action due to the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting “the fraud monitoring A”.

  Next, as a fifth specific example, when it is determined that the act is an illegal act and the state is shifted to an error state, information on the error state is externally notified by an output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600 The case of making the difference is described below.

  As a fifth specific example, in "injustice monitoring A", when it is determined that it is an injustice and it shifts to an error state, generation of magnetism or vibration due to an image from the effect display device 1600, an output from a lamp or a speaker While executing an abnormal occurrence effect to notify that it is an abnormal state due to, etc., and notifying the information about the error state externally, in "injustice monitoring B", it is judged as an injustice and the error state Even in the case of transition to, the information on the error state is not notified to the outside. That is, in "injustice monitoring A", when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and it shifts to an error state, the fraudulent person will be warned by the external notification of the information about the error state, and the deterrence against fraud is high. can do. In addition, when it is desired to strengthen the measures against the magnet goto and the vibration goto, it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of the fraudulent action due to the magnet goto and the vibration goto by selecting “the fraud monitoring A”.

  Note that, in this example, “illegal monitor A” is set as set values 1 to 3 and “illegal monitor B” is set as set values 1 ′ to 3 ′, and the main control MPU is set to point to peripheral control board 1510. By transmitting information related to the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine which of “illegal monitoring A” and “illegal monitoring B” should be on standby. For this reason, when the main control MPU transmits information on an error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 when it is determined that the operation is an illegal action and shifts to the error state, the peripheral control board 1510 side: It can be determined whether or not the information on the error condition is to be notified to the outside.

  In the case of "injustice monitoring B", when it is determined that an unauthorized action is made and an error state is entered, information on the error state is externally notified. The output of may be executed in a mode that is less prominent than (inconspicuously) the “cheating monitor A”. For example, in the "injustice monitoring B", when the information on the error state is notified to the outside, the output from the lamp or the speaker may be stopped and only the image of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. Also in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above, which is a case where it is different whether or not the information regarding the error state is notified to the outside.

  In the above, it has been described that the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values needs to set only three types of "big hit probability", and three surplus setting values are generated. In other words, with the set values 1 'to 3', the fraud monitoring system was set to "illegal monitor A" even though the set values 1 to 3 and the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" were the same set value. Although "incorrect monitoring B" is set to setting values 1 to 3, setting values 1 to 5 corresponding to five types of "big hit probability" are set, for example, without being limited thereto. If one surplus setting value occurs, the fraud monitoring system may be made to differ from the one surplus setting value. For example, with setting value 1 ′, which is one surplus setting value, monitoring of fraudulent activity while setting value 1 and “big hit probability” and “small hit probability” are the same as setting value 1 among setting values 1 to 5 For the setting values 1 to 5 in which the system is set to "illegal monitoring A", "illegal monitoring B" may be set. Even in such a case, the surplus setting value can be effectively utilized.

  In the above, although either "injustice monitoring A" or "injustice monitoring B" is set as the fraud monitoring system, "injustice monitoring A" or "injustice monitoring B" having a different fraud monitoring system is different. ", Or" cheating monitor C "may be set. The monitoring of fraudulent activity is strengthened in the order of “cheating monitoring C”, “cheating monitoring B”, and “cheating monitoring A”. For example, setting the setting values 1 and 2 corresponding to two types of "big hit probability" and describing the case where four surplus setting values occur, setting that the fraud monitoring system is set to "cheating monitoring A" For the values 1 and 2, the set values 1 'and 2' set in the "illegal monitor B" while the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are the same set values, the "big hit probability" and the "small hit The setting values 1 ′ ′ and 2 ′ ′ ′ set in the “cheating monitor C” may be set as the surplus setting values even though the “probability” is the same setting value. Even in such a case, the surplus setting value can be effectively utilized.

  In the above, although the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are set to the same setting value, the case where the fraud monitoring system is set to be different has been described, but the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" As other information, all or part of the operation systems of a plurality of prizes (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3 may be set to be different. A case where the operation system of a part of a plurality of prizes (movable objects) provided in such a game board 5 or the door frame 3 is set to be different will be described below as a sixth specific example.

  As shown in FIG. 202, in the sixth specific example, it is set as an operation system of a specific part (specific movable object) among a plurality of items (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3. The values "1 to 3" are set as "specific work operation" and the set values 1 'to 3' are set as "no specific work operation", the first set of "cheating monitor system". It differs from the specific example to the fifth specific example. That is, in the sixth specific example, the “big hit probability” and the “small hit probability” are obtained for set value 1 and set value 1 ′, set value 2 and set value 2 ′, and set value 3 and set value 3 ′, respectively. Even with the same set value, the operation system of the specific part (specific movable object) is set to either "specific part operation" or "no specific part operation". Note that a plurality of prizes (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can operate using drive sources such as a drive motor and a solenoid, respectively. For example, the specification of the present embodiment The special effects consist of the effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 described above, and the effect operation unit 300 can be moved up and down by the operation mechanism described above. Since this effect operation unit 300 can be operated by direct contact with the player, there is a high possibility that a failure or malfunction will occur as compared with other features. And in "with specific combination product operation", to control the specific combination product to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific combination product (rendering operation unit 300 is lifting operation) On the other hand, in "no specific part operation", control is performed so that the specific part does not operate without performing movable object presentation accompanied by the movement of the specific part. For example, when a malfunction occurs in the operation mechanism of the specific combination and the specific combination does not operate properly, the operation of the specific combination is stopped halfway by selecting “no specific combination operation”. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the continuation of the game becomes difficult.

  In the present example, in the case of “with a specific combination item operation”, when the variation pattern in which the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the movement of the specific combination item is determined among the plurality of variation patterns is While the specific combination is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object presentation accompanied by the movement, in "No specific combination movement", the movable object presentation accompanied by the movement of the specific combination is executed. It controls so that a specific part does not operate. On the other hand, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern may be changed between "with specific combination product operation" and "without specific combination product operation", for example, with "specific combination product operation". While, among the plurality of variation patterns, it is possible to determine the variation pattern for which the execution of the movable object presentation accompanied by the movement of the specific part is set, in the “specific part no action”, the specific part It may be controlled so as not to determine the fluctuation pattern to which the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of is set. Even in such a case, in "no specific part product operation", the same effect as described above can be obtained by performing control so that the specific part does not operate without executing the movable object presentation accompanied by the movement of the specific part. You can get

  Further, in the present example, when the operation system of the specific combination (specific movable object) is set to the setting values 1 to 3 in which “specific combination operation is performed”, the specific combination is performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). The initial operation of the object is performed, but when it is set to the setting values 1 'to 3' which is "no specific combination product operation", the initial movement of the specific combination is performed when the power is turned on (after the setting change). I try not to be done. As a result, it is possible to recognize again that the specific character (specific movable object) of the plurality of characters (movable objects) is removed from the operation target. In addition, with regard to the operation of the specific part (specific movable object), it is possible to check whether or not the set value is intended by the operator, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the operator makes a mistake in the set value. be able to.

  Unlike the above, when priority is given to checking for the presence or absence of a defect related to the movement of a specific part (specific movable object), “specific part operation is available” and “specific part function is not available” to accurately notify it. Even when any of the above is set, the initial operation of the specific combination may be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed).

  Further, it can be confirmed by the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g whether the "specific combination product action" or "specific combination product no action" is set, but other than the setting display 1310g However, notification may be made. For example, at the time of completion of setting change of setting values, notification of “set to specific role operation / set to specific role non-action operation” by output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600 Whether a specific combination (specified movable object) of a plurality of prizes (movable objects) is to be operated by giving a notification to that effect as a standby screen for a period when a game is not performed It can be recognized.

  Moreover, in this example, although it is possible to set to either one of “specific part operation action” or “no specific part function operation” by changing the setting of the setting value by the operator, such an initial stage After setting, the player may be able to change the initial setting to another setting. For example, it may be possible to allow the player to change to either "specified combination operation present" or "specific combination product not present" while the standby screen is displayed during a period in which a game is not being performed. That is, “with specific combination product operation” is set to setting values 1 to 3 and “specific combination product operation is not set” to setting values 1 ′ to 3 ′, and the main control MPU is directed to peripheral control board 1510 and set. By sending information about the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 will execute one of the settings as an initial setting, but if the player changes to another setting after the initial setting, On the peripheral control board 1510 side, the setting changed by the player is prioritized and executed over the initial setting.

  In addition, the specific role (specific movable object) of the plurality of characters (movable objects) is not limited to the effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300, and may be provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3, It may operate from the screen front of the effect display device 1600 to the front of the screen. Moreover, in this example, although it is possible to change the operation system of the specific part (specific movable object) of the plurality of items (movable objects) by changing the setting of the setting value, it is not limited to the specific part. Change the motion system of multiple items (movable objects) or all the items, and set the target item as either "with item action" or "without item action" You may do so. In addition, features (movable objects) may be provided not only on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 but also on the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and it is possible to change the operation system even for such features. It may be an object to be

[25. Fraud monitoring]
In the present embodiment, various fraudulent activities are monitored in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112 described above. Specifically, various winning openings and gate portions (gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 by changing the course of the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a which is divided into the game board 5 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 A magnetic sensor that detects fraudulent activity such as entering the ball), and the main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor, and monitors the fraudulent activity due to the magnet . In addition, the pachinko machine 1 vibrates or strikes the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the gaming area 5a defined in the game board 5 by applying vibration to the game board 5. The main control MPU determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor by providing a vibration sensor for detecting fraudulent activity such as entering into various winning openings and gate portions (gates) provided. Monitors fraudulent activity by vibration. With regard to the monitoring of these fraudulent acts, the monitoring mode differs between the normal time and the state in which the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are performed.

[25-1. About fraud monitoring during normal times]
First, monitoring of fraudulent behavior during normal times will be described below. Here, the normal time is a state in which the main frame 4 is closed, and a setting change of the set value and a confirmation display of the set value are not performed, and symbol fluctuation, a big hit game, a small hit game, etc. Points to a state where it is possible to play a game of

  In this example, a setting operation unit that can detect the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 as a magnetic sensor for detecting an illegal act by a magnet. A sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. At normal times, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used to monitor an illegal act on a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in normal times, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor does not generate magnetism (a magnet that is not properly generated due to illegal access to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1). The monitor monitors whether or not (a magnet approaches), and monitors fraudulent activities such as trying to change the setting or confirming display, except for those who change the setting of the set value or confirming display. Examples of fraudulent actions against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet include metal fraudulent equipment in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed) and A magnet and a metal illegal device are inserted through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island facility or an opening that has partially destroyed the pachinko machine 1 by storing a magnet for indirectly operating the metal illegal device. It is conceivable that the operation is performed to illegally access the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. When the detection signal from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is input in the injustice detecting process in step S112, the injustice using the magnet is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is judged that it is done.

  Similarly, at normal times, the gaming area magnetic sensor is used to monitor an illegal act on a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, at normal times, the game area section magnetic sensor monitors whether the magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) which should not occur originally is generated (whether the magnet approaches) to the area in front of the game area 5a. The fraudulent actions such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and entering various winning openings and gate portions provided on the game board 5 are monitored. In the injustice detecting process in step S112, when the detection signal from the gaming area magnetic sensor is input, it is determined that the injustice using a magnet is performed on the area in front of the gaming area 5a. ing.

  In this example, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation unit magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor, are provided as magnetic sensors for detecting fraudulent actions by magnets, but these two setting operation units are magnetic. The sensor and the game area magnetic sensor may have the same performance. That is, although these two magnetic sensors are not shown, they are constituted by a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and the first magnetic detection area having directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to one side surface It is possible to perform magnetic detection within the second magnetic detection area having directivity that is highly sensitive in the direction perpendicular to the side surface on the opposite side. There is. The term "strong in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is higher in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side surface, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The game area magnetic sensor is disposed such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body expand in the left-right direction or the up-down direction in a front view of the pachinko machine 1, Wide area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a plurality of places among the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the large winning opening 2005, and other main parts of the ball passage) ) Can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is configured such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the above-mentioned sensor body expand in the front-rear direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 1 The magnetic detection area is disposed so as to cover the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided can be monitored.

  In addition, it may be set as embodiment which does not have the same performance by two setting operation part magnetic sensors and a game area part magnetic sensor. For example, instead of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the game area magnetic sensor, it is the game board 5 where magnetism has occurred (is it around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311 a located behind the game board 5? A single magnetic sensor may be provided which can specify whether it is in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of. Even with such a configuration, it can be monitored whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311 is provided or whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a. .

  Further, in this example, as a vibration sensor for detecting an illegal act due to vibration, setting operation capable of detecting generation of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 A club vibration sensor and a game area vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third distribution device 2550 of the center combination 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. At normal times, the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used to monitor fraud. That is, at normal times, the setting operation unit vibration sensor monitors whether a vibration (vibration due to an unauthorized access) which should not originally occur is applied to the area where the setting change substrate 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided. And other than the person who performs setting change of setting value and confirmation display, it monitors the fraud such as trying to change the setting and confirmation display. When the detection signal from the setting operation unit vibration sensor is input in the cheating detection process in step S112, the cheating cheating is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is determined that

  On the other hand, only during the small hit game during the normal time, cheating is monitored using the gaming area vibration sensor, and other than the small hitting game, the cheating is not monitored using the gaming area vibration sensor. This is that in the small hit game, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B that is distributed to the second V winning port side by the second distribution device 2540 is either the second V winning port 2008 or the lost side If vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 is changed, and the game ball B is put on the second V winning opening 2008. It is possible to enter the ball, and to prevent such fraud. That is, during the small hit game during the normal time, it is monitored by the gaming area vibration sensor whether vibration (vibration due to unauthorized access) which should not originally occur is added to the third distribution device 2550 In addition, changing the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 and monitoring the fraudulent acts such as causing the game ball B to enter the second V winning opening 2008. In the injustice detecting process in step S112, when the detection signal from the game area vibration sensor is input, it is determined that the third allotment device 2550 is performing the injustice by vibration.

  In this example, two vibration sensors, a setting operation unit vibration sensor and a game area vibration sensor, are provided as vibration sensors for detecting cheating due to vibration. Identify the setting change board 1311 located on the rear side of the board 5 or the setting key switch 1311 a or the third sorting device 2550 of the center combination 2500 provided on the game board 5) One vibration sensor may be provided. Even in such a configuration, monitoring whether the vibration is applied to the area where the setting change substrate 1311 or the setting key switch 1311 a is provided or the vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550 it can.

  In addition, at the normal time, in the launch permission signal setting process of step S113, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the gaming ball B is allowed The game ball B can be fired when the handle 182 is operated.

  In addition, when game ball B wins in the winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the large winning opening 2005, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each in normal times Is input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as being effective. Specifically, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B is won in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, no symbol variation is performed, and the game ball B is not performed. In the case where the detection of the game ball B is made effective, when the game ball B is won in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the symbol variation is performed. It is possible for the game ball B to be paid out.

  In addition, during normal times, except during a period during which effects using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are being executed during symbol variation, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member. Specifically, after the image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to adjust the volume and the light amount by rotating the rotation operation unit 302. In addition, during the period when the effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is being executed while the symbol is changing, it was on standby that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated for the effect Because of the state, even when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume and the light amount can not be adjusted.

25-2. About fraud monitoring while changing settings of settings]
Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity during setting change of setting values will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity during setting change of setting values.

  When changing the setting of the setting value, first, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (a state where the pachinko machine 1 is powered off) Do the work (timing t1), insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a, turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees, and perform the first ON operation Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on as the setting key (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), it is possible to change the setting of the set value (change permitted state). In such a change permitted state, it is possible to change the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) each time the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, and thereafter the setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by pressing the setting key switch 1311a by turning the setting key switch 1311a by the second ON operation, and then the setting key switch 1311a is turned on from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to the original position. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off so as to return it (timing t4). That is, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (the change permission state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value is set. It will be in a state where it is impossible to change the setting (unchangeable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), it is possible to play a game Become.

  In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts main control power on processing (see FIGS. 138 and 139), but turns off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4. Until the setting change process of step S37 is not completed (in step S222 of the setting change process, it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF), and in the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, In order to prohibit the interrupt permission setting in step S52, the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed as compared with the normal power-on. Then, since the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 140) is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input processing in step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing and the cheating detection in step S112 The process, the emission permission signal setting process of step S113, and the like are not executed yet and are in a standby state. That is, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change permission state), but monitoring of the cheating is not performed, and the game ball B is not As well as not permitting the launch, it is a special period in which the input of the detection signal is not valid when the gaming ball B has won the winning opening. In addition, in the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the information regarding the setting change of the setting value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 The store clerk can know that the setting is being changed.

  Specifically, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and monitoring of cheating using the gaming area magnetic sensor are generally performed. Not to run. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who performs setting change of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b, and a person other than the regular worker who changes the setting of the setting value Because there is no room for cheating. In addition, when performing setting change of the setting value, even if the authorized worker who performs the setting change has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. It is possible to suppress the inhibition of the regular setting change work.

  Similarly, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and monitoring of cheating using the gaming area vibration sensor are executed as a whole. I try not to. This is because, in the change permission state, a regular worker who performs setting change of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b, and other than the regular worker who performs the setting change is invalid by vibration. It is because there is no room to act. In addition, even if a legitimate worker who performs the setting change changes the setting of the setting value, it is prevented from being detected as cheating due to the vibration, and the regular setting changing operation is performed. The inhibition can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the logic of the release permission signal to transmit permission to release the game ball B to the release control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set. And prohibit the firing of the game ball B. As a result, even if a regular worker who performs setting change of the setting value touches the handle 182, the gaming ball B can be prevented from being fired, and inhibition of the regular setting change operation can be suppressed. Also, even if the player operates the handle 182 in the change permission state, the game ball B can not be fired.

  In addition, in the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, and various gate units (gates When the game ball B enters the game ball, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the detection itself of the gaming ball B may not be performed by the detection sensor, or may be treated as invalid while inputting the detection signal from the detection sensor. As described above, in the case where the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the lottery, the symbol change, or the game ball B It will not be performed for any of the payouts, so even if the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 for any reason during the regular work of changing the setting of the setting value. , It is possible to suppress the progression of the game.

  Although not shown, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to the winning opening and the gate unit (gate) in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the gaming ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the measurement by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310 h for the game ball B discharged from the game area 5 a in the change permission state It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to ball clogging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the change permission state and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid the situation where it is measured (added to the out number counter).

  In addition, in the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume of the sound output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600 The light amount output from the light emitting member is not adjustable.

  In addition, in the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting of the setting value is set by the output from the image, lamp and speaker of the effect display device 1600. Notification during setting change (setting change related notification) for notifying that the change is in progress is executed. As notification during setting change, execute the sound of repeating "setting change in progress", the message display of "setting change in progress!", And the lamp light emission in the color corresponding to the setting value of 1 to 6 in the selection operation process And This setting change notification is a notification (effect) performed only in the change permission state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame open notification performed in the state where the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. That is, in the state where the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display or voice of "frame is open") is normally performed, but in the change permission state, the main body frame open notification In the setting change notification is given top priority without performing the above. The main frame opening notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, and the setting change notification is prioritized over the main frame opening notification, and the main frame opening notification is performed after the setting change notification is completed. The form can also be illustrated.

  In addition to the image from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, the notification by the function display unit 1400 is also notified as the setting change notification described above in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 is a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special In addition to the symbol indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, the setting change indicator, which consists of one LED that indicates that the setting change is in progress (change permitted state), of the setting The confirmation display indicator which consists of one LED which displays that it is in a confirmation display (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the change permission state, only the LED of the setting change-in-progress indicator in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other display indicators are turned off. Thereby, in the change permission state, it can be grasped by the notification by the function display unit 1400 that the game does not progress.

  Further, at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting change process in step S37 in the main control power on process (see FIGS. 138 and 139) is ended (setting key in step S222 of the setting change process). It is determined that the switch 1311a has been turned OFF), and the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed. Then, it becomes possible to start the main control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 140), and the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process, the fraudulent action detection process of step S112, the firing permission signal setting of step S113 Processing will be performed. However, in the present embodiment, until the operation of closing the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t5), detection of permission of firing of the game ball B or when the game ball B wins the winning opening It does not enable the input of a signal, and it is trying to maintain the state which can not start a game. That is, in the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5, even if the game ball B is made to win the winning opening by cheating, the detection signal is not input, and it is a period in which an illegal profit can not be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility that the outer frame 2 may receive an impact of closing the main body frame 4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and fraudulent activity using the gaming area magnetic sensor The monitoring, the monitoring of the cheating using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the monitoring of the cheating using the gaming area vibration sensor are in a standby state as unexecuted.

  In addition, the game ball B can be launched from time t5 when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, and it is possible to play games such as symbol variation, big hit games, small hit games Under the condition described above, monitoring of various fraudulent activities is started with the contents described in the above-mentioned [About fraud monitoring during normal times].

  Moreover, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and in the screen of the effect display device 1600, it is in a state of waiting for the start of the game. It displays an image to notify that (game standby notification). And, after the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in a predetermined period from timing t5, start the game such as symbol fluctuation, big hit game, small hit game etc on the screen of the effect display device 1600 An image (game start notification) notifying that it has become possible is displayed.

  In this example, the game ball B is released during a period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (which may be a change permission state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). Although the logic of the release permission signal for notifying the release control portion 633b of the removal control substrate 633 that permission is not set, in consideration of checking the release operation by the handle 182 in the change permission state, etc. During this period, the logic of the firing permission signal may be set so that the game ball B can be fired when the operator operates the handle 182. However, in the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (may be the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the permission until firing of the game ball B is retained. It is desirable that the game does not proceed unfairly by preventing detection signals from being input even if the game ball B is made to enter the various winning a prize opening and the gate part (gate). .

  In this example, the game ball B is released during a period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). The logic of the release permission signal for notifying the release control unit 633b of the release control board 633 that permission is not set is set, and the release of the game ball B is performed from the time of timing t5 (may be timing t4). Although it is in the possible state, when the handle 182 is operated (the handle 182 is touched for the first time) after the change permission state is ended and the firing of the gaming ball B is permitted for the first time, the setting change of the setting value is performed in the change permission state Notification after setting change to notify that is executed. As the notification after the setting change, the voice of "setting has been changed", the message of "setting has been changed", and the lamp emission are performed. In addition, even after the setting change notification, the handle 182 is manipulated only after the setting value setting is changed (even when the setting value setting setting is changed due to a fraudulent activity other than the authorized worker who changes the setting value). It is supposed to be executed at the time of contact with 182). As a result, even if the authorized worker who changes the setting of the setting does not change the setting of the setting, if notification after changing the setting is executed, the setting change of the setting changes due to cheating. It will be known to the outside, which can increase the deterrence against fraud.

  In this example, the game ball B is released during a period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4). The logic of the release permission signal for notifying the release control unit 633b of the release control board 633 that permission is not set is set, and the release of the game ball B is performed from the time of timing t5 (may be timing t4). If the handle 182 is operated (in contact with the handle 182) from the time before the game ball B is permitted to launch, although it is in the possible state, the handle 182 is released once after the game ball B is permitted to launch. The game ball B is not fired unless the handle 182 is touched (operated) again (when the contact detection is turned off). That is, even if the contact of the handle 182 is turned on before the timing t5, the continued handle 182 is detected unless an edge is detected from the touch detection to the handle 182 being turned on after the timing t5. Is disabled so that the game ball B is not fired. As a result, even if an authorized worker who changes the setting of the setting value contacts the handle 182 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is Since the game ball B is not shot carelessly when it is closed, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from generating a loss.

  Also, differently from the above, in the case where the handle 182 is operated from the point before the launch permission of the game ball B in consideration of accelerating the game start based on the end of the change permission state, the handle 182 is While the contact is continued, the continued contact to the handle 182 may be enabled so that the game ball B can be fired from the point of time when the game ball B is permitted to fire. In such a case, the handle 182 is operated before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for firing of the game ball B, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 You will be able to start playing.

  Also, in this example, the game ball B can be launched from time t5 when the operation of closing the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is performed, and games such as symbol variation, big hit games, and small hit games are possible. Although the game can be performed, the game may be performed immediately at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. In other words, it is possible to launch the game ball B from time t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and it is possible to play games such as symbol fluctuation, big hit game, small hit game, etc. With respect to the fraud monitoring at the time], the fraud etc. may be monitored or the like according to the contents described above. In such a configuration, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, symbol fluctuation, big hit game, small An image (game start notification) notifying that it is possible to start a game such as a hit game may be displayed.

  As another example, after the power is turned on, at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 before the setting change process in step S37 is started. The corresponding processing may be performed in advance. In such a configuration, for the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, although the setting change of the setting value is being performed (change permission state), it is made not to monitor the cheating, and the game ball While not permitting the firing of B, the input of the detection signal may not be valid when the gaming ball B has won in the winning opening.

  Further, in the above-mentioned another example, the magnetic sensor or the vibration may be in the change permission state (a period in which the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 is included) which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. While monitoring the fraudulent activity using the sensor, when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the abnormal state may not be notified. Also, during normal times, when it is determined that fraudulent acts due to magnets and vibrations are being performed, the values of the magnet and counter are increased by 1 (increment), but from timing t3 to timing t4. In the change permission state (which may be a period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5) that is a period of time, even if it is determined that a cheating by magnet or vibration is performed, the magnet The value of the got counter or the vibration got counter may not be added. Even with such a configuration, when changing the setting of the setting value, even if the authorized worker who performs the setting change brings the magnet closer or vibrates, the fraud due to the magnet or the vibration is not effective. Since no notification or addition is performed as an action, it is possible to prevent the monitoring of the cheating from becoming an obstacle when changing the setting of the setting value.

  In addition, since various needs may exist according to the environment etc. of the game arcade, various kinds of processing related to the change permission state described above may be selectively set for each game arcade. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of the normal RAM clear switch instead of the change permission state, a state where the operator of the game arcade can select which setting for various processing related to the change permission state is generated. Thereafter, when a change permitted state is generated, various processes related to the change permitted state are executed with the selected setting. Thereby, in the game arcade A, while making unauthorized monitoring into a non-monitoring state in the change permission state, setting is made to validate the contact with the handle 182 or in the game arcade B, the unauthorized monitoring is made in the change permission state It can be set as non-monitoring, and it can be set to invalidate the contact to the handle 182, and needs of the game arcade, such as whether it wants to inspect the firing operation by the handle 182 or the like in the change permission state You will be able to adjust to

[25-3. About fraud monitoring during confirmation display of set values]
In the above description, it has been described that the monitoring of cheating during setting change of the setting value is not monitoring the cheating during the setting changing of the setting value, but the monitoring of the cheating during the confirmation display of the setting value is described It may be configured that either the state in which the cheating is not monitored during the confirmation display of the setting value or the state in which the cheating is partially monitored. First, the case where the fraudulent action is not monitored during the confirmation display of the setting value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 204 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of the setting value.

  When performing confirmation display of the set value currently set, first, while confirming the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, confirm the state in which the symbol variation is not performed (the state in which there is no hold). Open the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and watch as with setting change. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by turning the first turning on operation by turning 60 degrees toward the direction (timing t6). At this time, the setting display 1310g displays the current setting (the setting of the setting 1 to setting 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time). Do. Then, the setting indicator is turned by turning 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder whose setting key is turned on to the original position (timing t7) Switch from the state where the setting value is displayed to 1310 g to the state where it is not displayed. That is, for the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the confirmation display of the set value is being performed (confirmation display state), and after the timing t7 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the confirmation of the set value It will be in the state where the display is not performed (the confirmation impossible state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t8), it is possible to play a game Become.

  At timing t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on as the setting key, the current setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g unless the gaming ball B such as a winning ball is paid out. ing. Further, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a and the first ON operation is performed by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise, the game ball B such as a winning ball is paid out If the setting key switch 1311a is not set to the setting key ON (while the setting key is OFF), the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off after the payout of the game ball B such as a winning ball is completed. The present setting value may be displayed on the setting display 1310g as the setting key ON.

  As another example, when the confirmation display of the set value currently set is performed, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is the same as in the case of changing the setting of the set value) Setting is done by inserting the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion hole of the setting key switch 1311a, turning the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees, and performing the first ON operation. By setting the key switch 1311a to the setting key ON and operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, it is configured to be able to perform confirmation display of the set value (confirmation display state) May be In addition, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by operating the power switch 630a, the setting changes to the setting values can be changed (change permitted state) On the other hand, when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, it may be configured to shift to a state in which confirmation display of the set value can be performed (confirmation display state). In such a configuration, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, whereby the setting value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state). A state in which confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state) corresponds to a period from timing t6 to timing t7.

  In this example, for the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, although the confirmation display of the set value is being performed (confirmation display state), the monitoring of the cheating is not performed, and the gaming ball B And a special period during which the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B has won in the winning opening. In the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, the information regarding the confirmation display of the set value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side through the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 The store clerk can grasp that the confirmation display is in progress.

  Specifically, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of the cheating using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, and monitoring of the cheating using the gaming area magnetic sensor as a whole Not to run. This is because in the confirmation display state, a regular worker who performs confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and a non-authorized worker who performs confirmation display of the setting value uses the magnet for fraudulent activity. There is no room to In addition, when performing confirmation display of the setting value, even if the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. It is possible to suppress the inhibition of the regular confirmation display operation.

  Similarly, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and monitoring of cheating using the gaming area vibration sensor are executed. I try not to. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the authorized worker who performs confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is room for other than the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display to perform the cheating by vibration. It is because there is not. In addition, even when a regular worker who performs the confirmation display adds vibration when performing the confirmation display of the setting value, it is prevented from being detected as cheating due to the vibration, and the regular confirmation display operation is performed. The inhibition can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the logic of the release permission signal to transmit permission to release the game ball B to the release control portion 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set. And prohibit the firing of the game ball B. As a result, even if a regular worker who performs confirmation display of the setting value touches the handle 182, the game ball B can be prevented from being fired, and inhibition of the regular confirmation display operation can be suppressed. Also, even if the player operates the handle 182 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B can not be fired.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, and various gate units (gates Even when the main control MPU inputs detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors when the game ball B enters the game ball, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. The detection itself of the game ball B may not be performed by the detection sensor, or the detection signal itself from the detection sensor may not be input. As described above, in the case where the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the lottery, the symbol change, or the game ball B It will not be performed for any of the payouts, so even if the gaming ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 for any reason during the regular operation of confirming the set value. , It is possible to suppress the progression of the game.

  Although not shown, the main control MPU inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to the winning opening and the gate unit (gate) in the confirmation display state which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the gaming ball B is treated as invalid. As described above, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is invalidated, for example, the measurement by the above-described base monitor 1310 h for the game ball B discharged from the game area 5 a in the confirmation display state It becomes possible to exclude from the target (target to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to ball clogging or the like is detected in the confirmation display state, and the base monitor 1310h It is possible to avoid the situation where it is measured (added to the out number counter).

  Further, in the confirmation display state which is a period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, even if the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume of the sound output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. The light amount output from the light emitting member is not adjustable.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is confirmed by the output from the image, lamp and speaker of the effect display device 1600. A notice is issued during confirmation display (confirmation display related notification) for notifying that it is being displayed. As notification during confirmation display, sound to repeat "during confirmation display", message display of "during confirmation display!", And lamp emission in colors corresponding to the setting values of 1 to 6 in the confirmation process are executed. There is. The notification during confirmation display is notification (effect) performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame opening notification performed in the state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. That is, in the state where the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display and sound of "frame is open") is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification During the confirmation display, it is assumed that the notification is given top priority without performing. The main frame opening notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, giving priority to the confirmation display notification over the main frame opening notification, and performing the main frame opening notification after the confirmation display notification is completed. The form can also be illustrated.

  In addition to the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, the speaker, and the notification from the function display unit 1400, the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7 is notified during the above confirmation display. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 is a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special hold number indicator, a second special In addition to the symbol indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, the setting change indicator, which consists of one LED that indicates that the setting change is in progress (change permitted state), of the setting The confirmation display indicator which consists of one LED which displays that it is in a confirmation display (confirmation display state) is provided. Then, in the confirmation display state, only the LED of the display during confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the LEDs of the other displays are turned off. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, it can be grasped by the notification by the function display unit 1400 that the game does not progress.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state (which may be the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8) which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening When the game ball B wins in the winning openings such as 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, etc., even if the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the gaming ball B Is treated as invalid, but when such a detection signal is input, firing of the game ball B is not permitted by the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600. Even though it is a period in which the game ball B does not win in the winning opening, a warning effect C is issued to notify that the game ball B is winning in the winning opening improperly. There. The warning effect C is executed prior to notification during confirmation display and main body frame opening notification. That is, at the time of execution of the warning effect C, the warning effect C is given top priority without performing notification during confirmation display or notification of main body frame opening.

  In addition, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the permission of the firing of the game ball B and the input of the detection signal when the game ball B is won in the winning opening are not enabled, and the game is performed. Although the state can not be started, until the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed thereafter (timing t8), the state is maintained. That is, in the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8, the detection signal is not input even if the game ball B is made to win the winning opening by cheating, and it is a period in which an illegal profit can not be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility that the outer frame 2 may receive an impact of closing the main body frame 4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and fraudulent activity using the gaming area magnetic sensor The monitoring, the monitoring of the cheating using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the monitoring of the cheating using the gaming area vibration sensor are in a standby state as unexecuted.

  In addition, the game ball B can be launched from time t8 when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, and it is possible to play games such as symbol variation, big hit games, small hit games, etc. Under the condition described above, monitoring of various fraudulent activities is started with the contents described in the above-mentioned [About fraud monitoring during normal times]. The game ball B can be fired even before timing t6 when the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and symbol variation or a big hit It is possible to play a game such as a game or a small hit game, and the monitoring of various injustices is started with the contents described in the above [about fraud monitoring during normal times].

  Moreover, in a period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and in the screen of the effect display device 1600, it is in a state of waiting for the start of the game. It displays an image to notify that (game standby notification). Then, after the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in a predetermined period from timing t8, the game such as symbol variation, big hit game, small hit game etc. should be started on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It displays an image notifying that it has become possible (play start notification).

  Further, in the normal state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a should not be in the state of setting the setting key ON, but in the case of setting the setting key ON On the other hand, the warning effects A and B are executed to notify that the setting key is turned on improperly by the output from the image, the lamp and the speaker of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on with the setting key ON (timing t1) in a state where symbol variation is being performed at the normal time (timing t1), the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF Until the time (timing t2), warning production A is executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where symbol variation is not always performed (timing t3), until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF During the interval (timing t4), the warning effect B is executed. Further, the warning effects A and B are executed with priority over the effects being executed. That is, when the warning effects A and B are executed, the current effects are stopped regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is performed, and the warning effects A and B are performed with the highest priority. Although the warning effects A and B execute the effect in the same manner, the effects may be performed in a different manner so that it can be determined whether or not symbol variation is being performed.

  In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in a period in which cheating due to magnet or vibration is monitored, the magnetism or vibration is generated for a predetermined period by the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of effect display device 1600 An abnormal occurrence effect is executed to notify that the abnormal state is caused by the occurrence of In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect, the contents of the abnormality (either magnetism or vibration depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area vibration sensor detects an abnormality). Whether generation has been detected or a part where abnormality is detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, or the area in front of the gaming area 5a, the third sorting device 2550 It is notified that it is a surrounding area). Further, the abnormality occurrence effect is executed prior to the effect being executed. That is, at the time of execution of the abnormality occurrence effect, the effect being executed is stopped to execute the abnormality occurrence effect with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the symbol variation is performed.

  In the present example, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (may be the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the firing of the game ball B is performed. Although the logic of the release permission signal for notifying the release control portion 633b of the release control substrate 633 that permission is given is not set, in consideration of inspection of the release operation by the handle 182 in the confirmation display state, etc. During this period, the logic of the firing permission signal may be set so that the game ball B can be fired when the operator operates the handle 182. However, in the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (may be the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the permission until the firing of the gaming ball B is retained. It is desirable that the game does not proceed unfairly by preventing detection signals from being input even if the game ball B is made to enter the various winning a prize opening and the gate part (gate). .

  Further, in this example, the game ball B is fired in a period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (may be the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7). The logic of the release permission signal for notifying the release control portion 633b of the release control board 633 that permission is not set is set, and the release of the game ball B is performed from time t8 (may be timing t7). If the handle 182 is operated (contacted with the handle 182) from the time before the game ball B is permitted to launch, contact with the handle 182 is permitted once after the game ball B is allowed to launch. The game ball B is not fired unless the handle 182 is touched (operated) again (when the touch detection is turned off). That is, even if the contact of the handle 182 is turned on before the timing t8, the continued handle 182 is detected unless an edge is detected from the touch detection to the handle 182 being turned on after the timing t8. Is disabled so that the game ball B is not fired. Thereby, even if a regular worker who performs confirmation display of the setting value contacts the handle 182 when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 can be output to the outer frame 2. Since the game ball B is not shot carelessly when it is closed, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from generating a loss.

  Also, differently from the above, in the case where the handle 182 is operated from the time before the launch permission of the game ball B in consideration of accelerating the game start based on the end of the confirmation display state, to the handle 182 It is possible to enable the game ball B to be fired from the point of time at which the game ball B is permitted to fire by enabling the continued contact with the handle 182 to be continued. In such a case, the handle 182 is operated before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for firing of the game ball B, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 You will be able to start playing.

  Also, in this example, the game ball B can be launched from time t8 when the operation of closing the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is performed, and games such as symbol variation, big hit games, and small hit games are possible. Although the game can be performed, the game may be performed immediately at time t7 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. That is, the game ball B can be launched from time t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and it is possible to play games such as symbol fluctuation, big hit game, small hit game, etc. With respect to the fraud monitoring at the time], the fraud etc. may be monitored or the like according to the contents described above. In such a configuration, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, symbol fluctuation, big hit game, small An image (game start notification) notifying that it is possible to start a game such as a hit game may be displayed.

  As another example, in the confirmation display state (a period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8) which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, a magnetic sensor or a vibration sensor may be used. It may be configured not to notify that the abnormal state is detected when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected while monitoring the fraudulent activity. Also, in normal times, when it is determined that the cheating by the magnet or the vibration is performed, the value of the magnet got counter or the vibration got counter is incremented by the value 1, but from the timing t6 to the timing t7 In the confirmation display state (which may be the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8) which is a period of time, it is determined that the magnet or the cheating by vibration is performed, the magnet The value of the got counter or the vibration got counter may not be added. Even with such a configuration, even if the authorized worker performing the confirmation display brings the magnet closer or vibrates when the confirmation display of the set value is performed, the fraud due to the magnet or the vibration occurs. Since no notification or addition is performed as an action, it is possible to prevent the monitoring of the cheating from becoming an obstacle when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed.

  In addition, since various needs may exist according to the environment etc. of a game arcade, the various processes regarding the confirmation display state mentioned above may be made to be able to be selected and set for every game arcade. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of the normal RAM clear switch instead of the confirmation display state, a state where the operator of the game arcade can select which setting for various processing related to the confirmation display state is generated. Thereafter, when a confirmation display state is generated, various processes related to the confirmation display state are executed with the selected setting. Thereby, in the game arcade A, while making unauthorized monitoring into a non-monitoring state in the confirmation display state, setting is made to validate the contact to the handle 182 or in the game arcade B, the unauthorized monitoring is made in the confirmation display state It can be set as non-monitoring, and it can be set so as to invalidate the contact to the handle 182, and needs of the game arcade, such as whether it is desired to check the firing operation by the handle 182 etc. You will be able to adjust to

  Next, a case where a fraudulent activity is partially monitored while confirming the setting value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity in the case where the fraudulent activity is partially monitored during confirmation display of setting values. Here, differences from the case where the fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the setting value described above will be described below.

  In this example, for the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the confirmation display of the set value is being performed (confirmation display state), but the firing of the game ball B is not permitted and the game ball is not A special period in which the detection signal input is not made valid when B is a prize, and monitors only the fraudulent act on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided among the fraudulent acts. There is.

  Specifically, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, while monitoring of fraudulent activity using the gaming area magnetic sensor is not performed, using the setting operation magnetic sensor To monitor fraudulent activity. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the authorized worker performing confirmation display of the set value operates the set key switch 1311 a while the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, but the set value is For example, a person other than the authorized worker who performs confirmation display performs fraudulent acts to bring the magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided, and the setting value is changed illegally, etc. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is made to win the winning opening due to the fraudulent action, the detection signal is not input and an illegal profit is obtained. Since it is a period that can not be performed, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the game area magnetic sensor.

  The setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state in the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7 but also in the period from the timing t8 at which the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. To monitor fraudulent activity. That is, with regard to the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, it is normal time, or the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on with the setting key ON. Regardless of the confirmation display state, monitoring is always performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided.

  Similarly, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, while monitoring of the cheating using the gaming area vibration sensor is not performed, the cheating using the setting operation portion vibration sensor is performed. I try to monitor the act. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the authorized worker performing confirmation display of the set value operates the set key switch 1311 a while the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, but the set value is For example, a person other than the authorized worker who performs confirmation display performs fraudulent acts to apply vibration to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided, and the setting value is changed illegally, etc. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is made to win the winning opening due to the fraudulent action, the detection signal is not input and an illegal profit is obtained Since it is a period that can not be performed, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the game area vibration sensor.

  In addition to the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7, the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used also in the period to the timing t8 at which the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. To monitor fraudulent activity. That is, with regard to the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, it is normal time, or the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Regardless of the confirmation display state, monitoring is always performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided.

  Further, in a period including a confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (may be a confirmation display state which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7), the fraud using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor Monitoring of behavior, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, but when those sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the magnetism or vibration is detected by the image of the effect display device 1600 An abnormal occurrence effect A is executed to notify that it is an abnormal state due to the occurrence of. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (either the generation of the magnetism or the vibration is detected) or the abnormality is detected depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The notified portion (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided) is notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at timing t7 (which may be timing t8) at the end of the confirmation display state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF. The abnormality occurrence effect A is forcibly ended. This is because, in the confirmation display state, a regular worker who performs confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when performing confirmation display of the setting value, the regular worker who performs confirmation display of the setting value. It is not possible to exclude the possibility of unintentionally bringing the magnet closer or applying vibration. For this reason, even if it is determined that a cheating due to a magnet or vibration is performed, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence effect A during execution is forcibly forced. It is supposed to end.

  As described above, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8, monitoring of the cheating using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, and monitoring of the cheating using the setting operation unit vibration sensor Even during normal times other than that period, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, monitoring of cheating using the gaming area magnetic sensor, using the setting operation unit vibration sensor Monitor fraudulent activity, and monitor fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600 causes an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration over a predetermined period. An abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying that there is an event is executed. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used and the abnormality occurrence The presentation is performed in a mode that is less noticeable than the presentation B. This is because in the confirmation display state, the person who performs confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when performing confirmation display of the setting value, the legitimate worker who performs the confirmation display is not intentionally It is because the possibility that the magnet is brought close or vibration is added can not be excluded. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area unit magnetic, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area unit vibration sensor detects an abnormality, the content of the abnormality (either magnetism or vibration Whether generation has been detected or a part where abnormality is detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, or the area in front of the gaming area 5a, the third sorting device 2550 It is notified that it is a surrounding area).

  Further, as described above, in the state where the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 which is a period from the timing t5 to the timing t8, the outer frame 2 is output by the image of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker. On the other hand, the main body frame open notification is issued to notify that the main body frame 4 is in the open state. In addition, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is confirmed by the output from the image, lamp and speaker of the effect display device 1600. A notice is issued during confirmation display (confirmation display related notification) for notifying that it is being displayed. Then, after the work of opening the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is performed, the setting display is shifted to the confirmation display state by setting the setting key switch 1311 a to the setting key ON, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification Notification is issued during confirmation display prior to execution, and when the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed prior to notification during confirmation display.

25-4. About the modification example of the fraud monitoring while changing the setting of the setting value]
In the above description, monitoring of cheating during setting change of setting values has been described that cheating is not monitored during setting changing of setting values, but even if cheating is monitored in part, it is configured Good. A case where a fraud is monitored in part during the setting change of such a setting value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity in the case where the fraudulent activity is partially monitored during setting change of setting values. Here, the difference from the case where the fraudulent action is not monitored during the setting change of the setting value described above will be described below.

  In the above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts main control power on processing (see FIGS. 138 and 139), but turns off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4. Until the setting change process in step S37 is not completed (in step S222 of the setting change process, it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF), and in the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the subsequent steps are performed. The prohibition of the interrupt enable setting in step S52 is prohibited, and the execution timing of the interrupt enable setting in step S52 is delayed compared to the normal power-on. That is, since the main control timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 140) is not started until the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed, the switch input processing in step S104 in the main control timer interrupt processing, and the cheating detection in step S112. The process, the emission permission signal setting process of step S113, and the like are not executed yet and are in a standby state. On the other hand, after turning on the power, at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 before starting the setting change process in step S37. The process (the same process) may be performed in advance. In this example, the setting change of the setting value is performed (change permitted state) in this example, but the firing of the game ball B is not permitted in this example. At the same time, the special period during which the input of the detection signal is not made effective when the game ball B has won in the winning opening is also made for the area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. We only monitor fraudulent activity.

  In addition, before starting the setting change process in step S37, the process (the same process) corresponding to the injustice detecting process in step S112 is performed in advance, and the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch among the injustices. In the case where only the fraudulent activity on the area provided with 1311a is monitored, in the processing, as in the fraudulent activity detection processing in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor or the vibration sensor is input, It is determined that the cheating by vibration is being performed, and the values of the magnet got counter and the vibration got counter are incremented by one. However, in the main control power-on process, after setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 and the setting change process of step S37 is ended (when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF in step S222 of the setting change process) After the determination, in step S38, the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for the specific area out of the entire area. For this reason, even if it is determined that the cheating by the magnet or the vibration is performed in the change permission state which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the values of the magnet and counter are added (incremented). By clearing the RAM at the end of the change permission state, the value of 0 (zero) is set (initialized) as the initial value to the values of the magnet got counter and the vibration got counter. Thus, at the end of the change permission state, the values of the magnet and counter are reset, but in the change permission state, the person who changes the setting of the set value changes the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b. When changing the setting of the setting value, the possibility that the person who performs the setting change unintentionally brings the magnet closer or applies vibration can not be excluded. For this reason, even if it is determined that cheating due to a magnet or vibration is performed, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the values of the magnet got counter and the vibration got counter are initially set. It is supposed to be

  Specifically, while the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, is not monitored for fraudulent activity using the gaming area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used. To monitor fraudulent activity. This is because, in the change permission state, the authorized worker who changes the setting of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b while closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. However, a person other than the authorized worker who changes the setting of the set value illegally moves the magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided, and the set value is changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of the occurrence of malfunction such as being done.

  On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the game ball B is made to win the winning opening by cheating, the detection signal is not input and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is a period that can not be performed, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the game area magnetic sensor.

  The setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state in the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, but also in the period from the timing t5 at which the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. To monitor fraudulent activity. That is, with regard to the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, it is normal time, or the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on with the setting key ON. Regardless of whether or not the change is permitted, monitoring is always performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided.

  Similarly, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, while monitoring of the cheating using the gaming area vibration sensor is not performed, the cheating using the setting operation portion vibration sensor is performed. I try to monitor the act. This is because, in the change permission state, the authorized worker who changes the setting of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b while closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. However, other than the authorized worker who performs setting change of the setting value, illegal operation is performed to apply vibration to the area provided with the setting change substrate 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting value is changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of the occurrence of malfunction such as being done.

  On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the game ball B is made to win the winning opening by cheating, the detection signal is not input and an illegal profit can be obtained. Since it is a period that can not be performed, it is not necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the game area vibration sensor.

  In addition to the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used also in a period to timing t5 at which the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. To monitor fraudulent activity. That is, with regard to the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, it is normal time, or the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, or the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON. Regardless of whether or not the change is permitted, monitoring is always performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided.

  In addition, in the change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting of the setting value is set by the output from the image, lamp and speaker of the effect display device 1600. An effect during setting change is notified to notify that the change is in progress. The first start port 2002 and the second start port are included in the change permission state (which may be a period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5) which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. When the game ball B wins in the winning openings such as 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, etc., even if the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the gaming ball B Is treated as invalid, but when such a detection signal is input, firing of the game ball B is not permitted by the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600. Even though it is a period in which the game ball B does not win in the winning opening, a warning effect C is issued to notify that the game ball B is winning in the winning opening improperly. There. The warning effect C is executed prior to notification during setting change and main body frame opening notification. That is, at the time of execution of the warning effect C, the warning effect C is to be performed with the highest priority without notification during setting change or notification of main body frame opening.

  Further, in a period including a change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (may be a change permission state which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4), the fraud using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor Monitoring of behavior, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, but when those sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the magnetism or vibration is detected by the image of the effect display device 1600 An abnormal occurrence effect A is executed to notify that it is an abnormal state due to the occurrence of. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (either the generation of the magnetism or the vibration is detected) or the abnormality is detected depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The notified portion (the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311 a are provided) is notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at timing t4 (which may be timing t5) which is the end time of the change permission state where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. The abnormality occurrence effect A is forcibly ended. This is because, in the change permission state, the authorized worker who performs setting change of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b, and performs the setting change when changing the setting of the setting value. It is not possible to rule out the possibility that the regular worker unintentionally brings the magnet closer or adds vibration. For this reason, even if it is determined that a cheating due to a magnet or vibration is performed, it is less necessary to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence effect A during execution is forcibly forced. It is supposed to end.

  As described above, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5, monitoring of the cheating using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, and monitoring of the cheating using the setting operation unit vibration sensor Even during normal times other than that period, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, monitoring of cheating using the gaming area magnetic sensor, using the setting operation unit vibration sensor Monitor fraudulent activity, and monitor fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the output from the image, lamp, or speaker of the effect display device 1600 causes an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration over a predetermined period. An abnormality occurrence effect B for notifying that there is an event is executed. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp and the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence effect A, only the image of the effect display device 1600 is used and the abnormality occurrence The presentation is performed in a mode that is less noticeable than the presentation B. This is because, in the change permission state, the authorized worker who performs setting change of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switching button 1311b, and performs the setting change when changing the setting of the setting value. This is because the possibility that the regular worker unintentionally brings the magnet closer or adds vibration can not be excluded. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, the game area magnetic sensor, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the game area vibration sensor detects an abnormality, the content of the abnormality (either magnetism or vibration The third distribution device 2550 whether it is the area where the occurrence of an abnormality has been detected or the area where the abnormality is detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided or the area in front of the It is intended to notify, etc.) of the area around.

  Further, as described above, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 which is a period from the timing t3 to the timing t5 after the power is turned on, the output from the image, lamp and speaker of the effect display device 1600 A main body frame open notification is performed to notify that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. Also, after the power is turned on, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased in the change permission state which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, and the image from the effect display device 1600 and the output from the lamp or speaker Notification during setting change (setting change related notification) for notifying that setting change of the setting value is being performed. Then, after the work of opening the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is performed, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on with the setting key ON to shift to the change permission state, but in the change permission state, the main body frame Notification during setting change is executed prior to opening notification, and when the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the change permission state, the main body frame The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over the release notification and the notification during setting change.

[26. Modified example of setting change such as winning probability etc.]
In the above-mentioned example, the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small hit gaming state by controlling to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state based on the result of the special lottery In the case of what controls to shift to the big hit gaming state has shown what to do the setting change such as the winning probability etc, but as shown in FIG. 207, do not provide the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, Alternatively, even if the game ball B is accepted in the first V prize port 2007 or the second V prize port 2008 during the small hit gaming state, the setting change such as the winning probability is performed for the one that is not transition controlled to the big hit gaming state. Good. Hereinafter, a modification of the setting change such as the winning probability in a pachinko machine in a mode in which the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not provided will be described as a second embodiment. The pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment is replaced with the prize winning opening 2006 of the pachinko machine 1 of the above-described example (the first V prize opening 2007 and the second V prize opening 2008 are disposed inside). The second large winning opening 2006A (in which the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not arranged) is provided, and the other configurations are the same.

[27-1. Game content of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the gaming ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit") advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 , A lottery for a special lottery result for generating "small hit", "time reduction (short time)", "probability change (certain change)" is performed. Then, the selected special lottery result is indicated (derived) to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, it is suggested (derived) in priority to the second special lottery result according to the reception in the second starting opening 2004. Do. The game ball B is accepted in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 without suggesting (leading) the special lottery result according to the acceptance to the second starting opening 2004 in priority (deduction) The special lottery result may be suggested (derived) in the order (or sequentially changed), or the first special lottery result according to the acceptance to the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance to the second starting port 2004 The second special lottery result may be suggested (derived) concurrently with the same period (simultaneous fluctuation).

  In addition, in the special lottery result which is drawn by the game ball B being accepted in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, “lost”, “small hit”, “2R positive variation big hit”, “15R positive variation big hit There are "15R Normal Big Hit" and so on. In the present embodiment, the second special lottery result includes "small hits", while the first special lottery result does not include "small hits". In addition, the lottery where the second special lottery result is elected as the "small hit" rather than the first special drawing result while including the "small hit" in both the first special drawing result and the second special drawing result The probability may be set high.

  If the special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are “small hits”, the second After a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s) elapses after the second large winning opening 2006A is in an open state where the game ball B can be received, a "small hit" game in which the game ball B is in a non-acceptable closed state is To be executed. Since the second large winning opening 2006A is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center character 2500, when "small hit" is drawn, "right-handed" and the first guidance The game ball B is thrown into the passage 2521. Also, in the small hit game of the second embodiment, although the period for which the second big winning opening 2006A is in the open state is shorter than that in the big hit game, the game is continued to hit the first guide passage 2521. For example, at least one game ball B can enter the second large winning opening 2006A in one small hit game. In addition, during the small hit game, the game state before the start of the small hit game state (such as a definite change state or a time saving state described later) is maintained, and after the small hit game, the game state before the start of the small hit game state continues. .

  The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are "15R definite variation big hit" or "15R normal big hit" In this case, after the big winning opening 2005 becomes open capable of receiving the game ball B, a predetermined time (for example, 29s) has elapsed, or a predetermined limit number (for example, 10) for the big winning opening 2005 Acceptance of the game ball B) of the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball B in an unacceptable closed state when any of the conditions is satisfied "big hit" A game is executed. Then, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are “15R normal big hit”, it is drawn by acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 after the big hit game is over. The fluctuation time of the special symbol for suggesting the player the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, the predetermined number of times of fluctuation (for example, the suggestion that the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery are added Transition control to "time saving state" to shorten the time until the next "hit" is drawn by shortening it than usual until reaching the number of times 100). In addition, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are "15R probability variation big hit" to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 until the next "big hit" after the end of the "big hit" game The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance of the game ball B are made shorter than usual for the variation time of the special symbol to indicate to the player, and the first special lottery result and the second The transition control to the “probability state (high probability state)” is performed to improve the probability that the special lottery result will be “hit”.

  If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are "2R probability variation big hit", the second large winning opening 2006A After the predetermined state (for example, 0.2 s) elapses after the game ball B can be opened, the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern for one round of opening and closing the game ball B into the unacceptable closed state) The “big hit” game is repeated twice. In addition, after the end of the "big hit" game, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 until the next "big hit" The probability change condition (high probability condition) improves the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be "hits" while shortening the variation time of the special symbol for suggesting the result to the player than usual. Transition control to).

  Since the second large winning opening 2006A and the large winning opening 2005 are mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center character 2500, the operation to hit the game ball B aiming the right side of the center character 2500 Can be played by the player. When game ball B is received in second large winning opening 2006A and large winning opening 2005 when second large winning opening 2006A and large winning opening 2005 are open, payout device 580 is performed by main control substrate 1310 and payout control substrate 633. A predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the second large winning opening 2006A and the large winning opening 2005 are capable of receiving the game ball B, by causing the second large winning opening 2006A and the large winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, many gaming balls B Can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

  The guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center product 2500 is easier to drive than the second guide passage 2522 on the first guide passage 2521 side, while the second guide passage 2522 Because it is less likely to be accepted by the large winning opening 2005 than the player side, it is possible to allow the player to select which passage to perform the striking operation, making it difficult for the player to get bored with various games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, only the game balls B driven into the first guide passage 2521 can be accepted in the second large winning opening 2006A.

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting from the start of the special drawing by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 until the special drawing result is suggested. Since the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started when the game ball B is accepted in the starting opening 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Ru. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  By the way, the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs. In the following, the blinking of the LED for a predetermined period of time to suggest the first special lottery result to the player is referred to as "variation display of the first special symbol" to suggest the second special lottery result to the player. The blinking of the LED for a predetermined period of time may be referred to as "the second special symbol variation display", and the first special lottery result may indicate to the player the combination pattern of the LED "stop symbol of the first special symbol" The combination pattern of the LEDs indicating the second special lottery result to the player may be referred to as "stop symbol of the second special symbol".

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a pattern row in which each pattern row is fluctuated and variably displayed in a state where three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Is sequentially displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows displayed in the stop pattern become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective symbols are stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is made. An advantageous gaming state (for example, "small hit" game, "big hit" game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the finalized image is The time until it is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 in the periphery control board 1510 according to the drawn special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, or the rotation operation can be inhibited. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the effect unit 3200, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game can do.

  Furthermore, in the player control type player operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 on the peripheral control substrate 1510, when the operation to be operated by the player is mistaken or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player of that. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation on the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed or the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates or the like. The effect display device 1600 displays that effect.

  Further, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003, in the main control board 1310, a drawing of a normal lottery result of whether or not the second starting opening door 2411 is opened in a predetermined pattern is performed. Then, it is suggested to the player for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time) on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 for the lottery result of the normal lottery. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol for suggesting to the player the result of the normal lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003 is “6000 s” in the normal state, but a definite change state And in the time saving state, it is "0.1 s".

  In addition, the probability of the popular drawing (probability that the normal lottery result will be "normal hit") is "10/10", and when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, "normal" in most cases And the second start opening door 2411 is opened. Also, when the normal lottery result is "normal hit", the period during which the second start door 2411 is in the open state is "0.1 s" in the normal state, while "2" in the definite change state and the time saving state. .0s ". Therefore, in the normal state, the second start opening door 2411 is only opened at the shortest interval of 6000s at the shortest, and the period of the open state is extremely short, so the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 is extremely It is considered difficult. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an unfair act aiming to receive the game ball B into the second start port 2004 in the normal state. On the other hand, in the definite change state, the second start opening door 2411 is not only frequently opened, but the open state is long, so the game ball B can be easily received in the second start opening 2004. . It should be noted that the probability per map may be made different from that in the normal state (low probability non-short state) and the time-shortened state (low probability time short state) or in the probability variation state (high probability time short state), for example Probability per diagram is set to "one-tenth", and probability of per-diagram is set to "one-tenth" in the time reduction state or the probability change state, and the acceptance of game ball B to the second starting opening 2004 is very limited in the normal state. In the time saving state or the definite changing state, the game ball B is easily received in the second starting opening 2004, and in the time reducing state or the definite changing state, the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004 is You may make it suppress the fraud which aimed at game ball B reception to the 2nd starting opening 2004 in a normal state, making reception occur frequently. In addition, while the probability per drawing is not elected as zero (0/11) in the normal state (low probability non-shorting state), while the time reduction state or the probability variation state is 10/10 Or “11/11” may be used to further suppress cheating intended to receive the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

  As described above, in the normal state, almost no acceptance of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 occurs, but the suggestion of the first special lottery result mainly based on the reception of the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 A special symbol variation display is performed. On the other hand, in the definite change state and the time reduction state, since the game ball B aiming operation on the right side of the center character 2500 is performed, the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 frequently occurs. The suggestion of the second special lottery result based on the reception of the game ball B in the starting opening 2004 (the variation display of the second special symbol) is performed.

  In addition, when game ball B is accepted in normal winning a prize opening 2003 during the period from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball B in the normal prize opening 2003, the suggestion of the normal lottery result The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the normal lottery result, which is drawn earlier, is completed. The number of pending normal lottery results is limited to 4 for the normal winning opening 2003. For more than that, even if the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, the normal lottery results are kept pending. Instead, I am trying to destroy it. It should be noted that, instead of this example, game ball B was accepted in normal winning opening 2003 from the start of the normal lottery to the reception of the result of the normal lottery by the acceptance of gaming ball B in normal winning opening 2003. In the case, the normal lottery result may be discarded without holding it. Thus, the game ball B aiming at the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 in the normal state is further prevented from being performed, and the second special lottery is performed in the normal state and the small hit is This can be prevented from occurring, and it is possible to further suppress an illegal act aiming to receive the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

  Further, the suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the ordinary winning opening 2003 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the special lottery result. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 directly controls to indicate the normal lottery result. The suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery in the function display unit 1400 makes the LED different from the LED suggesting the result of the special lottery turn on and off repeatedly to blink for a predetermined time, and then the ordinary lottery is performed by the combination of the lit LEDs Suggest a result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the game ball B aiming at the left side of the center character 2500 is hit in the normal state, and the first special based on the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002. The suggestion of the lottery result (the change display of the first special symbol) is performed. In the normal state, when the first special lottery result is "15R normal big hit", transition control to time saving state is performed after the end of the big hit game, and the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center character 2500 is hit The suggestion of the second special lottery result based on the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 (the variation display of the second special symbol) is performed. The time saving state is ended when the predetermined number of changes (100 times of the number of times of adding the suggestion of the first special drawing and the suggestion of the second special drawing) is reached without generating a big hit in the time saving state Transition control is performed, and the game ball B aiming at the left side of the center character 2500 is again shot, and the suggestion of the first special lottery result based on the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 (1st special Variation display of symbols) is performed.

  In addition, when the first special lottery result is "15R probability variation big hit" or "2R probability variation big hit" at the time of normal state or time saving state, it controls transition to the positive variation state (high probability state) after the end of the big hit game, center role A game ball B is shot for aiming at the right side of 2500, and a suggestion of a second special lottery result (variation display of a second special symbol) based on the reception of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is performed. The definite change state is continuously executed until the next big hit, and when the second special lottery result becomes “15R normal big hit” in the positive change state, it controls transition to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and the big hit occurs in the time saving state If it reaches a predetermined number of times of change (the number of times of the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery added 100 times), the time saving state is ended and the transition control to the normal state is performed.

  Also, when the second special lottery result is "15R probability variation big hit" or "2R probability variation big hit" in the definite variation state, transition control to the definite variation state (high probability state) is performed again after the end of the big hit game. As described above, the definite change state continues until it becomes "15R normal big hit", and when it becomes "15R normal big hit", it is controlled to shift to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game.

  In addition, when only the first special lottery result is suspended with no pending second special lottery result, or when there is no suspended second special lottery result, the game ball B is sent to the first starting opening 2002 If is accepted, the suggestion of the first special lottery result (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed also in the time saving state or the definite variation state. And when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal big hit" at the time of time saving state or definite changing state, it controls transition to time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and the first special drawing result is "15R at time decreasing state or definite changing state If it becomes a definite variation big hit "or" 2R definite variation big hit ", it controls transition to a definite variation state after the end of the big hit game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the probability (small hit probability) of being a "small hit" is set to be very high compared to the big hit probability as a second special lottery result (for example, 10 of the big hit probability About twice). In addition, during the time saving state or in the definite changing state, the reception of the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004 frequently occurs and the second special lottery is performed, so the small hit frequently occurs and the second big winning The mouth 2006A is open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s).

  That is, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, small hits occur frequently in the second special lottery at the time of a short time or a definite change state, and winning balls exceeding the shot amount are obtained little by little even if they are not big hits. It becomes possible, and the more prize balls can be won as the time saving state or the probability changing state lasts longer. Therefore, not only the gaming ball B does not decrease in the time saving state or the definite changing state, but the player's ball can be increased by the winning balls obtained by the generated small hits. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game balls in the normal state where the consumption of the gaming ball B is large, and the consumption of the gaming ball B is small. It is possible to control in a completely different state from the game executed in the short time state and the definite change state in increasing time.

[27-2. Setting change of winning probability etc. of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probability of a big hit, a small hit, etc. which is changed according to the set value will be described.

  Also in the second embodiment, as in the above-described example, a table corresponding to the setting value is selected as a table (a determination table for winning, a big hit symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, etc.) used in a special lottery or the like. A table used in the special lottery or the like is provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least a part of the values is different.

  As shown in FIG. 208A, in the present embodiment, the “big hit probability” and the “small hit probability” are set corresponding to each of the set value 1 to the set value 6.

  In addition, the jackpot probability common to the first special lottery and the second special lottery (proportion of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot was won in the judgment table) is set to a different value for each set value, The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state and time saving state (low probability state) is “1/319” at the setting value 1 and “1/309” at the setting value 2 and the setting value 3 "1/299", "1/2/289" for the setting value 4, "1/279" for the setting value 5, and "1/269" for the setting value 6. Also, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the definite variation state (high probability state) is “1/30” at the setting value 1 and “1/40” at the setting value 2 and the setting value 3 “1/50”, “1/60” at setting value 4, “1/70” at setting value 5, and “1/80” at setting value 6.

  As described above, in the normal state and the short time state (low probability state), the jackpot probability is increased as the setting value becomes higher, but in the positive change state, the setting value becomes higher contrary to the normal state and the time short state. The big hit probability is about to be low. That is, while the jackpot probability of the setting value 6 is the highest in the normal state and the time saving state, the jackpot probability of the setting value 1 is the lowest in the positive change state. In addition, the jackpot probability is not limited to what is proportional to or inversely proportional to the setting value, and for some, the jackpot probability to be set to a setting value lower than the setting value is greater than the jackpot probability to be set to any setting value. It may be set to be higher.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (A), the small hit probability in the first special lottery (the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won in the determination table) is “0” in all set values. And it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by small hit in the normal state and time-shortened state, while the small hit probability in the second special lottery (small hit in the judgment table) The ratio of the small hit judgment value (indicating the winning) is “1/3” common to all setting values, and it is a very high probability compared to the big hit probability, so it is small in the definite change state or time saving state Hits occur frequently and it is easy to get a winning ball.

  In the definite change state, since the big hit probability is the lowest at the set value 6, the occurrence of the big hit is less likely to occur than the low set value (delay), and since the positive change state continues over a long period of time, the set value is high. The number of small hits that occur before the big hit is increased. That is, the higher the set value, the more the winning balls can be obtained by the small hit, and the next big hit is also promised, and the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage. In other words, although the next big hit is promised regardless of which setting value in the definite change state, the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained other than the big hit is different for each setting value, and the big hit The expected value of the number of prize balls that can be acquired outside is increasing.

  In addition, without taking the continuation period of the definite change state until the next big hit, the same as the normal state and the time saving state, the predetermined number of times of change (the number of times of suggestion 100 times combining the suggestion of the first special lottery and the second special lottery) By setting the jackpot probability to be higher as the set value becomes higher while increasing the frequency of occurrence of the jackpot as the set value becomes higher. It is also good (so-called round and round change). In this case, although the next big hit is not promised, the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained other than the big hit is different for each set value, and the higher the set value is, the number of winning balls that can be obtained other than the big hit Although the expectation value is increased, it is possible to realize game characteristics which are expected to cause a big hit to occur before the termination condition of the probability change state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve interest. In addition, in realizing such game characteristics, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time-shortened state is set so as not to set the setting difference (equalized by 1/319) Only the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state may have the setting difference as described above.

  In addition, in order to realize the game characteristics of the second embodiment, in the case of a set value lower than a specific set value, while making the jackpot probability in the probability change state higher than the small hit probability in the second special lottery, If the set value is higher than the specific set value, the jackpot probability in the probability change state may be made lower than the small hit probability in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the short time state (low probability state) is set to “1/250” for the set value 1 and “240 for the set value 2”. "1/1/2" at setting value 3 and "1/180" at setting value 4 and "1/170" at setting value 5 and "1/160" at setting value 6 The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the definite variation state (high probability state) is “1/25” in the setting value 1 and “1/24” in the setting value 2 and “3 in the setting value 3”. "1/23", setting value 4 "1/18", setting value 5 "1/17", setting value 6 "1/16", while small in the second special lottery The probability of winning (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit is won in the judgment table) is set to “one-twentieth” common to all setting values. It can be.

  In the case of such a configuration, the set values 1 to 3 have a probability that the small hit probability in the second special lottery is lower than the big hit probability in the definite change state, and therefore the prize balls obtainable by the small hit in the definite change state While the number is relatively small, in the setting values 4 to 6, the small win probability in the second special lottery is a probability higher than the big hit probability in the definite variant state, so an award which can be obtained by the small hit in the definite variant state The number of balls will be relatively large. In particular, when the set value is 4 or more, in the definite change state, the big hit probability becomes lower than the small hit probability and the occurrence of the big hit becomes difficult to occur, and the probability change state lasts for a long time. You can create a game that gives a sense of expectation that you can get a ball. In addition, the history information of the probability of a big hit that occurred in a definite change state after turning on the power and the probability of a small hit that occurred in a positive change state is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM or the like) of the peripheral control unit 1511 By displaying various hit probability information based on the history information on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to make the player notice that the probability of the small hit is higher than the probability of the big hit in the definite change state. By giving the player a sense of expectation that "the set value is 4 or more", it is possible to impart new enjoyment and interest not found in the past during the continuation of the game in the definite change state. In addition, the player is told that "the set value is 4 or more" as the player feels that the definite change state continues for a long period and that many small balls can be obtained by the small hit in the definite change state. It can also be made to recognize, and in this respect it is possible to impart new enjoyment and interest not found in the past. As described above, with a set value higher than the specific set value (set value 4 in the present embodiment), by changing the small hit into a game feature capable of acquiring many prize balls, game entertaining Can be further improved.

  Further, as another embodiment, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery is made higher as the setting value becomes higher in the definite variation state, and the second special drawing is made as the setting value becomes higher. You may make it a small hit probability in Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time-shortened state (low probability state) “1/319”, “1/309 at setting value 2”, “1/299” at setting value 3, “1/289” at setting value 4, “1/279” at setting value 5 ” The setting value 6 is "1/269". In addition, the small hitting probability of the positive variation state (high probability state) is “1/31. 9” for setting value 1, “1/30. 9” for setting value 2, “29.9 minutes for setting value 3. The setting value 4 is “1⁄28.9”, the setting value 5 is “1 / 27.9”, and the setting value 6 is “1 / 26.9”. As described above, in the definite change state, the big hit probability of all the set values is increased tenfold as compared with the normal state and the short time state.

  Also, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is "one seventh" at setting value 1, "one sixth" at setting value 2, "one fifth" at setting value 3, and "setting value 4". “1⁄4”, “1⁄3” at setting value 5 and “1⁄2” at setting value 6 are used. Therefore, while small hit is generated once at every set value 1 when the second special lottery is performed 7 times, small set is set at 1 when the second special lottery is performed twice. The frequency of occurrence of small hits will be increased. That is, in the setting value 6, small hits occur more frequently than in the setting value 1 and it is easy to obtain a prize ball by the small hits. The expected number of balls is getting higher.

  Moreover, in addition to the setting change of the big hit probability and the small hit probability described above, or without changing the setting of the big hit probability and the small hit probability etc., by changing the determination ratio of the big hit type for each set value It may be changed. As described above, in the definite change state and the short time state, the second special lottery may be mainly executed and a small hit may occur, while in the normal state, the first special lottery may mainly be performed and a small hit may not occur. Therefore, the degree of advantage changes according to the duration of the definite change state or the short time state.

  Also, even in the definite variation state, as in the normal state and the short time state, the jackpot probability increases as the set value increases, and the small hit probability increases as the set value increases. It is also possible to perform a so-called fall lottery in which whether or not to end the definite variation state when the special lottery result becomes “off” during the definite variation state is performed. Further, in this case, the fall probability (the probability of ending the positive change state) may be made different for each set value, or the fall probability may be made different for each set value.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 208 (C), "one-hundredth" common to all set values may be used as the fall probability in the high probability state, and in this case, the fall lottery result terminates the definite change state. Although the probability of showing the is not different for each setting value, the jackpot probability is improved as the setting value becomes higher as shown in FIG. The degree of advantage is changed so that the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage.

  Also, the fall probability of the high probability state may be changed for each set value. For example, as shown in FIG. 208 (D), the fall probability is “1/80” for setting value 1 and setting value 2, “1/90” for setting value 3 and setting value 4, and setting value 5 and setting A value of 6 may be set to "one hundredth".

  In this case, while the big hit probability is "1 / 3.1 / 1" at setting value 1, the fall probability is "1/80" and the big hit probability is about 2.5 times higher than the fall probability. On the other hand, at the setting value 6, the big hit probability is "one-half of 26.9" while the falling probability is "one-hundredth" and the big-hit probability is about 3.7 of the falling probability. It has been doubled. That is, by increasing the probability of winning a big hit before a fall lottery result is obtained which improves the big hit probability as the set value increases and terminates the probability change state, the degree of advantage increases as the set value increases. There is.

  In addition, when the falling lottery result for terminating the definite variation state is obtained during the definite variation state, the second special drawing is performed while returning the big hit probability from the probability of the definite variation state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability). Control for shortening the variation time of the special symbol to suggest the result to the player may be continued, and in this case, the number of variations after the end of the big hit game is a predetermined number of times (for example, the first special The control may be ended and transition control may be performed to the normal state based on reaching the suggestion count of 100 times (sum of the suggestions of the lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery). That is, when a fall lottery result for terminating the definite variation state is obtained during the definite variation state, the definite variation state may be terminated and transition control to the time saving state may be performed. In addition, when the fall lottery result to end the definite change state is obtained, the number of times of fluctuation after the end of the big hit game is already a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times After reaching the final variation state, the transition control to the normal state may be performed without the transition control to the short time state.

  In addition, when the falling lottery result for terminating the definite variation state is obtained during the definite variation state, the big hit probability is returned from the probability of the definite variation state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special drawing result is The variation time of the special symbol for suggesting to the player may be returned to the normal variation time. That is, when a falling lottery result for ending the positive variation state is obtained during the positive variation state, the positive variation state may be ended to shift control to the normal state. In this case, the falling lottery may be performed even in the time saving state, and when the falling lottery result for ending the time saving state is obtained in the time saving state, the time saving state is ended to shift to the normal state. You may make it control.

  In the example shown in FIG. 208 (E), after being controlled to shift to the definite change state after the end of the big hit game, the occurrence ratio of the big hit type that the positive change state will end when the special lottery result becomes “big hit” By changing it, the degree of advantage is changed. Specifically, when the first special lottery result mainly executed in the normal state (low probability non-short state) is "big hit", the occurrence ratio of the big hit type is made the same at all set values, "2R probability variation is less than" 15R probability variation big hit "" 15R probability variation big hit "controlled to transition to high probability state after the end of the big hit game and the number of winning balls are controlled to transition to high probability status after the end of big hit game The occurrence ratio of “big hit” is “40/100” and the predetermined number of changes after the end of the big hit game (for example, the number of times of suggestion 100 combining the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery) The generation ratio of “15R normal big hit”, which is controlled to shift to the short time state until reaching the time of occurrence, is “20/100”.

  On the other hand, when the second special lottery result mainly executed in the definite variation state and the short time state is the "big hit", the occurrence ratio of the big hit type is different for each set value, and in the set value 1, The occurrence ratio of “15R probability variation big hit” controlled to transition to high probability state after the end of the big hit game is “45/100”, and the number of winning balls of those controlled to shift to high probability state after the end of the big hit game The generation ratio of “2R probability variation big hit” less than “15R probability variation big hit” is “15/100”, and controls transition to a time-saving state until reaching a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game The generation ratio of “15R Normal Big Hit” is “40/100”.

  In setting value 2, the occurrence ratio of “15R probability variation big hit” controlled to transition to high probability state after the end of the big hit game is “100/46”, and it is transition prize controlled to the high probability state after the end of big hit game The generation ratio of "2R probability variation big hit", where the number of balls won is smaller than "15R probability variation big hit", is set to "19/100", and after the end of the big hit game, a predetermined number of changes (for example, the first special lottery suggestion and The occurrence ratio of “15R Normal Big Hit”, which is controlled to shift to a time-saving state until reaching the number of suggestions 100 times) obtained by adding the suggestions of the second special lottery, is set to “35/100”.

  In the setting value 3, the occurrence ratio of “15R probability variation big hit” controlled to transition to high probability state after the end of the big hit game is “47/100”, and it is an award of what is controlled to high probability state after the end of the big hit game The generation ratio of "2R probability variation big hit", where the number of balls won is smaller than "15R probability variation big hit", is "23/100", and after the end of the big hit game a predetermined number of changes (for example, the first special lottery suggestion and The occurrence ratio of “15R Normal Big Hit”, which is controlled to shift to a time-saving state until reaching the number of suggestions 100 times) obtained by adding the suggestions of the second special lottery, is “30/100”.

  In the setting value 4, the occurrence ratio of “15R probability variation big hit” controlled to transition to high probability state after the end of the big hit game is “48th of 100th”, and it is the prize that is controlled to transition to high probability state after the end The generation ratio of "2R probability variation big hit", where the number of balls won is smaller than "15R probability variation big hit", is "27/100", and after the end of the big hit game a predetermined number of changes (for example The occurrence ratio of “15R Normal Big Hit”, which is controlled to shift to a time-saving state until reaching the number of suggestions 100 times) obtained by adding the suggestions of the second special lottery, is “25/100”.

  In setting value 5, the occurrence ratio of “15R probability variation big hit” controlled to transition to high probability state after the end of the big hit game is “49th of 100”, and it is the prize that is controlled to transition to high probability state after the end of big hit game The generation ratio of "2R probability variation big hit", where the number of balls won is smaller than "15R probability variation big hit", is "31/100" and a predetermined number of changes after the end of the big hit game (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of “15R Normal Big Hit”, which is controlled to shift to a time-saving state until reaching the number of suggestions 100 times) obtained by adding the suggestions of the second special lottery, is “20/100”.

  In setting value 6, the occurrence ratio of “15R probability variation big hit” controlled to transition to high probability state after the end of the big hit game is “50 out of 100”, and the prize of what is controlled to high probability state after the end of the big hit game The generation ratio of "2R probability variation big hit", where the number of balls won is smaller than "15R probability variation big hit", is "35/100", and after the end of the big hit game, a predetermined number of changes (for example, suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of “15R Normal Big Hit”, which is controlled to shift to a time-saving state until reaching the number of suggestions 100 times) obtained by adding the suggestions of the second special lottery, is “15/100”.

  As described above, when the second special lottery result mainly executed in the definite variation state and the short time state becomes the "big hit", the predetermined number of changes after the end of the big hit game (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the second Change the occurrence ratio of “15R Normal Big Hit”, which is controlled to transition to the short time state until reaching the suggestion count 100 times that added the suggestion of the special lottery, change for each setting value, and “15 R Normal Big Hit” occurrence as the setting value is higher By reducing the ratio, it is difficult to end the probability change state. As a result, the higher the set value, the more likely it is that transition to a definite change state will be difficult to end, and the number of occurrences of a big hit can be increased, and a prize ball based on a small hit generated during a positive change state It becomes possible to acquire. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expectation value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the definite variation state.

  In addition, while the generation ratio of "15R normal big hit" is reduced as the setting value is higher, the generation ratio of "2R probability big hit" is higher than "15R probability big hit" to suppress the number of winning balls, It is possible to suppress excessive benefits for the disabled.

[27-3. Setting value indication effect of the second embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the expected value of the winning balls obtainable in the definite variation state and the expected value of the number of small hits which can be won are different for each set value. Specifically, in FIG. 208 (A), since the jackpot probability of the definite change state of the setting value 1 is "1/30" and the small hit probability is "1/3", after the jackpot game is over. The expected value of the number of small hits that can be won after the control to the definite change state until the next big hit is "9 times". In addition, since one game ball B is allowed to enter the second large winning opening 2006A in one small hit game, the expected value of the award ball obtainable in one small hit game Is "15 balls". That is, in the case of the set value 1, the expectation value of the winning balls obtainable by the small hit in the definite variation state is “135 balls” of “9 times × 15 balls”. Similarly, in the case of set value 2, the expected value of the prize ball obtainable by the small hit in the definite change state is "195 balls" of "13 times × 15 balls", and obtained by the small hit in the definite change state in the set value 3 Expected value of possible prize balls is “16 balls × 15 balls” “240 balls”, and in the case of setting value 4, expected values of prize balls obtainable by small hit in definite variation state are “19 times × 15 balls” Expected value of winning ball that can be acquired by small hit in definite variation state in case of set value 5 is “345 sphere” of “23 times × 15 balls”, small hit in definite variation state in case of set value 6 The expected value of the winning balls that can be acquired by the player is “26 balls × 15 balls” and “390 balls”.

  Also, in FIG. 208 (B), the expected value of the winning ball obtainable by the small hit in the definite variation state in the case of the set value 1 is “60 spheres” of “4 times × 15 spheres” and the definite variation state in the case of the set value 2 The expected value of the prize ball obtainable by the small hit is "75 balls of 5 times × 15 balls", and in the case of the set value 3, the expected value of the prize ball obtainable by the small hit in the definite variation state is "5 times The expected value of the winning ball that can be acquired by a small hit in the definite variation state in the case of “75 balls” of “15 balls” × 15 balls is “105 balls” of “7 times × 15 balls”, and in the case of set value 5 Expected value of winning balls obtainable by small hit in definite variation state is "9 times × 15 balls" "135 balls", Expected value of winning balls obtainable by small hit in definite variation state in the case of setting value 6 " It is "195 balls" with 13 times x 15 balls.

  As described above, the expected value of the winning balls obtainable by the small hit in the definite variation state according to the set value and the expected value of the number of small hits which can be won are different (partly the same in FIG. 208 (B) Therefore, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game, the setting value may be estimated according to the number of prize balls obtained in the small hit game and the number of times the small hit is won before the next big hit. it can. In addition, an effect (a set value suggestion effect) may be performed that suggests a set value according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game, the number of times the small hit is won, and the like.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 209, the peripheral control unit 1510 displays a gauge unit having 1 to 6 six divisions 1600 d so as to correspond to the six levels of setting values on the effect display device 1600 as setting value suggestive effects, The gauge section is colored from the initial display mode as the number of winning balls obtained in the small hit increases by coloring the scales of the gauge section according to the number of winning balls (number of payouts) by winning in the second big winning hole 2006A. It may be colored (increasing the coloring indication between the graduations) to indicate that the setting value is high by coloring between all the graduations of the gauge part. Specifically, when controlling to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 209 (A), the scale 1600d of the initial display mode, the character 1600b and the balloon 1600c in which the words of the character are displayed It is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this initial display mode, assuming that the number of winning balls obtained is “0”, “setting” is performed by coloring and displaying only the leftmost one of the six scales as the corresponding setting value. In addition to suggesting that the value is 1 or more, the balloon 1600 c displays “set value ...?” To suggest to the player through the character 1600 b that the gauge unit suggests the set value. .

  When it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of award balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value in the set value 1 and is within the expected value range in the set value 2 In addition, the second scale from the left side of the six scales in the gauge section is further colored (in a state in which the first and second scales are displayed in color from the left side), which means that the set value is 2 or more. In addition to suggesting it, as a line of the character 1600b, "2 or more?" Is displayed on the balloon 1600c to more clearly indicate that it is the set value 2 or more (FIG. 209 (B)).

  In addition, if it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of award balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value in the set value 2 and falls within the expected value range in the set value 3 Further, the third division from the left side among the six divisions in the gauge section is further colored (in a state where the first to third from the left side is colored display) to be "a set value of 3 or more" While suggesting, "3 or more?" Is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly indicate that it is the set value of 3 or more (FIG. 209C).

  In addition, if it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of award balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value in the set value 3 and becomes within the expected value range in the set value 4 Further, the fourth division from the left side of the six divisions in the gauge section is further colored (in a state in which the first to fourth divisions are displayed in color from the left side), indicating that the set value is 4 or more. While suggesting, “4 or more !?” is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly indicate that the set value is 4 or more (FIG. 209 (D)).

  In addition, if it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of award balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value in the set value 4 and falls within the expected value range in the set value 5 Further, the fifth division from the left side of the six divisions in the gauge section is further colored (in a state where the first to fifth divisions are displayed colored from the left side) to be "set value 5 or more" In addition to suggesting, "5 exceed ??" is displayed on the balloon 1600c as a line of the character 1600b to more clearly indicate that the setting value is 5 or more (FIG. 209E).

  In addition, if it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1510 that the number of award balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value in the set value 5 and becomes within the expected value range in the set value 6 Further, from the left to the sixth of the six divisions in the gauge section, it is indicated by coloring (in a state where all the divisions are colored) to indicate that it is "set value 6", and As a line of speech, “I did it! 6 may be !!!” is displayed on the balloon 1600 c to more clearly indicate that the setting value is 6 (FIG. 209 (F)).

  And from the state where the sixth division from the left side of the six divisions in the gauge section is colored (in a state where all the gradations are colored), since the display at the final stage has already been reached, the big hit The display change of the gauge section by the number of prize balls paid out in the small hit game after the game is not performed, but the next big hit game is started, or the finish condition is satisfied for the condition with a definite change condition end condition Until this, all tick marks are colored and displayed.

  In addition, in the state where all six scales in the gauge part are displayed in color, additional setting suggestion may be made separately, for example, in the state where all six scales in the gauge part are displayed in color, a big hit game When paying out a prize ball in a small hit game later, based on the detection of entering the ball in the second large winning opening 2006A, the maximum setting decision to notify the player that it is the highest setting (setting value 6) definitively A special effect lottery may be performed to execute the effect. Specifically, in a state in which all six scales in the gauge section are displayed in color, a special effect drawing is performed in which the winning is performed at 1/1000 every time the second large winning opening 2006A is detected to enter the ball. By winning, the voice output of the special mode (Congratulations of setting 6! Message voice), various lamp emission of the door frame 3 in the special mode (lamp emission in rainbow color using seven colors), effect display device 1600 It can be exemplified that the highest setting decision effect consisting of the special display (the message display of the setting 6 congratulations!) At the same time is performed at the same time. By executing the highest setting decision effect in a state where all the scales are color-coded in this way, a sense of satisfaction is given by the effect relating to the setting suggestion performed earlier, and then the player is not bored, and it is further improved. Can be given to the player, and the game can be further enhanced.

  Also, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is made before displaying all the scales in a colored manner, the display mode of the gauge unit is cleared after the big hit, thereby causing a big hit and a big hit game. In order to suggest the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 by executing setting value indication production every time when it is controlled to shift to a definite variation state later, the actual setting value is estimated by statistics of setting values suggested by setting value indication presentation You will be able to That is, the setting value may be different from the expectation value of the winning balls that can be obtained according to the setting value and the number of winning balls obtained by the small hit during this probability changing state, if the definite changing state is executed only once. Although it is difficult to determine the number of prize balls obtained by a small hit every probability change state between big hits, the ratio near the specific number of balls will increase, so the specific number of balls is the expected value. By comparing, it becomes possible to estimate the set value. In this example, it can be inferred that the setting value at the highest suggested ratio in the setting value indication effect performed a plurality of times is the actual setting value.

  It should be noted that the display mode of the gauge unit may be taken over until the definite change state ends without clearing the display mode of the gauge unit when the jackpot is hit. Also, in this case, the six divisions in the gauge unit are 1 or more as the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in one definite variation state or the number of small hits that can be generated in one definite variation state according to the set value. It is possible that all graduations are not colored in the probability change state of times. As a result, since the set value can be suggested based on the number of winning balls, the number of small hits, etc. acquired in a long-term positive variation state, the reliability of the suggested set value can be improved.

  In addition, the above-described various setting value suggestion effects are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511 and are awarded by the small hit game executed in a definite variation state of the period from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit The suggested settings and actual settings may differ because they are based on numbers and not on actual settings. Note that information (setting value information) relating to setting values may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and in this case, an award obtained in a small hit game after a big hit game as a setting value suggestion effect. In addition to the number of balls, the set value may be suggested based on the set value information. Specifically, when the number of winning balls obtained in the small hit game after the big hit game exceeds the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the suggestion mode of the set value suggestion effect is not changed The set value or set value information indicated by the set value information by lottery or the like if the number of winning balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game is less than the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information. It may be made to change to the suggestion mode of the setting value suggestion presentation according to the setting value below the setting value shown by. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to increase the reliability of the setting value indication effect, and to allow attention to the setting value indicated by the setting value indication effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1510 grasps the number of winning balls paid out in the small hit game after the big hit game, and the peripheral control unit 1510 when the total number of winning balls exceeds the expected value in each setting value. When it is judged, the display of the gauge unit is changed to indicate the setting in the definite change state, but the setting indication in the positive change state is not limited to such a form, and may be as follows.

  For example, in the case where there are six stages of gauge sections as described above, each time the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the prize ball paid out by the small hit has reached a certain value, one graduation 1600d is colored. The player may be suggested to have a high setting by achieving the coloring of the final-stage graduation 1600d. In this case, it is preferable to achieve the coloring of the scale 1600d of the final stage on the basis of the expectation value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the small hit game after the hit game with the set value 6; If the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the small hit game after the hit with the value 6 is "195 balls", the payout of "195 balls + alpha balls (α <195)" is colored in the scale 1600d of the final stage It can be illustrated that it is the achievement timing.

  In addition, based on the peripheral control unit 1510 determining that the number of times the result of the second special lottery results in the small hitting result has reached a certain value, not based on the winning balls paid out by the small hitting, 1 Coloring the two graduations 1600d and achieving the coloring of the graduations 1600d at the final stage (for example, reaching 80 times the number of times the result of the second special lottery results in a small hit etc.) It may be suggested to the player that there is a certain. In this case, the achievement difficulty changes due to the relationship between the jackpot probability and the small-hit probability in the definite variation state at the actually set setting value. And depending on the display condition of the gauge section (for example, the condition to reach the final stage with coloring of one more scale), the result of the second special lottery will be smaller hit than the big hit, in expectation of setting value suggestion Can also provide new game features that pay attention to

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a new game in which the setting value is estimated according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game after the big hit game and the number of small win games Can provide sex.

[28. Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machine of Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment which is partially different from the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 106 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. explain. FIG. 210 is a front view of a pachinko machine of a third embodiment which is partially different from the pachinko machine of FIG. FIG. 211 is a right side view of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and FIG. 212 is a left side view of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 213 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment as viewed from the front.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 openably and closably, and a door frame 3 The main unit frame 4 supports the main unit 4 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door unit 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit by a player. In the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, the appearance of the door frame 3 is largely different from that of the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the main configuration of the other outer frame 2 and main body frame 4 is substantially the same. It is.

  The main changes in the third embodiment from the first embodiment are the grille member 46A of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2, the cylinder lock 130A of the door frame 3, the handle unit 180A and the handle cover unit 290, The plate 202, the ball lending operation unit 220, the appearance of the effect operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the appearance of the door frame top unit 450, the tank rail 553A of the dispensing base unit 550 in the main frame 4. , A base unit 660 of the substrate unit 620A, and the like.

[28-1. Outer frame lower assembly in the third embodiment]
Next, the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, as viewed from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 of this embodiment is the same as the outer frame lower assembly 40 shown in FIG. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 spaced apart to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  Outer frame lower assembly 40 connects lower ends of outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20 separated from each other in the left and right direction and extends to the left and right. A box-shaped front plate member 42 disposed forward of the frame 41 and extending laterally along the outer frame lower member 41 and having an open rear, and attached to the rear side of the front plate 42 A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and extending forward and open, and a ball meshing prevention mechanism formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43 And 44.

  The front curtain member 42 closes the open rear side with the rear curtain plate member 43 so as to cooperate with the rear curtain plate member 43 to be part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 The space 40a is formed. The front curtain member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front and back direction and extending in the left and right direction on the front surface near the right end.

  The rear curtain plate member 43 cooperates with the front curtain plate member 42 to form the inner curtain plate space 40 a which becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 by attaching the front curtain plate member 42 to the front. The rear curtain plate member 43 has a cylindrical connection cylindrical portion 43a which extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward and communicates with the inner curtain plate space 40a at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. The connecting cylindrical portion 43 a is inclined such that the upper end thereof is positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear curtain plate 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  Further, the lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front and rear curtain plate members 42 and 43 at a distance from each other and the opening 42a of the front curtain plate member 42 at the rear side. A port-like member having a flat plate-like grill member 46A closed from the bottom and two cylinders attached to the inside of the front curtain member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46A And a frame-like seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43 a of the rear curtain plate member 43.

  The grille member 46A is in the form of a strip extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of vanes 46b spaced apart in the up-down direction. The wing portion 46 b is provided in an inclined state such that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 224). The grill member 46A allows air communication between the inside (the inner space 40a of the curtain) and the outside of the front member 42 of the curtain through the gap between the blade portions 46b.

  The port member 47 makes the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46A by two cylinders. In the port member 47, two cylinders are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonate and amplify the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (in the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (player's side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear a deep bass.

  The seal member 48 is compressed between the upper end of the connection cylindrical portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Thus, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the speaker can be prevented from leaking between the connecting cylindrical portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

  According to the grille member 46A of the present embodiment, the handle cover unit 290 located obliquely upward on the front by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b, the air vibration discharged to the outside from the curtain inner space 40a by the main frame speaker 622 It can be directed into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180A is accommodated, through the lower notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player pushes a finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device for the game ball B), the main body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending a wind to the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

[28-2. Cylinder lock of door frame in the third embodiment]
The cylinder lock 130A in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 215 (a) is a front perspective view of a cylinder lock in a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment, and FIG. 215 (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a cylinder lock in a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2 (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. FIG. 216 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment as viewed from the front, and FIG. 216 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment It is the disassembled perspective view seen. FIG. 217 (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment as viewed from the front, and FIG. 217 (b) is a state rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock shown by these, and (c) is explanatory drawing of the cylinder lock shown in the state rotated 90 degree | times to clockwise direction from the state of (a).

  The cylinder lock 130A is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115A of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the body It is used for opening and closing locking with the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130A has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending in the front and rear direction, a key hole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular hole provided in the rear of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132. And a rotation transmitting member 133 which rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  More specifically, the cylinder lock 130A is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131, and rotates together with the first cam member 134 which rotates together with the regular key inserted in the key hole 132, and the cylinder mounting frame 115A. And a second cam member 135 rotatably mounted about an axis in the front-rear direction at a portion lower than the cylinder main body 131 at the upper portion, and the upper end side rotates at a portion on the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 A strip-shaped first arm 136 mounted on the lower end side of the second cam member 135 so as to be rotatably mounted at a position on the right of the rotation center of the second cam member 135 It is rotatably mounted at a position lower than the center and has a lower end rotated at a position lower than the rotation center of the second cam member 135 A second arm 137 strip-like attached to the ability, and a.

  In addition, the cylinder lock 130A is a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets rotatably mounted on the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 at the upper and lower ends of the rear cover 138 attached to the 115A and the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, respectively. 139, and.

  The upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably mounted from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115A, and the rotation transmission member 133 is mounted integrally rotatably on the rear side of the cylinder mounting frame 115A across the front surface. The lower end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side of the first arm 136 in front of the first arm 136.

  In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated at an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axes. doing. Also, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the center of rotation than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

  The rear cover 138 has a screw whose upper end is not shown in a state in which the shaft portion 138a protruding cylindrically from the lower ends of the left and right side surfaces is locked to the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115A. As a result, the cylinder mounting frame 115A is detachably mounted.

  In the cylinder lock 130A, a cylinder mounting frame 115A, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137 are formed of metal. .

  Subsequently, the operation of the cylinder lock 130A of the present embodiment will be described. In the cylinder lock 130 of the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 216 (c) and (d), the rotation transmitting member 133 is provided on the axial center of the cylinder body 131, The cylinder lock 130A of the present embodiment (the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment) is a rotation transmitting member at a position separated downward from the axial center of the cylinder main body 131 as shown in FIGS. 216 (a) and (b). 133 are provided.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 217 (a), in the cylinder lock 130A, the upper and lower end sides of the first arm 136 are the centers of rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower end sides of the second arm 137 are attached to portions below the respective centers of rotation in the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated at an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state, in the clockwise direction and in the counterclockwise direction, by the regular key.

  In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the key hole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will be. At this time, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. In the second arm 137, the upper end side is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is reversed from the second arm 137. The force to rotate in the clockwise direction hardly acts.

  In this manner, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 is counterclockwise. By rotating in the direction, the rotation transmitting member 133 is rotated together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward by the rotation of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134, and the first cam member It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction with the rotation center of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 decreases, while the force acting upward on the second arm 137 Increase the power of

  Therefore, when the first cam member 134 rotates 45 degrees from the normal state in the counterclockwise direction, the force of the second arm 137 acting upward relative to the first arm 136 increases. The second cam member 135 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 217 (b)).

  When the key is rotated 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state and rotated 90 degrees in the clockwise direction to return to the normal state, the operation reverse to the above is performed. It will work.

  On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the key hole 132 from the normal state, the upper end side is the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 As the first arm 136 attached to the lower side moves downward, the second arm 137 mounted at the upper end side below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, in the first arm 136, the upper end side is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise by the first arm 136 In the second arm 137, the upper end side is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 while the second arm 137 causes the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise. There is almost no force acting to rotate in the direction of.

  In this manner, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force is mainly transmitted through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise. As a result, the rotation transmitting member 133 is rotated together with the second cam member 135. The force transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 And the distance between the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 in the lateral direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, the force for rotating the second cam member 135 in the first arm 136 decreases while the second cam member 135 decreases. In the arm 137, the force to rotate the second cam member 135 is increased.

  Therefore, if the first cam member 134 rotates 45 degrees clockwise from the normal state, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 rather than the first arm 136. The second cam member 135 is rotated in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise from the normal state to an angle of 90 degrees (see FIG. 217 (c)).

  When the key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state and rotated 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the operation is performed by the reverse operation to the above. It will be done.

  As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130A of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are mounted with the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 phased with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. The first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the key hole 132) is at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, regardless of the rotational position, because the rotation is transmitted. Thus, the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated by transmitting the rotation, and locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 can be made favorable.

  Further, according to the cylinder lock 130A of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, whereby the rotation transmitting member 133 (with respect to the axial center of the cylinder body 131) Since the axis of transmission cylinder 654 of locking unit 650 in main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of cylinder main body 131 in door frame 3 can be set at any position without changing locking unit 650. The cylinder main body 131 (key hole 132) can be provided at a portion which does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

  Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be diverted. Cost increase can be suppressed.

  By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder main body 131, an unauthorized person who knows the configuration inserts a tool to the rear of the cylinder main body 131 from the front. If the rotation transmission member 133 is illegally rotated by the tool, there is a possibility that the door frame 3 may be opened to perform an illegal act. On the other hand, since the cylinder lock 130A of the present embodiment is provided with the rotation transmission member 133 at a position separated from the axial center (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool is inserted in the rear of the cylinder body 131. Even if the rotation transmission member 133 is to be rotated, the rotation transmission member 133 can not be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 is not present at the relevant portion, and the fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 etc. Can be prevented.

  In the cylinder lock 130A of this embodiment, as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, the one using the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is shown. For example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt And so on.

[28-3. Handle unit and handle cover unit in the third embodiment]
Next, the handle unit 180A and the handle cover unit 290 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 218 to 224 and the like. FIG. 218 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and (b) is a portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment It is an enlarged perspective view showing. FIG. 219 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit in FIG. 218 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 220 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit in FIG. 218 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 221 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in FIG. 218 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 222 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in FIG. 218 as viewed from the front. FIG. 223 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 218 (a) cut along the line a-i. FIG. 224 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 210 taken along an arrow line. In addition, in FIG. 223, it is set as sectional drawing of only the door frame 3 which abbreviate | omitted the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

  The handle unit 180A of the present embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the plate unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is operated by the player. It is possible to drive into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Here, members having the same configuration as the handle unit 180 in the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 38 and the like will be described with the same reference numerals.

  First, the handle unit 180A will be described. Handle unit 180A is rotatably attached to the front end of handle base 181 and handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to handle mounting surface 101b of door frame base 101 via handle cover base 291 of handle cover unit 290 described later. Handle 195, a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 described later, and a disc-like member attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center on the front end side of the handle 195. A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 to cover the front of the handle decoration substrate 184 Front lens 18 It has a, and.

  In addition, handle unit 180A is attached to the outer periphery rotatably mounted by inner base 186 attached to the front of handle base 181 on the rear side of handle 195 and handle 195 attached to the front end and by inner base 186 and handle base 181 It has a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a integrally rotating with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 held between the base 186 and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180A is attached at one end to the handle base 181 and at the other end to the handle 195 to return the handle 195 to the initial rotational position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in a direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180A has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186 and a tip end projecting outward from the left side in a front view outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 A single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 and a single-shot button 193 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth to the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180A is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front and rear direction, the disk-like front end 181b radially projecting from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291 c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of a handle cover base 291 described later. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handlebar cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 291d, and the ridges 291d can be respectively inserted into the three grooves 181c. The handle base 181 can not be rotated relative to the handle cover base 291 by the insertion of

  The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially outwardly extending at intervals from the central hub portion 195a, and a plurality of spokes An annular outer peripheral ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two arcs extending in a circular arc centering on the rotation shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction It has a slit 195d, and a locking projection 195e which protrudes rearward from a position on the inner side with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 195d and is locked at the other end side of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The three spokes 195b of the handle 195 are clockwise and clockwise about one spoke 195b horizontally extending leftward from the central hub 195a when the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spokes 195b extend from the respective 120-degree angle in the counterclockwise direction. The three spokes 195b extend with a length such that a gap into which the player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub 195a and the outer ring 195c.

  An outer peripheral ring portion 195 c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195 a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the U-shaped rounded side facing forward.

  The entire handle 195 is formed to be translucent, and a plated portion which is electrically continuous partially from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is applied. Thus, even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched, the touch of the handle 195 is detected by the handle touch sensor 192. Therefore, the game ball B can be hit even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is turned.

  The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a opened toward the center side of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b extending to the center side from the front end of the guide portion 196a. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the mounting stay 196b is attached to the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c in the handle 195. Movement of the handle guide 196 in the front-rear direction is restricted by inserting a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183 a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 by penetrating the slit 195 d of the handle 195 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 penetrates the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a range of rotation angles of about 120 degrees.

  There are a total of 10 handle decoration substrates 184, one at the center, three at fixed intervals in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six at fixed intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. Individual LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups, one at the center, three at the middle, two at the upper left of the outer periphery, two at the upper right of the outer periphery and two at the lower side (See Figure 237). On the handle decoration substrate 184, a 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for emitting light of each LED 184a is mounted. The LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls with a total of 15 systems of 3 systems for one set so that 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups can emit light in full color respectively. It is like that.

  Although not shown, the handle decoration substrate 184 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control substrate 1510. Etc., and a control cable for receiving a signal such as, and a clock for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. . When the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration substrate 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control substrate 1510 (effect control substrate) via the control signal line, it is divided into five groups according to the command. Ten LEDs 184a can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  As described above, since the handle decoration substrate 184 has the LED driver 184 b, the light emission of the LEDs 184 a of a larger number than the number of the wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected is individually (here, set). The number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration relating to the electrical wiring can be simplified.

  The handle front lens 185 has a front surface bulging forward and has translucency. The handle front lens 185 is provided internally with a three-dimensionally formed lens member of a transparent member. The handle front lens 185 is made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED 184 a on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the emission solenoid 542 in the ball emitting device 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a with strength according to the angle.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180A, and when the player contacts the handle 195, it detects static electricity acting from the player and contacts the player's handle 195. To detect. Then, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch, when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the emission solenoid is generated with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

  Therefore, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's touch even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195. Thus, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B can not be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game by rotating the handle 195 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  The one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 by the player. When the one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the one-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the driving of the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, if the player presses the one-shot button 193 while turning the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the turning operation of the handle 195, and the one-shot button By releasing the pressing operation 193, the gaming ball B can be reentered into the gaming area 5a with the hitting strength before the single shot button 193 is operated.

  Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180A on the rear side of the handle 195, and the rear end thereof is a handle cover base 291 attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101; An inner cover attached at a rear end thereof to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200, and an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front side; The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is provided with an annular substrate cover 294 covering the front from the outer surface of the inner 292 and a handle cover 295 attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 at the rear end.

  The handle cover base 291 has a cylindrical front cylinder portion 291a extending back and forth with an inner diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and the inner diameter decreases in the forward direction from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a. The inner wall portion 291b extends to the inner wall portion 291b, and a cylindrical rear cylinder portion 291c which extends through the inner wall portion 291b and has an inner diameter that can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 back and forth And a plurality of (here, three) ridges 291 d provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181 c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

  Further, the handle cover base 291 has the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a from the middle of the flange portion 291e extending outward from the rear side than the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a A cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f projecting forward to the front, a guide piece 291g projecting outward from the front cylinder portion 291a at a portion between the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and the front cylinder And an opening 291h penetrating at a lower portion of the portion 291a.

  The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in the shape of a circular arc whose section is expanded outward from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. The rear cylinder portion 291 c has its rear end attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101. The rear cylindrical portion 291 c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three ridges 291 d correspond to the three grooves 181 c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181 c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively unrotatable. The outer cylindrical portion 291 f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291 e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 291f.

  The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer cylinder portion 291f to a position near the front cylinder portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length of about 110 degrees, and three guide pieces are provided in the circumferential direction at intervals of an angle of 10 degrees. The U-shaped guide portion is inserted by inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180A backward through the guide pieces 291g with respect to the guide piece 291g and rotating the handle 195. By positioning the guide piece 291g in the space 196a, the movement of the guide portion 196a (the handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

  The opening 291h penetrates the front cylinder 291a with a size in the range of an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction from the rear end of the front cylinder 291a to the vicinity of the flange 291e in the front-rear direction.

  The inner 292 extends rearward from an outer peripheral edge of an annular base portion 292a having an outer diameter larger than that of the flange portion 291e at an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 It has a leg 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notches 292c which are cut away from the rear end of the leg 292b to the vicinity of the base 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front cylinder portion 291a of the handlebar cover base 291 is inserted from the front to the base portion 292a, and the base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e. The leg 292 b extends in a curved shape that bulges outward, and the rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200. The notches 292c are respectively provided at the upper and lower parts and the left and right parts of the leg 292b.

  The handle cover decorative substrate 293 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291 a of the handle cover base 291 and is formed in an annular shape having the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291 e. The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293 a and an LED driver 293 b having a unique address for causing each LED 293 a to emit light. Twelve LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are provided in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in six sets of two from the center, two at the lower left, two at the left, two at the upper left, two at the upper right, two at the right, and two at the lower right. It is divided (see FIG. 237). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and can control a total of 18 systems of 3 systems per one set so that 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can emit light in full color. I have to.

  Although not shown, the handle cover decorative substrate 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, a command from the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the like. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one control signal line for receiving a signal such as an address, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. There is. When the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control substrate 1510 (effect control substrate) via the control signal line, it is divided into six groups according to the command. The twelve LEDs 293 a can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  The substrate cover 294 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an annular front plate portion 294a having an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base 292a of the inner 292; And a cylindrical side plate portion 294b which extends short rearwardly. In the substrate cover 294, the front plate portion 294a is located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and the side plate portion 294b extends to the base 292a of the inner 292.

  The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at the front end which has the same inner shape as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and is a spindle (bulb type or bowl type) , Etc.), and a plurality of (here, four) notch openings 295 b are provided in the circumferential direction, which are notched forward from the rear end. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and is formed so that the plurality of cutout openings 295b coincide with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292.

  The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors by synthetic resins different in color and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is formed in two colors by two kinds of resins of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner phase penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, Circular and radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 236 (a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The handle unit 180A and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 223 and the like, are assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle 195 of the handle unit 180A. A portion on the rear side is inserted, and the handle 195, the handle front lens 185, and the like are located on the front side of the handle cover unit 290. The handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 with the rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180A sandwiching the portion closing the rear end of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290 It is attached to 101b.

  A central central hub portion 195 a of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 A is rotatably supported by a handle base 181. Further, the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The handle guide 196 is inserted between the front cylindrical portion 291 a and the outer cylindrical portion 291 f of the handle cover base 291 at the rear end side of the guide portion 196 a and between the flange portion 291 e and the guide piece 291 g And rotatably supported in a state in which movement in the longitudinal direction (axial direction) is restricted.

  The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the substrate cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to be translucent, and cause the LED 293 a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 to emit light. In addition to emitting and decorating the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, and the like can also be illuminated and decorated.

  The handle cover unit 290 has the notch opening 295b and the notch 292c which correspond to each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, so when viewed from the outer side, the handle cover base 291 is located on the left and right and lower sides. It can appear as if the hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a is open. Thereby, the player is relieved of mental unrest that the hand (finger) is pushed into the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Can.

  The upper notch opening 295 b of the handle cover 295 (the upper notch 292 c of the inner 292) is closed by the upper right decoration unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

  In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180A is inserted passes through the opening 291h, and the lower side of each of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 224). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or game ball B or the like intrudes into the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the lower side The handle cover unit 290 can be discharged downward through the opening 291 h, the notch 292 c, and the notch opening 295 b.

  When liquid or gaming ball B intrudes into the left and right notched openings 295b of the handle cover 295, the space between the front cylinder 291a and the leg 292b of the inner 292 passes through the gap between the lower cylinder It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295 b.

  The opening 291 h of the handle cover base 291, the lower notch 292 c of the inner 292, and the lower notch opening 295 b of the handle cover 295 are, as shown in FIG. It is provided on the extension of the inclination direction of the blade part 46b of the grill member 46A in the solid 40. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) discharged forward and obliquely upward from the grille member 46A through the wing portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is transmitted through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder It can be made to enter into the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player inserts a finger into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the driving device for the game ball B), the main frame speaker By vibrating 622 and sending a wind into the front cylinder portion 291a, the player can be surprised, and an unprecedented effect can be performed.

  Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has the cutout opening 295b, when the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened, the user can put a finger on the cutout opening 295b on the right side and pull it. It can be used as a handle when opening.

  In addition, since the plated portion is applied to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c at the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect a touch of the handle 195, and even when only the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is touched You can type in

  In addition, since the handle cover 295 has the cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be simplified by putting a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the cutout opening 295b for gripping. The game ball B can be fixed, and even if the hand is not kept twisting, the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a certain strength. As described above, since the game ball B can be hit by rotating the handle 195 by various methods, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting a hit operation suitable for the player.

[28-4. Lower plate in the third embodiment]
Next, the lower tray 202 of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 225 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the door frame of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment by cutting it horizontally at the lower flat ball feed port, and FIG. 225 (b) is a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects the site | part same as (a) in the door frame of, and shows the principal part. In the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, as shown in the figure, the shape of the lower flat ball supply port 211j of the flat unit base 211 and the position of the lower flat ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 are characterized. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the site | part of the structure similar to the pachinko machine 1 of 1st Example here, and detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 225 (b), the lower countersink ball of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 in communication with the ball outlet 150 d of the far cover unit 150. For the supply port 211c, a lower countersink hole 202a for the lower tray 202 is provided on the front of the central axis. Then, the lower flat ball supply port 211c is formed in a cylindrical shape extending straight forward so that the gaming ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 150d goes straight to the lower flat ball extraction hole 202b. Thus, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower ball supply port 211c can be quickly discharged downward from the lower ball extraction hole 202a by the movement of the shortest distance.

  By the way, when the game ball B is directed straight toward the lower ball extraction hole 202a by the lower ball supply opening 211c, the lower ball extraction hole 202a is closed when the lower ball extraction hole 265a is closed. Since the countersink holes 202a and the lower ball supply port 211c are provided in the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a fear that the storage of the game balls B may be concentrated in the area on the right of the center in the lower plate 202. There is. Then, when the gaming ball B concentrated in the area on the right side in the lower tray 202 blocks the front of the lower bowl ball supply port 211c, the gaming ball B is on the lower tray 202 side from within the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150. As a result, the full tank detection sensor 154 may be activated, and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full despite the fact that the left area in the lower tray 202 still has room. There is.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 225 (a), the left side wall of the lower ball and ball supply port 211j is inclined so as to extend diagonally forward to the left. More specifically, at least one gaming ball B can be circulated at a distance between the side wall on the left side of the lower bowl ball supply port 211 j and the front surface of the plate unit base 211 at a portion immediately behind the lower bowl ball extraction hole 202 b. It is inclined diagonally left forward so as to be a distance.

  Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 225, the lower spherical ball hole 202b is located on the left of the central axis (line indicated by the alternate long and short dash line) of the rear end (ball outlet 150d) of the lower spherical ball supply port 211j. I'm moving towards.

  As a result, by moving the lower spherical ball extraction hole 202b to the left, the lowermost portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower spherical ball extraction hole 202b) is moved to the left, and the lower spherical ball extraction hole It can be reduced that the gaming balls B are concentrated and stored on the right side in the lower tray 202 while the 202 b is closed. And, even if a plurality of gaming balls B are stored in the lower plate 202 from the portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b and reaches the rear end of the lower plate 202 (the front surface of the plate unit base 211), the lower plate ball supply The side wall on the left side of the mouth 211j extends diagonally to form a gap through which the gaming ball B can flow between it and the rear end of the lower plate 202, so that the fowl cover unit 150 (ball outlet 150d) or the upper bowl ball The gaming ball B released from the pulling-out unit 240 (ball extraction guiding path 241c) to the lower ball supply port 211j side is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the left side wall extending obliquely and released. The game balls B can be properly stored in the entire lower plate 202.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from being operated and the full tank being notified even though there is a sufficient area for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202.

[28-5. Ball lending operation unit in the third embodiment]
Next, the ball lending operation unit 220 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a top view which expands and shows the site | part of the ball lending operation unit of the door frame of the pachinko machine in 3rd Example. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 Or, after inserting a prepaid card, lend a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine, or use the ball rental machine The amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the game ball B is deducted and returned, the volume is adjusted, the light amount is adjusted, or the like. Here, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description is omitted.

The ball lending operation unit 220 has a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball extraction button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221 A light transmitting disc-like ball lending operation base 223 disposed to the right of the extraction button 222, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit 226 disposed on the lower rear of the ball lending operation base 223;
A sound volume adjustment button 227 disposed in front of the ball lending button 224 outside the base portion 221 and a light amount adjustment button 228 disposed on the left side of the volume adjustment button 227 are provided.

  The upper ball ball extraction button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by the player performing a pressing operation. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and the character of "ball" is given on the upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is configured of three 7-segment LEDs and one shell type LED, and can be favorably viewed from the player side through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the gaming balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball extraction button 222. Further, after inserting a prepaid card with cash or balance into the ball lending machine and pressing the ball lending button 224, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Further, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display unit 226 when the ball rental machine breaks down.

  The volume control button 227 is a sound for effects such as music, voice, sound effects, etc. outputted from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. It is for adjusting the volume. The volume control button 227 is formed in a double circular gourd shape like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a letter "+" at the center of one circle (upper side) and a letter "-" at the center of the other (lower side) circle, and between the two circles In the part of, there is a pattern that sounds from the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The volume adjustment button 227 increases the volume when pressing the "+" side, and decreases the volume when pressing the "-" side.

  The light amount adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light amounts of the LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a double circular gourd shape like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a letter "+" at the center of one circle (upper side) and a letter "-" at the center of the other (lower side) circle, and between the two circles In the part of, the pattern of the light bulb is given. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the “+” side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the “−” side. The light amount adjustment button 228 becomes bright when the “+” side is pressed, and becomes dark when the “−” side is pressed.

  The volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 have different colors (for example, the volume adjustment button 227 is white, and the light amount adjustment button 228 is black) so that the player can not make a mistake.

  By the way, when the volume and the light amount are adjusted by using the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, the player participation type effect requiring the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not executed. At the same time, after operating the effect operation unit 301 appropriately to display a menu for setting for adjusting the volume, light amount, etc. on the effect display device 1600 and selecting an item to be adjusted, the user operates the rotation operation unit 302. This will change the size of the volume and the brightness of the light amount, etc., and it will take time (time) to adjust the volume and the light amount. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the light amount can be adjusted directly (directly), and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the light amount. Can be simplified to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be adjusted in a short time.

[28-6. Door frame left side unit in the third embodiment]
Subsequently, the door frame left side unit 420 of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 227 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame in the third embodiment, and FIG. 227 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of FIG. ) Is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of (a) as viewed from the rear. FIG. 228 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit of FIG. 227 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 229 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit of FIG. FIG. 230 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line W in FIG. The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 420 is mounted on the front of the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a in the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and on the front of the door frame left side base 421 It is attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which the multiple first LEDs 422a installed at the top and bottom with a fixed interval on the front are mounted and the door frame left side base 421 To cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed at the top and bottom with a certain interval on the front surface and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 Door frame left side base 42 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421 and the front side of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 A left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame, and a door frame left side decoration 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front sides of the left upper side reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425; Have.

  Further, the door frame left side unit 420 is a left side upper light guiding member 427 for guiding light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 forward, and upper and lower sides of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 Left side middle light guide member 428 for guiding light from the first LED 423a above the center of the direction forward, and from the first LED 423a below the middle in the vertical direction of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 And a left side lower light guide member 429 for guiding the light of the light source forward.

  The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and being opened forward. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors by synthetic resins different in color and light transmittance (light transmittance). If it explains in full detail, the door frame left side base 421 is formed in two colors by two kinds of resin of inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b like the above-mentioned handle cover 295, and a part of inner phase is an outer layer By passing through 3b and appearing on the outer surface, a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the left side frame 421 of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 236 (a) ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a strip plate shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 with a constant interval in the vertical direction, and two each are arranged side by side vertically between the first LEDs 422a. The LED 422b is mounted. Further, on the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted.

  On the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, a total of 12 full color LEDs, i.e., four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted. Moreover, 1st LED422a in which 2nd LED422b is provided in upper and lower sides is provided in the center (center between) of these 2nd LED422b. In addition, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top view type LED capable of emitting light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, as shown in FIG. 237, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, eight second LEDs 422b are in three sets of the upper two, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the upper It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit full color light in each of the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. In this way, a total of 15 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

  Although not shown, two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c to the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422. , One control signal line for receiving signals such as command and address from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the decoration substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, when a command addressed to the address is received from the peripheral control substrate 1510 (effect control substrate) via the control signal line, two sets are The four first LEDs 422a divided into three and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  The door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 is formed in a strip-like shape extending vertically, and the right side is formed to be uneven. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 with a constant interval in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs arranged side by side between the first LEDs 423a The LED 423 b is mounted. In addition, a 24-bit LED driver 423 c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423 a and the second LED 423 b to emit light is mounted on the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423.

  The door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 has a total of 18 full-color LEDs mounted, including six first LEDs 423 a and twelve second LEDs 423 b. Moreover, 1st LED423a in which 2nd LED423b is provided in upper and lower sides is provided in the center (center between) of these 2nd LED423b. In addition, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top view type LED capable of emitting light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis in the direction perpendicular to the front surface.

  In the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, as shown in FIG. 237, six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups in order from the top two each in order. In addition, 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 to 1 from the top to 3 from the top, 3 from 4 to 6 from the top, and 7 to 9 from the top It is divided into four groups of three from 10 to 12 from the top and 3 from. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit full-color light from each of the six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups. Thus, a total of 21 systems of 3 systems are controlled for one set.

  Although not shown, two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c to the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423. , One control signal line for receiving signals such as command and address from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. When the LED driver 423c of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control substrate 1510 (rendering control substrate) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The six first LEDs 423 a divided into four and the twelve second LEDs 423 b divided into four can emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a A cylindrical holding cylinder 424 b extending in the front and back direction is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts on the front surface of the door frame upper side upper decoration substrate 422, and the front side around the through hole 424a is directed forward It is shaped like a spreading dish. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422 b can be widely diffused forward.

  The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting a cylindrical light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 described later It is. The holding cylinder 424 b is provided at the center between the through holes 424 a. Thereby, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 which protrudes forward through the holding cylinder 424b, the second door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 facing from the through holes 424a on the upper and lower sides thereof The light from the LED 422 b is emitted to both the upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft 427 a with an equal amount of light, and the shadow of the light guide shaft 427 a is prevented from being reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decoration 426 be able to.

  Further, in the left side upper reflector 424, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (center line) between the through holes 424a. Thus, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decoration 426.

  The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating in the back and forth direction at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and corresponds to the first LED 423a A cylindrical holding cylinder 425 b extending in the front and back direction is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the front side around the through hole 425a is directed forward It is shaped like a spreading dish. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423 b can be widely diffused forward.

  In the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425, a cylindrical light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 described later and a cylindrical light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are inserted. Thus, the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 425 b is provided at the center between the through holes 425 a. Thus, the through holes 425a on the upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 that protrudes forward through the holding cylinder 425b and the light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 The light from the second LED 423b of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 facing more from the upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a is irradiated with an equal amount of light, and the door frame left Shadows of the light guide shaft 428 a and the light guide shaft 429 a can be prevented from being reflected on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

  Further, in the left side lower reflector 425, at the center (center line) between the through holes 425a, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 is provided. Thus, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame left side decoration 426.

  The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in the form which the half circular arc bulging forward extended up and down. Thereby, the door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened back. The door frame left side decoration body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating in the vertical direction at regular intervals along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 426 a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424 b of the left upper side reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425 b of the left side lower reflector 425. In these openings 426a, a light guide shaft 427a of the left upper side light guide member 427, a light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and a light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, The respective tips of are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further includes a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a constant shape recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. doing.

  The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a extending longitudinally in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , Is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the upper left side reflector 424. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends in the front-rear direction with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426, and the front end surface is the door frame left It will be in the state where it matches the surface of the side decoration 426. The left side upper light guide member 427 can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame upper left side decoration substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a and radiate it from the tip outward, The opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 can be made bright.

  The left-side middle light guiding member 428 has three light guiding shaft portions 428a extending longitudinally in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guiding shaft portions 428a. , Is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft 428a extends in the front and back direction with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426, and the front end surface is the door frame left It will be in the state where it matches the surface of the side decoration 426. The left side middle light guide member 428 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame lower left lower decoration substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 428a and radiate it from the tip outward The opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 can be made bright.

  The left side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending longitudinally in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , Is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided at regular intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the lower three holding cylinders 425b of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends in the front-rear direction with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a penetrates the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426, and the front end surface is the door frame left It will be in the state where it matches the surface of the side decoration 426. The left side lower light guide member 429 can guide light from the first LED 423a of the door frame lower left lower decoration substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a and radiate it from the tip outward, The opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 can be made bright.

  In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame left side base 421 is formed in the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the handle cover 295 The color of the portion of the outside of the circular or radial pattern in the door frame left side base 421 is the same as the color of the portion of the outside of the circular or radial pattern in the handle cover 295.

  In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward with respect to the portion on the lower side, and near the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of the left side unit 420 of the door frame is located above the door window 101a and below the hinge assembly 120, and the lower end is below the door window 101a and the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. Are located above the speaker opening 211b.

  According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 are separated to a certain extent rearward than the front surface of the door frame left side decoration 426. Because the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 is irradiated, The left side decoration 426 can be uniformly light emitting and decorated.

  In addition, the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 provided at a position separated rearward from the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 Is guided forward by the light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 Thus, the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 can be made to emit light brighter in a point shape than the other portions.

  In addition, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the first LED 423 a of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, and the left side middle light guide member 428 The light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and the second LEDs 423b. As a result, light is emitted from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides to the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a with an equal amount of light, so the door frame Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows are difficult to see and the door frame left side decorative body 426 is evenly Luminescent decoration can be made in the form of a surface.

  Furthermore, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is provided with a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. Thus, even if the light from the second LED 422b or the second LED 423b projects the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a onto the door frame left side decoration 426. Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the site where the shadow is projected, the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a can be hard to see, and the door frame left The appearance of the light emission decoration of the side decoration 426 can be improved.

[28-7. Door frame right side unit in the third embodiment]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. Fig. 231 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame in the third embodiment, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit of (a), (c) is It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of a) from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of (a) from the back. 232 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit of FIG. 231 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit of FIG. 231 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 231 (a) cut by an air-line. FIG. 235 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 231 (a) cut along the line O-O. The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a in the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the top of the front of the door frame right side base 431 It is attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame on the right side of the door frame on which the multiple first LEDs 432a installed at the top and bottom of the door frame are mounted. The door frame right side lower decoration board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a installed at the top and bottom with a certain distance on the front are mounted, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower The right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433 and the front side of the right side reflector 434 It is provided with a door frame right side decorative body 435 which is attached to the door frame right side base 431, to.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guiding member 436 for guiding light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward, and a second of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 And a right side lower light guide member 437 for guiding light from one LED 433a forward.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is mounted so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431 and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in the left and right in a predetermined shape. It is provided between the left side decoration 438, the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side base 431 so that the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 is closed. A plurality of translucent right side left lenses 439 having a decorative portion 439a to be fitted and a plurality of right and left sides of a door frame right side base 431 are covered and attached so as to cover the right side surface. It is provided between the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 having the decorative hole 440a, the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431, and the door frame right side right side surface Decorative body 44 Includes a right side right lens 441, a having a decorative hole 440a translucent having a decorative portion 441a which is fitted to close the.

  The right and left sides of the door frame right side base 431 extend up and down with a substantially constant width. Further, the rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side is curved to the rear side at a position where it extends substantially straight from the upper end to the center in the vertical direction. After extending obliquely backward, it is bent in the vertical direction near the lower portion and extends vertically to the lower end.

  The door frame right side base 431 is a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens A plurality of reflector portions 431a which are recessed from the left and right side sides and extend forward to the front end are provided at the height portions where the decorative portions 441a) of 441 are provided. The rear end side of the reflector portion 431a, which is the inner side of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a, is inclined toward the side surface, and the bottom surface is curved.

  Further, the door frame right side base 431 is a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440. The reflector portion 431a corresponding to (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) has a front portion excluding a portion to be an inner side of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a , Penetrates in the left-right direction (concave from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

  The reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431 is the light irradiated from the third LED 432c of the door frame upper right upper decoration substrate 432 described later and the third LED 433c of the door frame lower right lower decoration substrate 433 to the left and right The light is reflected in the direction, and the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are lighted and decorated (see FIG. 235 and the like).

  The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 at a constant interval in the vertical direction, and two each are arranged side by side vertically between the first LEDs 432a. The LED 432 b is mounted. Further, on the rear surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, on the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for emitting the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c is mounted.

  On the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, a total of 16 full color LEDs, i.e., four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted. Moreover, 1st LED432a by which 2nd LED432b is provided in upper and lower sides is provided in the center (center between) of these 2nd LED432b. In addition, at least the second LED 432 b and the third LED 432 c are wide-angle top view type LEDs capable of emitting light in the range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the vertical direction with respect to the front surface.

  In the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, as shown in FIG. 237, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, eight second LEDs 432b are in three sets of the upper two, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the upper It is divided. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into the top two and the remaining two.

  Since the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 is divided into two sets of the first LED 432a, three sets of the second LED 432b, and two sets of the third LED 432c, each of the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, In order to cause the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, there are a total of 21 systems of 3 systems per set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432 d of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 can be controlled up to 24 systems, in addition to the 21 systems described above, the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 described later A total of 24 systems of one group of three systems on the upper side of the third LED 433c divided into two groups are controlled.

  In the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, although not shown, a first LED 432a, a second LED 432 b, a third LED 432 c, two third LEDs 433 c on the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 and an LED Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the driver 432 d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as command and address from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED A wiring cable composed of four electric wires, one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432 d with the peripheral control board 1510 is connected. When the LED driver 432 d of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control substrate 1510 (effect control substrate) via the control signal line, two sets are received according to the command. In the first four lower LEDs 44a divided into three, the second eight LEDs 432b divided into three, the fourth third LED 432c divided into two, and the door frame The upper third set of two third LEDs 433c in the set can be made to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each set.

  The door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 with a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs arranged side by side vertically between the first LEDs 433a LED 433b is mounted. In addition, on the rear surface of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433, a plurality of third LEDs 433 c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, on the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 is mounted a 24-bit LED driver 433 d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433 a, the second LED 433 b, and the third LED 433 c to emit light.

  On the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs are mounted: six first LEDs 433 a, twelve second LEDs 433 b, and four third LEDs 433 c. Moreover, 1st LED433a by which 2nd LED433b is provided in upper and lower sides is provided in the center (center between) of these 2nd LED433b. In addition, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top view type LEDs capable of emitting light within a range of an angle of 130 degrees about the optical axis in the vertical direction with respect to the front surface.

  In the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433, as shown in FIG. 237, six first LEDs 433 a are divided into three groups in order, one by two from the top. In addition, 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 to 1 from the top to the 3rd, 3 from 4 to the top from the top, 7 to 9 from the top It is divided into four groups of three from 10 to 12 from the top and 3 from. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into the top two and the remaining two.

  The door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 is divided into three sets of the first LED 433a, four sets of the second LED 433b, and two sets of the third LED 433c. In order to cause the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, there are a total of 27 systems of 3 systems per set. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 can control up to 24 systems at the maximum, the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 is divided into two sets of the third LED 433c Among them, the upper one of the three groups is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, and the remaining 24 lines (all of the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the front and the third LED In the lower two, the LED driver 433 d of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 is controlled. This can suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

  Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 is supplied with power for driving a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, two lower third LEDs 433c, and an LED driver 433d. Power line (one is a ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as command and address from peripheral control board 1510, and 1 for synchronizing LED driver 433d with peripheral control board 1510 A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected to the clock line of the book. When the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control substrate 1510 (effect control substrate) via the control signal line, three sets are received according to the command. The first set of six LEDs 433a divided into four, the second set of 12 second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and the second set of third LEDs 433c of the lower set of two sets It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity each time.

  In the right side reflector 434, through holes 434a are formed at the positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the second LED 433 b of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433. In addition, a cylindrical holding cylinder 434b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 or the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 and the front surface of the through hole 434 a Around the side, it is formed in the shape of a plate that spreads forward. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432 b and the second LED 433 b can be widely diffused forward.

  In the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434, a cylindrical light guide shaft 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 described later and a cylindrical light guide shaft 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted. The light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. The holding cylinder 434 b is provided at the center between the through holes 434 a. Thus, in the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a protruding forward through the holding cylinder 434b, the second LED 432b and the second LED 432b of the door frame on the right side facing the through holes 434a on both the upper and lower sides The light from the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 is irradiated with uniform light quantity from the upper and lower sides to the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a, and the door frame right side decoration It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a from being reflected on the back side of 435.

  Further, in the right side reflector 434, at the center (center line) between the through holes 434a, a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 is provided. Thereby, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole is not reflected on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

  The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed in the milky white which had translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thus, the door frame right side decoration 435 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating in the vertical direction at regular intervals along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 435 a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434 b of the right side reflector 434. The tips of the light guide shaft 436a of the right upper side light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed of a synthetic resin having higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 or the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440. The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426. In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a constant shape recessed in an arc shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a doing.

  The right side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending longitudinally in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , Is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from above the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends in the front and back direction with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side It will be in the state of being in agreement with the surface of the decorative body 435. The right side upper light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and radiate it from the tip outward, The opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 can be made bright.

  The right side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending in the longitudinal direction in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , Is made of a transparent material. The six light guide shaft portions 437a are provided at predetermined intervals up and down so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from below the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends in the front and back direction with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and the front end surface is the door frame right side It will be in the state of being in agreement with the surface of the decorative body 435. The right side lower light guide member 437 can guide light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and radiate it from the tip outward, The opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 can be made bright.

  The door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 is formed in a vertically extending plate shape, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a penetrating in the left and right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The front end side of the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 is formed along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 is molded in two colors by synthetic resins different in color and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 is formed in two colors by two kinds of resin of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421 described above. A circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner phase penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. That is, a part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 236 (a)). When molding the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate along the inner side (right side) of the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 and protrudes leftward to decorate the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 The hole 438a has a decorative portion 439a fitted from the inside (right side). When fitted in the decoration hole 438a, the decorative portion 439a has a surface that matches the outer surface (left side) of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 (see FIG. 235). The right side left lens 439 is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than that of the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration It can be decorated by emitting light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433.

  In addition, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a in the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438. Thereby, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 is a radial pattern in which two colors are formed in the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish the part from the part of the decorative part 439a which is decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

  The door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440 a penetrating in the left and right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). Further, the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 has a cylinder insertion port 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a key hole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130A. The door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is formed to have substantially the same height as the entire height of the door frame 3 in the vertical direction. Further, the front end side of the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440 b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

  The door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is molded in two colors by synthetic resins different in color and light transmittance (light transmittance). More specifically, the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is similar to the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 described above, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. And a part of the inner phase penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, whereby a circular or radial pattern is formed. That is, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 236 (a)). When molding the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

  The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate along the inner side (right side) above the cylinder insertion port 440b of the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440, and protrudes rightward to the door frame right side. A decorative portion 441a fitted from the inside (left side) to the decorative hole 440a of the side right side surface decorative body 440 is provided. When fitted in the decorative hole 440a, the decorative portion 441a matches the outer surface (right side) of the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 (see FIG. 235). The right side right lens 441 is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than that of the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a of the door frame right side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration It can be decorated by emitting light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433.

  The right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440. Thereby, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is a radial pattern formed in two colors in the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish the part from the part of the decorative part 441a light-emitting decorated by the third LED 432c or the third LED 433c.

  In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern in the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is the handle cover 295 or the door frame left It is formed in the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the side base 421, and the outer side of the circular or radial pattern of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 The color of the part of the is formed in the same color as the color of the part outside the circular or radial pattern in the handle cover 295 or the door frame left side base 421.

  In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than a portion at the same height in the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed at substantially the same height from the upper end to the lower end of the door frame 3.

  The door frame right side unit 430, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decoration 435 has a cylindrical fluorescent lamp Looks like it's embedded. In the door frame right side unit 430, a portion from about the top to a height of about a half part protrudes forward largely to form a screen. Thereby, in the island facility of the game hall, the inside of the door window 101a (the game area 5a) is hard to see from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacent to the right side. Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed into a screen shape, it is possible to block the line of sight of the players located in the vicinity, thereby making it difficult to see the entire game area 5a from other players. By making it hard to receive the feeling as seen from other players, it is possible to make the other players play the game without hesitation.

  According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 are separated to a certain extent rearward than the front surface of the door frame right side decoration 435 In the state where the light from the second LED 432 b and the second LED 433 b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread, the back side of the door frame right side decoration 435 is irradiated, The right side decoration 435 can be uniformly light emitting and decorated.

  In addition, the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 provided at a position separated rearward from the front of the door frame right side decoration 435 Is guided forward by the light guide shaft 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the opening of the door frame right side decoration 435 The site 435a can emit light more brightly than other sites.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 causes the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433 c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 to emit light, thereby reflecting the reflector portion of the door frame right side base 431. 431a is inserted into the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 The decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 can be illuminated and decorated. In addition, since part of the left and right sides (portions of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) of the screen frame right side unit 430 can be illuminated and decorated, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to other players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be highlighted and has a high appeal to the player.

  Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the first side of the front surface of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b are adapted to emit light and decorate the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear surface side of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side With the third LED 433 c on the rear surface side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the light emission decoration is performed on the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration 435 The first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the first L are formed by the presence of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433. D 433 a, the light from the second LED 433 b illuminates the rear door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 to emit light, or from the third LED 432 c and the third LED 433 c Light can be prevented from illuminating and illuminating the front door frame right side decorative body 435. Thereby, since the door frame right side decorative body 435 and the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 on the rear side can be completely independently emitted and decorated. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting the player with a light-emitting effect with a higher effect.

  In addition, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the first LED 433 a of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 and the light guide shaft 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the right side lower light guide member 437 The light guide shaft portion 437a is provided at the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and the second LEDs 433b. As a result, light is emitted to the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a with equal amounts of light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides. Even when the shadows of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are hard to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated and decorated in a planar manner without unevenness.

  Further, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is provided with a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. Thereby, even if the shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a is projected on the door frame right side decoration 435 by the light from the second LED 432b or the second LED 433b, the shadow is projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided at the portion where the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are shaded, it is possible to improve the appearance of the light emission decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435. be able to.

[28-8. About the exterior of the door frame in the third embodiment]
Next, the exterior of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 236 (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a state in which the outer layer of two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame in the third embodiment, and (b) shows the inner layer in (a) It is a right view of the door frame right side unit shown in the state which made the outer side layer transparent as it is. As shown in FIGS. 211 to 213 and the like, the exterior of the door frame 3 of the third embodiment has a plurality of circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 236, as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 430 is shown as an example.

  More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns applied on the outer surface are two colors using two types of synthetic resins different in color and light transmittance (transmittance of light) It is formed by molding. The exterior portion of the door frame 3 to which the pattern is applied is formed in two colors by two kinds of resins of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner phase penetrates the outer layer 3b By appearing on the side, a circular or radial pattern is formed.

  For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. 236 (a), when the honeycomb pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is opaque, the inner side of the circular pattern is formed. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in areas other than the pattern, and the exterior of the layer 3a has an appearance in which a circular or radial pattern is emphasized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 236 (b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and it is relatively circular or relatively round. It becomes difficult to see the radial pattern. That is, it becomes an exterior of the appearance where the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

  In FIG. 236, in the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a inserted into the decorative hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440, even if the outer layer 3b is transparent, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (the decorative portion 441a) does not change.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the materials used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b ( By appropriately selecting and combining the color of the synthetic resin), the light transmittance, and the like, the shape can be greatly different in appearance even as it is.

  Therefore, for example, by making the outer layer 3b transparent to make the pattern of the inner layer 3a visible at the time of minor change etc., it is possible to change the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 without increasing the cost.

  Alternatively, the colors etc. of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b may be changed for each production lot, and pachinko machines 1 of different lots may be shipped to the same gaming hall and installed on island facilities to make the player feel colorful. Can increase their appeal.

  In the above embodiment, although two-color molding is shown, the invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be employed. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 of two color molding, but as the three color molding, the door The frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the circular or radial pattern is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various patterns may be formed.

[28-9. Arrangement and System of LEDs in Door Frame of Third Embodiment]
Next, a system of arrangement and control of each LED provided in the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 237 and FIG. 238 and the like. FIG. 237 is a front view showing each decoration substrate of the door frame in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and FIG. 238 is a plan view showing the decoration substrate of the part of the effect operation unit of the door frame in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment It is.

  As shown in FIG. 237, the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment rotates the game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the player rotating the lower right corner in front view. A steering wheel 195 is provided. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b in which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting tips of the spoke portions 195b. And has an appearance similar to that of the steering wheel of a car.

  The handle 195 has a handle decoration substrate 184 in which the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered by the front handle lens 185 and a plurality of LEDs 184a are mounted on the front surface between the front handle lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, a handle cover decorative substrate 293 on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted on the front surface is provided.

  There are a total of 10 handle decoration substrates 184, one at the center, three at fixed intervals in the circumferential direction on the middle circumference, and six at fixed intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference. Individual LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle in the broken line in FIG. 237, and two in the upper left in the outer circumference and two in the upper right of the outer circumference, respectively connected by the broken line. And the lower two at the outer periphery are divided into five sets. The LED 184a divided into these five groups is controlled by 15 systems by the LED driver 184b, and the LEDs 184a of each group can emit full color light as appropriate.

  On the other hand, on the handle cover decorative substrate 293, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a line at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are, as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 237, two at the lower left from the center, two at the left, two at the upper left, two at the upper right, and two at the right, It is divided into six sets of two at the bottom right and two. The LED 293a divided into these six groups is controlled in 18 systems by the LED driver 293b, and the LED 293a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  As described above, since the handle decorative substrate 184 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293 are provided on the handle 195, the light emitting effect such that the light rotates around the handle 195, the center of the handle 195 It is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the light is concentrated and a light emission effect in which the light is spread toward the outside of the handle 195. In addition, the LED 293 a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 can emit light and decorate the outside and the inside of the handle cover 295.

  Further, as illustrated, the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment is a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in a front view. have. The door frame 3 is a plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and a door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the right side decoration body 435 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

  The upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276, the door frame left side decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the door frame top decorative body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a have a semitube shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 237, the dish upper left decoration substrate 273 behind the dish upper left decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a and the dish upper right decoration behind the dish upper right decoration 276 Substrate 278, door frame on the rear side of the door frame left side decoration 426, upper side decoration board 422 on the left side, door frame left side lower side decoration board 423, door frame on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration 435 A door frame right side lower decoration board 433, a door frame top center decoration board 455 behind the door frame top decoration 453, a door frame top left decoration board 456 and a door frame top right decoration board 457 are provided facing forward There is.

  Specifically, on the upper left decorative substrate 273, LED drivers for emitting four LEDs 273a mounted on the front side by side in a line in the left-right direction, the LED 273a and the LED 273a of the upper upper decorative substrate 278 described later (Not shown) and. These four LEDs 273a are divided into two groups of two on the left and two on the right, as indicated by broken lines in FIG. 237. The LED 273a divided into these two groups is controlled in six systems by the LED driver, and the LEDs 273a of each group can emit full color light of an appropriate color.

  The dish upper right decoration substrate 278 is provided with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front side by side in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two groups of two on the left and two on the right, as indicated by broken lines in FIG. 237. The LED 278a divided into these two groups is controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273, and the LEDs 278a of each group can emit full color light of an appropriate color.

  On the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the two first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction and the two first LEDs 422a are mounted side by side vertically There are eight second LEDs 422b, and a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and an LED driver 422c for emitting light from the second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. As shown in FIG. 237, the four first LEDs 422a of the top left decoration substrate 422 of the door frame are divided into the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line. In addition, as shown in FIG. 237, the eight second LEDs 422 b are connected by the upper two, the third three from the top, and the third six from the top, and the sixth through eight It is divided into three groups of three up to the first. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled in 15 systems by the LED driver 422c, and the first LED 422a and the second group of each group are controlled The LED 422 b can emit full color light as appropriate.

  On the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, two first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the up and down direction and two at a time are vertically arrayed between the first LEDs 423a. It is provided with 12 2nd LED423b and the LED driver 423c for light-emitting a total of 18 1st LED423a and 2nd LED423b. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front. As shown in FIG. 237, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups of two each in order from the top as shown by two-dot chain lines. In addition, as the 12 second LEDs 423b are connected by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 237, 3 from the top 1 to 3 and 3 from the top 4 to 6 It is divided into four groups of three from the top to the seventh to the ninth and three from the top to the tenth to the twelfth. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by 21 systems by the LED driver 423c, and each group of the first LED 423a and the second group is controlled The LED 423 b can emit full color light as appropriate.

  On the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front with a certain interval in the vertical direction, and two each on the front side by side vertically between the first LEDs 432a It has eight mounted second LEDs 432 b and four third LEDs 432 c mounted on the rear surface at an interval in the vertical direction. In addition, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 emits a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432 b, and third LEDs 432 c, and two third LED 433 c of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 to emit light. The LED driver 432 d is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into the upper two and the remaining two as shown by two-dot chain lines in FIG. 237. In addition, as shown in FIG. 237, the eight second LEDs 432b are connected by the upper two, three from the third to fifth, and the sixth to eight from the upper as shown by the dashed-dotted line in FIG. It is divided into three groups of three up to the first. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into the upper two and the remaining two as shown by dashed dotted lines in FIG. The first LED 432 a divided into two, the second LED 432 b divided into three, the third LED 432 c divided into two, and the third divided into two in the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 The upper one set of third LED 433c of the LEDs 433c is controlled by 24 systems by the LED driver 432d, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, and the third LED 433c of each set are appropriately colored It can emit light in full color.

  The door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 has six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front with a certain interval in the vertical direction, and two each on the front side by side vertically between the first LEDs 433a Twelve second LEDs 433b mounted, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at an interval in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two lower third LEDs 433c And an LED driver 433 d for emitting light. As shown in FIG. 237, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups of two each in order from the top as shown by two-dot chain lines. In addition, as the 12 second LEDs 433b are connected by an alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 237, 3 from 1 to 3 from the top and 3 from 4 to 6 from the top It is divided into four groups of three from the top to the seventh to the ninth and three from the top to the tenth to the twelfth. Furthermore, the rear four third LEDs 433c are divided into the upper two and the remaining two as shown by a broken line in FIG. 237. 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 groups, 12 second LEDs 433 b divided into 4 groups, and 2 lower third ones of the 2 groups divided into 2 groups The LED driver 433d is controlled in 24 systems, and the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c in each set can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a The board | substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 are formed in the left-right asymmetry shape bordering on the center of the left-right direction of the door window 101a. Further, the shapes of the front and rear directions of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 42, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are different from each other. .

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mounted on the respective front surfaces. The number of one LED 422a, the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b are the same as one another, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. A system connected by a chain line or a two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically in the left-right direction. This makes it easy to create data of the lighting pattern of the LED for performing the light emission effect.

  The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front with an interval in the left-right direction, the LED 455a and the LED frame 456 of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 And an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two each from the left, as indicated by broken lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled in nine systems by the LED driver, and the LEDs 455a of each group can emit full color light as appropriate.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a which are mounted on the front surface in the left and right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two groups, two on the left side and two on the right side, as indicated by broken lines in FIG. 237. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit full color light as appropriate.

  The door frame top right decoration substrate 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a which are mounted in the front and opened in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two groups of two on the left side and two on the right side, as indicated by broken lines in FIG. 237. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

  According to the door frame 3 of the third embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the first LED 432 a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 The light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 is the light guide shaft 427a of the left upper side light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the left side lower Opening of the door frame left side decoration 426 by the light guiding shaft 429a of the light guiding member 429, the light guiding shaft 436a of the right upper side light guiding member 436, and the light guiding shaft 437a of the right side lower light guiding member 437 It is guided to the opening 435a of the portion 426a and the door frame right side decoration 435 and is irradiated outward (forward). Thus, it is possible to show the player the luminous effect of emitting light in the form of dots on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 or the door frame right side decorative body 435. The player can be made "H" by the light-emitting effect that emits light in a spot.

  Further, in the door frame 3 of the third embodiment, the LED 273a of the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, Door frame left side lower decoration board 423 second LED 423b, door frame right side upper decoration board 432 second LED 432 b, door frame right side lower decoration board 433 second LED 433 b, door frame top central decoration board 455 LED 455a, door The LED 456a of the frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 emit light appropriately to cause the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a to emit light or move light along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. It is possible to show the player the effect of light emission as

  That is, in the door frame 3 of the third embodiment, spot light is emitted at the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 or the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. Light emission can be performed, and light emission (surface light emission) in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit planar light (the surface light emission) by the LED system connected by the one-dot chain line in FIG. A presentation can be performed.

  Further, according to the door frame 3 of the third embodiment, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transmitted to the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft The light is guided to the front end inserted in the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 or the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 by the portion 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a. Since the light is emitted forward from there, the area of the opening 426a and the opening 435a is brightly spotted with high brightness as compared with the general surfaces of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435. It can be made to emit light. At this time, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are disposed outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, so the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 And even if the area of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is spot light-emitted with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a seen from the door window 101a is not hard to see due to its glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a The game ball B, the effect image, the decoration, etc. in the area 5a can be visually recognized in a good state.

  Further, according to the door frame 3 of the third embodiment, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward than the door window 101a (the game area 5a) and are high. Opening portions 426a and 435a for spot light emission with luminance, portions of ridges that become front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 protruding forward (in a circular view projecting forward in plan view Therefore, the light of the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (the side of the door window 101a) because it is provided on the vertical line connecting the front ends. Therefore, the light of the spot light emission in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 is reflected to the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a and the rear side of the door window 101a. There is no difficulty in seeing the inside of the game area 5a.

  Furthermore, according to the door frame 3 of the third embodiment, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body that project the light emission site forward in the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a. Since it is provided in 435, the site | part which light-emits a spot becomes a position substantially the same as the outer periphery vicinity of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot light emission site is located outside the player, so the player does not block the light of the spot light emission. Thereby, when spot light emission is performed in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, the light of high-intensity spot light is seen also from other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 Therefore, it is possible to appeal the presence of the pachinko machine 1 to other players, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and to select a pachinko machine to be played in the game hall. Can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting a player who is traveling to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, LED for spots (first LED422a, first LED423a, first LED432a, first LED433a) for making the front side of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 spot-emit It is desirable that the surface LEDs (the second LED 422 b, the second LED 423 b, the second LED 432 b, and the second LED 433 b) belong to the same system. Thereby, both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, and light guide shaft 437a) for guiding the light of the spot LED Since the surface LEDs of the light source are in the same lighting mode, light of the same light quantity is emitted from the both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the light is guided in the door frame left side decoration 426 or the door frame right side decoration 435 The shadow of the light pin can be made even less visible.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 238, the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment is provided below the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and 31 doors are provided on the upper surface. An annular effect operation ring decoration substrate 355 on which the LED 355a is mounted is provided. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 355 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 355a to emit light. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 355 is divided into two, a front decoration substrate 356 and a rear decoration substrate 357.

  Of the 31 LEDs 355 a, 18 LEDs 355 a are mounted on the front decoration substrate 356 of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 355. Sixteen of the eighteen LEDs 355a of the front decoration substrate 356 are spaced apart on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are spaced on the circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference close to the outer periphery.

  The remaining 13 LEDs 355 a are mounted on the rear decoration substrate 357 of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 355. Four of the thirteen LEDs 355a of the rear decorative substrate 357 are provided two by two at intervals near the both ends of the arc on the circumference close to the inner circumference, and three are between the inner circumference and the outer circumference It is provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer circumference in the vicinity of both ends of the arc.

  As 18 LEDs 355a of the front decoration substrate 356 are connected by an alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 238, six on the inner circumference are three sets of two each in the circumferential direction, and three on the middle circumference There are a total of nine sets of three sets of one each, and nine sets of three on the outer circumference in the circumferential direction. In addition, 18 LEDs 355a of the rear decoration substrate 357 are connected by an alternate long and short dash line in FIG. Three pieces are divided into three sets of 1 each, and 9 pieces on the outer circumference are divided into a total of 7 sets of 2 sets of 3 pieces near each end. That is, in the effect operation ring decoration substrate 355, the 31 LEDs 355a are divided into 16 sets. The LEDs 355a divided into these 16 groups are controlled in 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each set of LEDs 355a can emit full color light as appropriate.

  According to the effect operation ring decoration substrate 355, light emission effects such that light is rotated in the effect operation unit 301, and light emission effects such that light is concentrated to the center by appropriately emitting 31 and 48 LED 355a Or, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect such that the light spreads outward.

[28-10. Identification of Decorative Substrate in Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, identification of various decoration substrates on which the LED is mounted in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 239 and the like. FIG. 239 is a rear view showing the decorative substrates provided around the door window of the door frame in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Here, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right The upper side decoration substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 will be described in detail by way of example.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white substrate is used as a decorative substrate on which the LEDs are mounted, and the non-white LED drivers and connection connectors attached to the decorative substrate are attached to the rear side of the substrate. It is like that. As a result, the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decoration substrate can be reflected to the front side so that the decoration on the front etc. can be brightened and decorated more brightly, and the front (player's side) It makes the decorative substrate less noticeable.

  The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board itself may be white.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decoration substrates, different identification parts 7 are provided on the back surface of each decoration substrate so that each decoration substrate can be easily identified (see FIG. 239). ). The identification unit 7 is a character identification unit 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, and model numbers, and a color identification unit 7b using colors different from each other (shown by different shades of gray in FIG. 239). And.

  More specifically, as the character identification portion 7a, the letters "lower left" on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, "lower right" on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and "upper left" on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 The letters “lower left” on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, “upper right” on the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and “lower right” on the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 The characters are "upper middle" for the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, "upper left" for the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and "upper right" for the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. , Has been applied respectively.

  In addition, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is provided over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 239, the color identification portion 7b is partially provided so as not to hinder the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decoration substrate, not on the entire rear surface. .

  The identification unit 7 in the present embodiment is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), application of a seal, application of a paint, or the like.

  In the above, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 has been described as an example, but various types of devices provided in the handle unit 180A, the rendering operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc. The identification unit 7 such as the character identification unit 7a or the color identification unit 7b may be provided also on the decorative substrate.

  In the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 includes both the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification unit 7a may be used. Alternatively, only the color identification unit 7b may be used.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, since the identification portion 7 (the character identification portion 7a and the color identification portion 7b) is provided on the decoration substrate on which the LED is mounted, a decoration substrate having a similar shape is provided. While being easily distinguishable, it is possible to prevent an incorrect decoration substrate from being assembled during an assembly operation, and to improve the workability of assembly.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, since the identification portion 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, the front side of the decorative substrate can be made as white as possible, and mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate It is possible to reflect the light from the LED being made forward to the front side on the front surface of the decoration substrate to make the decoration on the front etc. brighter and to make the decoration decoration brighter and to make the decoration substrate less noticeable from the front (player side) Can be made to look good.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, since the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is applied over substantially the entire decoration substrate, only by looking at a part of the decoration substrate It can be recognized whether it is a decoration board of a desired (desired color). Therefore, even in a state where multiple kinds of decorative substrates are overlapped at the time of assembly etc., if a part of the decorative substrate can be seen, a desired decorative substrate can be easily found, and it takes time for assembling work. Can be simplified.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, since the color of the color identification portion 7b is made different for each decoration substrate, when preparing a decoration substrate necessary for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly. When there is a decorative substrate on which the color identification part 7b of the same color is provided, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, when the color identification part 7b of the prepared decorative substrate is not sufficient in color, it can be easily recognized that there is a decorative substrate not prepared. Therefore, when preparing a decorative substrate necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decorative substrate is prepared or the prepared decorative substrate is insufficient or not. Therefore, it is possible to prepare the decoration substrate for exactly the necessary amount, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to set up at the time of assembly.

[28-11. Tank rail of body frame in the third embodiment]
Subsequently, a tank rail 553A of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 240 to 244 and the like. FIG. 240 is an enlarged perspective view of a portion of a tank rail when the pachinko machine of the third embodiment is viewed from behind. FIG. 241 (a) is a plan view of a state where a tank rail and the like are assembled to a ball tank in a pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and FIG. 241 (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. (C) is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail of (a) from the back. FIG. 242 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. 241 disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like of FIG. FIG. 243 is a cross-sectional view of a tank rail or the like cut along a car line in FIG. 241 (a). FIG. 244 is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls in the tank rail of FIG. 241 in cross section. In the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, the tank rail 553A, the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball rectifying member 556A of the dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 are the same as those of the first embodiment. It is different, and the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated about the same structure.

  The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the gaming ball B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers it to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. The tank rail 553A extends leftward in the form of a groove opened upward. The tank rail 553A is provided with a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left of the first rail cover 554A in a front view, and an upper side of the second rail cover 555A so as to close the upper end side. A ball rectifying member 556A is provided, and a ball stopper 557 capable of blocking the flow of the game ball B is mounted at the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

  The tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b, as shown in FIG. 241 (a) and the like. The flow speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

  The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c on the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-like cover portion 555a for closing the upper end of the tank rail 553A, and a pair of protection walls 555b extending upward from both front and rear ends upstream from the center in the left-right direction of the cover portion 555a. And an opening 555c penetrating the cover 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b is formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion where the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided. A straightening piece 556a of a ball straightening member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

  The ball straightening member 556A extends in the forward and backward direction and is rotatably mounted about an axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided between the pair of protective walls 555b above the cover 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. Plate-like rectifying piece 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A abuts from above the gaming balls B stacked in multiple tiers in the tank rail 553A, thereby breaking the tiers of the gaming balls B and making it easy to align in a line, and the uppermost side The game ball B is prevented from rapidly moving to the downstream side to prevent the occurrence of ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

  According to the tank rail 553A and the like of the third embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is positioned below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. doing. Thus, the electric wire (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 240) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball rectifying member 556A is attached. Contact from above with respect to the ball | bowl rectification | straightening member 556A can be prevented. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a comes in contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above, even if the game ball B contacts the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A by the weight of the electric wire, the ball rectifying member 556A May not be able to pivot upward, and there is a risk that the rectifying action of the gaming ball B by the ball rectifying member 556A can not be sufficiently exerted. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent contact of the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a with the ball rectifying member 556A, When the gaming ball B abuts on the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward, and exerts a rectifying function sufficiently, so that the ball biting in the tank rail 553A or It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging.

  Further, since the serpentine portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the flow speed of the gaming ball B can be suppressed by the serpentine portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes smaller toward the downstream side, when the upper game ball B of the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages first move to the downstream side, ball biting tends to occur . On the other hand, in the third embodiment, as described above, since the flow speed of the gaming ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, the upper gaming ball B moves to the downstream side first. Can be suppressed, and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

[28-12. Ball Discharge at Base Unit of Main Frame in Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, the discharge of the game balls B in the substrate unit 620A of the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 245 (a) is a front view of a substrate unit in a main frame of a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) seen from the front right, (c) is It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of a) from the left front. 246 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 245 (a) as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 245 (a) as viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 247 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 245 (a) disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 248 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 245 (a) disassembled and viewed from the back . FIG. 249 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key line in FIG. 245 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the broken line in (a), (c) is (a) ) Is a cross-sectional view taken along the broken line in FIG. FIG. 250 is a bottom view of a pachinko machine showing a portion behind the door frame in the third embodiment.

  The substrate unit 620A of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment is attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 instead of the substrate unit 620 in the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the substrate unit 620A of the third embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is largely different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the first embodiment. Here, the same components as those of the substrate unit 620 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description is omitted.

  The board unit 620A is a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a and the speaker unit 620a attached to the lower side of the game board placement portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 from behind. A base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a part from the rear.

  The base unit 660 is attached to the front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and to the rear side of the front base 661. The power supply unit 620 c is attached to the rear surface An out ball passage 663 provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 circulate, and the game flowing through the out ball passages 663 An out sensor 664 for detecting the balls B one by one, and a ball extraction guiding portion 627 for receiving the game balls B discharged from the lower ball escape passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and guiding them to the right in front view; The game balls B induced by the ball extraction guiding portion 627 are distributed, and the ball extraction provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 is performed. And exits passage 665, and a passage wall member 666 is attached to the rear base 662 so as to close the rear side of the ball 抜排 out passage 665, a.

  The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a long box opened to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall 662a extending in the vertical direction at a substantially constant height to the left and right, and an out ball passage 663 and a ball extraction guide 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall 662a. And a ball extraction / discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in the shape of a box whose rear side with respect to the section wall 662 a is opened rearward.

  In the base unit 660, the front base 661, the rear base 662, and the passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball extraction guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball extraction passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball withdrawal guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball withdrawal passage 665 can be visually recognized well from the upper side and the lower side of the base unit 660. There is.

  The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of the flat partition wall 662 a extending in the vertical direction at the rear base 662 at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction and is open with the front open. The front end is closed by a front base 661.

  The out ball passage 663 is open upward at a substantially central position in the left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1 and extends the ball discharge receiving portion 663a and the gaming ball B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. At the lower end of the lower guiding portion 663 c, the lower guiding portion 663 c for guiding the gaming ball B rectified in a single line by the out ball rectifying portion 663 b and straightening out in a row while straightening a large meander in the left and right direction. It has a downward opening, and has an out ball discharge port 663 d for discharging the gaming ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided on the rear side of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 250).

  The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a loose angle so that the right end side becomes lower.

  The out ball straightening portion 663b is inclined at a loose angle so that the left end side becomes lower from the position on the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a to the lower side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. In addition, the depth of the front and rear direction of the out ball straightening portion 663b becomes narrower as it goes downstream (left), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball B near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. It is a depth. Further, the height of the portion on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a in the out ball rectifying portion 663b becomes lower toward the downstream side (left side), and the height of the upper and lower portions decreases. The height is slightly larger than the diameter. Thus, the game balls B can be aligned in a line in the out-ball rectifying unit 663b.

  The lower guiding portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-sphere rectifying portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall is flush with the rear wall (partition wall portion) in the middle of the vertical direction The curve is curved in a small crank shape backward to become As a result, the downstream end (out ball outlet 663 d) of the lower guiding portion 663 c is located rearward of the front surface of the partition wall 662 a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the lower guiding portion 663c. The lower guiding portion 663c is formed into a curved shape so that the cranked portion does not have a horizontally extending portion, and therefore, the lower guiding portion 663c passes through the out sensor 664 and is bent into a cranked shape. Even if the game ball B abuts on the part where it is located, it does not jump upward to the out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent the one out of the game sensors B from being detected twice.

  The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch of high durability and long life because the game ball B passes frequently.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 is provided on the left side of the ball discharge receiving portion 663 a in the out ball passage 663. The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end that opens to the left at the top of the left side in a front view, and a downstream side is bent backward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall 662 a of the rear base 662 , And the upstream end of the ball extraction passage 665 (see FIG. 249 (a) and the like).

  The ball removal and discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the section wall 662 a of the rear base 662. The ball removal and discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state of being opened rearward, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball extraction passage 665 is located forward of the rear end of the rear base 662 by one minute of the outer diameter of the gaming ball B. That is, a gap equal to or more than one game ball B is formed between the ball removal passage 665 and the power supply substrate 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

  The upper end (left end) of the ball extraction / discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction / induction portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball ejection / reception portion 663a of the out ball passage 663. A horizontal guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide portion 665a vertically to the lower surface of the rear base 662, a downstream end (lower end of the vertical guide portion 665b And a ball outlet 665c which is open downward. The ball extraction outlet 665c is provided slightly behind the out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663 (see FIG. 250).

  The ball extraction and discharge passage 665 has a plurality of projections 665 d alternately projecting inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guiding portion 665 b. In the ball extraction and discharge path 665, the gaming balls B flowing in the vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward contact the plurality of protrusions 665d alternately, causing the gaming balls B to flow down in a zigzag shape and distributing the balls An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball outlet 665c can be suppressed.

  Since the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage by the horizontal guiding portion 665a and the vertical guiding portion 665b, when the ball extracting lever 593 is operated to discharge the game ball B in the ball tank 552 , A large number of gaming balls B can be smoothly induced and discharged.

  According to the board unit 620A in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, the game ball B which is driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663. In addition, it is detected by the out sensor 664 and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (extract) the game ball B in the ball tank 552, etc., the game ball B discharged to the ball extraction passage 580b side by operating the ball extraction lever 593 of the payout device 580 is out-ball passage 663 The game is discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through the ball drawing and guiding part 627 and the ball drawing and discharging passage 665 which are separate and independent. Thus, only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663. Therefore, only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. It can be counted. Therefore, the number of gaming balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the number of gaming balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 The pachinko machine 1 is capable of calculating the payout rate (dispensing rate).

  The number of game balls B (out ball number) counted by the out sensor 664 is hit in the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, The number of gaming balls B received from the game board 5 and discharged from the game board 5 after being received by the winning openings such as the big prize opening 2005, the prize winning opening 2006, etc., and after being hit into the gaming area 5a The number of game balls B that have been received by the out port 1008 and discharged from the game board 5 without adding the number of the game balls B (injected balls) inserted into the game area 5a. It is.

  In addition, since the payout rate (dispense rate) changes according to the gaming state, a payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) It is calculated as "number of balls out of predetermined period = payout rate within predetermined period".

  Further, according to the present embodiment, an out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 is distributed is provided on the substrate unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached. The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and since the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected, the “out ball” is detected in the game board 5 There is no need to provide an out-of-ball detection unit 3030, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified to reduce the cost.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided between the rear end of the ball removal discharge path 665 and the power supply substrate 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. Therefore, the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 are separated from the power supply substrate 630 and the payout control substrate 633, etc. Can reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to the electric noise generated by static electricity, induced current, etc., and the pachinko machine 1 with few malfunctions due to the distribution of the game ball B It can be done.

[28-12 a. Another embodiment of the ball discharge in the substrate unit of the main body frame]
Next, a configuration different from the idle discharge at the substrate unit 620A of the main frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment described above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252 and the like. FIG. 251 is an explanatory view showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball outlet of the out ball passage. FIG. 252 (a) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the out sensor is removable, and FIG. 252 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a).

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 251, a guiding piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at the portion of the out ball outlet 663 d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. More specifically, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is provided a merging portion 663e which merges with the ball removal and discharge passage 665. The merging portion 663e is opened downward, and the open end thereof is an out-ball outlet 663d (ball outlet 665c). And the induction | guidance | derivation piece 667 protrudes short back from the front side wall in the out-ball discharge port 663d.

  According to the embodiment of FIG. 251, the game ball B discharged downward from the out-ball discharge port 663d contacts the induction piece 667, whereby the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely backward and downward. . Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, a part (out receiving portion, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game balls B provided on the rear side (within the island facility) of the front of the island facility. The game balls B can be easily released to the side etc., and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

  Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 251, since the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely backward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is made to the main body frame 4. Even when provided at a position close to the position directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (position close to the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, since it becomes possible to arrange the out ball passage 663 (out ball discharge port 663 d) as far as possible to the front, it is possible to widen the space behind the out ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 Because the out ball passage 663 is away from the power supply substrate 630, the payout control board 633, etc., electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated when many game balls B flow through the out ball passage 663 is possible. The influence on the power supply substrate 630, the payout control substrate 633, and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with less malfunctions due to the distribution of the game balls B.

  Subsequently, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 252, the out sensor 664 can be attached to and removed from the lower portion of the out ball passage 663 at the portion of the out ball outlet 663 d. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the lower guiding portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opened downward so as to accommodate the out sensor 664 and the out sensor housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f And a sensor cover 668 for restricting the downward movement of the 664.

  The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the lower guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out ball rectifying portion 663b in the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. Also in the present embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be viewed from above and below the base unit 660.

  The sensor cover 668 extends longer than the sensor attachment recess 663f, and the detection of the out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor attachment recess 663f in the main body 668a and the body portion 668a whose proximal end is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 A through hole 668b through which the game ball B passes so as to pass through the hole coinciding with the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the opposite side to the base end side in the main body portion 668a; Have.

  The sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted on the base end side at an outer portion opposite to the sensor mounting recess 663 f in the base unit 660 opposite to the out ball rectifying portion 663 b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided on the outside of the sensor mounting concave portion 663f of the base unit 660 on the out-ball rectifying portion 663b side.

  The sensor cover 668 moves the locking claw 668 c upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor attachment recess 663 f such that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 matches the out ball passage 663. The main body portion 668a abuts against the lower surface of the out sensor 664 by rotating and closing the locking claw portion 668c with the locking portion 663g, thereby restricting the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and the out A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 252 (a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 matches the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the gaming ball B which has flowed through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is removed. It is discharged downward through. The through hole 668 b of the sensor cover 668 doubles as an out-ball outlet 663 d of the out-ball passage 663.

  When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated about the base end side of the main body 668 a so that the locking claw 668 c moves downward, and the main body 668 a of the sensor cover 668 is the lower surface of the out sensor 664 And the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 252 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 252 (b), in the present embodiment, with the sensor cover 668 rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the contact object shown by the two-dot chain line (e.g. Between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder 43a of the rear plate 43, etc.) or the lower end of the main frame 4 ing. Thereby, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come in contact with the contact object, preventing the sensor cover 668 from being damaged. be able to.

  According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 252, since the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B inserted into the game area 5a of the game board 5, many game balls B are distributed. As a result, as described above, since the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from the lower side by opening the sensor cover 668, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced. it can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, even when the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 contacts the contact object such as the outer frame 2 Can prevent the sensor cover 668 from being damaged. More specifically, although the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from the lower side, many game balls B contact with the out sensor 664 from the upper side. The locking claws 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the pressure sensor, causing the sensor cover 668 to open. If the sensor cover 668 is opened during the game and the out sensor 664 falls downward, the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B despite the fact that the game ball B is inserted into the game area 5a. As a result, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified by the main control board 1310 or the like. With the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality, the staff member of the game hall opens the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality, but the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the outer frame 2 And the like, so that the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming in contact with the contact threat, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

  Furthermore, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 252, the proximal end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outside of the sensor attachment recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. In addition, since the base unit 660 is transparent, by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be favorably viewed from below.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2 Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and turned upside down, and the out sensor 664 is replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668 or the ball passage from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660 It is possible to easily carry out the checking operation in the inside of 663 and the inside of the ball extraction passage 665 and the like.

[29. Relationship between the present invention and embodiments]
In the present embodiment, the identification unit 7 is used as the distinction means of the present invention, the character identification unit 7a in the present embodiment is used in the character part of the present invention, and the color identification unit 7b in the present embodiment is used in the colored part of the present embodiment. Dish upper left decoration 271 of Dish upper left decoration unit 270 in Dish unit 200, Dish upper right decoration 276 of Dish upper right decoration unit 275, door frame left side decoration 426 of door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430 The door frame right side decoration 435 of and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 respectively correspond to the decoration of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 of the plate upper left decorative unit 270, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame left side Lower decoration board 423, door frame right side unit 430 door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and door frame right side lower decoration board 433, door frame top center decoration board 455 of door frame top unit 450, door frame top left decoration board 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are the decorative substrate of the present invention, the LED driver 422c of the door frame upper left upper decorative substrate 422, the LED driver 423c of the door frame left lower lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right LED driver 432d of the upper side decoration board 432 and LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 To the functional component of the present invention, and corresponds respectively.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the LED 273a of the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the LED 278a of the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 The LED 423a and the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, the first LED 433a and the second LED 433 b of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433, the LED 455 a of the door frame top central decoration substrate 455, The LED 456 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the LED 457 a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 correspond to the LED of the present invention.

[30. Characteristic effects of the third embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, the dish upper left decoration 271 of the dish upper left decoration unit 270 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3, the dish upper right decoration 276 of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, the door frame Embellish the decorations such as the door frame left side decoration 426 of the left side unit 420, the door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430, and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450, etc. For the LED is mounted, dish upper left decoration unit 270 dish upper left decoration board 273, dish upper right decoration unit 275 dish upper right decoration board 278, door frame left side unit 420 door frame left side decoration board 422 And the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 for the door frame right side unit 430, and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 43 The character identification portion 7a and the color identification portion 7b are provided on the back surface of each of the decorative substrates such as the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top unit 450. Since the identification unit 7 is provided, it is determined whether the desired decorative substrate is a desired one simply by looking at the discriminating means provided on each decorative substrate when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. It is possible to easily search for a desired decorative substrate, and to make it easy to notice a mistake in the decorative substrate to be attached by the identification unit 7, to reduce assembly errors and to make it easy to take time for assembly work. be able to.

  In addition, the dish upper left decoration board 273 of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish upper right decoration board 278 of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 423 The door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the door frame Since the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 colored in a predetermined color is provided over the entire length in the longitudinal direction on the rear surface of the decoration substrate such as the top right decoration substrate 457, etc., the color identification portion 7b Since the front and back of the decorative substrate can be easily distinguished, when assembling the pachinko machine 1, when preparing (planning) the decorative substrate necessary for one pachinko machine 1 Even if a decorative substrate with symmetrical or similar shape is present laterally or vertically, the color identification part 7b makes only two decorative substrates on one side because the front and back are clear Such mistakes can be prevented, and the decorative substrate necessary for assembly can be prepared reliably. Therefore, the assembly operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be smoothly performed, and the time required for assembly can be shortened to suppress the increase in cost.

  In addition, the dish upper left decoration board 273 of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish upper right decoration board 278 of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 423 The door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the door frame Since the color of the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is different for each decoration substrate such as the top right decoration substrate 457, etc., even when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, even if there is a decoration substrate having a similar shape, The decorative substrate can be easily distinguished by the color of the color identification portion 7b, and it is possible to prevent the incorrect decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly operation. It is possible to improve the workability of assembly.

  In addition, the color identification portion 7b includes a plate upper left decorative substrate 273 of the plate upper left decorative unit 270, a plate upper right decorative substrate 278 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275, a door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame Left side lower decoration board 423, door frame right side unit 430 door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and door frame right side lower decoration board 433, door frame top unit 450 door frame top central decoration board 455, door frame top left Because the decoration substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, etc. are provided over the entire length in the longitudinal direction of the decoration substrate, decoration is performed even in a state where multiple kinds of decoration substrates overlap during assembly etc. If a part of the substrate can be seen, the color identification part 7b can be seen, so that a desired decorative substrate can be easily found, and the effort required for the assembly operation can be simplified. It can be.

  Furthermore, the dish upper left decoration board 273 of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish upper right decoration board 278 of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 423 The door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the door frame Since the color of the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is made different for each decoration substrate such as the top right decoration substrate 457, etc., when preparing a decoration substrate necessary for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly When there is a decorative substrate provided with the color identification part 7b of the same color, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative substrate is prepared in duplicate.Alternatively, in the color identification portion 7b provided on the prepared decoration substrate, when the color is insufficient, it can be easily recognized that there is a decoration substrate not prepared. Therefore, when preparing a decoration substrate necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decoration substrate is prepared or that the prepared decoration substrate is insufficient. The decorative substrate can be prepared for exactly the necessary amount, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly.

  In addition, the dish upper left decoration board 273 of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish upper right decoration board 278 of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 423 The door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the door frame Since the character identification unit 7a as the identification unit 7 for distinguishing from other substrates is provided on the back surface of the decoration substrate such as the top right decoration substrate 457, etc., the operator can read the characters of the character identification unit 7a Thus, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same function and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the dish upper left decoration board 273 of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish upper right decoration board 278 of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 423 The door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top central decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the door frame The front left and the back of each decorative substrate such as the top right decorative substrate 457, etc. are white, and the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface, so the dish upper left decorative unit in the dish unit 200 is provided in front of the decorative substrate 270 plate upper left decoration 271, plate upper right decoration unit 275 plate upper right decoration 276, door frame left side unit 420 door frame left size Even if the degree of transparency of the decorative body such as the decorative body 426, the door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is high, It is possible to make the decorative substrate less noticeable and improve the appearance of the decorative body, and the white front surface of the decorative substrate makes it possible to reflect the light from the LED forward, making the decorative body more attractive. Light emission decoration can be performed brightly, and the player can be entertained by the light emission effect with a high effect effect, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, LED driver 422c of the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, LED driver 423c of the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and door frame right side lower decoration board 433 LED driver 433d, etc. functional parts, dish upper left decoration unit 270 dish upper left decoration board 273, dish upper right decoration unit 275 dish upper right decoration board 278, door frame left side unit 420 door frame left side decoration board 422 And the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, the door frame top central decoration board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door It is provided on the back of the decoration substrate such as the frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, etc. In order to hide the functional parts from the player side, the dish upper left decoration 271 of the dish upper left decoration unit 270 in the dish unit 200, the dish upper right decoration 276 of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, the door frame left side unit The functional parts can be seen through the decorations such as the door frame left side decoration 426 of the 420, the door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430, and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450, etc. Deterioration in appearance can be avoided, and the appearance of the decorative body (game machine) can be improved. In addition, since the functional parts are not visible by being provided on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) so as not to be noticeable, and use the functional parts as they are It is possible to suppress an increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, the main unit frame 4 provided with the game board 5 having the game area 5a is attached to the outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall in an openable / closable manner. The door frame 3, which closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4, and in the game area 5a visible through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. The base of the board unit 620A provided below the game board 5 in the main unit frame 4 is discharged downward from the game board 5 after the game ball B hit by the operation of the player is involved in a predetermined game. After being delivered to the out ball passage 663 in the unit 660 and rectified by the out ball rectification portion 663 b in the out ball passage 663 and the flow velocity is suppressed, it is detected by the out sensor 664 and detected. It is discharged to the 備側. In this manner, by detecting the gaming ball B by the out sensor 664, the number of the gaming balls B (the number of out balls) ejected into the gaming area 5a and discharged from the gaming board 5 can be counted.

  At this time, since the game ball B whose flow velocity is suppressed by the out ball rectification portion 663 b of the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the flow of the game ball B causes the out sensor 664 to hang. Since the impact can be weakened, early wear and breakage of the out sensor 664 can be reduced.

  The out sensor 664 is accommodated in the sensor attachment recess 663f opened downward in the base unit 660 and is held by the sensor cover 668 from the lower side, and the locking claw of the other end of the sensor cover 668 In the portion 668c, the locking with the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660 is released, and the sensor cover 668 is pivoted around one end side so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward. Therefore, the sensor cover 668 can be opened relative to the sensor mounting recess 663f, so that the out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f can be removed or the out sensor 664 can be accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f. Can. Therefore, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game interrupted by the damage of the out sensor 664 can be resumed early, and the game is interrupted by the interruption of the game. While being able to ease the frustration of the person, it is possible to control the decrease of interest, it is possible to control the decrease of the operation rate of this pachinko machine 1, it is possible to lighten the burden on the game hall side.

  Also, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even when the sensor cover 668 is opened, when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 is from the base unit 660. Since it is suspended and does not fall off, it is possible to prevent the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

  Further, in the sensor cover 668 holding the out sensor 664 from the lower side, an outer site near the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660 through which many gaming balls B circulate, around the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). The distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 by the flow of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 by the circulation of the gaming ball B (one side (one side). Of the locking claw portion 668c (the other end portion side) locked relative to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, when many gaming balls B pass through the out sensor 664, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664, the one end side rotatably attached thereto Since it is possible to receive many, it is difficult to release the lock at the locking claw 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce that the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 falls off. .

  Furthermore, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state where the sensor cover 668 is open, the lower end (locking claw portion 668c) of the sensor cover 668 is the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. In this case, the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from coming into contact with the outer frame 2 and being damaged, since it is not in contact with the connection cylindrical portion 43a of the rear curtain plate member 43 in the above. Therefore, the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped due to vibration, impact, etc. by many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, and the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a. The absence of the detection of the game ball B by the out sensor 664 makes it possible to notify the occurrence of a problem, and even if the staff etc. of the game hall opens the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the base unit 660 The sensor cover 668 hanging down from the lower surface is not in contact with the outer frame 2, and the sensor cover 668 can be prevented from contacting the outer frame 2 and being damaged.

  In addition, since the door frame top unit 450 having a portion on the same plane as the upper surface of the outer frame 2 is provided on the upper portion of the door frame 3, the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on a floor or the like with the upper surface side down. Can be erected in the inverted state. Therefore, when performing maintenance such as inspection of the out ball passage 663 and replacement of the out sensor 664, maintenance such as replacement of the out sensor 664 can be facilitated by the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is inverted. it can.

  Also, the game ball B circulating in the out ball passage 663 is visible from the outside, and when the game ball B is clogged in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 is visually recognized from the outside Therefore, it is possible to identify at a glance where a game ball B is clogged, and to clog the game ball B early.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, the plurality of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 of the payout base unit 550 are paid out by the payout device 580 to the player side. The game ball B discharged from the ball tank 552 for the purpose of discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is provided separately from the out ball passage 663 below the game board 5 in the main body frame 4 The flow velocity is transferred by the plurality of projections 665d of the vertical guiding portion 665b of the ball pulling out discharge passage 665 which is delivered to the ball pulling out guiding portion 627 of the base unit 660 and formed on the rear side of the section wall 662a in the rear base 662 Are discharged from the ball outlet 665c, which opens downward, to the island facility side.

  In such a configuration, the payout device 580 pays out the gaming ball B while counting the number by the payout detection sensor 591. Therefore, the gaming device B triggered by the payout device 580 is triggered by the gaming ball B. The number of game balls B (safe balls) paid out can be counted. On the other hand, in the out-ball passage 663 through which the game balls B ejected into the game area 5 by being driven into the game area 5a are distributed, balls for discharging the game balls B in the ball tank 552 supplied to the payout device 580 Since it is separated from the discharge and discharge passage 665, only the game ball B (out ball) discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, and the game board The pachinko machine 1 capable of accurately counting only the game balls B discharged from 5 can be provided, and the number of safe balls counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the out sensor 664 The pachinko machine 1 is capable of calculating the payout rate of the game ball B accurately by the number of out balls counted by the above.

  Then, when the payout rate per payout time (out-rolling rate) calculated from the safe number of balls per predetermined time and the number of out-of-balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player wishes to pay out many game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, it is immediately recognized that the pachinko machine 1 is highly likely to be paid out. This makes it easy to select the pachinko machine 1 to play the game. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, the displayed payout rate will be larger than normal if an illegal action is performed such that many gaming balls B are paid out. Since the other players and the attendants of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraud, the execution of the fraud can be deterred, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraud It can be done.

  In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position where the player can not visually recognize, the reason similar to the above can be seen by a person in charge of the game hall or the like. Can detect misconduct. In addition, when maintaining the pachinko machine 1 etc., if the payout rate displayed is different from the normal value, the interior of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the fault nail N, the main control board 1310, the delivery control board 633, relay Since there is a possibility of problems with the substrate, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.), it is possible to promptly cope with the problems, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  In addition, since the out ball passage 663 and the ball extraction passage 665 are separated, the number of gaming balls B passing through the out sensor 664 by flowing through the out ball passage 663 per unit time can be determined by the player. It becomes dependent on the pace which drives the ball B into the game area 5a, and becomes smaller than the number of the game balls B which circulate the ball extraction passage 665. As a result, since the momentum of the game ball B circulating in the out ball passage 663 becomes relatively weak, the load on the out ball passage 663 and the out sensor 664 applied by the circulation of the game ball B can be reduced. It is possible to suppress early fatigue of the 664 and the like and prevent the out-ball passage 663, the out-sensor 664, and the like from being damaged easily.

  Furthermore, since the out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 circulate, a configuration for detecting the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, It is not necessary to provide an out ball detection unit 3030), and the cost for the game board 5 can be reduced, and at the game board 5, a space is secured for the configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged. By providing the rendering device in the secured space, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 (play board 5) that can further entertain the player.

  In addition, since the game ball B is detected by the out sensor 664 after the game balls B are aligned in a line by the out ball rectification portion 663b of the out ball passage 663, the game balls B circulating in the out ball passage 663 Can be reliably detected one by one, and the number of game balls B (out balls) discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately counted (detected).

  In addition, since the out-ball commutating portion 663b has the out-ball rectifying portion 663b meandering, the game ball B is circulated through the out-ball rectifying portion 663b to suppress the flow speed of the gaming ball B. It is possible to prevent damage in the out ball passage 663 due to the impact of the circulating game balls B or damage on the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game balls B discharged from the out ball passage 663, etc. .

  Furthermore, since the ball guiding and discharging passage 665 has the vertical guiding portions 665b in which the plurality of protrusions 665d are alternately projected, the game balls B circulate through the vertical guiding portions 665b, so that the distribution of the game balls B is performed. Since the speed can be reduced, damage in the ball removal discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game balls B, damage to the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game balls B discharged from the ball removal discharge passage 665, Etc. can be prevented.

  In addition, the ball extraction outlet 665 formed on the rear side of the partition wall 662a of the rear base 662 on the downstream side is provided on the rear of the rear base 662 (base unit 660) power supply substrate 630 for playing a game And the out ball passage 663 provided on the front side of the partition wall 662a is also provided with a payout control board 633, since it is provided at a position separated from at least the outer diameter of the game ball B from the payout control board 633 and the like. Because it will be provided at a position away from etc., the payout control board 633 due to electrical noise such as static electricity or induced current generated by the game ball B flowing through the ball extraction passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 etc. The impact on the game ball B can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made less prone to malfunction due to the distribution of the game balls B.

  In addition to providing the out ball straightening portion 663b meandering in the out ball passage 663, and providing the vertical guiding portion 665b in which the plurality of projections 665d are projected in the ball extraction discharge passage 665, the game ball B It is possible to reduce the electric noise emitted from the gaming ball B circulating in the out ball passage 663 and in the ball pulling out discharge passage 665, so that it is provided nearby. The influence on the power supply substrate 630, the payout control substrate 633 and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a small number of malfunctions due to the distribution of the game balls B.

  In addition, since the out ball outlet 663 d and the ball outlet 665 c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball outlet discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball outlet exhaust passage are opened. Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, it becomes difficult for the game ball B to collide with another pachinko machine or wall provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and the other pachinko machine It is possible to prevent the machine or the wall from being damaged. Further, since the gaming balls B are discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball pulling out discharge passage 665, the discharged game balls B are less likely to scatter, and from the out ball passage 663 and the ball pulling out discharge passage 665 on the island facility side It is possible to easily collect the discharged game balls B.

  Furthermore, when the guiding piece 667 for guiding the gaming ball B backward is provided at the out ball discharge port 663 d of the out ball passage 663, the front face of the island equipment is installed in the island equipment with the pachinko machine 1 installed. To the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) side which collects the game ball B provided on the rear side than the game ball B by the guide piece 667 provided in the out ball discharge port 663 d of the out ball passage 663 Can be guided to the rear side, and the game ball B can be reliably recovered on the island facility side.

  Further, since the game ball B can be guided to the rear side by the induction piece 667 provided at the out ball discharge port 663 d of the out ball passage 663, the out ball discharge port 663 d of the out ball passage 663 It can be provided at a position close to the front side (a position below the rear surface of the game panel 1100 where the game area 5a is provided on the front side of the game board 5). Then, by providing the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 at a position close to the front side, the space behind the out ball passage 663 (the rear base 662 of the base unit 660) can be widened. In the space, various power supply substrates 630 for playing a game, a payout control substrate 633, and the like can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball removal discharge path 665 and the out ball path 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, Since it becomes possible to deliver the ball to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by discharging the game ball B driven into the area 5a downward, the configuration according to the discharge of the game ball B in the game board 5 is The configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the ball outlet 665c of the ball outlet channel 665 and the out-ball outlet port 663d of the out ball channel 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2, The discharged game balls B can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2, so that the game balls B that circulate vigorously through the ball removal discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collide with the outer frame 2. Damage to the outer frame 2 can be avoided, and a pachinko machine 1 that is not easily damaged can be provided.

  In addition, since the ball extraction outlet 665c of the ball outlet passage 665 and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the site for collecting the game balls B on the island facility side ( It is not necessary to advance the out receiving portion, the bucket, etc. to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, and it is possible to reduce the time for installing the pachinko machine 1 and the time for moving the pachinko machine 1.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, the game area of the game board 5 provided in the main body frame 4 attached via the outer frame 2 to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When the corresponding key is inserted into the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130A of the door frame 3 that closes 5a so as to be visible from the front and rotated, it is inserted into the key hole 132 coaxially with the axis of the cylinder body 131 Key rotates the first cam member 134 which is rotated, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are mounted with their one ends separated at a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the first cam member 134. Is moved as the first cam member 134 rotates. The other end of each of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 moved by the rotation of the first cam member 134 is provided at a position eccentric to the first cam member 134 (the cylinder main body 131). The second cam member 135 is pushed by the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 because the second cam member 135 is attached at a rotational angle of 90 degrees as in the case of the first cam member 134. As it is pulled, it rotates in the same direction as the first cam member 134, and the rotation transmitting member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. Therefore, the first cam member 134 rotated by the key inserted into the key hole 132 coaxially with the cylinder body 131 and the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at a position eccentric to the axis of the cylinder body 131 integrally rotate. Since the second cam member 135 is connected by two of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to form a link, the rotation of the key inserted in the key hole 132 can be performed by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Transmission of the locking unit 650 which can transmit to the second cam member 135 via the second arm 137 and rotate the rotation transmission member 133 together with the second cam member 135 and is engaged with the rotation transmission member 133 The cylinder 654 can be rotated, and by operating the door frame collar 652 and the outer frame collar 653 by the rotation of the transmission cylinder 654, the main body frame 4 can be rotated. The main body frame 4 can be unlocked with respect to the door frame 3 or the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 can be opened, and the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is unlocked as in a conventional pachinko machine. It can be locked and locked.

  Further, in the cylinder lock 130A, since the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 with each other at a rotational angle of 90 degrees with respect to the first arm 136, A straight line connecting a center of the first cam member 134 and a center of the second cam member 135 with a portion attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of the one arm 136 or the second arm 137 Even when positioned on the upper side, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135 It will be in the Therefore, when one of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 is located at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 is performed. Even if it can not be transmitted, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, so There is no large resistance to the rotation, and the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated, and unlocking and locking can be performed easily, and the key inserted in the keyhole is forcibly rotated. It is possible to prevent the key from being broken and to prevent the key from being broken.

  Also, the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used to transmit the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at the eccentric position, for some reason Thus, even if one of the arms is broken, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arms, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130A can be provided.

  Further, the rotation transmitting member 133 provided at a position eccentric to the axial center of the key hole 132 (the cylinder main body 131) can be rotated by the rotation of the key inserted in the key hole 132. That is, the cylinder body 131 is provided at an arbitrary position with respect to the axis of the rotation transmission member 133, and the cylinder body 131 can be provided at a position away from the axis of the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650. Therefore, even if the key hole 132 is provided at a position different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the rotation transmission member 133 can be provided coaxially with the transmission cylinder 654 in the locking unit 650 of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even if the position of the keyhole 132 is changed, there is no need to change the locking unit 650, the conventional locking unit 650 can be used, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is engaged with the rotation transmission member 133 provided at a position eccentric to the axial center of the key hole 132 of the cylinder main body 131 and inserted into the key hole 132. Since rotation of the key is transmitted, the rotation transmitting member 133 and the transmitting cylinder 654 are offset with respect to the axial center of the cylinder main body 131. Therefore, from between the door frame 3 and the cylinder main body 131 or the like Even if a tool is made to enter the rear of the cylinder main body 131 to perform an illegal act, the rotation transmission member 133 and the transmission cylinder 654 are rotated since the rotation transmission member 133 and the transmission cylinder 654 are not present at the relevant part. It can not be done, and it can prevent that the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are unlocked illegally.

  In addition, the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the eccentrically-centered rotation transmitting member 133 by the smooth rod-like (strip-like) first arm 136 and second arm 137. Therefore, when the rotation is transmitted by a gear, the gear may rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 may be rotated by pulling the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. By making the arm 136 and the second arm 137 into a smooth rod-like surface, the tip of the tool can be made less likely to be caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move. It is possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and the locking unit 650 is illegally operated to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It can be reliably prevented from being provided.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, the handle cover 295 provided outside the door window 101a where the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decoration A two-color molding (multi-color molding) of a body 438 and a door frame right side right side surface decoration 440 or the like by two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and a decoration of a polka-dot pattern by the two-color molding Therefore, since the decorative body is formed into the desired shape and at the same time the desired decoration is given to the decorative body, the decorative body is formed into the desired shape like the decorative body of the conventional pachinko machine. Then, there is no need to apply a desired decoration by painting or the like, and the time required for decoration can be omitted to suppress the increase in cost.

  In addition, since the decoration of the decoration such as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decoration 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed by two-color molding, By changing the color of the synthetic resin used, it is possible to easily change the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body. More specifically, in the case of forming a polka-dot pattern decoration by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a constituting the inner side of the polka-dot circle and the outer layer 3b constituting the outer side of the circle respectively transmit light. When the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are the same color when formed in the same color with different rates, the circle of the polka dot pattern is hard to see and the appearance is not provided with the polka dot pattern decoration. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a constituting the inner side of the dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b constituting the outer side is pink, the color difference between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b The polka-dot circle is clearly visible, and the pink ground has a white polka dot decoration. As described above, when forming a decorative body such as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440, By appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including the color), the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, and the cost of changing the appearance can be suppressed.

  Also, as described above, it is used when forming a decorative body such as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side surface decoration 438, and the door frame right side right side surface decoration 440 By appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including the color) of the synthetic resin, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed. Therefore, the combination of the synthetic resin used for each production lot is changed, and the different lots of this material are changed. When the pachinko machine 1 is shipped to the same gaming hall and installed in a row in the island facility, the island facilities can be made to look colorful, so for the player who is traveling around the gaming hall. It is possible to provide a high impact pachinko machine 1 capable of giving a strong impact and capable of attracting a player.

  Furthermore, a handle cover 295 having a decoration formed by two colors of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances in a portion outside the door window 101a where the game area 5a in the door frame 3 faces forward, door frame left side base Since a decoration such as 421, a door frame right side left side surface decoration 438, and a door frame right side right side surface decoration 440 is provided, the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decoration to improve appearance. Can.

  In addition, the outer layer 3b of the decorative body such as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 formed by two colors is left Since it is made of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance lower than that of the inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made less visible through the outer layer 3b, and a decoration (polka dot pattern) relatively constituted by the inner layer 3a The border of can be seen clearly and the decoration can be seen clearly.

  Further, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made less visible through the outer layer 3b. Make the inner layer 3a invisible from the outside as a low-rate one, and use a synthetic resin with a high light transmittance in the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through at the time of model change This makes it possible to greatly change the view of the decoration of the decoration such as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decoration 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. The appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decoration.

  Further, as described above, since the outer layer 3b having low light transmittance can make the inner layer 3a difficult to see, a pattern (pattern by pattern, painting, printing, sticking of a seal, etc. is formed on the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance makes the pattern of the inner layer 3a invisible through the outer layer 3b, and transparent to the outer layer 3b during model change. Because the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a flexible synthetic resin, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decoration 438, and the door frame The appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be largely changed without changing the shape of the decorative body such as the right side / right side decorative body 440 or the like, and the cost for model change is suppressed. It can be.

  Furthermore, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 capable of emitting light to the inside of the door frame right side left side surface decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decoration 440 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate Since it is provided with the 433 third LED 433c and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a light transmittance higher than others, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 The portion of the layer 3a (portion of the polka dots) can be brightly decorated, and the appearance can be improved by making the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a emit light. Both the player to be able to entertain emission decoration door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed. Further, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a can also cause the outer layer 3b to emit light and decorate. The side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 can be lighted and decorated, and the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are shown beautifully to play The pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal and can attract people's attention strongly.

  In addition, as described above, the decoration of the decorative body such as the door frame right side left side surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side surface decorative body 440 is formed by two-color molding of plural synthetic resins having different light transmittances Since it is formed by molding), LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are caused to emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface, the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used, etc. The decoration that can be seen when the user is not present can be different from the decoration that can be seen when the LED is lit, and the change of the decoration can strongly attract the player's attention. Describing in detail, for example, in the case of two-color molding as multi-color molding, when a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in a portion covered by the outer layer 3b in the inner layer 3a, the LED emits light. In the absence state, only the portion exposed to the surface in the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion where the hole is formed in the inner layer 3a. The shape of the holes of the layer 3 becomes visible, and the portion exposed on the surface of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the holes become visible, and a decoration different from when the LED is not emitting light can be seen. Alternatively, for example, in the case where the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is made to emit yellow, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is decorated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the portions of the inner layer 3a and the portions of the outer layer 3b on the surface are decorated to emit light. It is possible to make the site to be made different and to change the decoration to be lighted and decorated. As described above, since the decoration of the decoration can be made different by the light emission of the LED, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by causing the LED to emit light according to the gaming state, the player is given an opportunity or a change in the hitting operation (for example, "right-handed") by changing the decoration of the decoration. The pachinko machine 1 which can be made to suggest and can perform various presentation can be provided.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, the opening on the upper end side of the tank rail 553A, the height of which becomes lower toward the dispensing device 580 side, is closed by the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A. Therefore, the game balls B can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail 553A, and the game balls B stacked vertically can be rectified further by the cover portion 555a. At this time, since the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A which can swing in the vertical direction through the opening 555c between the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555a protrudes into the tank rail 553A, A rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A can contact from above with the gaming ball B stacked vertically in the tank rail 553A. Then, the game balls B in the tank rail 553A are circulated, so that the heights of the game balls B stacked one on top of the other change, so that the ball rectifying member 556A swings up and down due to the change in the height. It becomes. By swinging the ball straightening member 556A in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game ball B in contact with the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, and it is intended to move downstream faster than the lower game ball B Can be prevented, and it is possible to break into the row of lower game balls B arranged in a row to prevent the game balls B from meshing with each other, and the ball rectifying member 556A moves downward. In this case, since the upper game ball B is hit downward, the game balls B stacked vertically can be broken, and the occurrence of clogging of the game ball B in the tank rail 553A can be prevented.

  Further, since the ball straightening member 556A is provided so as to swing up and down at a position lower than the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b protruding upward in the second rail cover 555A, this pachinko In the island facilities of the game hall where the machine 1 is installed, the electric wire hanging down on the tank rail 553A can be made to abut against the pair of protection parts 555b first and not to strike the ball rectifying member 556A. It can prevent that the ball | bowl rectification | straightening member 556A can not rock up and down by contact | abutting of an electric wire. More specifically, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553A, etc. in the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the back side of the main frame 4 so that the player can not see it, and the pachinko machine 1 is an island facility in the game hall. If it installs in, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be located in an island installation. In this island facility, there are many electric wires for connecting the pachinko machine 1 (external terminal board 558) and the game hall side, and depending on the length of the electric wires and the wiring method, on the tank rail 553A. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the second rail cover 555A closing the opening on the upper end side of the tank rail 553A may have a pair of members projecting upward than the ball rectifying member 556A. Since the protective wall 555b is provided, the hanging electric wire can be made to abut on the protective wall 555b first and not to contact the ball rectifying member 556A, and the ball rectifying member 556A swings in the vertical direction by the contact of the electric wire. It can prevent that it can not move. Therefore, even if the electric wire is hanging down on the tank rail 553A, the ball rectifying member 556A can be swung in the vertical direction by being protected by the pair of protective walls 555b. The game balls B stacked inside can be reliably broken, and clogging of the tank rail 553A can be prevented from being clogged.

  Furthermore, the tank rail 553A is provided with a meandering portion 553c that causes the gaming ball B to meander to suppress the circulation speed, and the circulation velocity of the gaming ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. It is possible to suppress the moving game ball B from moving to the downstream side faster than the lower game ball B, and interrupt the lower game ball B array in which the upper game balls B are arranged in a line. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being engaged with each other in the tank rail 553A to cause clogging of the balls.

  Further, as described above, the protection wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the contact of the electric wire to the ball rectifying member 556A to prevent the occurrence of the ball clogging, so that many tank rails 553A can be used. Placing the terminal board (for example, the external terminal board 558) to which the electric wire is connected and the control board near or arranging the terminal board and the control board where many electric wires are connected near the tank rail 553A Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high degree of freedom in the arrangement of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal plate and the like.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 provided so as to be able to open and close with the left side as an axis and closing the game area 5a of the game board 5 visibly Disc-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b radially projecting from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. Since the handle 195 is provided and the cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is provided, the conventional pachinko machine is provided with the handle at the portion where the handle is provided. You will see the handle 195 and handle cover unit 290 in a form that you have never seen before, giving a strong impact to the player. The player can be strongly attracted to the interest of the player, and the player can be motivated to play a game with the pachinko machine 1, and the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed It is possible to make it easy for the player who is traveling inside to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play a game.

  In addition, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylinder portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c in the handle 195, the player can When the player grips the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a different sense from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine with respect to the operation of the handle 195, and the player is entertained and entertained by the operation of the game ball B of the new sense. Can be suppressed.

  Then, when the player operates the handle 195, if the effect sound is output from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the substrate unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the speaker of the main body frame speaker 622 vibrates. The air in the enclosure 624 according to the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 passes through the internal space 40a of the lower frame assembly 40 and the port member 47 in the outer frame 2 in communication with the enclosure 624 It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is detected by the plural blade portions 46b of the grill member 46A provided at the front end of the port member 47, and the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover It can be guided into the handlebar cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handlebar cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291 and passes through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c into the handlebar cover unit 290. Stimulation by sound pressure can be applied to the finger of the player operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, the sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the finger of the player inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the cutout opening 295 b and the opening 291 h according to the game state in the game area 5 a. It is possible to surprise the player, to foresee the arrival of a chance, to change the operation amount of the steering wheel operation, to entertain the player and to make it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291 a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295 b and the opening 291 h, the handle cover By making the inside of the unit 290 cool and making the environment around the hand of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, the stress applied to the player can be alleviated and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. it can.

  Further, as described above, the handle 195 or the finger of the player operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 in which the handle cover unit 290 is provided is Since the stimulation is given by the plurality of blade portions 46b, various sensors provided on the handle 195 (handle rotation detection sensor, as compared with the case where the vibration device is provided on the handle 195) 189, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism etc. It is possible to make bets 180A unlikely damage, by damage to the handle unit 180A can be prevented that the uncomfortable feeling to the player, the reduction in the interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, a part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46A is released forward. Therefore, the player is released from the port member 47 also to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players traveling around the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The presentation sound can also attract the player's attention by the presentation sound, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  In addition, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a more dramatic bass sound, and to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

  Furthermore, the steering wheel 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, so that the steering wheel 195 looks like a steering wheel of a car, so the steering wheel of a conventional pachinko machine Even if the appearance is largely different, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who first saw the pachinko machine 1 can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without confusion, and as a pachinko machine as a pachinko machine that plays without causing the player to hesitate. The machine 1 can be made easy to select.

  Further, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a portion facing the lower side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 which can insert the player's finger through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c When the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the area below the handle cover unit 290 is through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it can be seen and an open feeling can be given to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, the player's anxiety about inserting a finger in the handle cover unit 290 can be reduced, and the player can The handle 195 can be operated without making the user hesitate.

  In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291a passing through are provided at a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if liquid such as a drink or game ball B enters the handle cover unit 290, the liquid is discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. It is possible to make it difficult for the liquid or the like discharged downward from the notch opening 295 b and the opening 291 h to enter the port member 47.

  Further, the handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and a plurality of handle covers 295 of the handle cover unit 290 having the same diameter as the outer peripheral ring portion 195b at the front end. The center hub portion 195c is used to grip and operate the same as a handle of a conventional pachinko machine, or the spoke portion 195b to operate with only a finger, or an outer peripheral handle. The steering wheel cover operation is performed by using the portion 195c like a steering wheel of a car, holding the finger by putting a finger on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b, or straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. You can use your fingers to pinch the inside and outside of the 290 Can colorful hammering operation of the gaming balls B (steering) provides pachinko machine 1 as possible. Therefore, according to the gaming state, the state of the player, etc., the player can hit the gaming ball B into the gaming area 5a by a method which is easy for the player to operate, making it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B, and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, a finger is placed on the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195 for gripping, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 are pinched with fingers so as to straddle the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing this, it is possible to fix the operation position of the handle 195. Therefore, in addition to the handle operation similar to the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, the handle operation which can not be performed by the conventional pachinko machine can also be performed, so that various handle operations can be provided to the player. The player can be made hard to get bored by entertaining the steering wheel operation.

  Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c in the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 is formed to extend rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The appearance can be such that the handle 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the diameter of the front end of handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of outer peripheral ring portion 195 c, it becomes possible to suppress the dimension in the vertical direction of handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary. By suppressing the pressing of the game area 5a (the door window 101a) upward by this, it is possible to prevent the game area 5a from being narrowed, and the game area 5a can be relatively enlarged. The large pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Furthermore, emitting light by decoration of the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 by emitting the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293 appropriately. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the light emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c can be made conspicuous It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting the player's interest strongly.

  Further, a handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner on the opposite side to the hinge side of the door frame 3, and a cutout opening 295b is provided at a portion of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface. Therefore, the cutout opening 295 b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that makes the appearance worse, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

  In addition, a flange portion 291e that rotatably supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 in the circumferential direction and restricts movement in the front-rear direction on the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) The guide piece 291g is provided, and even if the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the forward movement of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c can be restricted by the guide piece 291g etc. The spoke portion 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a is not deformed, and breakage of the handle 195 can be prevented.

  In addition, after detecting that the player is touching the handle 195 by the handle touch sensor 192, the operation of the handle 195 is received and the game ball B is hit, so only in the spoke portion 195b and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The player can hit the gaming ball B even by operating the handle 195 in the touched state, and the player can make the pachinko machine 1 capable of performing various types of hitting operations (handling operations) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being hit when the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle operation using a tool from being performed and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the third embodiment, the door windows have different amounts of projection in the front-rear direction on the outside of one side and the other of the other in the left-right direction of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. A door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 extending vertically along the 101a are provided, and the door frame left side decorative A door frame on the left side and a plurality of first LEDs 423 a and a second LED 423 b are mounted on the left side of the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 422 a and a second LED 422 b are mounted behind each of the body 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 Door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, and door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 with a plurality of first LEDs 432a and a plurality of second LEDs While the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 on which one LED 433a and the second LED 433b are mounted is provided, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is the door frame left side A light guide shaft 427a of a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides near the front surface of the decoration 426 or the door frame right side decoration 435 and emits light forward, a light guide shaft 428a of a left side middle light guide 428, Since the light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, the light guide shaft 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided, the door frame Left side upper decoration board 422, door frame left side lower decoration board 423, door frame right side upper decoration board 432, door frame right side lower decoration board 433 second LED 422b, second By emitting light from the ED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be light emitting decorative (surface emitting) in a planar shape. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a of the board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 The light irradiated to the front is a columnar light guide shaft 427a, a light guide shaft 428a, a light guide shaft 429a, a light guide shaft 436a, and a light guide shaft 437a. After being guided to the vicinity of the front face of the side decoration 435, it will be radiated forward from their front end (front end face), and the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door Light emission decoration of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a in the frame right side decorative body 435 (Spot emission) can be performed.

  Therefore, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b of the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 and the first LED 423a Door frame left side decoration provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) by appropriately emitting the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b Light emission decoration of the whole of 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 in a plane shape, light emission decoration of a part of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, It is possible to make the light decoration of a part, while making the light decoration of the whole of the side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 into a plane. Because, it is possible to show the variety of emission effect to the player, it entertained while hardly get bored the player can be suppressed a decrease in interest in the game.

  In this case, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the second LEDs 422b, the first LEDs 423a, and the second LEDs 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are divided The plurality of first LEDs 432a, the second LEDs 432b, the first LEDs 433a, and the second LEDs 433b of the side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are mutually symmetrical with each other. Since the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the first LEDs 423a, the first LEDs 432a, the first LEDs 433a, the plurality of second LEDs 422b, the second LEDs 423b, the second LEDs 432b, and the second LEDs 433b are different systems, the door frame left side The first LED 422a on the decorative body 426 side, the second LED 4 2b, when creating data of lighting patterns of the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration 435 side, for example Data for the frame left side decoration 426 side is diverted to data for the door frame right side decoration 435 side, or similar for the door frame left side decoration 426 side and the door frame right side decoration 435 side Since it becomes possible to use flow data, it is possible to simplify the process of creating lighting pattern data, and to build more complex lighting pattern data (in the same creation time) In addition to being able to show the player various light emission effects of the lighting pattern, it is possible to show the player various light emission effects with high effect. , It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting a sufficient performance effect against emission effect at the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 left and right outer sides of Tobiramado 101a.

  In addition, since the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the two second LEDs 422b provided between the first LED 433a, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b have the same system , Sandwich the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a (the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, the light guide shaft 437a) Since the two second LEDs 422b, the second LEDs 423b, the second LEDs 432b, and the second LEDs 433b provided in the LED are always lit at the same time, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, Light is irradiated from both sides of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a, respectively. The shadow of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a by the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b The light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 427a projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 or the door frame right side decorative body 435 The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 437a can be hard to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be light emittingly decorated in a plane without unevenness.

  In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emitting light in a plane shape by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the second A light emitting decoration is performed in a point shape on a portion corresponding to the front end of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a by one LED 432a and the first LED 433a. It is possible to show the player a luminous effect that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as emitting light in a plane while partially emitting light in a dot, and brightly emitting light in a dot. While making it possible to attract the player's interest strongly by the light emission effect etc., the point light which does not exist in the conventional pachinko machine makes the light emission dimly The emission effect, the player can be a "hash" can be a pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  Furthermore, a light guide shaft 427a that guides light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a to near the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 A shaft portion 428a, a light guide shaft portion 429a, a light guide shaft portion 436a, and a light guide shaft portion 437a, and two adjacent second LEDs 422b, second LEDs 423b, second LEDs 432b, and second LEDs 433b Of the irradiation range of the light to the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 according to the irradiation angle of light from the position where the boundaries of the light irradiation areas coincide with each other Since the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 are provided, the door frame left side upper decoration base 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 are separated sufficiently backward from the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 It can be in a state where the light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b is not irradiated to the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 While the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 can be made to emit light in a planar shape without light emission unevenness occurring, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower The decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is a door frame left side decorative body 426 and a door frame right side decorative body 435 The door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 by the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a even if it is far from the rear surface. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of emitting and decorating the front surface of the light-emitting device in the form of dots and exhibiting the same function and effect as described above.

  In addition, in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a), the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a The spot light emission has high luminance because spot light emission is performed by the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a. However, the inside of the game area 5a will not be hard to see, and by making the spot light emission with high brightness, the interest of another player can be directed to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b for emitting light in a planar shape to the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 in a dot shape. Since the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a for emitting light are arranged, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is reliable. The light guide shaft 427a for guiding the light, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a are two second LEDs 422b, a second LED 423b, a second LED 432b, a second It will be provided in the center between the LEDs 433b. Therefore, the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, and the second LED 432b on both sides of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the side surface of the light guide shaft 437a. Since light is emitted from the second LED 433b with an equal amount of light, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 428a are guided from the rear to the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435. Even when the shadows of the light axis portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected, the shadow is difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 face evenly. It can be decorated to emit light.

  Furthermore, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame The first LED 422 a, the second LED 422 b, the first LED 423 a, the second LED 423 b, the first LED 432 a, the second LED 432 b, the first LED 433 a, the first LED 433 a In the second LED 433b, the distance to the front of each of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 is the same distance, so the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration Even if the projection amounts in the front-rear direction are different from each other between Emitting decorated to be able, it can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player sufficiently to exhibit the performance effect of emission effect at the outer than Tobiramado 101a with Is.

  In addition, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 on the other side (right side) and the door frame right side lower Since the decorative substrate 433 and the decorative substrate 433 have an asymmetrical shape to each other, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right Since the lower side decoration substrate 433 can be distinguished, the door frame upper left upper side decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper upper decoration substrate 432, and the door frame assembled in the pachinko machine 1 assembly operation Mistakes in the right lower side decorative substrate 433 can be avoided, and assembly workability can be improved to suppress an increase in cost.

  In addition, since the amount of protrusion of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (the game area 5a) is different, Since it is possible to make the impression (view) different when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the left front and the right front, the player is traveling in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Once the player passes by the front of the pachinko machine 1 and approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is different from that at the time of the previous migration, thereby drawing interest in the pachinko machine 1 The pachinko machine 1 of high appeal that can attract a player who is traveling in the game hall to select the pachinko machine 1 to play can be made to the pachinko machine 1. .

  Further, the rear ends of the plurality of light guide shafts 427a, light guide shafts 428a, light guide shafts 429a, light guide shafts 436a, and light guide shafts 437a are runners 427b, runners 428b, runners 429b, The runner portion 436b and the runner portion 437b are connected, and the rear end sides of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a The holding portion 424b of the left upper side reflector 424, the holding portion 425b of the left side lower reflector 425, and the holding portion 434b of the right side reflector 434 hold the runner portion 427b, the runner portion 428b, and the runner portion 429b. , A runner portion 436b, a runner portion 437b, a holding cylinder 424b, a holding cylinder 425b, and a holding cylinder 434b, The frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are provided as close as possible. The runner part 427b, the runner part 428b, the runner part 429b, the runner part 436b, the runner part 437b, the holding cylinder 424b, the holding cylinder 425b, and the holding cylinder 434b are the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, the second LED 433b The light from the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b is a runner portion 427b, a runner portion 428b, a runner portion 429b, a runner portion 436b, and a runner portion because it is located laterally with respect to the front. 437b, holding cylinder 424b, holding cylinder 425b, holding Even when irradiated to 434b, the shadows of the runner 427b, runner 428b, runner 429b, runner 436b, runner 437b, holding cylinder 424b, holding cylinder 425b, and holding cylinder 434b extend in the lateral direction, and the front door It is not projected on the frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be made to emit light in a plane shape without unevenness.

  Furthermore, the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, and the light guide Since the positional relationship between the light axis portion 436a and the rear end of the light guide shaft portion 437a can be maintained in a good state, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided The door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side can be reliably guided forward by the shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a. It corresponds to the front end of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a in the decorative body 435. Site can reliably be emitted in dots to.

  A plurality of light guide shafts 427a, light guide shafts 428a, light guide shafts 429a, light guide shafts 436a, light guide shafts 437a, runners 427b, runners 428b, runners 429b, runners 436b Because the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a are not assembled one by one, since they are connected by the runner portion 437b, A plurality of runners 427b, runners 428b, runners 429b, runners 436b, and runners 437b are connected only by assembling runner 427b, runner 428b, runner 429b, runner 436b, and runner 437b. The light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a at one time Can be attached, it is possible to suppress the increase of the cost by simplifying the labor required for assembly.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In the above embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 includes the two guide passages of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by two or more guide paths.

  In the above embodiment, after the guide path group 2520 is twisted 90 degrees, it is twisted 90 degrees in the reverse direction, and the arrangement of the inlets and the array of the outlets are the same. Alternatively, the arrangement of the inlets and the arrangement of the outlets may be different. Alternatively, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 may be twisted a plurality of times so as to form a spiral.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are provided with the opening 426a and the opening 435a penetrating respectively in the front and back, and the opening 426a and the opening 435a are guided. Although the light axis portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are shown to be inserted, the present invention is not limited thereto. A recess recessed from the rear is provided at the opening 426a and the opening 435a in the decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435, and the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft are provided in the recess. The portion 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a may be inserted. Alternatively, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a may be formed on the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 in which the opening 426a and the opening 435a are not provided. The light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a may extend forward to the rear surface of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435. Thus, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 428a are guided while the surfaces of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are the surfaces without the opening 426a and the opening 435a. Spot light emission can be performed in a point shape by the light axis portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a, and the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 7 identification section (differentiation means)
7a Character identification part (character part)
7b Color identification part (colored part)
200 dishes unit 270 dishes upper left decoration unit 271 dishes upper left decoration body (decoration body)
273 Dish top left decorative board (decorative board)
273a LED (LED)
275 Dish upper right decoration unit 276 Dish upper right decoration body (decoration body)
278 Dish upper right decorative board (decorative board)
278a LED (LED)
420 door frame left side unit 422 door frame left side upper decoration board (decorative board)
422a 1st LED (LED)
422b Second LED (LED)
422c LED driver (functional parts)
423 Door frame left side bottom decoration board (decoration board)
423a 1st LED (LED)
423b second LED (LED)
423c LED driver (functional parts)
426 Door frame left side decoration (decoration)
430 Door frame right side unit 432 Door frame right side above decorative board (decorative board)
432a 1st LED (LED)
432b Second LED (LED)
432d LED driver (functional parts)
433 Door frame right side bottom decoration board (decoration board)
433a 1st LED (LED)
433b Second LED (LED)
433d LED driver (functional parts)
435 Door frame right side decoration body (decoration body)
450 door frame top unit 453 door frame top decorative body (decorative body)
455 Door frame top central decorative board (decorative board)
455a LED (LED)
456 Door frame top left decorative board (decorative board)
456a LED (LED)
457 Door frame top right decoration board (decoring board)
457a LED (LED)

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
"A plurality of decorative substrates provided behind the at least one decorative body having a predetermined light transmission property, at least the front surface being white, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface,
A separation means provided on the back surface of each of the plurality of decorative substrates to distinguish them from other substrates;
Equipped with
The distinction means is characterized in that it has a colored portion applied over substantially the entire length of the decoration substrate in the longitudinal direction.
In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
"A plurality of decorative substrates provided behind the at least one decorative body having a predetermined light transmission property, at least the front surface being white, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface,
A separation means provided on the back surface of each of the plurality of decorative substrates to distinguish them from other substrates;
Equipped with
The distinction means is provided over substantially the entire length of the decoration substrate in the longitudinal direction.
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
"A plurality of decorative substrates provided behind the at least one decorative body having a predetermined light transmission property, at least the front surface being white, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface,
A separation means provided on the back surface of each of the plurality of decorative substrates to distinguish them from other substrates;
Equipped with
The distinction means is characterized in that each of the plurality of decorative substrates has a different color.
In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
"A plurality of decorative substrates provided behind the at least one decorative body having a predetermined light transmission property, at least the front surface being white, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface,
A separation means provided on the back surface of each of the plurality of decorative substrates to distinguish them from other substrates;
Equipped with
The distinction means is provided on at least a rear surface of each of the plurality of decorative substrates, and has a character portion indicating at least one of the attachment position and the attachment direction of the decorative substrate.
In addition, as the invention which is not related to the present invention, the following means are exemplified.
Means 1: In the gaming machine,
"A plurality of decorative substrates provided behind a decorative member having a predetermined light transmission property, at least having a white front surface, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface,
It is provided to a plurality of the rear surface of each of the decorative substrate, and a distinction means for distinguishing from other board "that you characterized.

In addition, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied over substantially the entire rear surface. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 239, the color identification portion 7b is partially provided so as not to hinder the soldering of the LED or the like mounted on the decoration substrate, not on the entire rear surface. .

Claims (1)

A plurality of decorative substrates provided behind the decorative body having a predetermined light transmission property, at least the front surface being white, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided on the rear surface of each of a plurality of the decorative substrates, and has distinction means for distinguishing it from other substrates.

Images